ETOS®_Operating_Instructions_7815063_10_en

THE POWER BEHIND POWER.
Operating instructions
ETOS®
7815063/10 EN
© All rights reserved by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
Dissemination and reproduction of this document and use and disclosure of its content are
strictly prohibited unless expressly permitted.
Infringements will result in liability for compensation. All rights reserved in the event of the
granting of patents, utility models or designs.
The product may have been altered since this document was published.
We reserve the right to change the technical data, design and scope of supply.
Generally the information provided and agreements made when processing the individual
quotations and orders are binding.
The product is delivered in accordance with MR's technical specifications, which are based on
information provided by the customer. The customer has a duty of care to ensure the
compatibility of the specified product with the customer's planned scope of application.
The original operating instructions were written in German.
Table of contents
1 Introduction ................................................. 8 4.4 Design ......................................................................... 37
1.1 Manufacturer ................................................................. 8 4.4.1 Control cabinet................................................ 37
1.2 Completeness ............................................................... 8 4.4.2 Gear motor (versions) ..................................... 61
1.3 Safekeeping ................................................................... 8 4.4.3 Sensors ............................................................ 62
1.4 Notation conventions .................................................. 9 4.4.4 Nameplate ...................................................... 64
1.4.1 Hazard communication system ....................... 9 4.5 Visualization ............................................................... 66
1.4.2 Information system........................................... 9 4.5.1 Main screen...................................................... 66
1.4.3 Instruction system............................................. 9 4.5.2 Operating concept.......................................... 69
1.4.4 Typographic conventions ............................... 10 4.5.3 MControl touch panel (optional) ................... 72
1.5 Open source software................................................. 11
5 Packaging, transport and storage............... 75
2 Safety ......................................................... 12 5.1 Packaging .................................................................... 75
2.1 Appropriate use ........................................................... 12 5.1.1 Suitability .......................................................... 75
2.1.1 Motor-drive unit ................................................ 12 5.1.2 Markings ........................................................... 76
2.1.2 On-load tap-changer regulation...................... 13 5.2 Transportation, receipt and handling of
2.1.3 Bushing monitoring.......................................... 13 shipments ................................................................. 77
2.1.4 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load 5.3 Storage of shipments................................................. 78
tap-changer (VAM)......................................... 13 5.4 Unpacking shipments and checking for
2.2 Inappropriate use ....................................................... 14 transportation damages ......................................... 79
2.2.1 Bushing monitoring......................................... 14
2.2.2 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load 6 Mounting .................................................... 81
tap-changer (VAM)........................................ 14 6.1 Lacquering the control cabinet (optional) ................. 81
2.2.3 Internal power supply ..................................... 14 6.2 Notes on installing several connected control
2.3 Fundamental safety instructions ............................... 15 cabinets .................................................................... 83
2.4 Personnel qualification ............................................... 17 6.3 Mounting the control cabinet ................................... 83
2.5 Personal protective equipment.................................. 18 6.4 Mounting the control cabinet (vibration-
damped design)....................................................... 87
3 IT security ................................................... 19 6.5 Mounting the control cabinet (insulated
3.1 General.......................................................................... 19 mounting) ................................................................ 90
3.2 Commissioning............................................................ 19 6.6 Mounting the lock cylinder........................................ 94
3.3 Operation .................................................................... 20 6.7 Adjusting the installation height of the
3.4 Interfaces .................................................................... 20 MControl touch panel ............................................. 96
3.5 Encryption standards ................................................. 22 6.8 Removing cover plate ................................................ 98
6.9 Motor-drive unit.......................................................... 98
4 Product description ................................... 26 6.9.1 Mounting drive shafts and bevel gear ........... 98
4.1 Scope of delivery ........................................................ 26 6.9.2 Centering on-load tap-changer and
4.2 Function description .................................................. 26 motor-drive unit ............................................ 98
4.2.1 Motor-drive unit............................................... 26 6.9.3 Connecting the gear motor.......................... 105
4.2.2 On-load tap-changer regulation .................... 28 6.10 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-
4.2.3 On-load tap-changer monitoring .................. 30 changer (VAM)........................................................ 107
4.2.4 Transformer monitoring ................................. 31 6.10.1 Mounting the vibration sensor .................... 107
4.2.5 Bushing monitoring ......................................... 31 6.10.2 Connecting the vibration sensor to the
4.2.6 Cooling system control .................................. 32 control cabinet ............................................ 108
4.2.7 Cooling system monitoring ........................... 33 6.10.3 Connecting the temperature sensor .......... 111
4.2.8 Additional digital inputs and outputs ........... 33 6.11 Bushing monitoring ................................................. 112
4.2.9 Additional analog inputs and outputs .......... 33 6.11.1 Preparation .................................................... 112
4.2.10 TPLE ............................................................... 33 6.11.2 Installing the bushing adapter ..................... 112
4.2.11 Communication ............................................. 33 6.11.3 Installing the bushing coupling unit............ 115
4.3 Operating modes ....................................................... 35 6.11.4 Connecting the bushing adapter to the
4.3.1 Emergency operation during switching bushing coupling unit .................................. 117
blocking (X100 bridge).................................. 35 6.11.5 Connecting the bushing coupling unit to
the control cabinet....................................... 118
6.11.6 Connecting the voltage transformers for
the reference system.................................. 120
7815063/10 EN Table of contents 3

6.12 Connecting the control cabinet ............................. 122
6.12.1 Cable recommendation................................ 122 8 Operation ................................................ 164
6.12.2 Cable bushing in the base plate of the 8.1 System ....................................................................... 164
control cabinet ............................................ 124 8.1.1 Establishing a connection to the
6.12.3 Electromagnetic compatibility .................... 127 visualization (with CPU I / CPU II).............. 164
6.12.4 Notes on the screw terminal tightening 8.1.2 Establishing a connection to the
torque........................................................... 130 visualization (with CPU / COM-ETH) ......... 165
6.12.5 Information about connecting serial 8.1.3 General ........................................................... 166
interfaces RS232 and RS485 (with 9-pin 8.1.4 Configuring the network .............................. 169
data cable).................................................... 130 8.1.5 Configuring the network................................ 171
6.12.6 Notes on connecting to the MR sensor 8.1.6 Web visualization .......................................... 174
bus ................................................................. 131 8.1.7 Configuring serial interfaces.......................... 175
6.12.7 Information on connecting to the CAN 8.1.8 Assigning serial interfaces ............................. 176
bus ................................................................ 140 8.1.9 MQTT............................................................... 176
6.12.8 Information about connecting analog 8.1.10 Setting the device time ................................ 178
sensors ......................................................... 140 8.1.11 Configuring syslog ....................................... 180
6.12.9 Notes on routing the MSENSE® FO 8.1.12 SCADA ........................................................... 181
fiber-optic cable in the control cabinet ..... 146 8.1.13 Displaying the status of the
6.12.10 Information on connecting the socket communication services ............................ 203
circuit............................................................ 146 8.1.14 Name plate................................................... 203
6.12.11 Information on connecting the power 8.1.15 Measured value recorder............................. 204
supply ........................................................... 146 8.1.16 Displaying measured value recorder
6.13 Checking functional reliability ............................... 148 (optional)...................................................... 205
8.1.17 Setting the measured value recorder......... 206
7 Commissioning........................................ 149 8.1.18 Generic temperatures (optional) ................ 207
7.1 Commissioning the motor-drive unit (side drive).. 149 8.1.19 Linking signals and events .......................... 207
7.2 Commissioning the ISM® ......................................... 150 8.1.20 MR sensor bus .............................................. 211
7.2.1 Establishing a connection to the 8.1.21 Configuring analog inputs and outputs
visualization (with CPU I / CPU II).............. 150 (optional)....................................................... 219
7.2.2 Establishing a connection to the 8.1.22 Configuring digital inputs and outputs ..... 222
visualization (with CPU / COM-ETH) ......... 151 8.1.23 Event management..................................... 224
7.2.3 Setting the language ...................................... 152 8.1.24 User administration .................................... 226
7.2.4 Commissioning wizard .................................. 152 8.1.25 Brute-force protection ................................ 232
7.2.5 Downloading the operating instructions ..... 153 8.1.26 Hardware...................................................... 233
7.2.6 Configuring analog inputs and outputs 8.1.27 Software ....................................................... 235
(optional)....................................................... 153 8.1.28 Import/export manager.............................. 235
7.2.7 Checking measured values and status of 8.1.29 Transformer Personal Logic Editor
digital inputs and outputs ........................... 156 (TPLE) ........................................................... 239
7.2.8 Checking the temperature measurement ... 156 8.1.30 Configuring media converter with
7.2.9 Checking the redundant recording of the managed switch .......................................... 253
on-load tap-changer oil temperature 8.1.31 Linking to the visualization of external
(optional)....................................................... 156 devices ......................................................... 257
7.3 Function test of the motor-drive unit (side 8.1.32 Configuring the touch panel ...................... 259
drive) ........................................................................ 158 8.2 Power grid ................................................................. 266
7.3.1 Checking correct electric switch-off ............. 158 8.2.1 Transformer data........................................... 266
7.3.2 Checking mechanical and electric end 8.2.2 Setting the transformer data for the
stop of on-load tap-changer/de- reference system (optional) ....................... 279
energized tap-changer and motor-drive 8.2.3 Measurement ................................................ 280
unit................................................................. 158 8.2.4 Voltage monitoring....................................... 282
7.3.3 Checking tripping of motor protective 8.2.5 Current monitoring ....................................... 284
switch ............................................................ 159 8.2.6 Power monitoring ......................................... 286
7.4 Function test of the motor-drive unit (top drive) .. 160 8.2.7 Power flow monitoring ................................. 288
7.5 Tests on the transformer......................................... 160 8.2.8 Phase symmetry monitoring ....................... 289
7.5.1 High-voltage tests on the transformer ........ 160 8.2.9 Monitoring settings....................................... 290
7.5.2 Dielectric tests on transformer wiring.......... 161 8.2.10 TAPCON® 2xx retrofit ................................. 290
7.6 Transporting transformer to the operating site ..... 162 8.2.11 Displaying current measured values.......... 292
7.7 Commissioning the transformer at the 8.2.12 Displaying minimum and maximum
operating site .......................................................... 162 measured values ......................................... 292
4 Table of contents 7815063/10 EN

8.3 On-load tap-changer regulator ............................... 294 8.5.17 Oil filter unit control .................................... 395
8.3.1 Regulation ...................................................... 294 8.5.18 Displaying the minimum and maximum
8.3.2 Voltage regulation (optional) ....................... 295 tap position.................................................. 399
8.3.3 Reactive power regulation (optional) .......... 308 8.5.19 Messages...................................................... 399
8.3.4 Active power regulation (optional)............... 311 8.5.20 Tap position message as gray code.......... 399
8.3.5 Displaying control parameters..................... 314 8.5.21 Tap position message as BCD code .......... 402
8.3.6 Line drop compensation ............................... 315 8.5.22 Tap position message as dual code ......... 404
8.3.7 Parallel operation (optional) .......................... 317 8.5.23 Tap position message as decimal
8.3.8 U bandwidth monitoring .............................. 327 coding........................................................... 407
8.3.9 Q bandwidth monitoring (optional) ............ 328 8.6 Motor-drive unit and control cabinet ...................... 411
8.3.10 P bandwidth monitoring (optional) ........... 330 8.6.1 Actuate motor-drive unit (side drive) ........... 411
8.3.11 Target-tap-position operation ..................... 331 8.6.2 Actuate motor-drive unit (top drive) ........... 413
8.3.12 Three-winding transformer and HV/LV 8.6.3 Control of the motor-drive unit ................... 413
regulation..................................................... 332 8.6.4 Drive overview .............................................. 416
8.4 Active part................................................................. 335 8.6.5 Motor Current Index (MCI) ........................... 418
8.4.1 Asset intelligence .......................................... 335 8.6.6 Calibrating the position sensor.................... 421
8.4.2 Temperature monitoring ............................. 336 8.6.7 Synchronizing the motor-drive unit ............ 422
8.4.3 Displaying temperature curve (optional).... 336 8.6.8 Control cabinet monitoring.......................... 424
8.4.4 Setting Tx statistics monitoring .................. 337 8.7 Cooling system control (optional) .......................... 426
8.4.5 Displaying winding temperatures 8.7.1 Configuring cooling stages........................... 426
(optional)...................................................... 337 8.7.2 Set the operating mode................................ 427
8.4.6 Hot-spot temperature of the transformer 8.7.3 Deactivating cooling system control........... 428
winding (optional) ....................................... 338 8.7.4 Configuring load-dependent mode ............ 428
8.4.7 Setting calculation of transformer's loss 8.7.5 Configuring periodic mode .......................... 429
of life (optional) ........................................... 346 8.7.6 Configuring alternating mode ..................... 430
8.4.8 Dynamic Transformer Rating (optional)..... 346 8.7.7 Configuring the frequency-based cooling
8.4.9 Dissolved gas analysis (optional) ................ 350 system control............................................. 430
8.4.10 Monitoring the gas volume of the 8.7.8 Displaying status of cooling stages............. 433
Buchholz relay (transformer) ..................... 358 8.8 Cooling system monitoring (optional) ................... 434
8.4.11 Monitoring the oil pressure 8.8.1 Setting the cooling system monitoring
(transformer) ............................................... 358 function ........................................................ 434
8.4.12 Displaying transformer statistics ............... 359 8.8.2 Displaying status of cooling stages............. 435
8.4.13 Breakdown voltage monitoring ................. 359 8.8.3 Cooling efficiency monitoring (optional) .... 435
8.5 On-load tap-changer................................................ 368 8.8.4 Cooling system flow monitoring
8.5.1 Tap position monitoring (optional).............. 368 (optional)...................................................... 437
8.5.2 Switching interval monitoring...................... 369 8.9 Bushings................................................................... 440
8.5.3 Switching interval monitoring...................... 370 8.9.1 Configuring bushing monitoring ................ 440
8.5.4 Changing tap position designation 8.9.2 Displaying the state of the bushings........... 447
(optional)....................................................... 371 8.9.3 Displaying the capacitance progression .... 448
8.5.5 Setting the tap position message 8.9.4 Show dissipation factor curve (MSENSE®
(optional)....................................................... 371 BM-T)........................................................... 448
8.5.6 Displaying tap-change operation 8.9.5 Displaying sum current information .......... 448
statistics (optional)...................................... 373 8.10 Protective devices .................................................. 450
8.5.7 Displaying information about contact 8.10.1 Displaying the measured values of the
wear (only OILTAP®) ................................... 373 Buchholz relay (optional)............................ 450
8.5.8 Information about the on-load tap- 8.10.2 Displaying the measured values of the
changer ........................................................ 374 pressure relief device (optional)................. 450
8.5.9 Maintenance (optional)................................. 374 8.10.3 Displaying protective device status
8.5.10 Torque monitoring (optional)...................... 381 (optional)...................................................... 451
8.5.11 Performing trial tap-change operations .... 386 8.11 Insulating fluids ....................................................... 452
8.5.12 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on- 8.11.1 Displaying the measured value trend of
load tap-changer (VAM) ............................. 387 the oil level and dehydrating breather
8.5.13 OLTC data .................................................... 390 (optional)...................................................... 452
8.5.14 Displaying power characteristics ............... 393
8.5.15 Monitoring the gas volume of the
Buchholz relay (OLTC)................................ 394
8.5.16 Monitoring the oil pressure (on-load
tap-changer) ................................................ 394

12.2 Motor-drive unit ...................................................... 486
9 Fault elimination...................................... 453 12.2.1 Motor-drive unit (side drive)........................ 486
9.1 Motor-drive unit fault elimination ........................... 453 12.2.2 Technical data for position transmitter
9.1.1 Safety instructions ......................................... 453 equipment ................................................... 486
9.1.2 General information ...................................... 453 12.2.3 Motor-drive unit (top drive) ........................ 487
9.1.3 Fault in the environment of the motor- 12.3 Sensors .................................................................... 488
drive unit ...................................................... 454 12.3.1 Vibroacoustics .............................................. 488
9.1.4 Fault in the motor-drive unit when the 12.3.2 Bushing monitoring..................................... 488
tap-change operation has not been 12.4 ISM® assemblies...................................................... 493
ended ........................................................... 454 12.4.1 Power supply QS3.241 ................................ 493
9.1.5 Fault in the motor-drive unit after the 12.4.2 Power supply CP5.241 ................................ 493
tap-change operation is ended correctly.. 455 12.4.3 Power supply PS.......................................... 493
9.1.6 Hand crank operation in the event of 12.4.4 UI 1 voltage measurement and current
faults............................................................. 455 measurement ............................................. 494
9.1.7 Motor-drive unit ............................................. 455 12.4.5 UI 3 voltage measurement and current
9.2 Fault elimination ISM (hardware and software)..... 457 measurement .............................................. 495
9.2.1 General faults ................................................. 457 12.4.6 UI 5-3 voltage measurement and
9.2.2 Human-machine interface ........................... 457 current measurement................................. 496
9.2.3 Torque monitoring........................................ 458 12.4.7 UI 5-4 voltage measurement and
9.2.4 Temperature monitoring ............................. 461 current measurement................................. 498
9.2.5 Maintenance messages ................................ 465 12.4.8 Voltage measurement U 3 ......................... 499
9.2.6 Function monitoring ..................................... 468 12.4.9 Current measurement I 3 ........................... 500
9.2.7 Other faults.................................................... 469 12.4.10 DIO 28-15 digital inputs and outputs ...... 501
12.4.11 Digital inputs and outputs DIO 42-20
10 Inspection and maintenance ................... 471 (HL) ............................................................... 503
10.1 Care .......................................................................... 471 12.4.12 Digital inputs DI 16-24 V ........................... 505
10.1.1 Cleaning the control cabinet ....................... 471 12.4.13 Digital inputs DI 16-48 V ........................... 507
10.1.2 Cleaning the VS 1 vibration sensor............. 471 12.4.14 Digital inputs DI 16-110 V.......................... 508
10.1.3 Cleaning the bushing adapter and the 12.4.15 Digital inputs DI 16-220 V ......................... 510
bushing coupling unit ................................. 471 12.4.16 Digital outputs DO 8 .................................. 511
10.1.4 Cleaning the gear motor............................. 471 12.4.17 AIO 2 analog inputs and outputs .............. 513
10.2 Inspection................................................................ 472 12.4.18 AIO 4 analog inputs and outputs.............. 513
10.2.1 Lubricating the door hinges and locking 12.4.19 AIO 8 analog inputs and outputs............. 514
mechanism .................................................. 473 12.4.20 Analog inputs AI 4-T.................................. 515
10.3 Maintenance ........................................................... 475 12.4.21 Analog inputs AI 4 ...................................... 517
10.3.1 Maintaining motor-drive unit...................... 475 12.4.22 Analog outputs AO 4................................. 518
10.3.2 Heating maintenance.................................. 475 12.4.23 CPU (central processing unit) I................. 520
10.4 Updating application software.............................. 476 12.4.24 CPU (central processing unit) II ................ 521
10.4.1 Copy the application software to the PC .. 476 12.4.25 CPU (central processing unit) ................. 523
10.4.2 Establishing a connection to the 12.4.26 System networking MC 2-2...................... 526
visualization (with CPU I / CPU II).............. 477 12.4.27 System networking SW 3-3...................... 527
10.4.3 Establishing a connection to the 12.4.28 System networking COM-ETH ................ 528
visualization (with CPU / COM-ETH) ........ 478 12.4.29 System networking BEM1/BES1 .............. 529
10.4.4 Updating application software .................. 479 12.4.30 System networking BES ........................... 529
12.4.31 VI 4 vibration sensor input module ......... 530
11 Removal ................................................. 481 12.4.32 CAN gateway............................................. 530
11.1 Removing the drive shaft........................................ 481 12.5 Standards and directives......................................... 531
11.2 Disassembling gear motor ..................................... 482
11.3 Removing the bushing adapter and bushing 13 Drawings ................................................. 532
coupling unit .......................................................... 482 13.1 101734750................................................................ 533
11.4 Removing the control cabinet ............................... 483 13.2 101734780 ............................................................... 534
13.3 101335000 ............................................................... 535
12 Technical data ........................................ 484 13.4 101334990............................................................... 536
12.1 Control cabinet....................................................... 484 13.5 101358630 ............................................................... 537
12.1.1 Dimensions and weight .............................. 484 13.6 101358600 ............................................................... 538
12.1.2 Permissible ambient conditions ................ 484 13.7 101716390 ................................................................ 539
12.1.3 Electrical data ............................................... 485 13.8 101334980............................................................... 540
13.9 101334970 ............................................................... 541
6 Table of contents 7815063/10 EN

13.10 101358640 ............................................................. 542
13.11 101358620 .............................................................. 543
13.12 101716420.............................................................. 544
13.13 101734770.............................................................. 545
13.14 101734760 ............................................................. 546
13.15 101734800 ............................................................. 547
13.16 101734790 ............................................................. 548
Glossary...................................................... 549
List of key words ......................................... 551

1 Introduction
This technical file contains detailed descriptions on the safe and proper installa-
tion, connection, commissioning and monitoring of the product.
It also includes safety instructions and general information about the product.
This technical file is intended solely for specially trained and authorized person-
nel.
1.1 Manufacturer
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Falkensteinstraße 8
93059 Regensburg
Deutschland
+49 941 4090-0
[email protected]
reinhausen.com
MR Reinhausen customer portal: https://portal.reinhausen.com.
Further information on the product and copies of this technical file are available
from this address if required.
1.2 Completeness
This technical file is incomplete without the supporting documents.
The following documents also apply in addition to this technical file:

– Quick reference guide
– Connection diagrams
– Routine test report
– Supplement
Also observe generally valid legislation, standards, and guidelines as well as

specifications on accident prevention and environmental protection in the re-
spective country of use.
1.3 Safekeeping
Keep this technical file and all supporting documents ready at hand and accessi-
ble for future use at all times.
8 Introduction 7815063/10 EN
1.4 Notation conventions
1.4.1 Hazard communication system
Warnings in this technical file are displayed as follows.
1.4.1.1 Warning relating to section

Warnings relating to sections refer to entire chapters or sections, sub-sections
or several paragraphs within this technical file. Warnings relating to sections use
the following format:
WARNING Type of danger!

Source of the danger and outcome.
Action
Action
1.4.1.2 Embedded warning information

Embedded warnings refer to a particular part within a section. These warnings
apply to smaller units of information than the warnings relating to sections. Em-
bedded warnings use the following format:
DANGER! Instruction for avoiding a dangerous situation.
1.4.1.3 Signal words in warning notices

Signal word Meaning
DANGER Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in mi-
nor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates measures to be taken to prevent damage to property.

Table 1: Signal words in warning notices
1.4.2 Information system
Information is designed to simplify and improve understanding of particular pro-

cedures. In this technical file it is laid out as follows:
Important information.
i
1.4.3 Instruction system
This technical file contains single-step and multi-step instructions.
Single-step instructions
Instructions which consist of only a single process step are structured as fol-
lows:
7815063/10 EN Introduction 9
Aim of action
Requirements (optional).
Step 1 of 1.
Result of step (optional).
Result of action (optional).
Multi-step instructions
Instructions which consist of several process steps are structured as follows:
Aim of action
Requirements (optional).
1. Step 1.
2. Step 2.
Result of action (optional).
1.4.4 Typographic conventions
Typographic convention Purpose Example
UPPERCASE Operating controls, switches ON/OFF
[Brackets] PC keyboard [Ctrl] + [Alt]
Bold Software operating controls Press Continue button
…>…>… Menu paths Parameter > Control parameter
Italics System messages, error messages, sig- Function monitoring alarm triggered
nals
[► Number of pages] Cross reference [► Page 41].
Dotted underscore
............................................. Glossary entry, abbreviations, definitions, Glossary entry
........................
etc.
Table 2: Typographic conventions used in this technical file
10 Introduction 7815063/10 EN
1.5 Open source software
This product contains open source software, which has been developed by third
parties. The open source software and the corresponding license conditions can
be called up in the menu via Settings > Export > Licenses.
The open source software is protected by copyright. You are free to use the
open source software provided you comply with the respective license condi-
tions. In the event of a conflict, these license conditions shall take precedence
over other license conditions.
The open source software is provided free of charge. Insofar as this is provided
for by the license conditions of the open source software, you can obtain the
source text of the open source software at least for three years from receipt of
the product against payment of the corresponding costs from your respective
contact person at Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
Insofar as the use of the open source software goes beyond the intended use in
the product itself, all liability is excluded. The same applies in the event of
changes to the open source software.
7815063/10 EN Introduction 11
2 Safety
– Read this technical file through to familiarize yourself with the product.
– This technical file is a part of the product.
– Read and observe the safety instructions provided in this chapter.
– Read and observe the warnings in this technical file in order to avoid func-
tion-related dangers.
– The product is manufactured on the basis of state-of-the-art technology.
Nevertheless, risks to life and limb for the user or impairment of the product
and other material assets due to the function may arise in the event of im-
proper use.
2.1 Appropriate use

The product is a modular system for controlling, regulating and monitoring a
transformer. The components necessary for this are installed in a housing. De-
pending on your order, the product is equipped with various function packages.
The product is designed solely for use in stationary industrial large-scale electri-
cal energy systems and facilities. If used as intended, in compliance with the re-
quirements and conditions specified in this technical document and observing
the warning notices in this technical document and attached to the product, the
product does not pose a risk of injury or damage to property or the environ-
ment. This applies throughout the service life of the product, from delivery, in-
stallation and operation to removal and disposal.
The following is considered intended use:

– Operate the product in accordance with this technical document, the agreed-
upon delivery conditions and the technical data.
– Ensure that all necessary work is performed by qualified personnel only.
– Only use the equipment and special tools included in the scope of delivery
for the intended purpose and in accordance with the specifications of this
technical document.
– Only operate the product in industrial areas. Observe the notices in this tech-
nical document regarding electromagnetic compatibility and the technical
data.
2.1.1 Motor-drive unit
The motor-drive unit function package is used to adjust the operating position
of on-load tap-changers in regulating transformers to the individual operating
requirements.
The following is considered appropriate use of the motor-drive unit function

package:
– Use the product only with the transformer/on-load tap-changer/de-ener-
gized tap-changer specified in the order.
– You will find the standard valid for the product and the year of issue on the
nameplate.
– The serial numbers of on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer and
on-load tap-changer accessories / de-energized tap-changer accessories
(drive, drive shaft, bevel gear, protective relay etc.) must match if these prod-
ucts are supplied as a set for one order.
– Electrically operate the motor-drive unit remotely during normal operation.
12 Safety 7815063/10 EN
– In special operating cases (such as during maintenance tasks), the motor-
drive unit can also be operated electrically on site via control switch S3.
– Never operate the motor-drive unit electrically or with the hand crank before
the transformer has been disconnected if you think there may be a fault in
the transformer or the on-load tap-changer/de-energized tap-changer. For
more information, refer to the "Troubleshooting" chapter.
– The provided hand crank is for activating the motor-drive unit during installa-
tion and tests in the transformer plant or during maintenance tasks if the
transformer has been disconnected.
– For details about using the hand crank in emergency operation when the
transformer is energized, refer to the "Operation" chapter.
2.1.2 On-load tap-changer regulation
The on-load tap-changer regulation function package is used to automatically

adjust the tap position of an on-load tap-changer with motor-drive unit.
2.1.3 Bushing monitoring
The bushing monitoring function package is used to monitor capacitance-

graded bushings on power transformers in the Um = 66...420 kV voltage levels
(other voltage ranges available upon request). You can use the product to de-
tect sparkovers at partial capacitances in the bushing and to monitor aging in
the bushings.
The following is considered appropriate use of the bushing monitoring function

package:
– Use the product only with the bushings specified in the order.
– Use the product only for high-voltage bushings of a power transformer sub-
ject to similar installation conditions and thermal loads.
– Use the product only for bushings of the same type (manufacturer, series,
technology, model year).
– Use the product only for bushings that were not previously damaged.
– This device is intended for indoor use in non-hazardous areas and should be
operated only by qualified personnel who are familiar with its use. The
switch-off device is part of the end application.
– The device is intended for installation. Protection against the spread of fire
and protection against electric shock must be fulfilled in the end application.
Resistance to mechanical stress must be fulfilled in the end application.
2.1.4 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM)
The vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) function pack-

age is used for monitoring on-load tap-changers on power transformers/reac-
tors. You can use the product to detect time and amplitude anomalies in the
progression of the vibro-acoustic signal sent by the on-load tap-changer and to
receive event messages when anomalies are detected.
The following is considered appropriate use of the VAM function package:

– Only use the product with the on-load tap-changer and the motor-drive unit
specified in the order.
– Only use the product for on-load tap-changers that have not already been
damaged.
– Only use the product on transformers with insulated add-on parts after ap-
proval by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH (special version required).
7815063/10 EN Safety 13
2.2 Inappropriate use
Use is considered to be inappropriate if you use the product other than as de-
scribed in the "Appropriate use" section.
Note the following information on inappropriate use of the bushing monitoring

function package:
– The product is not suited for extending the permitted service life of the bush-
ing specified by the bushing manufacturer.
– The product is not a protective device. Do not use it to handle safety-related
functions.
– The product is not intended for use in environments subject to strong corro-
sion effects.
– Do not connect the product components to measurement systems from
other manufacturers, because this can lead to bushing monitoring errors.
Note the following information on inappropriate use of the vibro-acoustic moni-

toring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) function package:
– The product is not suitable for extending the permitted service life of the on-
load tap-changer specified by the on-load tap-changer manufacturer.
– The product is not a protective device. Do not use it to handle safety-related
functions.
– The product is not intended for use in environments subject to strong corro-
sion effects.
2.2.3 Internal power supply
Do not use the power supply units which are used to supply the internal assem-
blies in the control cabinet to supply external circuits.
14 Safety 7815063/10 EN
2.3 Fundamental safety instructions
To prevent accidents, malfunctions and damage as well as unacceptable ad-
verse effects on the environment, those responsible for transport, installation,
operation, maintenance and disposal of the product or parts of the product
must ensure the following:
Personal protective equipment

Loosely worn or unsuitable clothing increases the danger of becoming trapped
or caught up in rotating parts and the danger of getting caught on protruding
parts. This poses a danger to life and limb.
– Wear appropriate personal protective equipment such as a helmet, work
gloves, etc. for the respective activity.
– Never wear damaged personal protective equipment.
– Never wear rings, necklaces, or other jewelry.
– If you have long hair, wear a hairnet.
Work area
Untidy and poorly lit work areas can lead to accidents.
– Keep the work area clean and tidy.
– Make sure that the work area is well lit.
– Observe the applicable laws for accident prevention in the relevant country.
Drying the transformer

Drying the product together with the transformer in an autoclave will cause
damage to property and product malfunctions.
– Never dry the product together with the transformer in an autoclave.
Working during operation

The product may only be operated in a sound, operational condition. Otherwise
it poses a danger to life and limb.
– Regularly check the operational reliability of safety equipment.
– Comply with the inspection work, maintenance work and maintenance inter-
vals described in this technical file.
Invisible laser radiation

Looking directly into the beam or the reflected beam can cause eye damage.
The beam is emitted at the optical connections or at the end of the fiber-optic
cables connected to them on the assemblies. Read the chapter "Technical Data"
for further information.
– Never look directly into the beam or the reflected beam.
– Never look into the beam with the aid of optical instruments such as a mag-
nifying glass or a microscope.
– In the event that the laser beam strikes your eyes, close your eyes immedi-
ately and move your head out of the path of the beam.
Working with current transformers

Dangerous high voltages may occur when a current transformer is operated
with an open secondary circuit. This can lead to injuries and property damage.
– Never operate a current transformer with an open secondary circuit; short-
circuit the current transformer to prevent this.
– Observe the information in the current transformer operating instructions.
7815063/10 EN Safety 15
Dangerous external voltages
Depending on the product version, the control cabinet may be powered from
different circuits (e.g., separate power supply circuits, measurement circuits). In
this case, please note that circuits within the control cabinet can still carry dan-
gerous voltages even if you have turned off the fuses and/or main switches of
the control cabinet. Note the connection diagram supplied.
Handling electrical components

Electrical components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
– Never touch electrical components during commissioning, operation or
maintenance work.
– Take suitable measures (such as covers) to ensure that personnel cannot
touch components.
– Wear suitable personal protective equipment.
Hand crank aperture

Reaching into the hand crank aperture during a tap-change operation may lead
to injuries caused by a rotating drive shaft.
– Never reach into the hand crank aperture.
Securing the motor-drive unit

If you open the motor-drive unit during operation, there is a danger of electric
shock due to live components behind the swing frame.
– Secure the motor-drive unit against unauthorized opening during operation
by using a padlock.
– The motor-drive unit may only be opened by an electrically skilled person.
Opening the swing frame

Opening the swing frame while the motor-drive unit is in operation may result
in electric shocks due to live components.
– The swing frame may only be opened by an electrically skilled person.
Explosion protection
Highly flammable or explosive gases, vapors and dusts can cause serious explo-
sions and fire. This increases the danger to life and limb.
– Do not install, operate or perform maintenance work on the product in areas
where a risk of explosion is present.
Safety markings
Warning signs and safety information plates are safety markings on the prod-
uct. They are an important aspect of the safety concept.
– Observe all safety markings on the product.
– Make sure all safety markings on the product remain intact and legible.
– Replace safety markings that are damaged or missing.
Ambient conditions
To ensure reliable and safe operation, the product must only be operated under
the ambient conditions specified in the technical data.
– Observe the specified operating conditions and requirements for the installa-
tion location.
Auxiliary materials and operating materials

Auxiliary materials and operating materials not approved by the manufacturer
can lead to personal injury, damage to property and malfunctions of the prod-
uct.
– Only use conductive and grounded hoses, pipes, and pump equipment that
are approved for flammable liquids.
– Only use lubricants and auxiliary materials approved by the manufacturer.
16 Safety 7815063/10 EN
– Contact the manufacturer.
Modifications and conversions

Unauthorized or inappropriate changes to the product may lead to personal in-
jury, material damage and operational faults.
– Only modify the product after consultation with Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
GmbH.
Spare parts
Spare parts not approved by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH may lead to
physical injury, damage to the product and malfunctions.
– Only use spare parts that have been approved by Maschinenfabrik Rein-
hausen GmbH.
– Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
2.4 Personnel qualification

The person responsible for assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance
and inspection must ensure that the personnel are sufficiently qualified.
Electrically skilled person

The electrically skilled person has a technical qualification and therefore has the
required knowledge and experience, and is also conversant with the applicable
standards and regulations. The electrically skilled person is also proficient in the
following:
– Can identify potential dangers independently and is able to avoid them.
– Is able to perform work on electrical systems.
– Is specially trained for the working environment in which (s)he works.
– Must satisfy the requirements of the applicable statutory regulations for acci-
dent prevention.
Electrically trained persons

An electrically trained person receives instruction and guidance from an electri-
cally skilled person in relation to the tasks undertaken and the potential dangers
in the event of inappropriate handling as well as the protective devices and
safety measures. The electrically trained person works exclusively under the
guidance and supervision of an electrically skilled person.
Operator
The operator uses and operates the product in line with this technical file. The
operating company provides the operator with instruction and training on the
specific tasks and the associated potential dangers arising from improper han-
dling.
Technical Service
We strongly recommend having maintenance, repairs and retrofitting carried
out by our Technical Service department. This ensures that all work is per-
formed correctly. If maintenance is not carried out by our Technical Service de-
partment, please ensure that the personnel who carry out the maintenance are
trained and authorized by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH to carry out the
work.
Authorized personnel
Authorized personnel are trained by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH to
carry out special maintenance.
7815063/10 EN Safety 17
2.5 Personal protective equipment
Personal protective equipment must be worn during work to minimize risks to
health.
– Always wear the personal protective equipment required for the job at hand.
– Never wear damaged personal protective equipment.
– Observe information about personal protective equipment provided in the
work area.
Protective clothing Close-fitting work clothing with a low tearing strength, with
tight sleeves and with no protruding parts. It mainly serves to
protect the wearer against being caught by moving machine
parts.
Safety shoes To protect against falling heavy objects and slipping on slip-
pery surfaces.
Safety glasses To protect the eyes from flying parts and splashing liquids.
Visor To protect the face from flying parts and splashing liquids or
other dangerous substances.
Hard hat To protect against falling and flying parts and materials.
Hearing protection To protect against hearing damage.
Protective gloves To protect against mechanical, thermal, and electrical haz-

ards.
Table 3: Personal protective equipment
18 Safety 7815063/10 EN
3 IT security
Observe the following recommendations to operate the product safely.
3.1 General
– Ensure that only authorized personnel have access to the device.
– Only use the device within an ESP (electronic security perimeter). Do not con-
nect the device to the Internet in an unprotected state. Use mechanisms for
vertical and horizontal network segmentation and security gateways (fire-
walls) at the transition points.
– Ensure that the device is only operated by trained personnel who are familiar
with IT security.
– Check regularly whether software updates are available for the device and
perform the updates.
3.2 Commissioning
Observe the following recommendations for device commissioning:
– User IDs must be unique and assignable. Do not use a "Group account" func-
tion or the "Auto login" function.
– Activate the "Auto logout [►Section 8.1.3.2, Page 167]" function.
– Restrict the rights of the individual user groups as much as is feasible; this
helps avoid errors during operations. A user with the "Operator" role, for ex-
ample, should only perform operations and should not be able to change any
device settings.
– Delete or disable the default "admin" user ID. This requires first creating a
new user account with the "Administrator" role. You can then use it to delete
or disable the default "admin" account.
– Deactivate service user access [►Section 8.1.3.3, Page 168].
– Activate brute-force protection [►Section 8.1.25, Page 232].
– Enable SSL/TLS encryption [►Section 8.1.3, Page 166]; access to the device
is then only possible using the SSL/TLS protocol. In addition to encrypting
communication, this protocol also checks the authenticity of the server.
– Use TLS version 1.2 or higher wherever possible.
– Integrate the device into a public key infrastructure. Create your own SSL cer-
tificates for this if necessary and then import them.
– Connect the device to a central log server by using the syslog interface
[►Section 8.1.11, Page 180].
– Only use the [►Section 8.1.3.4, Page 169]SNMP function if you can ensure
that the communication is protected by external security equipment.
– Deactivate all unused interfaces [►Section 8.1.5, Page 171].
– Media converter with managed switch (assembly SW 3-3) [►Section 8.1.30,
Page 253]:
– Change user account and password.
– Disable unnecessary services.
7815063/10 EN IT security 19
3.3 Operation
Observe the following recommendations during device operation:
– Change the password at regular intervals.
– Export the security log [►Section 8.1.28.1, Page 235] at regular intervals.
– Check the log files regularly for unauthorized system access and other secu-
rity-related events.
– Media converter with managed switch (assembly SW 3-3): Check at regular
intervals whether the manufacturer Belden/Hirschmann has released an up-
date for the product “EES 25” and, where necessary, perform a firmware up-
date [►Section 8.1.30.3, Page 256].
3.4 Interfaces
The device uses the following interfaces for communication:
CPU
RUN
INIT
9
9
COM 1
CAN 1
CAN 2
ERR
2 4 6
0 8 L
1
1
E C A
2 4 6
8 H
C A
TEST
9
PROG
COM 2
RUN
USB2.0
1
24V DC
ETH 1 ETH 2.1 ETH 2.2

+
-
Figure 1: CPU assembly interfaces
Interface Protocol Port Description
CAN 1 - - DIO assembly connection
CAN 2 - - Communication with other ISM® devices (e.g.

parallel operation)
COM 1 - - Internal system interface
COM 2 - - Serial interface (SCADA)
USB - - Import or export of data
ETH 1 TCP 80 HTTP for web-based visualization 1 2
ETH 1 TCP 443 HTTPS for web-based visualization 2
ETH 1 TCP 102 IEC 61850
ETH 1 TCP 502 Modbus 3
ETH 1 TCP 20000 DNP3 3
ETH 1 UDP 161 SNMP 4
1 Port is closed if you activate the device's SSL encryption.

2 Depending on the setting of the parameter Visualization release [►Page 170].
3 Default setting; if you have modified the port for the control system protocol, only the set port is open.
4 Depending on the setting of the SNMP agent [►Page 169] parameter.
20 IT security 7815063/10 EN
ETH 2.x TCP 21 FTP 1 (only for MR service)
ETH 2.x TCP 80 HTTP for web-based visualization 1
ETH 2.x TCP 443 HTTPS for web-based visualization
ETH 2.x TCP 990 FTPS (only for MR service)
ETH 2.x TCP 8080 HTTP for web-based visualization 1
ETH 2.x TCP 8081 HTTPS for web-based visualization
ETH 2.x UDP 161 SNMP 4

Table 4: Interfaces and open ports of the CPU assembly
Figure 2: Assembly SW 3-3 interfaces
ETH 2.3, TCP 22 SSH 5

ETH 2.4
23 Telnet 5
80 HTTP for web-based visualization 5
443 HTTPS for web-based visualization 5
UDP 161 SNMP 5

Table 5: Interfaces and open ports of the SW 3-3 assembly
5 Port is closed if the corresponding service is disabled.
CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
Figure 3: CPU assembly interfaces
X2 TCP 102 IEC 61850
X2 TCP 502 Modbus 6
X2 TCP 20000 DNP3 6
X2 TCP 2404 IEC 60870-5-104 6
X2 UDP 123 SNTP
X2 - - Bus extension (optional)
X3 TCP 80 HTTP for web-based visualization 7
X3 TCP 443 HTTPS for web-based visualization
X3 TCP 22 SSH (only for MR Service) 8
X3 UDP/TCP 514 Syslog
X4 - - Serial interface (SCADA)
X5 - - Serial interface (SCADA)

Table 6: Interfaces and open ports of the CPU assembly
3.5 Encryption standards

The device supports the following TLS versions:
– TLS 1.0
– TLS 1.1
– TLS 1.2
– TLS 1.3
The device uses the following cipher suites for a TLS-secured connection:
6 Default setting; if you have modified the port for the control system protocol, only the set port is open.
7 Port is closed if you activate the device's SSL encryption.
8 Port is closed if you deactivate the Service user access [►Section 8.1.3.3, Page 168].
Cipher suite TLS version [►Page 171]
>=1.0 >=1.1 >=1.2 >=1.3
TLS_AKE_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● ● ●
TLS_AKE_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 ● ● ● ●
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA ● ● - -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 ● ● ● -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM ● ● - -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM_8 ● ● - -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● ● -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA ● ● - -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 ● ● ● -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM ● ● - -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM_8 ● ● - -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 ● ● ● -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_ARIA_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_ARIA_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 ● ● ● -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM_8 ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 ● ● ● -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM_8 ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 ● ● ● -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_ARIA_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_ARIA_256_GCM_SHA384 ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 ● ● ● -
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● ● -
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA ● ● - -
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 ● - - -
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 ● ● ● -
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_ARIA_128_GCM_SHA256 ● - - -
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_ARIA_256_GCM_SHA384 ● - - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA ● ● - -
Cipher suite TLS version [►Page 171]
>=1.0 >=1.1 >=1.2 >=1.3
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM_8 ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM_8 ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_ARIA_128_GCM_SHA256 ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_ARIA_256_GCM_SHA384 ● ● - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_IDEA_CBC_SHA ● - - -
TLS_RSA_WITH_IDEA_CBC_SHA ● - - -
Table 7: Cipher suite (● = available, - = not available)
The device uses the SHA256 hash function to save passwords.

The SW 3-3 assembly supports the following TLS version:
– TLS 1.2
The assembly uses the following cipher suites for a TLS-secured connection:
Key exchange Authentication Encryption Key length Operating Hash function

mode
TLS ECDHE RSA WITH AES 128 GCM SHA265
DHE CBC SHA
Table 8: Cipher suite
The device uses the following encryption standards in accordance with techni-
cal directive TR-02102-4 from Germany's Federal Office for Information Secu-
rity:
– Key agreement:
– diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
– diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha256
– ecdh-sha2-nistp256
– Server authentication:
– ssh-rsa
– rsa-sha2-512
– rsa-sha2-256
– Encryption algorithms:
– aes128-ctr
– [email protected]
– MAC protection:
– hmac-sha1
– hmac-sha2-256
– Compression:
– None
– Zlib
4 Product description
4.1 Scope of delivery

– Control cabinet
– Product documentation
– Gear motor (pre-installed on the on-load tap-changer)
– Connection cable
– For each bushing to be monitored (3 or 6):
– Bushing adapter
– Connection cable for the bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit
– Bushing coupling unit
– Set of fasteners for the bushing coupling unit
– Connection cable for the bushing coupling unit and the control cabinet
– Vibration sensor VS 1 with adapter and kick guard
– Sensor cable
– Terminating resistor for CAN bus
Please note the following:
1. Check the shipment for completeness using the shipping documents.
2. Store the parts in a dry place until installation.
3. The product must remain in its airtight, protective wrapping and may only be
removed immediately before installation.
4.2 Function description

The product is a modular system for controlling, regulating and monitoring a
transformer. The components necessary for this are installed in a housing. De-
pending on your order, the product is equipped with various function packages.
The motor-drive unit function package is used to adjust the operating position
of on-load tap-changers in regulating transformers to the individual operating
requirements.
Side Drive
The tap-change operation is initiated by activating the motor-drive unit (a single
control impulse is triggered, for example via the optional "On-load tap-changer
regulation" function package). This adjustment operation is always completed
regardless of any other control impulses issued during the tap-change opera-
tion. In the standard design, the next tap-change operation can only proceed
once all control devices have reached their resting positions.
Behavior in the event of a voltage interruption

On-load tap-changes are only possible if the controller is ready for operation.
Should the voltage be interrupted during an on-load tap-change operation, once
the voltage supply returns, the motor-drive unit completes the started on-load
tap-change operation.
26 Product description 7815063/10 EN

Top Drive
The on-load tap-changer is delivered with a pre-installed gear motor that is con-
trolled by an electronic control unit. The electronic control unit is located in a
control cabinet and is connected to the gear motor via a connection cable.
A complex installation of drive shafts and bevel gears and the associated cou-
pling and centering of the individual modules is not required for the top drive.
The motor-drive unit control unit can be configured and the measured values
and events can be displayed using the web-based visualization. Here, the func-
tional scope is based on the ordered product version.
Figure 4: Motor-drive unit (top drive) and on-load tap-changer on one power transformer
Figure 5: Example illustration of the routing of the motor-drive unit (top drive) connection ca-
ble with an on-load tap-changer in a 3-column design

On-load tap-change operations are only possible if the controller is ready for op-
eration.
7815063/10 EN Product description 27

4.2.1.1 Motor-drive unit active power measurement (option)
The device can be equipped with an optional assembly for measuring the active
power of the motor-drive unit. This assembly transmits the active power to the
device as an analog signal (4…20 mA).
The device can transmit the measured active power via the control system.
Moreover, the device triggers an event message if the analog signal is not
within the permissible range (4…20 mA).
4.2.1.2 Tap-change supervisory control

The tap-change supervisory control is used for monitoring the drive linkage be-
tween the on-load tap-changer/de-energized tap-changer/ARS and motor-drive
unit as well as for monitoring tap position equality. Ensure that the tap-change
supervisory control is connected to the tripping circuit of the transformer circuit
breaker in accordance with the connection diagram to avoid damage to the on-
load tap-changer and transformer.
Behavior in the event of tap position inequality

If the on-load tap-changer/de-energized tap-changer/ARS and motor-drive unit
are not in the same tap position, the tap-change supervisory control behaves as
follows:
– Tap-change operations via remote electrical impulse or via on-site actuation
of the control switch on the motor-drive unit are blocked.
– If the motor-drive unit is actuated via the hand crank, the device trips the
transformer circuit breaker.
– You can only reactivate the transformer circuit breaker once you have re-
stored tap-position equality and the tap-change supervisory control does not
report an error.
Tap-change supervisory control operation

The tap-change supervisory control can be operated in accordance with the
open-circuit principle or in accordance with the closed-circuit principle.
– Closed-circuit principle: The circuit breaker is tripped via an interruption of
the electrical supply voltage. The transformer circuit breaker is tripped in the
event of a line break or interruption of the supply voltage to the tap-change
supervisory control circuit.
– Open-circuit principle: The circuit breaker is tripped via an electrical impulse
in the event of an error. You must ensure that the tap-change supervisory
control is connected to the supply voltage. Otherwise the device cannot trip
the transformer circuit breaker.
4.2.2 On-load tap-changer regulation
The on-load tap-changer regulation function package is used to automatically

adjust the tap position of an on-load tap-changer with motor-drive unit.
– Automatic voltage regulation
– 1 desired value
– Delay time T1 (linear)
– Automatic voltage regulation
– 3 desired values or TDSC
– Delay time T1 (linear/integral) und delay time T2
– Parallel operation
– Line drop compensation
– Reactive power regulation
– Active power regulation

– Limit value monitoring
– Voltage U<, U>
– Current I<, I>
– Limit value monitoring
– Voltage U<<, U<, U>, U>>
– Current I<<, I<, I>, I>>
– Power S<<, S<, S>, S>>, P<<, P<, P>, P>>, Q<<, Q<, Q>, Q>>
– Phase angle cosφ<, cosφ<<
– Bandwidth monitoring
– Function monitoring
4.2.2.1 Power regulation (optional)

If your device is equipped with the optional power regulation function, you can
regulate the active power or reactive power of a transformer with on-load tap-
changer. The device measures the active power or reactive power and com-
pares it to the desired value set. The difference between the measured value
and the desired value is the control deviation. If the control deviation is greater
than the set bandwidth, the device triggers a tap-change operation.
Note the following function limitations if your device is equipped with the
power regulation function:
– Parallel operation is only possible with the tap synchronization method for
both the voltage regulation and for the power regulation.
– The line drop compensation only has an effect on the voltage regulation.
– The "Active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value" (TDSC)
function only has an effect on the voltage regulation.
4.2.2.2 Regulation of a three-winding transformer (optional)

The three-winding transformer consists of one high-voltage winding and two
low-voltage windings. The high voltage winding is equipped with an on-load
tap-changer.
The device measures the voltage of the two low-voltage windings. The voltage
is regulated via one of the two windings (winding 1 or winding 2). How your de-
vice is configured determines which winding is regulated. The set limit values
on the winding not being regulated are still monitored.
W3
W1 W2
Figure 6: Overview of three-winding transformer voltage regulation

4.2.2.3 Regulation of the high-voltage side or low-voltage side of a trans-
former (HV/LV regulation)
The device measures the voltage on the high-voltage side and on the low-volt-
age side of the transformer. With automatic winding selection, the voltage on
one of the two windings (winding 1 or winding 2) is regulated based on the ac-
tive power flow. You can select when and which winding is to be regulated via
the device configuration. The set limit values on the winding not being regu-
lated are still monitored.
HV (W3)
LV (W1)
I
U
Figure 7: Overview of voltage regulation on the high-voltage side or low-voltage side of the
transformer
4.2.3 On-load tap-changer monitoring
The on-load tap-changer monitoring function package is used for monitoring

on-load tap-changers on power transformers/reactors. It contains the following
functions:
– Motor-drive unit status (motor protective switch, motor is running)
– Tap-change statistics of on-load tap-changer
– Maintenance interval calculation
– OLTC temperature monitoring
– On-load tap-changer oil level
– Contact wear calculation (only for OILTAP® V, M, R, RM, MS, G)
– Oil carbonization (only for OILTAP® V, M, R)
– Motor Current Index
– Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer
– Torque monitoring
4.2.3.1 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM)

The vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) function pack-
age is used for monitoring on-load tap-changers on power transformers/reac-
tors. You can use the product to detect time and amplitude anomalies in the
progression of the vibro-acoustic signal sent by the on-load tap-changer and to
receive event messages when anomalies are detected.
The on-load tap-changer is equipped with measuring equipment through which

the system records and analyses the vibro-acoustic signal throughout the tap
change sequence. In addition, the system determines the changed tap position
and the oil temperature in the on-load tap-changer.

Using the implemented algorithms, the monitoring system can reliably detect
any potential anomalies that occur in the vibro-acoustic signal progression, tak-
ing the temperature variations of the on-load tap-changer oil into account. In
addition, the system also includes a self-learning function for limit value adjust-
ment at oil temperatures above 15°C.
You must perform approximately 5 tap-change operations per evaluation

i cluster (e.g. 5x from step 1 to step 2 in reverse tap-change operation) be-
fore the device can display the first limit value curve.
Status message
The MSENSE® VAM monitoring system produces a 3-stage status message:
Status Device/visualization display SCADA/digital output re-

mote signaling
Normal OK message through blue No remote signaling

status message
Warning The first and the second No remote signaling

anomalies in an evaluation
cluster are indicated via a
yellow status message in the
VAM analysis (Information
menu).
Alarm A third anomaly arising in an This event message is trans-

evaluation cluster or the mitted to a connected
third successive anomaly SCADA system.
triggers an additional event In addition, it can also be
message (Events menu). sent to a digital output.
4.2.4 Transformer monitoring
The transformer monitoring function package is used for monitoring the trans-
former. It contains the following functions:
– Asset intelligence
– Temperature monitoring
– Ambient temperature
– Top-oil temperature
– Bottom-oil temperature (optional)
– Calculation of the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or
IEEE C57.91
– Calculation of paper moisture content
– Calculation of the bubbling temperature
– Calculation of the transformer overload capability (emergency operation)
– Gas in oil analysis
– Winding temperature measurement
The bushing monitoring function package is used to monitor capacitance

graded bushings on power transformers. You can use the product to detect
breakdowns at partial capacitances in the bushings and to monitor aging in the
bushings.

To determine the state of the bushing, the bushings are equipped with a mea-
suring device which the system uses to continuously measures the change in
capacitance ΔC1 of the bushings during operation.
Depending on the device configuration, the system can measure the voltage of
the 3-phase reference system and determine the change in the dissipation fac-
tor Δtanδ of the bushings. In the version with constant reference system, the
reference voltage is set as a parameter and is not measured.
The monitoring system takes advantage of the implemented algorithms to

largely compensate for voltage fluctuations and temperature fluctuations in the
3-phase system, thereby ensuring reliable monitoring for the bushings.
Figure 8: Operating principle (with the option "Reference measuring")
Bushing monitoring with constant reference system (optional)

The "Bushing monitoring with constant reference system" option is used to
monitor the bushings in systems in which it is not possible to measure the volt-
age of the reference system. The system uses a constant reference grid voltage
for this. The angle between phases is a constant 120°.
If the voltage of the reference system is not measured, significant asymme-

i tries in the grid can lead to the incorrect triggering of events.
4.2.6 Cooling system control
The cooling system control function package is used for controlling the cooling
system of a power transformer. It contains the following functions:
– Control of 2, 4 or 6 cooling groups
– Conventional control via relay contacts of a thermometer
– Intelligent control
– Temperature-dependent switching point control
– Load-dependent mode
– Periodic mode
– Alternating mode

– Frequency-based cooling system control
4.2.7 Cooling system monitoring
The cooling system monitoring function package is used for monitoring the
cooling system of a power transformer. It contains the following functions:
– Monitoring of 2, 4 or 6 cooling groups
– Operating status
– Number of starts
– Operating duration
– Cooling efficiency monitoring
– Thermal resistance Rth
– Comparison of the measured and the calculated upper oil temperature
– Comparison of the cooling system feed temperature and the return tem-
perature
4.2.8 Additional digital inputs and outputs
This function package includes additional digital inputs and outputs which you
can use freely. You can link these inputs and outputs with functions, event mes-
sages or control system messages.
4.2.9 Additional analog inputs and outputs
This function package includes additional analog inputs and outputs which you
can use freely.
4.2.10 TPLE
You can use the TAPCON® Personal Logic Editor (TPLE) function to program
simple logical links via the web-based visualization. You can also link the inputs
and outputs available on the device using function modules.
4.2.11 Communication
The communication function package is used for communication between the

product and other systems. It contains the following functions:
– Web-based visualization
– IEC 60870-5-101
– IEC 60870-5-103
– IEC 60870-5-104
– IEC 61850 (edition 1 and edition 2)
– Modbus RTU
– Modbus TCP
– Modbus ASCII
– DNP3
– Redundancy protocol (HSR or PRP)
– MQTT
– User authentication via RADIUS

– MR sensor bus
Please note that you cannot use the MR sensor bus at the same time as a
i control system that uses the serial interface.

4.3 Operating modes
You can select the device operating mode using the rotary switch in the control
cabinet [►Section 4.4.1, Page 37]. Depending on the device version, the ro-
tary switch is designated S32 (without on-load tap-changer control) or S132
(with on-load tap-changer control). You can operate the device in the following
operating modes:
LOCAL (S32/S132 in position LOC)

In the Local operating mode, you can only actuate the device using the operat-
ing elements in the control cabinet. Commands via digital inputs or SCADA are
not possible. There is no automatic on-load tap-changer control.
REMOTE (S32/S132 in position REM)

In the Remote operating mode, you can actuate the device, depending on the
setting of the Remote behavior [►Page 167] parameter, only via external key or
SCADA commands. You can activate (AR AUTO) or deactivate (AVR manual)
the optional on-load tap-changer control function via digital inputs or SCADA.
OFF (S132 in position OFF)

In OFF operating mode, you cannot operate the motor-drive unit via control
switch or digital inputs. This operating mode is used to prevent the motor-drive
unit from starting up inadvertently (e.g., during maintenance work).
AUTO (S132 in position AUTO, only with option "Automatic on-load

tap-changer control")
Automatic on-load tap-changer control is active only in the Auto operating
mode. You cannot actuate the motor-drive unit manually in this mode.
LOCAL REMOTE OFF AUTO
Control using S3 control switch Yes No No No
Control using digital inputs No Yes No No

9
Control using SCADA No Yes - No
On-load tap-changer regulation AVR MAN- AVR MAN- - AVR AUTO

10
UAL UAL
AVR AUTO
Table 9: Overview of operating modes
4.3.1 Emergency operation during switching blocking (X100 bridge)
The monitoring function of the on-load tap-changer is only active when the
i device is ready for operation and issues a signal at the digital output Status
OK.
If your device is equipped with the OLTC monitoring expert function package,
the monitoring system can block further tap-change operations where neces-
sary. In this case, the monitoring system will report the event Blocking active. If
operation needs to be resumed despite the cause of the event not being elimi-
nated, you can activate emergency operation by inserting the X100 bridge.
9 Optional when connecting the motor-drive unit to a control system (SCADA).

10 Only available if the device is equipped with the "On-load tap-changer control" option.

If the X100 bridge is inserted, drive blocking by the monitoring system is
switched to inactive. All operating values continue to be recorded and stored by
the monitoring system.
NOTICE Damage to the transformer and/or on-load tap-changer

If the Blocking active event is present in the monitoring system, the cause of
the event has to be analyzed before activating emergency operation. Per-
forming additional tap-change operations on the motor-drive unit without an-
alyzing the cause may lead to on-load tap-changer and/or transformer dam-
age.
Check what caused the Blocking active event and, based on the cause, de-
cide whether to continue operating the on-load tap-changer.
Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
If emergency operation is active, this is displayed in the visualization of the de-

vice:
Emergency operation of motor-drive unit (X100) active
Figure 9: Emergency operation of motor-drive unit (X100) active

4.4 Design
This chapter contains an overview of the design of the product.
4.4.1 Control cabinet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
10
15 11
14 13 12
Figure 10: Control cabinet layout (side drive)
1 Door of the control cabinet 2 Inspection window
3 Eyebolt 4 Transmission gear cover plate
5 Indication field 6 Output shaft
7 Hand crank aperture with hand crank 8 Fixing lug

interlock switch
9 Hand crank 10 Motor protective switch Q01
11 S3 control switch 12 Swing frame / anti-condensation

heater
13 Base plate for cable bushings 14 Briefcase
15 MControl 10" touch panel (optional)

1 2 3 4
5
6
7
11
10 9 8
Figure 11: Control cabinet layout (top drive)
1 Door of the control cabinet 2 Inspection window
3 Eyebolt 4 Indication field
5 Fixing lug 6 Motor protective switch Q01
7 S3 control switch 8 Swing frame / anti-condensation

heater
9 Base plate for cable bushings 10 Briefcase
11 MControl 10" touch panel (optional)

4.4.1.1 Motor-drive unit
4.4.1.1.1 Indication field

An indication field is fitted in the control cabinet. The pointer and operations
counter are mechanically driven and indicate the tap-change operation se-
quence and operating position of the motor-drive unit. The reset wheel on the
operations counter is sealed at the factory.
1 2 1 3
4
Figure 12: Indication field
1 The two drag hands indicate the regu- 2 Tap position indicator
lating range currently used
3 Tap-change indicator: Shows the cur- 4 Mechanical operations counter

rent position of the control cam (33
tap-change indicator sections per op-
erating position)
4.4.1.1.2 Position transmitter equipment

NOTICE Damage to the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit!
Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit due to incorrect use of
position transmitter equipment.
Only circuits stated in the chapter Technical data for position transmitter
equipment [►Section 12.2.2, Page 486] may be connected to the position
transmitter module connections.
The switchover point of the position transmitter equipment in the motor-
drive unit is not the same as the switchover point of the diverter switch op-
eration. This depends on the type of diverter switch. This fact should be
noted when project planning the locking circuits between the motor-drive
unit and external equipment (e.g. transformer circuit breaker).
The position transmitter equipment is used to indicate the operating position of

the on-load tap-changer/de-energized tap-changer when idle.
The remote displays are available in various versions.
The position transmitter module for connection by the customer is located on

the terminal rail.
For more information about the position transmitter equipment, see Technical
data for position transmitter equipment [►Section 12.2.2, Page 486].

4.4.1.1.3 Transmission gear cover plate
WARNING Danger of death and severe injury from electrical voltage!
Danger of death and severe injury from electrical voltage if the transmission
gear cover plate is not fitted.
Never start up motor-drive unit without transmission gear cover plate.
Upon successful removal during assembly, reconnect the ground connec-
tion.
The touch-protected transmission gear cover plate features an opening for the
hand crank used in manual mode.
Figure 13: Transmission gear cover plate
4.4.1.1.4 Protective devices

The following protective devices are fitted in the motor-drive unit:
– End stop device (mechanical and electric)
– Device protecting against unintentional passage
– Motor protection device
– Protection against accidental contact
4.4.1.2 Anti-condensation heater

The heating element is integrated onto the cap rail in the swing frame. Regula-
tion is via a thermostat or a hygrostat (optional).
4.4.1.3 Swing frame/terminal rail

The swing frame protects all electrical and mechanical parts of the motor-drive
unit behind the swing frame against accidental contact.
The terminal rail behind the swing frame enables easy electrical connection of
the motor-drive unit. Vertically arranged cap rails with the correspondingly
mounted terminal bars ensure that the connection wiring is easy to install.
4.4.1.4 Base plate for cable bushing

The base plate is used for cable bushings in the control cabinet. Depending on
your order, the device is equipped with one of the following base plates:
– Blind plate for creating your own cable bushing
– Two-piece blind plate for creating your own cable bushing
– Base plate with Roxtec CF32 cable bushing
– Base plate with metric cable glands (2x M20, 20x M25, 5x M32, 3x M40)
– Base plate with flange opening FL21

4.4.1.5 ISM® assemblies
4.4.1.5.1 Power supply QS3.241

The PULS DIMENSION QS3.241 assembly supplies power to the ISM® assem-
blies.
Figure 14: PULS DIMENSION QS3.241 assembly
4.4.1.5.2 Power supply CP5.241

The PULS DIMENSION CP5.241 assembly supplies power to the ISM® assem-
blies.
Figure 15: PULS DIMENSION CP5.241 assembly
4.4.1.5.3 Power supply PS

The PS assembly contains the power supply unit for supplying power to the
ISM® assemblies. The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
PS - 8640
SICAM A8000
RY
4 -
3
X1
2
1 +
Figure 16: PS assembly

4.4.1.5.4 CPU (central processing unit) I
The CPU I assembly is the central processing unit for the device. It contains the
following interfaces:
– Internal system interface RS232 (COM1)
– Serial interface RS232/485 (COM2)
– 3x Ethernet (ETH1, ETH 2.1, ETH 2.2)
– USB (USB 2.0)
– 2x CAN bus (CAN 1, CAN 2)
CPU
RUN
INIT
9
COM 1
CAN 1
CAN 2
ERR
2 4 6
0 8 L
1
E C A
2 4 6
8 H
C A
TEST
9
PROG
COM 2
RUN
USB2.0
1
24V DC

+
-
Figure 17: CPU I assembly
4.4.1.5.5 CPU (central processing unit)

The CPU assembly is the central processing unit for the device. It contains the
following interfaces:
– Serial interface RS485/422 (electrically isolated, X4)
– Internal system interface RS232 (X5)
– 2x Ethernet 10/100 Mbps (electrically isolated, X2, X3)
CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
Figure 18: CPU assembly

4.4.1.5.6 UI 1 voltage measurement and current measurement
The UI 1 assembly is used for measuring 1-phase voltage and current.
Figure 19: UI 1 assembly
Warning of a danger point. Read the information given in the product operating
instructions.
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage.
This assembly is protected via double insulation or reinforced insulation.
Table 10: Safety-relevant symbols on the assembly
4.4.1.5.7 UI 3 voltage measurement and current measurement

The UI 3 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage and current.
Figure 20: UI 3 assembly
instructions.

4.4.1.5.8 UI 5-3 voltage measurement and current measurement
The UI 5-3 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage and current.
Figure 21: UI 5-3 assembly
instructions.
4.4.1.5.9 UI 5-4 voltage measurement and current measurement

The UI 5-4 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage and current.
Figure 22: UI 5-4 assembly
instructions.

4.4.1.5.10 Voltage measurement U 3
The U3 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage. The RY LED signals
that the assembly is ready for operation.
AI - 8340
10
SICAM A8000
7
1 X2
RY
2
X1
1
Figure 23: U 3 assembly
4.4.1.5.11 Current measurement I 3

The I 3 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage and current. The RY
LED signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
AI - 8330
6
I1
SICAM A8000
4
I2
3
2
I3
1
X1
RY
Figure 24: I 3 assembly

4.4.1.5.12 DIO 28-15 digital inputs and outputs
The DIO 28-15 assembly makes 28 inputs and 15 outputs (6 N/O contacts, 9
change-over contacts) available.
Figure 25: DIO 28-15 assembly
instructions.
4.4.1.5.13 Digital inputs and outputs DIO 42-20 (HL)

The assembly DIO 42-20/DIO 42-20 HL makes 42 inputs and 20 outputs (8 N/
O contacts, 12 change-over contacts) available.
Figure 26: Assembly DIO 42-20/DIO 42-20 HL
instructions.

4.4.1.5.14 Digital inputs DI 16-24 V
The DI 16-24V assembly has 16 digital inputs with a nominal voltage of 24 V DC.
The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
DI - 811x
10
SICAM A8000
6
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1
Figure 27: DI 16-24V assembly

The DI 16-48V assembly has 16 digital inputs with a nominal voltage of 48 V DC.
The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
DI - 811x
10
7
SICAM A8000
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1

The DI 16-110V assembly has 16 digital inputs with a nominal voltage of
110 V DC. The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
DI - 811x
10
SICAM A8000
6
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1

The DI 16-220V assembly has 16 digital inputs with a nominal voltage of
220 V DC. The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
DI - 811x
10
7
SICAM A8000
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1

4.4.1.5.18 Digital outputs DO 8
The DO 8 assembly provides you with 8 digital outputs (relays). The RY LED sig-
nals that the assembly is ready for operation.
DI - 8212
4
2
X4
SICAM A8000
1
2
X3
1
RY
2
X2
1
2
X1
1
Figure 31: DO 8 assembly
4.4.1.5.19 AIO 2 analog inputs and outputs

The AIO 2 assembly provides 2 channels for analog inputs and outputs.
In accordance with the device configuration, the AIO assembly supports one of
the following signal types:
Input Output
Voltage Current Voltage Current
0 to 10 V 0...20 mA 0 to 10 V 0...20 mA
4...20 mA 4...20 mA
Resistance measurement (e.g. PT100, resistor contact series)

Table 16: Signal types supported by the AIO assembly
Figure 32: AIO 2 assembly

The AIO 4 assembly provides 4 channels for analog inputs and outputs.

In accordance with the device configuration, the AIO assembly supports one of
the following signal types:
Input Output
Voltage Current Voltage Current
0 to 10 V 0...20 mA 0 to 10 V 0...20 mA
4...20 mA 4...20 mA
Resistance measurement (e.g. PT100, resistor contact series)

Table 17: Signal types supported by the AIO assembly

The AIO 8 assembly provides 8 channels for analog inputs. In accordance with
the device configuration, the AIO assembly supports one of the following signal
types:
– Voltage: 0...10 V
– Current: 0/4...20 mA (only channels 1, 2, 7 and 8)
– Resistance measurement (e.g. PT100)

4.4.1.5.22 Analog inputs AI 4-T
The AI 4-T assembly provides you with 4 analog inputs for temperature mea-
suring (PT100, PT1000). The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for oper-
ation.
AI - 8310
10
SICAM A8000
6
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1
Figure 35: AI 4-T assembly
4.4.1.5.23 Analog inputs AI 4

The AI 4 assembly provides you with 4 analog inputs for current measurement
(0/4…20 mA) or voltage measurement (0…10 V) via analog sensors. The RY LED
signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
AI - 8320
2
X4
SICAM A8000
2
X3
1
RY
2
X2
1
2
X1
1
Figure 36: AI 4 assembly

4.4.1.5.24 Analog outputs AO 4
The AO 4 assembly provides you with 4 analog outputs for outputting mea-
sured values (0/4…20 mA, 0…10 V). The RY LED signals that the assembly is
ready for operation.
AI - 8380
4
2
X4
SICAM A8000
1
2
X3
1
RY
2
X2
1
2
X1
1
Figure 37: AO 4 assembly
4.4.1.5.25 System networking MC 2-2

The MC 2-2 assembly is a media converter, which converts 2 electrical connec-
tions (RJ45) to one fiber-optic cable connection each. Each is converted inde-
pendently of the other. The following interfaces are available:
– 2x RJ45 (ETH12, ETH22)
– 2x Duplex-LC (SFP module) (ETH11, ETH21)
The media converter is designed to be transparent for the network and

i does not have its own IP address.
Figure 38: MC 2-2 assembly

4.4.1.5.26 System networking SW 3-3
The assembly SW 3-3 is a media converter with managed switch. It combines
two independent functions and provides you with the following interfaces:
– A media converter converts an electric connection (RJ45) into a fiber-optic
cable connection
– RJ45 (ETH12)
– Duplex-LC (SFP module) (ETH11)
– Managed switch with redundancy function (PRP or RSTP)
– 2x RJ45 (ETH23, ETH24), device-internal connection
– 2x Duplex-LC (SFP module) (ETH21, ETH22), redundancy connection
The following redundancy functions are available to you according to your or-
der:
– PRP (standard setting)
– RSTP
Figure 39: SW 3-3 assembly
4.4.1.5.27 System networking BEM1/BES1

The assemblies BEM 1 (master) and BES 1 (slave) are bus extension modules
which are used to extend the system by one additional busbar with additional
assemblies. Data is transmitted via fiber-optic cable. The assembly BES 1 has a
connection for supplying voltage to the additional busbar.
Figure 40: Assemblies BEM 1 and BES 1

4.4.1.5.28 System networking COM-ETH
The COM-ETH assembly provides you with 5 Ethernet interfaces.
CI - 8520
ETH
X5
SICAM A8000
ETH
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
ETH
X1
Figure 41: COM-ETH assembly
4.4.1.5.29 System networking BES

The BES assembly is a bus extension module and extends the device by one ad-
ditional bus rail with additional assemblies. The RY LED signals that the assem-
bly is ready for operation. The ER LED signals that the device has detected an
error.
CI - 8530
ETH
X3
SICAM A8000
ETH
X2
45
23
6
I/0
789
F01
A
E
B CD
RY ER
4 -
3
X1
2
1 +
Figure 42: BES assembly

4.4.1.5.30 Vibroacoustics VI 4
The VI 4 assembly records the vibration sensor signals via an IEPE interface. The
abbreviation IEPE refers to an industry standard for piezo-electrical sensors
(IEPE = Integrated Electronics Piezo Electric).
Figure 43: Assembly VI 4
The measured signals are processed with evaluation algorithms.
4.4.1.5.31 Control status message

The device reports the status of the control via digital outputs:
– OFF: Control is switched off.
– RDY: Control is ready.
– ERR: There is an error.
Output Configuration OFF RDY ERR
DIO: Status OK NO, High active 0 1 0
DIO: Status OK NC, High active 1 0 1

Table 18: Status message (DIO 28-15 or DIO 42-20)
Output Configuration OFF RDY ERR

11
DO 8: Status OK NO, High active 0 1 0
DO 8: Status OK NO, Low active 11 0 0 1
CPU: Status OK NO, High active 0 1 0
CPU: Status OK NC, High active 1 0 1

Table 19: Status message (DO 8 and CPU)
11 In this case, note that in the DIO configuration [►Section 8.1.22.1, Page 222] "NO, High-active" is shown as NO and that "NO, Low-
active" is shown as NC.

4.4.1.5.32 CAN gateway
The CAN gateway provides you with a CAN bus connection. Use the connec-
tion CAN1 for the connection to the CAN bus.
Figure 44: PEAK PCAN
4.4.1.6 Safety markings

The following safety markings are used on the product:
3 2
Figure 45: Overview of the safety markings (side drive)
1 Warning of rotating parts 2 Warning of dangerous electrical volt-

age
3 Warning of hot surface

1 2
Figure 46: Overview of the safety markings (top drive)
1 Warning of hot surface 2 Warning of dangerous electrical volt-

age
4.4.1.7 Main switch (optional)

You can shut the motor-drive unit down using the main switch. Depending on
the control cabinet version, the main switch is either inside the control cabinet
or on the outside of the door.
WARNING Electric shock!

The main switch does not de-energize the complete control cabinet. Perform-
ing work in the control cabinet when the control cabinet is energized can lead
to death or serious injuries.
Before working in the control cabinet, completely de-energize the control
cabinet using an all-phase isolating device.
4.4.1.8 Operation switch (optional)

You can use the operation switch to select the operating mode [►Section 4.3,
Page 35] of the motor-drive unit.
Position Description
LOC "LOCAL" operating mode activated.
REM "REMOTE" operating mode activated.

Table 20: Operation switch S32 (LOCAL/REMOTE)
AUTO "Automatic voltage regulation" operating mode activated.

Table 21: Operation switch S132 (LOCAL/AUTO/REMOTE)
OFF "OFF" operating mode activated.

Table 22: Operation switch S132 (LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE)

4.4.1.9 Operating elements on the outside of the control cabinet (optional)
The control cabinet is optionally equipped with operating elements on the out-
side of the control cabinet door. The operating elements are protected from
harmful environmental influences by a cover. You can protect the cover from
unauthorized access with a padlock.
NOTICE Damage to the device

If the cover is open, environmental influences such as humidity or low ambi-
ent temperatures can result in damage to the operating elements.
Always close the cover after you have pressed the operating elements.
Figure 47: Operating elements on the outside of the control cabinet
4.4.1.10 External socket for emergency heating (optional)

The optional external socket for emergency heating is located in the floor panel
of the control cabinet. The external socket allows you to start the heating of the
control cabinet without having to connect the entire control cabinet to the
power supply. This is necessary, for example, if you want to store the control
cabinet at particularly low ambient temperatures or if you have to switch off the
power supply for maintenance work.
The external socket for emergency heating consists of the following compo-
nents:
– External socket with protective cover in the floor panel
– Connecting cable with plug for external socket and grid plug
– Heater switch S34 for switching between internal power supply or external
power supply to the heater

If the protective cover of the external socket is open, moisture may enter and
cause damage to the device.
Always close the protective cover after the connecting cable has been re-
moved.

Figure 48: External socket for emergency heating (optional)
4.4.1.11 Insulated mounting (optional)

The control cabinet is equipped with an adapter bracket for insulated mounting.
Figure 49: Overview
1 Control cabinet 2 Adapter bracket

Insulated grounding bar (optional)
In accordance with your order, the control cabinet is equipped with up to two in-
sulated grounding bars. The grounding bars are not electrically connected to
the housing and they are also not electrically connected to each other.
Figure 50: Grounding bars
1 Grounding bars
When designing your system, you must ensure that the effectiveness of
i the electromagnetic compatibility measures is not impaired by the insu-
lated mounting. Observe the Notes on electromagnetic compatibility for
the product.
4.4.1.12 Isolated power supply for the ISM® controller (optional)

The isolated power supply available as an option for the ISM® controller in-
creases the operational safety of the device. It enables you, for example, to con-
nect the device controller to an uninterruptible power supply so that messages
can be received in the control room even in the event of a power failure.
To ensure correct connection, observe the connection diagram supplied and

the technical data [►Section 12.4, Page 493] of the power supply for the ISM®
assemblies.
4.4.1.13 Additional Ethernet interface (optional)

As an option, the control cabinet is equipped with an additional Ethernet inter-
face (RJ45) in the operating panel. This interface allows you to connect with the
device visualization system on site without having to open the swing frame or
the cover.
Observe the supplied connection diagram and the section Establishing connec-
tion to visualization [►Section 7.2.1, Page 150].

4.4.2 Gear motor (versions)
The gear motor is on the head of the on-load tap-changer. It is connected di-
rectly to the drive shaft of the on-load tap-changer and carries out the on-load
tap change operation. The gear motor is delivered pre-installed with the on-load
tap-changer and does not normally have to be uninstalled. The gear motor is
available in the following versions:
Figure 51: Gear motor
Figure 52: Gear motor

4.4.3 Sensors
4.4.3.1 Vibroacoustics
4.4.3.1.1 VS 1 sensor assembly
Figure 53: VAM sensor assembly
1 Sensor cable 2 Kick guard
3 Vibration sensor 4 Adapter
4.4.3.2 Ambient temperature sensor (optional)

As an option, the device is equipped with a temperature sensor for recording
the ambient temperature. The temperature sensor is on the right-hand side of
the protective housing.
Ensure that there is sufficient circulation of the ambient air around the tem-
i perature sensor. Otherwise, there may be errors in torque monitoring.

1
Figure 54: Ambient temperature sensor (side drive)
1 Ambient temperature sensor
Figure 55: Ambient temperature sensor (top drive)
1 Ambient temperature sensor
4.4.3.3 Bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit

The bushing adapter is used to pick up the measured voltage at the bushing
test tap. The downstream bushing coupling unit is used to adjust the measured
voltage. Both components are tuned to the bushings to be monitored in accor-
dance with your order. They may be used only for those bushings.
The following components are used:

– Bushing adapter A001...A010 [►Section 12.3.2.1, Page 488]
– Bushing coupling unit C002

4.4.3.4 Motor-drive unit active power measurement (option)
The device can be equipped with an optional assembly for measuring the active
power of the motor-drive unit. This assembly transmits the active power to the
device as an analog signal (4…20 mA).
The device can transmit the measured active power via the control system.
Moreover, the device triggers an event message if the analog signal is not
within the permissible range (4…20 mA).
4.4.3.5 MSENSE® FO winding temperature measurement

As an option, the device is equipped with a fiber-optic MSENSE® FO thermome-
ter for recording the winding temperature. Observe the supplied
MSENSE® FO ECU-I, -S device installation and operating instructions. The
MSENSE® FO ECU-I control unit is already integrated in the control cabinet.
4.4.4 Nameplate
The nameplate is in the control cabinet.
Figure 56: Nameplate in the control cabinet (side drive)
1 Nameplate

1
Figure 57: Nameplate in the control cabinet (top drive)
1 Nameplate

4.5 Visualization
4.5.1 Main screen
The web-based visualization is split into various areas.
Figure 58: Main screen
1 Display area 2 Secondary navigation
3 Primary navigation 4 Status bar
The most important measured values of the transformer are displayed on the
main screen. The individual status displays of the transformer shown can be se-
lected directly when accessing them via the web browser. They act as links to
the corresponding menu items. If you are operating the device via the front
panel, you are only able to call up the elements via the Information menu.
If the device does not have one of the optional functions, this will be indi-
i cated in the main screen via a small padlock .
Depending on the device configuration, the main screen displays the schematic
representation of a transformer for network applications or a transformer for in-
dustrial applications.

4.5.1.1 Transformer for network applications
Figure 59: Transformer data
1 DGA (status) 2 Top-oil temperature
3 Hot-spot temperature 4 Cooling system (status)
5 Load current and load voltage of 6 Transformer name

phases L1, L2, L3
For three-winding transformer or HV/
LV regulation: Measured values of the
regulated winding
Figure 60: Apparent power, oil level, and ambient temperature
1 Asset Intelligence 2 Total apparent power

For three-winding transformer or HV/
LV regulation: Measured value of the
regulated winding
3 Ambient temperature 4 Oil level (transformer on left, on-load

tap-changer on right)

Figure 61: On-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit
1 OLTC oil temperature 2 Current tap position, status of the

motor-drive unit
3 Voltage regulator 4 Tap-change operation statistics, VAM
5 OLTC status message (collective 6 Oil filter unit status message

message)
4.5.1.2 Transformer for industrial applications
1 DGA (status) 2 Top-oil temperature
3 Hot-spot temperature 4 Cooling system (status)
5 Load current an load voltage of the 6 Transformer name

phases L1, L2, L3 (high-voltage side)

Figure 63: Apparent power, oil level, and ambient temperature
1 Asset intelligence 2 Total apparent power
3 Ambient temperature 4 Oil level (transformer on left, on-load

tap-changer on right)
1 OLTC oil temperature 2 Current tap position
3 Voltage regulator 4 Tap-change operation statistics
5 OLTC status message (collective

message)
4.5.2 Operating concept
You can operate the device using the web-based ISM™ Intuitive Control Inter-
face visualization via a PC.
User rights and user roles

The device is equipped with a rights system and a roles system. The display and
access rights to device settings or events can therefore be controlled at the user
level.
You can configure the rights system and roles system to meet your require-
ments. You will find more information on user rights and user roles in the User
administration [►Section 8.1.24, Page 226] section.

You can only modify the device settings or parameters if you have the nec-
i essary user rights.
Logging on, logging off and changing users

The control of access rights to device settings and parameters is user-based.
Various users can log in at the same time (e.g. via the visualization) and access
the device.
To log in as a user, proceed as follows:

1. Select the LOGIN or CHANGE button in the status line.
2. Enter your user name and password and select the Accept button.
The name of the logged-in user appears in the status line.
To log out as a user, proceed as follows:

Press the LOGOUT button in the status line.
Navigation
If you are operating the device using the web-based visualization, you can navi-
gate by clicking on the appropriate buttons.
Example To navigate to the "Date" parameter, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings.
2. Go to Parameters.
3. Go to System.
4. Go to Time synchronization.
5. Select Time.
In these operating instructions, the path for navigating to a parameter is always

shown in an abridged form: Go to Settings > Parameters >System > Time syn-
chronization > Time.
Parameter search
You can use the quick search function in the parameter menu to search for a
parameter. Enter the name of the desired parameter in the Search entry field.
Figure 65: Quick search

Expert mode
The device has an expert mode for entering the parameters. You can enter the
parameters directly on the overview screen of the respective menu in this
mode.
Figure 66: Expert mode
To activate the expert mode, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters.
2. Select the Expert mode checkbox.
Expert mode is active.
Hiding/showing parameters
Depending on how you set the parameters, the device will hide or show addi-
tional parameters related to this function.

4.5.3 MControl touch panel (optional)
4.5.3.1 Additional display elements and operating controls

If you are using the device with the optionally available MControl touch panel,
additional operating controls and display elements are displayed on the left
edge of the screen. Depending on the device configuration, a variety of keys are
available.
Figure 67: Additional display elements and operating controls
Status LED status Status display
12 REMOTE key Select the operating mode:

– On: REMOTE
– Off: LOCAL
13 AVR AUTO key Activate auto mode.
13 RAISE key Send a control command to the motor-drive unit

to increase the voltage. Only possible in manual
mode.
13 AVR Manual key Activate manual mode.
13 LOWER key Send a control command to the motor-drive unit

to reduce the voltage. Only possible in manual
mode.
14 RAISE MDU key Send a control command to the motor-drive unit

to raise the tap position. Only possible in remote
mode.
LED lights up as long as a signal is present at in-
put I: Raise.
14 LOWER MDU key Send a control command to the motor-drive unit

to lower the tap position. Only possible in re-
mote mode.
LED lights up as long as a signal is present at in-
put I: Lower.
12 Not available if local/remote is toggled using a digital input.

13 Only available if the device is equipped with the "On-load tap-changer control" option.
14 Only available if the device is equipped with the "motor-drive unit" (ED or TD single-column) option.

4.5.3.2 Operation
The device is equipped with a capacitive touch panel (MControl 10"). You can
operate the device with your bare fingers but not when wearing gloves.
Figure 68: Operation
Calling up the configuration menu

To call up the configuration menu, you have to press any part of the display for
longer than three seconds.
Figure 69: Calling up the configuration menu
You must enter the administrator password to be able to change settings. You
will be logged out automatically upon leaving the menu or after ten minutes of
inactivity.
You will find more information in the section "Configuring the touch panel
[►Section 8.1.32, Page 259]".

On-screen keyboard
An on-screen keyboard is available for entering text and values.
Figure 70: On-screen keyboard
Toggle between letters and numbers/characters

,
Display further characters
Select keyboard language
Hide keyboard
Table 23: Additional functions
In order to enter special characters, press and hold the respective letter until a
selection dialog appears. Be aware that, depending on the selected keyboard
language, some special characters may not be available to you.
Figure 71: Special characters

5 Packaging, transport and
storage
5.1 Packaging
The products are sometimes supplied with sealed packaging and sometimes in
a dry state, depending on requirements.
Sealed packaging surrounds the packaged goods with plastic foil on all sides.
Products that have also been dried are identified by a yellow label on the sealed
packaging. In the dry state, delivery is also possible in a transport container.
The information in the following sections should be applied as appropriate.
5.1.1 Suitability
NOTICE Property damage due to incorrectly stacked crates!

Stacking the crates incorrectly can lead to damage to the packaged goods.
The outer marking on the packaging states if, for example, the on-load tap-
changer or selector has been packed upright. Never stack these crates.
General rule: Do not stack crates above a height of 1.5 m.
For other crates: Only stack up to 2 equally sized crates on top of one an-
other.
The packaging is suitable to ensure undamaged and fully functional means of

transportation in compliance with local transportation laws and regulations.
The packaged goods are packed in a sturdy crate. This crate ensures that, when
in the intended transportation position, the packaged goods are stabilized to
prevent impermissible changes in position, and that none of the parts touch the
loading surface of the means of transport or touch the ground after unloading.
Sealed packaging surrounds the packaged goods with plastic foil on all sides.
The packaged goods are protected from humidity using a desiccant. The plastic
foil was bonded after the desiccant is added.
7815063/10 EN Packaging, transport and storage 75

5.1.2 Markings
The packaging bears a signature with instructions for safe transport and correct
storage. The following symbols apply to the shipment of non-hazardous goods.
Adherence to these symbols is mandatory.
Protect against Top Fragile Attach lifting Center of mass

moisture gear here
Table 24: Shipping pictograms
76 Packaging, transport and storage 7815063/10 EN

5.2 Transportation, receipt and handling of ship-
ments
WARNING Danger of death or severe injury!
Danger of death or serious injuries due to tipping or falling load.
Only transport the crate when closed.
Do not remove the securing material used in the crate during transport.
If the product is delivered on a pallet, secure it sufficiently.
Only trained and authorized persons may select the sling gear and secure
the load.
Do not walk under the suspended load.
Use means of transport and lifting gear with a sufficient carrying capacity in
accordance with the weight stated on the delivery slip.
In addition to oscillation stress, jolts must also be expected during transporta-

tion. In order to prevent possible damage, avoid dropping, tipping, knocking
over and colliding with the product.
If a crate tips over, falls from a certain height (e.g. when slings tear) or experi-
ences an unbroken fall, damage must be expected regardless of the weight.
Every delivered shipment must be checked for the following by the recipient be-
fore acceptance (acknowledgment of receipt):
– Completeness based on the delivery slip
– External damage of any type
The checks must take place after unloading when the crate or transport con-
tainer can be accessed from all sides.
Visible damage If external transport damage is found upon receipt of the shipment, proceed as
follows:
– Immediately record the identified transport damage in the shipping docu-
ments and have this countersigned by the carrier.
– In the event of severe damage, total loss or high damage costs, immediately
notify the manufacturer and the relevant insurance company.
– After identifying damage, do not modify the condition of the shipment fur-
ther and retain the packaging material until an inspection decision has been
made by the transport company or the insurance company.
– Record the details of the damage immediately on site together with the car-
rier involved. This is essential for any claim for damages.
– Photograph damage to packaging and packaged goods. This also applies to
signs of corrosion on the packaged goods due to moisture inside the packag-
ing (rain, snow, condensation).
– NOTICE! Damage to packaged goods due to damaged sealed packaging. If
the product is delivered in sealed packaging, check the sealed packaging im-
mediately. If the sealed packaging is damaged, do not under any circum-
stances install or commission the packaged goods. Either re-dry the dried
packaged goods as per the operating instructions, or contact the manufac-
turer to agree on how to proceed.
– Identify the damaged parts.
Hidden damage When damages are not determined until unpacking after receipt of the ship-
ment (hidden damage), proceed as follows:
– Make the party responsible for the damage liable as soon as possible by tele-
phone and in writing, and prepare a damage report.
– Observe the time periods applicable to such actions in the respective coun-
try. Inquire about these in good time.

With hidden damage, it is very hard to make the transportation company (or
other responsible party) liable. Any insurance claims for such damages can only
be successful if relevant provisions are expressly included in the insurance
terms and conditions.
5.3 Storage of shipments

Packaged goods dried by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
Upon receipt of the shipment, immediately remove the packaged goods dried
by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen from the sealed packaging and store air-tight in
dry insulating fluid until used if the packaged goods were not supplied in insu-
lating fluid.
Non-dried packaged goods

Non-dried packaged goods with functional sealed packaging can be stored out-
doors when the following conditions are complied with.
When selecting and setting up the storage location, ensure the following:
– Protect stored goods against moisture (flooding, water from melting snow
and ice), dirt, pests such as rats, mice, termites and so on, and against unau-
thorized access.
– Store the crates on timber beams and planks as a protection against rising
damp and for better ventilation.
– Ensure sufficient carrying capacity of the ground.
– Keep entrance paths free.
– Check stored goods at regular intervals. Also take appropriate action after
storms, heavy rain or snow and so on.
Protect the packaging foil from direct sunlight so that it does not disintegrate
under the influence of UV rays, which would cause the packaging to lose its
sealing function.
If the product is installed more than 6 months after delivery, suitable measures
must be taken without delay. The following measures can be used:
– Correctly regenerate the drying agent and restore the sealed packaging.
– Unpack the packed goods and store in a suitable storage space (well venti-
lated, as dust-free as possible, humidity < 50% where possible).
Storing the product in particularly low ambient temperatures

If you want to store the product in ambient temperatures lower than the per-
missible storage temperature [►Section 12.1.2, Page 484], you must ensure
that the internal heater is in continuous operation. To do so, connect the heater
to the power supply via the optional emergency heating plug device in the base-
board (terminal X29) [►Section 4.4.1.10, Page 58].

5.4 Unpacking shipments and checking for trans-
portation damages
– NOTICE! Transport the packaged crate to the place where the packaged
goods will be installed. Do not open the sealed packaging until just before in-
stallation. Otherwise, damage to the packaged goods may occur due to inef-
fectively sealed packaging.
– WARNING! When unpacking, check the condition of the packaged
goods. Place the packaged goods in an upright crate and protect them from
tipping out. Otherwise, the packaged goods may become damaged and seri-
ous injuries may result.
– Check the completeness of the accessories kit based on the delivery slip.
– NOTICE! Do not set the device down on the pressure equalization element
on the rear side. Otherwise the pressure equalization element may be dam-
aged.
Figure 72: Pressure equalization element on the rear of the device
1 Pressure equalization element
Attachment points for lifting gear

WARNING Danger of death and damage to property!
Danger of death and damage to property due to tipping or falling load!
the load.
accordance with the weight stated in the Technical data section.

– WARNING! Serious injuries and damage to the control cabinet due to
falling load. Use all 4 transport lugs or the 2 transport lugs on the side of the
door. Turn the transport lugs to face the lifting gear. Attach the lifting gear so
that the cable angle is always less than 45° in relation to the vertical.
Figure 73: Transport lugs for lifting gear
Figure 74: Maximum permissible cable angle for the lifting gear limit stop of the control cabi-
net
– WARNING! Serious injuries due to the control cabinet tipping and dam-
age to the cable gland if the control cabinet is set down, transported or
stored upright. Only set down, transport and store the control cabinet on its
back.
– Only remove the control cabinet from the crane once it has been fully con-
nected to the transformer.

6 Mounting
This chapter describes how to correctly mount and connect the device. Observe
the connection diagrams provided.
DANGER Electric shock!

Risk of fatal injury due to electrical voltage. Always observe the following
safety regulations when working in or on electrical equipment.
Disconnect the equipment.
Lock the equipment to prevent an unintentional restart.
Make sure all poles are de-energized.
Ground and short-circuit.
Cover or cordon off adjacent energized parts.

Dangerous high voltages may occur when a current transformer is operated
with an open secondary circuit. This can lead to death, injuries and property
damage.
Never operate a current transformer with an open secondary circuit; short-
circuit the current transformer to prevent this.
Observe the information in the current transformer operating instructions.
6.1 Lacquering the control cabinet (optional)

The control cabinet only needs to be lacquered if the control cabinet was pro-
cured without a lacquer coating or if the control cabinet lacquer coating is dam-
aged.
NOTICE Damage to the control cabinet due to lacquering

During lacquering, certain control cabinet components may become dam-
aged and/or have their function impaired.
Cover or mask these components prior to lacquering.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 81
The following components may not be lacquered:
Figure 75: Temperature sensor, ground connection and water drain in the base plate
1 Temperature sensor 2 Ground connection
3 Water drain
Figure 76: Pressure equalization element on the rear of the control cabinet
1 Pressure equalization element
82 Mounting 7815063/10 EN
6.2 Notes on installing several connected control
cabinets
Observe the following installation notes if your system consists of several con-
nected control cabinets. This will ensure trouble-free operation:
– Install the control cabinets as closely together as possible. The distance be-
tween the control cabinets must be less than 5 m.
– Take precautions to protect the connection cables between the control cabi-
nets from mechanical damage (e.g., protective tubes). Otherwise the con-
nection cables may become damaged.
– You must connect the grounding cable to both the control cabinet and the
transformer tank. If this is not possible, you must establish a direct grounding
connection between the control cabinets.
Figure 77: Installing several connected control cabinets
6.3 Mounting the control cabinet

the load.
The control cabinet has four fixing lugs on the rear to secure it.
1. Attach four stud bolts (not supplied by MR) to the transformer tank. Recom-
mended clearance between the control cabinet and floor is approx. 0.5…1 m.
Figure 78: Fastening the stud bolts
A Standard: 715 ± 2 mm B 750 ± 2 mm (29.53 ± 0.08 in)

(28.15 ± 0.08 in)
Rail profile: 760 ± 2 mm
(29.92 ± 0.08 in)
2. For control cabinets with vibration damper: Attach the inner brackets to the
control cabinet. Attach the outer brackets to the transformer wall. The com-
plete contact surfaces of the brackets must be in contact.
3. WARNING! Serious injuries and damage to the control cabinet due to
door. Attach the lifting gear so that the cable angle is always less than 45° in
relation to the vertical.
net
4. Use the fixing lugs to attach the control cabinet to the stud bolts and align it
vertically on the transformer tank.
Figure 81: Attaching the control cabinet
5. NOTICE! Damage to the control cabinet due to mechanical tension if the off-
set to the plane is greater than 5 mm. The offset must be compensated using
washers. Secure the control cabinet without subjecting it to mechanical ten-
sion.
Figure 82: Securing the drive
6. Connect the grounding cable to the control cabinet and transformer tank.
Figure 83: Connecting the grounding cable
6.4 Mounting the control cabinet (vibration-
damped design)
the load.
For vibration-damped mounting, you must use the supplied adapter bracket to
attach the control cabinet to the transformer tank.
door. Turn the transport lugs to face the lifting gear. Attach the lifting gear so
that the cable angle is always less than 45° in relation to the vertical.
net
2. Fasten both adapter brackets on the control cabinet.
Figure 86: Mounting the adapter bracket
1 Adapter bracket 2 Washer
3 Fixing screw
Figure 87: Fastening the stud bolts
A 715 ± 2 mm (28.15 ± 0.08 in) B 750 ± 0.25 mm (29.53 ± 0.01 in)
4. Push a thrust washer onto each stud bolt.
5. Attach the control cabinet with the adapter bracket to the stud bolts and
align it vertically on the transformer tank.
Figure 88: Fastening the control cabinet
1 Stud bolts 2 Thrust washer
3 Thrust washer 4 Nut
Figure 89: Aligning the control cabinet
sion.
7. Connect the grounding cable to the control cabinet and transformer tank.
Figure 90: Connecting the grounding cable
6.5 Mounting the control cabinet (insulated

mounting)
the load.

Risk of fatal injury due to electrical voltage during operation if you do not con-
nect the device to the protective ground.
Connect the device to a protective conductor.
For insulated mounting, you must use the supplied adapter bracket to attach
the control cabinet to the transformer tank.
net
2. Fasten both adapter brackets on the control cabinet. When doing this, en-
sure that the washers and bolting are arranged as shown in the following.
Otherwise, the insulation cannot be guaranteed.
Figure 93: Mounting the adapter bracket
1 Washer (steel, Ø 40 mm) 2 Insulating disk (plastic, Ø 40 mm)
3 Insulating sleeve (plastic) 4 Insulating disk (plastic, Ø 40 mm)
5 Washer (steel, Ø 40 mm) 6 Locking washer (steel, Ø 32.5 mm)
A 715 ± 2 mm (28.15 ± 0.08 in) B 750 ± 2 mm (29.53 ± 0.08 in)
4. Attach the control cabinet with the adapter bracket to the stud bolts and
align it vertically on the transformer tank. While doing so, use the spacing
sleeves to ensure that a distance of at least 5 mm is maintained between the
fixing screw of the control cabinet and the transformer tank.
Figure 94: Attaching the control cabinet
sion.
Figure 95: Fastening the control cabinet
6. Connect the grounding cable to the control cabinet and attach it to the
equipotential bonding of the system.
Figure 96: Connecting the grounding cable to the control cabinet
7. Connect the insulated grounding bar in the control cabinet to the equipoten-
tial bonding of the system.
Figure 97: Connecting the insulated grounding bar to the equipotential bonding of the sys-
tem
6.6 Mounting the lock cylinder

You can install a lock cylinder in the control cabinet door to protect the control
cabinet against unauthorized operation. If you want to do this, use a lock cylin-
der of the half euro profile cylinder type with a size of 35/10 mm.
If you are operating the control cabinet in an environment subject to high
i corrosion effects, you must ensure that your lock cylinder meets the re-
quirements on corrosion resistance. Otherwise the corrosion protection of
the control cabinet may be impaired.
To install the lock cylinder, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the door handle upward.
Figure 98: Pulling the door handle upward
2. Loosen the fixing screw and remove the plastic insert.
Figure 99: Removing the plastic insert
3. Insert the lock cylinder and fasten using the fixing screw.
Figure 100: Mounting the lock cylinder
6.7 Adjusting the installation height of the MCon-
trol touch panel
You can adjust the installation height of the optional MControl touch panel in
accordance with your requirements. Please note the length of the supply line
and the Ethernet cable if you want to move the MControl touch panel down-
wards.
Figure 101: Possible positions of the MControl touch panel
1. Remove 4 fixing screws from the display bracket.
Figure 102: Removing the fixing screws
2. If necessary, remove the grounding cable on the control cabinet door.
Figure 103: Removing the grounding cable on the control cabinet door (optional)
3. NOTICE! Affix the display bracket to the interior side of the control cabinet
door at the desired height. When doing so, ensure that the touch panel does
not collide with other components in the control cabinet when the door is
closed. Failure to do so may result in damage to the touch panel.
Figure 104: Affixing the display bracket
4. If the grounding cable was removed earlier: Connect the grounding cable on
the touch panel to the control cabinet door.
Figure 105: Connecting the functional ground
6.8 Removing cover plate
1. Loosen the screws with a ¼ turn and carefully remove the upper cover.
Figure 106: Loosening the screws and removing the upper cover
2. Loosen the grounding cable and completely remove the upper cover.
6.9 Motor-drive unit
6.9.1 Mounting drive shafts and bevel gear
The process of mounting the drive shafts and bevel gear is described in the in-
stallation and commissioning instructions for the on-load tap-changer / de-en-
ergized tap-changer.
6.9.2 Centering on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit

Danger of death or severe injury due to motor-drive unit starting up by acci-
dent and due to electric voltage!
Before starting any coupling work make sure that the motor protective
switch is tripped.
Carry out any adjustment work in manual mode only.
When manually operating the motor-drive unit only use the hand crank
provided for this purpose.
Note that the hand crank safety switch causes a 2-pole disconnection of
the motor circuit but that the control circuit is not interrupted.
NOTICE Damage to property!

The on-load tap-changer will be damaged by incorrectly centering the motor-
drive unit.
Do not perform more than 250 tap-change operations on the on-load tap-
changer. If more than 250 tap-change operations are performed, com-
pletely fill oil compartment with insulating oil and lubricate sliding surfaces
of contacts on selector and selector gear with insulating oil.
The following steps for centering the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive
i unit do not apply to the DEETAP® DU or COMTAP® ARS devices. The
process for centering the motor-drive unit and DEETAP® DU or COM-
TAP® ARS devices is described in the relevant operating instructions.
One on-load tap-change operation is represented by one rotation of the tap-

change indicator. This indicator is divided into 33 tap-change indicator sections,
each of which corresponds to one hand crank revolution in the standard motor-
drive unit design. The time of the switchover depends on the on-load tap-
changer / de-energized tap-changer type, but is always 2 tap-change indicator
sections upstream of the area marked in gray on the tap-change indicator at the
latest.
To center the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit, proceed as follows.

1. NOTICE! Move the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer and the
motor-drive unit into the adjustment position before commencing any ad-
justment work. Ensure that the tap position indicators for the motor-drive
unit and the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer match. Other-
wise damage to the on-load tap-changer and transformer may result.
Figure 107: Adjustment position
2. Attach the hand crank in the motor-drive unit to the shaft end located in the
upper cover plate. By doing so, the hand crank safety switch that triggers the
motor protective switch is actuated.
Figure 108: Hand crank
3. Turn the hand crank clockwise until the diverter switch operation begins.
When turning the hand crank, observe the tap-change indicator, which me-
chanically reflects the progress of the tap-change operation.
Figure 109: Turning the hand crank
100 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

4. Once the diverter switch operation begins, continue to turn in the same di-
rection while counting the tap-change indicator sections required for the
pointer to reach the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-
change indicator. Note the number counted (value A) and the direction of ro-
tation (example: A=2).
Figure 110: Counting the tap changes needed to reach the mid-position
5. If value A is greater than 8 tap-change indicator sections, the tap-change op-

eration has been completed correctly. If value A is less than 8 tap-change in-
dicator sections, turn another 8-A tap-change indicator sections in the same
direction (example: 8-2=6) to complete the tap-change operation. Then turn
in the opposite direction until the pointer is in the mid-position of the area
marked in gray on the tap-change indicator.
Figure 111: Completing the diverter switch operation
7815063/10 EN Mounting 101

6. Turn the hand crank counter-clockwise until the diverter switch operation be-
gins.
Figure 112: Turning the hand crank in the opposite direction
7. Once the diverter switch operation begins, continue to turn in the same di-
rection while counting the tap-change indicator sections required for the
pointer to reach the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-
change indicator. Note the number counted (value B) and the direction of ro-
tation (example: B=5).
Figure 113: Counting the tap-change indicator sections needed to reach the mid-position
8. If value B is greater than 8 tap-change indicator sections, the tap-change op-

eration has been completed correctly. If value B is less than 8 tap-change in-
dicator sections, turn another 8 B tap-change indicator sections in the same
102 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

direction (example: 8-5=3) to complete the tap-change operation. Then turn
in the opposite direction until the pointer is in the mid-position of the area
marked in gray on the tap-change indicator.
Figure 114: Completing the diverter switch operation
9. If the values obtained for A and B are identical, the on-load tap-changer and
the motor-drive unit are correctly coupled (a slight imbalance of maximum 1
tap-change indicator section is permitted). If the values obtained for A and B
are different, establish correction value C by halving the difference between
A and B: C=|(A-B) x 0.5|
Example: C=|(2-5) x 0.5|=|-1.5|=1.5
Also take numbers after the decimal point into account.

i
10. If the correction value |C| is less than 0.5 tap-change indicator sections, no
further action is required. Refer to item 18 for how to proceed next.
11. Use the hand crank to crank in the direction in which the determined value
A or B was higher (example: counter-clockwise, because B > A) until the di-
verter switch operation begins.
12. Once the diverter switch operation begins, continue turning another 8 hand
crank revolutions in the same direction to correctly complete the diverter
switch operation.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 103

13. Uncouple the motor-drive unit and vertical drive shaft by removing the cou-
pling brackets. After uncoupling, do not turn the drive shaft any further.
Figure 115: Uncoupling the motor-drive unit and drive shaft
14. Operate the motor-drive unit using the hand crank in the same direction,
continuing by C tap-change indicator sections on the tap-change indicator
(example: 1.5 tap-change indicator sections).
15. Couple the motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer by refitting the verti-
cal drive shaft (tightening torque 9 Nm). Do not turn the drive shaft or out-
put shaft of the bevel gear or motor-drive unit any further.
16. Continue to turn in the same direction while counting the tap-change indi-
cator sections required for the pointer to reach the mid-position of the area
marked in gray on the tap-change indicator. Note the number counted
(value A) and the direction of rotation. If value A is greater than 8 tap-
change indicator sections, the tap-change operation has been completed
correctly. If value A is less than 8 tap-change indicator sections, turn an-
other 8 A tap-change indicator sections in the same direction (example:
8-4=4) to complete the tap-change operation. Then turn in the opposite di-
rection until the indicator is in the mid-position of the area marked in gray
on the tap-change indicator. Check the coupling again as described previ-
ously.
104 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

17. The pointer of the tap-change indicator must be in the mid-position of the
area marked in gray once the on-load tap-change operation with the hand
crank is complete.
Figure 116: Pointer in the mid-position
18. Once coupling is complete in both directions, check by carrying out several
on-load tap-change operations and check that the on-load tap-changer and
motor-drive unit are in the same tap position.
6.9.3 Connecting the gear motor
NOTICE Damage to the connecting cable!

Damage to the connecting cable due to impermissibly small bending radii and
kinks.
When routing the connection cable, observe the minimum bending ra-
diuses: min. 51 mm for fixed routing, min. 170 mm if moved occasionally.
When routing the connection cable, make sure that the maximum permit-
ted cable jacket temperature of 80°C is not exceeded during operation.
To connect the gear motor, proceed as follows:

The control cabinet is installed at the desired location.
Use only the specified cables for wiring. Note cable recommendation.
1. Remove and dispose of the transport protective cap for the plug connector
of the gear motor.
2. Connect the connection cable provided to the plug connector of the gear
motor. Connect the other end of the connection cable to the terminal in the
control cabinet in accordance with the connection diagram provided.
Figure 117: Connecting the connection cable to the gear motor
7815063/10 EN Mounting 105

3. Connect the earthing cable to the ground connection of the gear motor and
connect it to the ground connection on the on-load tap-changer head or
transformer.
Figure 118: Connection of the earthing cable on the earthing bar of the gear motor
1 Grounding bar
4. Place the cable shield on the earthing bar of the control cabinet using the
clamping bracket.
Figure 119: Placing the cable shield with clamping bracket on the earthing bar
5. Optional with torque monitoring: Connect the rotary encoder connection ca-
ble to the terminal in the control cabinet in accordance with the connection
diagram provided.
6. Connect the shield of the connection cable (rotary encoder) provided using
shielded clamps to the grounding bar in the control cabinet.
106 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

6.10 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-
changer (VAM)
6.10.1 Mounting the vibration sensor
When selecting the mounting position, ensure that there is the greatest
i possible clearance to the drive motor, drive shafts and pipelines to reduce
the disruptive effect on the vibro-acoustic recording to a minimum.
To mount the VAM sensor, proceed as follows:

1. Remove one bolt from the on-load tap-changer cover. Reuse the washer that
is present.
Figure 120: Removing bolt
7815063/10 EN Mounting 107

2. NOTICE! Incorrect mounting can destroy the vibration sensor. Only apply a
tool with wrench size 17 to the lower hexagon of the adapter to attach the
sensor assembly. Place the washer over the open tapped hole and screw in
the sensor assembly (vibration sensor with adapter and kick guard) with a
torque of 34 Nm.
Figure 121: Mounting the vibration sensor
6.10.2 Connecting the vibration sensor to the control cabinet
Depending on the application, one or more vibration sensors are included in the
scope of delivery. Repeat the following steps for a multi-column application.
You must connect the vibration sensor to the control cabinet using the sensor
cable provided. Note the following information when routing the sensor cable:
– Route the sensor cable with as much shielding as possible on the trans-
former (e.g. in the tube or cable duct) and along a conductive grounded sur-
face that runs without interruption.
– Route sensor cables separately from supply lines and do not create any un-
necessary loops.
– The vibration sensor cable can also be routed together with the temperature
sensor cable in a protective tube.
– On the control cabinet, it is advantageous to have routing parallel to the
earthing cable that connects the transformer and the control cabinet to-
gether.
108 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

To route the sensor cable, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the vibration sensor cover cap.
Figure 122: Vibration sensor cover cap
2. Ensure that the sensor cable plug and the socket on the sensor are dry and
free of dirt. If this is not the case, clean and dry them with a cloth.
3. Plug in the sensor cable plug and screw it in by hand.
Figure 123: Plugging in the sensor cable
4. Route the sensor cable on the transformer to the control cabinet with shield-
ing to prevent mechanical damage and interference.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 109

5. Shorten the sensor cable to the desired length. Loops or coil windings of an
excessive length are not permitted when routing the cable.
Figure 124: Sensor cable routing
1 Temperature sensor cable 2 Control cabinet
3 Vibration sensor cable 4 Transformer
5 On-load tap-changer head cover
If the control cabinet is farther away, extend the sensor cable with a
i shielded cable in the motor drive cabinet or in a metal intermediate termi-
nal box.
Follow the information in the Cable recommendation section and imple-
ment continuous shielding.
110 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

For the control cabinet connection, proceed as follows:
1. Place the cable shield on the earthing bar of the control cabinet using the
clamping bracket.
Figure 125: Placing the cable shield with clamping bracket on the earthing bar
2. Connect the sensor cable in accordance with the connection diagram pro-
vided (blue = signal, brown = signal ground, black = ground in control cabi-
net).
6.10.3 Connecting the temperature sensor
Depending on the application, one or more temperature sensors are included in

the scope of delivery. When making the connection, follow the connection dia-
gram on the associated dimensional drawing. Make the connection to the con-
trol cabinet in accordance with the connection diagram provided for the moni-
toring system.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 111

6.11 Bushing monitoring
6.11.1 Preparation
Before installation, check that the serial numbers of the bushing adapter and
bushing coupling unit match those on the delivery slip and are appropriate for
the bushing you have specified. Perform a plausibility check before starting the
bushing coupling unit installation.
WARNING Time delayed explosion hazard and fire hazard!

Installing a bushing coupling unit with an incorrect capacitance value can
cause a malfunction and failure of the protective device. As a result, overheat-
ing occurs, posing a risk of explosion and serious injury.
Perform a plausibility check in accordance with the following description.
Proceed with installation and commissioning only if the target range of the
measured voltage is maintained. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer and
replace the bushing coupling unit.
Plausibility check
Calculation equation:
Ur C1
U out = ×
3 C BCU
Uout Measured voltage (output of bushing Ur Nominal voltage of transformer

coupling unit)
C1 Main capacitance of the bushing CBCU Capacitance of bushing coupling unit
Target range:
– UI5-3 assembly: 55 V ≤ Uout ≤ 100 V
– U 3 assembly: 25 V ≤ Uout ≤ 125 V
Procedure:
1. Check fields 1 and 2 separately to see if the respective capacitance value of
the bushing coupling unit is correct.
2. Calculate the measured voltage at the bushing coupling unit output:
3. Compare the calculated value for Uout with the target range.
4. If the calculated value is outside the target range, replace the bushing cou-
pling unit.
5. Proceed with assembly only if the bushing coupling unit is designed cor-
rectly. If in doubt, contact MR.
6.11.2 Installing the bushing adapter
Carry out the operating steps listed below on all bushings.

i
1. Remove the safety cap for the bushing test tap. Store the safety cap (and,
where applicable, the built-in spring, see "Bushing adapter without pin con-
nection") in a safe place for possible operation of the bushing later without
the monitoring system.
2. Ensure that the test tap and the bushing adapter are dry and free of dirt. If
this is not the case, clean and dry them with a cloth.
112 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

3. Ensure that the sealing ring of the bushing adapter is present and positioned
correctly.
Figure 126: Checking the sealing ring (example illustration bushing adapter A001 and A002)
Bushing adapter with pin connection

– With bushing adapters with a pin port, visually check that the pin of the test
tap fits mechanically into the port of the bushing adapter.
Figure 127: Checking the connection (example illustration bushing adapter A001 and A002)
7815063/10 EN Mounting 113

Bushing adapter without pin connection
– If a spring is supplied with the bushing adapter, use the supplied spring and
safely store the spring installed on the test tap.
Figure 128: Test tap with spring
– If a spring is not supplied with the bushing adapter, use the spring installed
on the test tap.
– With the bushing adapter A008, a flat connection is made and no spring is
used. Safely store the spring installed on the test tap.
NOTICE! Install the bushing adapter at the bushing test tap. Compare the
following reference values for the tightening torque with the specifications of
the bushing manufacturer and consult them if necessary. Otherwise, leakage
or damage to the bushing may occur.
Figure 129: Installing the bushing adapter (example using bushing adapter A002)
Type Tightening torque reference value
A001 6 ± 2 Nm
A002 30 Nm
A003 50 Nm
A004 10 Nm
A005 25 Nm
A006 160 Nm
114 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

Type Tightening torque reference value
A007 35 Nm
A008 5 ± 1 Nm
A010 40 Nm
Table 25: Tightening torque reference values
6.11.3 Installing the bushing coupling unit
Observe the notes regarding the plausibility check [►Section 6.11.1, Page 112].
You can also use your own supporting plate instead of the provided sup-
i porting plate. In this case, you must ensure that the bushing coupling unit
is continuously connected to the transformer tank by a low-resistance con-
nection (e.g. via lock washers under the screw heads of the M4 fixing
screws). The necessary dimensions for the holes can be found in the tech-
nical data for the bushing coupling unit [►Section 12.3.2.2, Page 491].
Carry out the operating steps listed below on all bushings.

i
Install the bushing coupling unit onto the bushing flange near the bushing
adapter.
1. Unscrew the cover bolts for the bushing coupling unit and lift off the cover.
Figure 130: Loosening the screws and removing the cover
7815063/10 EN Mounting 115

2. Align the supporting plate so that the grounding symbol is still clearly visible
after installation. Insert Allen screws with lock washers into the intended
holes and fasten the supporting plate on the other side with lock washers
and nuts.
Figure 131: Fastening the bushing coupling unit to the supporting plate
3. Place the cover on the bushing coupling unit and screw it in place.
Figure 132: Fastening the cover
4. Unscrew the fixing screw for the bushing flange.

5. Install the supporting plate on the bushing flange.
Figure 133: Installing the supporting plate on the bushing flange
116 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

6. Connect the earthing cable to the supporting plate and transformer.
Figure 134: Connecting the earthing cable
6.11.4 Connecting the bushing adapter to the bushing coupling unit
The bushing adapter must be connected to the bushing coupling unit with the
connection cable provided. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the N female connector safety cap from the bushing adapter.
2. Ensure that the plug of the connection cable and the connections of the
bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit are dry and free of dirt. If this is
not the case, clean and dry them with a cloth.
3. Attach the connection cable plug to the bushing adapter and screw it in
place. Details on the thread can be found in the technical data.
Figure 135: Connecting the connection cable to the bushing adapter
7815063/10 EN Mounting 117

4. Attach the connection cable plug to the bushing coupling unit and screw it in
place.
Figure 136: Connecting the connection cable to the bushing coupling unit
6.11.5 Connecting the bushing coupling unit to the control cabinet
The bushing coupling unit must be connected to the control cabinet with the
connection cable provided. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the safety cap from the U connection of the bushing coupling unit.
2. Ensure that the plug of the connection cable and the U connection of the
bushing coupling unit are dry and free of dirt. If this is not the case, clean and
dry them with a cloth.
3. Attach the connection cable plug to the U connection of the bushing cou-
pling unit and screw it in place.
Figure 137: Connecting the connection cable to the bushing coupling unit
118 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

4. NOTICE! Laying the connection cable on the transformer to the control cabi-
net. While doing so, maintain the minimum permissible bending radius of
50 mm and take precautions to protect the cable from mechanical damage
(e.g. protective tube). Otherwise, the connection cable may become dam-
aged.
Figure 138: Laying the connection cable to the control cabinet
5. Shorten the connection cable to the desired length.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 119

Connecting the connection cable in the control cabinet
The connection cable must be connected to the terminal in the control cabinet
in accordance with the connection diagram. You must place the cable shield on
the grounding bar using the clamping bracket. To avoid interference caused by
electromagnetic coupling, do not lay the connecting cable together with lines
that are subject to interference (e.g., supply lines).
1. Place the cable shield on the grounding bar of the control cabinet using the
clamping bracket.
Figure 139: Placing the cable shield with clamping bracket on the grounding bar
2. Connect the connection cable to the measuring card as shown in the connec-
tion diagram. When doing so, ensure that you do not mismatch the phases,
otherwise the correct bushing monitoring function may not operate cor-
rectly.
6.11.6 Connecting the voltage transformers for the reference sys-

tem
NOTICE Damage to the device!

If the voltage transformer and device have different potentials, current may
flow across the shielding. This current may damage the device.
Connect the devices to a potential equalization rail to equalize the poten-
tial.
If both devices have different potentials, only connect the cable's shielding
to one device.
To connect the voltage transformers for the reference system, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the cable insulation.
Figure 140: Removing the cable insulation
120 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

2. Connect the voltage transformers in accordance with the connection dia-
gram. When doing so, ensure that you do not mismatch the phases, other-
wise the correct bushing monitoring function may not operate correctly.
UI
L1 L2 L3 N
VT VT VT
L1
L2
L3
Figure 141: Connecting the voltage transformers for the reference system
3. Place the cable shield on the grounding bar of the control cabinet using the
clamping bracket.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 121

6.12 Connecting the control cabinet
Current flow through the shielding of signal lines can cause the device to be-
come damaged.
Use potential equalization to ensure that the control cabinet and trans-
former are on the same potential and connect the shielding of the signal
lines on both ends.
If potential equalization cannot be assured, only connect the shielding of
the signal lines in the control cabinet. In this case, the effectiveness of the
shielding against interference is reduced.
To connect the control cabinet, proceed as follows:

Observe information in the following chapters.
Observe the connection diagrams in the document pouch.
1. Connect the signal lines in accordance with the connection diagram.
2. Connect the power supply in accordance with the connection diagram.
6.12.1 Cable recommendation
Please note the following recommendation when wiring the device:

– Electromagnetic interference on signal lines, which can be expected due to
the transformer's surroundings, can disrupt the proper operation of the de-
vice.
– Where possible, route signal lines with shielding.
– Excessive line capacitance can prevent the relay contacts from interrupting
the contact current. In control circuits operated with alternating current, take
into account the effect of the line capacitance of long control cables on the
function of the relay contacts.
– If you want to route Ethernet connections from a control cabinet or building,
we recommend using fiber-optic cables (in accordance with the
IEC 61850-90-4 recommendation). If use of fiber-optic cables is not possible,
you must ensure that the cable shield is placed in the control cabinet (e.g. on
the grounding bar or using a network socket for cap rail installation).
– Ensure that the copper cables used have a temperature resistance of 70 °C.
Cable Assembly Cable type Conductor cross- Conductor Max. length

section material
Voltage measurement UI 1, UI 3, UI 5-4 Shielded 2.5 mm² Copper -
Current measurement UI 1, UI 3, UI 5-4 Unshielded 4 mm² Copper -
Voltage measurement U3 Shielded 2.5 mm² Copper -
Current measurement I3 Unshielded 2.5 mm² Copper -

2
Signal inputs DIO 28-15, Shielded 1.5 mm Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
DIO 42-20
Signal outputs DIO 28-15, Shielded 1.5 mm2 Copper -

DIO 42-20
Signal inputs DI 16 Shielded 1.5 mm2 Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
Signal outputs DO 8 Shielded 1.5 mm2 Copper -
Signal inputs AIO 2, AIO 4, AIO 8 Shielded 1 mm2 Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
Signal outputs AIO 2, AIO 4, AIO 8 Shielded 1 mm2 Copper -
122 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

section material
Signal inputs AI 4, AI 4-T Shielded 1 mm2 Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
Signal outputs AO 4 Shielded 1 mm2 Copper -
RS232, SUB-D CPU I, CPU II Shielded 0.25 mm2 - 25 m
RS485; SUB-D CPU I, CPU II Shielded 0.25 mm2 - 140 m
CAN bus CPU I Shielded 0.75 mm² - 2,000 m (total CAN

bus)
Ethernet RJ45 CPU I Min. CAT5, - - 100 m

shielded S/FTP
RS232, RJ45 CPU Shielded 0.25 mm2 - 2.5 m (internal)
RS485; RJ45 CPU Shielded 0.25 mm2 - 140 m
Ethernet RJ45 CPU Min. CAT5, - - 100 m

shielded S/FTP
Ethernet FO MC 2-2, SW 3-3 Duplex LC - - 2000 m

Multimode, OM3,
1310 nm
Ethernet RJ45 COM-ETH Min. CAT5, - - 100 m

shielded S/FTP
Table 26: Recommendation for connection cables
Circuit Function Type Materials
Motor circuit Power supply Unshielded, separate ca- Copper

ble
Control circuit Power supply Unshielded, separate ca- Copper

ble
Tap-change supervi- Shielded Copper

sory control
Pulse circuit, raise/ Shielded Copper

lower
Tripping circuit Q01- Shielded Copper

Off
Monitoring circuit Temperature sensor Shielded Copper
Signaling circuits Signal transmission Shielded Copper
Cross wiring between Power supply Unshielded, separate ca- Copper

motor-drive units ble
Tap-change supervi- Shielded Copper

sory control
Pulse circuit, raise/ Shielded Copper

lower
Tripping circuit Q01- Shielded Copper

Off
7815063/10 EN Mounting 123

section material
Temperature measurement OF100 Shielded 0.25...0.75 mm2 Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
Table 27: Connection cable recommendations, oil filter unit OF100
6.12.2 Cable bushing in the base plate of the control cabinet
Depending on the configuration, the product can be equipped with different

types of cable bushings in the base plate of the control cabinet. Observe the in-
structions described below for handling.
6.12.2.1 Base plate with Roxtec CF32 cable bushing

The base plate is equipped with a cable bushing of type Roxtec CF32.
Figure 143: Base plate with Roxtec CF32 cable bushing
1 Dummy plug 2 Terminal module
The following parts are included:

– Prepress tool for CF8/32
– Lubricant to grease the sealing module
– 14x sealing module CM 20w40 for two cables with a diameter of
3.5...16.5 mm
– 1x sealing module CM 40 10-32 for one cable with a diameter of
9.5...32.5 mm
– Installation instructions
You will find more information on handling the cable bushing on the manu-
i facturer website (www.roxtec.com).
To feed through the cable, proceed as follows. Also follow the included installa-
tion instructions.
1. Unscrew the nut and remove the terminal module.
2. Remove the required number of dummy plugs.
3. Clean the installation frame and then grease it with the lubricant.
4. Feed in the cable through the installation frame.
5. Remove the inserts of the sealing module so that the distance between the
two parts of the sealing module is 0.1...1 mm when the cable is inserted.
124 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

6. Grease the sealing module with the lubricant on all sides.
7. Mount both parts of the sealing module with the cable in the installation
frame. If there is more than one sealing module, start with the largest.
8. Press the sealing modules together with the prepress tool to then be able to
insert the terminal module.
9. Insert the terminal module.
10. Tighten the nut of the terminal module with a tightening torque of
8...12 Nm.
6.12.2.2 Base plate with metric cable glands

The base plate is equipped with holes for metric cable glands. The cable glands
are optionally included depending on your order. If you would like to use your
own cable glands, then follow the installation instructions of the cable gland
manufacturer.
Figure 144: Base plate with metric cable gland
1 3x M40 2 5x M32
3 20x M25 4 2x M20
Mounting your own cable bushings

Mount the cable bushings based on the instructions from the manufacturer.

Cable bushings made of metal may carry current in the event of a fault and
could cause an electric shock when touched. They must therefore be effec-
tively connected to the protective ground of the control cabinet.
Connect metal cable bushings to the control cabinet in an electrically con-
ductive manner. To do so, use toothed lock washers for the screw connec-
tion on the inside of the control cabinet or remove the paint on the inside
of the control cabinet around the hole.
Mounting cable bushings (optionally included)

NOTICE Property damage due to moisture penetrating the control cabi-
net!
If you use the pre-assembled cable glands in the base plate for the cable
bushing, the degree of protection of the control cabinet is no longer guaran-
teed. In this case, moisture may penetrate the control cabinet and cause dam-
age.
Only use metric cable glands with the required degree of protection for the
cable bushing.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 125

Note that the degree of protection of the control cabinet is reduced if the
i cable glands have a lower degree of protection than IP66. Information on
the degree of protection of the included cable glands can be found in the
corresponding dimensional drawing.
Nominal size Width across flat A Tightening torque x
Plastic Stainless steel
M20 25 6 Nm 8 Nm
M25 30 8 Nm 10 Nm
M32 36 10 Nm 20 Nm
M40 46 13 Nm 20 Nm
Table 28: Tightening torque for included intermediate supports and cap nuts
To feed through the cable, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the cable gland (rubber membrane) from the selected hole in the
base plate.
Figure 145: Removing the blank cover
2. Mount the intermediate supports and screw in with the tightening torque ac-
cording to the table mentioned above.
Figure 146: Mounting the intermediate supports
3. Thread the cap nut onto the cable.
126 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

4. Pull the cable through the bushing and the cap nut with the tightening
torque according to the table mentioned above.
Figure 147: Fastening the cable bushing
6.12.2.3 Base plate with flange opening FL21

The base plate is equipped with three flange openings of size FL21. The flange
openings are closed with blank covers in the delivery state. You can mount an
FL21 size cable bushing or insert your own cable glands in the blank covers.
Figure 148: Base plate with FL21 flange openings
1 Flange opening with blank cover
To feed through the cable, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the blank cover.
2. Insert cable bushing size FL21 or cable gland in blank cover.
3. Feed the cable through the cable bushing in accordance with the manufac-
turer's specifications.
4. Mount the cable bushing or the blank cover and tighten with a tightening
torque of 20 Nm.
6.12.3 Electromagnetic compatibility
The device has been developed in accordance with applicable EMC standards.
The device is a product for Environment A (industrial). The following points
must be noted in order to maintain the EMC standards.
6.12.3.1 Wiring requirement of installation site

Note the following when selecting the installation site:
– The system's overvoltage protection must be effective.
– The system's ground connection must comply with all technical regulations.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 127

– Separate system parts must be joined by a potential equalization.
– The device and its wiring must be at least 10 m away from circuit-breakers,
load disconnectors and busbars.
6.12.3.2 Wiring requirement of operating site

Note the following when wiring the operating site:
– Route the connecting leads in grounded metal cable ducts.
– Do not route lines which cause interference (e.g. power lines) and lines sus-
ceptible to interference (e.g. signal lines) in the same cable duct.
– Maintain a distance of more than 100 mm between lines which cause inter-
ference and those which are susceptible to interference.
Figure 149: Recommended wiring
1 Cable duct for lines causing interfer- 3 Cable duct for lines susceptible to in-
ence terference
2 Line causing interference (e.g. power 4 Line susceptible to interference (e.g.

line) signal line)
– Short-circuit and ground reserve lines.

– Never connect the device with a multi-wire collective pipe.
– For signal transmission, use shielded lines with individual conductors (outgo-
ing conductor / return conductor) twisted in pairs.
– Connect full surface of shielding (360º) to device or to a nearby grounding
bar.
Using single conductors may limit the effectiveness of the shielding. Con-
i nect close-fitting shielding to cover all areas.
128 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

Figure 150: Recommended connection of the shielding
1 Connection of the shielding via a sin- 2 Full-surface connection of the shield-

gle conductor ing
6.12.3.3 Wiring requirement in control cabinet

Note the following when wiring in the control cabinet:
– The control cabinet where the device will be installed must be prepared in ac-
cordance with EMC requirements:
– Functional division of the control cabinet (physical separation)
– Constant potential equalization (all metal parts are joined)
– Line routing in accordance with EMC requirements (separation of lines
which cause interference and those susceptible to interference)
– Optimum shielding (metal housing)
– Overvoltage protection (lightning protection)
– Collective grounding (main grounding rail)
– Cable bushings in accordance with EMC requirements
– Any contactor coils present must be interconnected
– The device's connection cables must be laid in close contact with the
grounded metal housing or in metallic cable ducts with a ground connection.
– Signal lines and supply lines / switching lines must be laid in separate cable
ducts.
Figure 151: Cable ducts and grounding bar in the control cabinet
1 Cable duct for supply cables and 2 Grounding bar

switching lines
3 Cable duct for signal lines
7815063/10 EN Mounting 129

6.12.4 Notes on the screw terminal tightening torque
NOTICE Damage to screw terminals!

Tightening the screws too tightly can damage the screw terminals.
When fastening the screw terminals, make sure that the tightening torque
is 0.4 Nm.
NOTICE Damage to screw terminals

Tightening the screws too tightly can damage the screw terminals.
When fastening the screw terminals, make sure that the tightening torque
is 0.5 Nm.
6.12.5 Information about connecting serial interfaces RS232 and

RS485 (with 9-pin data cable)

Using the wrong data cable may damage the device.
Only use data cables which comply with the description below.
RS232 (D-SUB 9-pin)

To connect the device via the RS232 interface (COM2), use a data cable with the
following structure:
Figure 152: RS232 data cable (9-pin)
130 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

RS485 (D-SUB 9-pin)
To connect the device via the RS485 interface (COM2), use a data cable with
the following structure:
Figure 153: RS485 data cable
D-SUB 9-pin plug connection

Only use 9-pin D-SUB plugs with the following characteristics:
– Plug housing is metallic or metal-plated
– Cable shielding is connected with the plug using one of the following two
variants:
– Shielding is screwed down with traction relief.
– Shielding is soldered to the plug housing.
Figure 154: Example of a soldered shielding on a plug housing
6.12.6 Notes on connecting to the MR sensor bus
The optionally available MR sensor bus function lets you connect digital and
analog sensors to the device over Modbus RTU. The MR sensor bus supports
the connection of up to 31 sensors (Modbus server). The ISM® device operates
as a Modbus client.
Ensure that no other Modbus client is connected over the MR sensor bus.
i Assign a unique Modbus address to each sensor you are connecting over
MR sensor bus. The MR sensor bus may experience errors if multiple sen-
sors are using the same Modbus address.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 131

Observe the following notes for connecting the sensors:
– NOTICE! Damage to the device or sensor. Connect all of the sensors to a po-
tential equalization rail to avoid circulating currents over the MR sensor bus.
– The MR sensor bus uses Modbus in a 2-wire configuration (2W). The 4-wire
configuration (4W) is not supported.
– You must connect the sensors via a shielded line with 3 conductors (D0, D1,
Common). The data lines (D0, D1) must be in twisted pairs. Note the cable
recommendation.
– Stub lines from the bus node to the respective device must be shorter than
20 m.
– You may connect the sensors directly to the CPU assembly or via an optional
transfer module.
– The CPU assembly contains a terminating resistor (120 Ω) at the COM2 inter-
face. Install another terminating resistor (120 Ω, 0.5 W) at the other end of
the bus.
– The CPU assembly contains a pull-up resistor and a pull-down resistor (each
of 680 Ω in accordance with the Modbus specification). No additional pull-
up/pull-down resistors are needed.
CPU I/II-COM2 Transfer module (optional)

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
Com. (C) 5 Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6 D0 (A+) 6
7 7
8 8
D1 (B-) 9 D1 (B-) 9
S
Sensor 1
Com. (C)
D0 (A+)
D1 (B-)
Sensor x
Com. (C)
D0 (A+)
120 Ω
D1 (B-)
Figure 155: Connection example MR sensor bus to CPU I/II-COM2 with optional transfer
module
132 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

CPU-X4 Transfer module (optional)
D1 (B-) 1 D1 (B-) 1
D0 (A+) 2 D0 (A+) 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
Com. (C) 6 Com. (C) 6
7 7
8 8
S
Sensor 1
Com. (C)
D0 (A+)
D1 (B-)
Sensor x
Com. (C)
D0 (A+)
120 Ω
D1 (B-)
Figure 156: Connection example MR sensor bus to CPU-X4 with optional transfer module
6.12.6.1 MESSKO® MTeC® EPT303 FO

If you would like to use a MESSKO® MTeC® EPT303 FO sensor, you must con-
nect the sensor to the RS485 plug terminals on the sensor bus. Use a shielding
clamp to apply the shield to the cable. You can directly connect additional
MESSKO® MTeC® EPT303 FO sensors to the plug terminal.
The EPT303 FO sensor module contains a terminating resistor. If you

i would like to use the EPT303 FO sensor together with other sensor types
on an MR sensor bus, then we recommend connecting the EPT303 FO sen-
sor to the end of the bus.
CPU-COM2 1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
EPT303 FO
D+ (B) 1
GND 2
D- (A) 3
D+ (B) 4
GND 5
D- (A) 6
1 6
Figure 157: Connection example MESSKO® MTeC® EPT303 FO (terminal RS485)
6.12.6.2 MESSKO® MTO

If you would like to use a MESSKO® MTO sensor, you must connect the sensor
to the terminal strip on the sensor bus. Connect the cable shielding to the sen-
sor using an EMC cable gland. You can connect additional sensors directly to
7815063/10 EN Mounting 133

the second terminal strip (daisy chain). If the MSENSE® MTO sensor is the only
bus device or the last bus device, you must use a terminating resistor (120 Ω,
0.5 W). You can connect the terminating resistor to the second terminal strip.
CPU-COM2 1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
MTO 24V
0V
B
com
A
24V
0V
B
com
A
Figure 158: MESSKO® MTO connection example (RS485 terminal strip)
6.12.6.3 MESSKO® MTRAB® 2.5

If you would like to use a MESSKO® MTRAB® 2.5 sensor, you must connect the
sensor to the RS485 plug terminals on the sensor bus.
CPU-COM2 1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
MESSKO® MTRAB® 2.5
D+ | Rx+
D- | Rx-
Shield
Comm
Tx-
Tx+
Figure 159: Connection example MESSKO® MTRAB® 2.5 (terminal RS485)
134 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

You must enable the half-duplex operating mode on the sensor by switching
the "Duplex mode" switch to the "HALF" setting. If the MESSKO® MTRAB® 2.5
sensor is the only bus device or the last bus device, you must activate the sen-
sor terminating resistor by switching the "BUS termination 120 ohms" switch to
the position "1 = ON" and "2 = OFF".
Figure 160: MESSKO® MTRAB® 2.5 Modbus configuration
1 Terminating resistor: in half duplex 2 Operating mode: HALF = half duplex,

mode: 1 = ON, 2 = OFF; in full duplex FULL = full duplex
mode: 1 = ON, 2 = ON
3 Modbus address
6.12.6.4 MESSKO® MT-ST Compact

If you would like to use a MESSKO® MT-ST Compact sensor, you must connect
the sensor to the terminal strip on the sensor bus. Connect the cable shielding
to the sensor using an EMC cable gland. You can connect additional sensors di-
rectly to the second terminal strip (daisy chain). If the MSENSE® MT-ST Compact
sensor is the only bus device or the last bus device, you must use a terminating
resistor (120 Ω, 0.5 W). You can connect the terminating resistor to the second
terminal strip.
CPU-COM2 1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
MT-ST
+
Compact -
B
Compact RM COM
A
+
-
B
COM
A
Figure 161: MESSKO® MT-ST Compact (RS485 terminal strip)
7815063/10 EN Mounting 135

6.12.6.5 MSENSE® DGA
If you would like to use an MSENSE® DGA sensor, you must connect the sensor
to the MR sensor bus in accordance with the following connection examples. If
the MSENSE® DGA sensor is the only bus device or the last bus device, you
must use a terminating resistor (120 Ω, 0.5 W).
CPU-COM2 1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
MSENSE DGA 2/3
D0 (A) 1
4 3
5 D1 (B) 2
D1 (B) 3
1 2 D0 (A) 4
Com. (C) 5
Figure 162: Connection example MSENSE® DGA 2/3 (connector M12, type A, 5-pole in accor-
dance with IEC 61076-2-101)
CPU-COM2 1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
MSENSE DGA 5
(PhoneA) X302:5
(PhoneB) X302:4
(GND) X302:3
(OUTB-) X302:2
(OUTA+) X302:1
Figure 163: Connection example MSENSE® DGA 5 (terminal X302)
CPU-COM2 1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
MSENSE DGA 9
(PhoneA) X304:5a
(PhoneB) X304:4b
(GND) X304:3
(OUTB-) X304:2a
(OUTA+) X304:1b
Figure 164: Connection example MSENSE® DGA 9 (terminal X304)
136 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

6.12.6.6 MSENSE®-FO ECU-I/S
If you would like to use an MSENSE®-FO ECU-I or ECU-S sensor, you must con-
nect the sensor to the RS485 plug terminals on the sensor bus. Use a shielding
clamp to apply the shield to the cable. If the MSENSE®-FO sensor is the only bus
device or the last bus device, you must use a terminating resistor (120 Ω,
0.5 W). You must activate the half-duplex, 2-conductor operating mode on the
sensor via the MSET-FO configuration software.
CPU-COM2 1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
MSENSE®-FO
Tx+ 1
Tx- 2
Rx+ 3
Rx- 4
GND 5
Figure 165: Connection example MSENSE®-FO ECU-I and ECU-S (terminal RS485)
6.12.6.7 E+E EE364

If you would like to use a type E+E EE364 sensor, you must connect the sensor
to the MR sensor bus with the 5-pole plug connector via the Phoenix PSM-ME-
RS485 RS485 repeater. If the E+E EE364 sensor is the only bus device or the last
bus device, you must activate the Port B terminating resistor.
CPU-COM2 PSM-ME RS485

1
2
3
4 Port B
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6 D (A) D (A)
7 D (B) D (B)
8 GND GND
D1 (B-) 9 SHD SHD
EE364-Tx3xx
D1 (B-)
D0 (A+)
Com. (C)
Port A VCC
4 3 + 1 + 10...28 VDC D (A) 24V +
5 2
- 3 - D (B) 24V -
1 2 D0 (A+) 4 GND 0V
D1 (B-) 5 SHD 0V 24 V AC/DC
Figure 166: Connection example E+E EE364 (plug connector M12, type A, 5-pole in accor-
dance with IEC 61076-2-101) to the Phoenix PSM-ME-RS485 RS485 repeater
7815063/10 EN Mounting 137

6.12.6.8 E+E MOP301
If you would like to use a type E+E MOP301 sensor, you must connect the sen-
sor to the MR sensor bus with the 4-pole plug connector via the Phoenix PSM-
ME-RS485 RS485 repeater. If the E+E MOP301 sensor is the only bus device or
the last bus device, you must activate the Port B terminating resistor.
CPU-COM2 PSM-ME RS485

1
2
3
4 Port B
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6 D (A) D (A)
7 D (B) D (B)
8 GND GND
D1 (B-) 9 SHD SHD
MOP301
D1 (B-)
D0 (A+)
Com. (C)
8...35 VDC
+
+ 1 - Port A VCC
4 3
D1 (B-) 2 D (A) 24V +
- 3 D (B) 24V -
1 2 D0 (A+) 4 GND 0V
SHD 0V 24 V AC/DC
Figure 167: Connection example E+E MOP301 (plug connector M12, type A, 4-pole in accor-
dance with IEC 61076-2-101) to the Phoenix PSM-ME-RS485 RS485 repeater
Vent the E+E MOP301 temperature and humidity sensor when installing it
i on the transformer to ensure that no air enters the transformer tank.
6.12.6.9 TFMR sensor

If you would like to use a TFMR sensor, you must connect the sensor to the MR
sensor bus via the Phoenix PSM-ME-RS485 RS485 repeater. If the TFMR sensor
is the only bus device or the last bus device, you must use a terminating resistor
(120 Ω, 0.5 W).
CPU-COM2
1
2
3
4
Com. (C) 5
D0 (A+) 6
7
8
D1 (B-) 9
TFMR
Pt100 1
2 +
24V 3 10...28 VDC
0V 4 -
COM 5
A+ 6
B- 7
Figure 168: Connection example TFMR to the Phoenix PSM-ME-RS485 RS485 repeater
6.12.6.10 Configuring the RS485 repeater

You can set the baud rate and the terminating resistor of the Phoenix PSM-ME-
RS485 RS485 repeater.
138 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

Electrostatic discharge may cause damage to the device.
Take precautionary measures to prevent the build-up of electrostatic
charges on work surfaces and personnel.
Unlock the repeater housing using a screwdriver and carefully pull up until
the stop.
3
2
Figure 169: Pulling up the housing so that you can configure the RS485 repeater
1 Unlock housing 2 DIP switches for the baud rate
3 DIP switches for Port A and Port B

terminating resistor
Baud rate
Set the baud rate to the same rate that you use for the MR sensor bus.
Baud rate [kBd] DIP
1 2 3 4 5 6
1.2 ON ON ON OFF - -
2.4 ON ON OFF ON - -
4.8 ON ON OFF OFF - -
9.6 ON OFF ON ON - -
15
19.2 ON OFF ON OFF - -
38.4 ON OFF OFF ON - -
57.6 ON OFF OFF OFF - -
75 OFF ON ON ON - -
93.75 OFF ON ON OFF - -
115.2 OFF ON OFF ON - -
136 OFF ON OFF OFF - -
187.5 OFF OFF ON ON - -
375 OFF OFF ON OFF - -
500 OFF OFF OFF ON - -
1500 OFF OFF OFF OFF - -

Table 29: DIP setting
15 MR sensor bus factory setting.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 139

Terminating resistor
Set the terminating resistor as follows:
– Port A: ON
– Port B: ON, if the repeater is the last MR sensor bus device. Otherwise set to
OFF.
6.12.7 Information on connecting to the CAN bus
6.12.7.1 Mounting terminating resistor of CAN bus

If you want to operate the device in parallel operation, you need to mount a
120 Ω terminating resistor at both ends of the CAN bus between CAN_L and
CAN_H (see supplied connection diagram).
6.12.7.2 Shielding the CAN bus

In order for the CAN bus to operate faultlessly, you have to connect the shield-
ing using one of the following variants. If you are not able to use any of the vari-
ants detailed below, we recommend using fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic cables
decouple the devices and are not sensitive to electromagnetic interference
(surge and burst).

If you connect the CAN bus cable to devices with different potentials, current
may flow across the shielding. This current may damage the device.
Connect the devices to a potential equalization rail to equalize the poten-
tial.
If both devices have different potentials, only connect the CAN bus cable
shielding to one device.
Variant 1: The connected devices share the same potential

1. Connect all devices to a potential equalization rail to equalize the potential.
2. Connect the CAN bus cable shielding to all connected devices.
Variant 2: The connected devices have different potential levels
Note that the shielding is less effective with this variant.

i
1. Connect the CAN bus cable shielding to just one device.
2. Connect the wires of the shielded CAN bus cable in accordance with the con-
nection diagram supplied.
6.12.8 Information about connecting analog sensors
NOTICE Damage to the device and sensors!

Incorrectly connected and configured analog inputs/outputs may result in
damage to the device and sensor.
Follow information about connecting analog sensors [►Section 6.12.8,
Page 140].
Configure analog inputs and outputs according to the connected sensors.
140 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

6.12.8.1 Information about shielding the cables for analog signals
In order to correctly record the analog signals, you must place the cable shield-
ing on the grounding bar in the control cabinet. The cable shielding should only
be removed just prior to connecting to ensure that the section with unshielded
cables is kept as short as possible. Observe the notes in the connection dia-
gram.
Direct connection to ISM assemblies

If you connect the analog signals directly to the ISM assembly, you must place
the cable shield on the grounding bar in the control cabinet using a clamping
bracket.
Connection to transfer module

If you connect the analog signals to the transfer module, you must place the ca-
ble shield on the transfer module using a shielding terminal.
Figure 171: Placing cable shield on transfer module
7815063/10 EN Mounting 141

6.12.8.2 AIO connection example
The AIO assembly has a separate plug connector for each channel (input or out-
put). The plugs are assigned as follows:
RDY
AIO
1 11
2
3
12
13
1
4 14
5 15
1
2
+ 2
24V DC
-
3 3
4
6 16 4
7
8
9
17
18
19
5
10 20
5
Figure 172: Plug assignment of the AIO module (illustration using module AIO 4 as an exam-
ple)
Interface Pin Description
1 6 11 16 I OUT (+): Current output +
2 7 12 17 I/U IN (+) U OUT (+): Voltage input +,

current input +, voltage output +
3 8 13 18 I/U IN (-): Voltage input -, current input -
4 9 14 19 I/U OUT (-): Voltage output -, current

output -
5 10 15 20 Not used
Table 30: Analog inputs and outputs
You can connect the following types of analog sensors:

– 4...20 mA
– PT100/PT1000 (2-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire)
4...20 mA sensor
You must connect a 4...20 mA sensor to the pins and . You must also con-
nect the included bridge to the pins , and .
4...20 mA signal source
1 I OUT (+)
I/U IN (+)
2 U OUT (+)
3 I/U IN (-)
4 I/U OUT (+)
5 ---
Figure 173: Connection example for a 4...20 mA sensor
142 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

PT100/PT1000 sensor
Depending on type, you must connect a PT100 sensor or PT1000 sensor as fol-
lows:
– 2-wire: pin and
– 3-wire: pin , and
– 4-wire: pin , , and
PT100/PT1000
2-wire 3-wire 4-wire
1 I OUT (+) 1 I OUT (+) 1 I OUT (+)
I/U IN (+) I/U IN (+) I/U IN (+)

2 U OUT (+) 2 U OUT (+) 2 U OUT (+)
3 I/U IN (-) 3 I/U IN (-) 3 I/U IN (-)
4 I/U OUT (+) 4 I/U OUT (+) 4 I/U OUT (+)
5 --- 5 --- 5 ---
Figure 174: Connection example for a PT100/PT1000 sensor
6.12.8.3 AI 4 connection example

The AI 4 assembly has a separate plug connector for each channel. The plugs
are assigned as follows:
4 U- voltage input
4
3 I- current input
3
2
2 I+ current output
1 1 U+ voltage output
Table 31: Plug assignment for assembly AI 4

– 4...20 mA
– 0…10 V
7815063/10 EN Mounting 143

4...20 mA
signal source
4 U-
3 I-
2 I+
1 U+
Figure 175: Connection example for a 4...20 mA sensor
0...10 V
signal source
4 U-
3 I-
2 I+
1 U+
Figure 176: Connection example for a 0...10 V sensor
6.12.8.4 AI 4-T connection example

The AI 4-T assembly has a separate plug connector for every two channels. The
plugs are assigned as follows:
10 IREF- current output B

10
9 IN V- voltage input B
9
8
8 IN V+ voltage input B
7 7 IREF+ current output B

6
6 Not used
5
4 5 Not used
3
4 IREF- current output A
2
3 IN V- voltage input A
1
2 IN V+ voltage input A
1 IREF+ current output A

Table 32: Plug assignment
144 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

– PT100/PT1000 (2-wire)
– PT100/PT1000 (3-wire)
– PT100/PT1000 (4-wire)
PT100/PT1000
2-wire 3-wire 4-wire
A B A B A B
5 6 --- 5 6 --- 5 6 ---
4 10 IREF- 4 10 IREF- 4 10 IREF-
3 9 IN V- 3 9 IN V- 3 9 IN V-
2 8 IN V+ 2 8 IN V+ 2 8 IN V+
1 7 IREF+ 1 7 IREF+ 1 7 IREF+
Figure 177: Connection example for a PT100/PT1000 sensor
6.12.8.5 AO 4 connection example

The AO 4 assembly has a separate plug connector for each channel. The plugs
are assigned as follows:
4 Not used
4
3 V- current input
3
2
2 V+ current output
1 1 Not used
Table 33: Plug assignment for assembly AO 4
They can output the following signal types:

– 4...20 mA
– 0…10 V
4...20 mA
0...10 V
4 ---
3 V-
2 V+
1 ---
Figure 178: Connection example of an analog display device
7815063/10 EN Mounting 145

6.12.9 Notes on routing the MSENSE® FO fiber-optic cable in the
control cabinet
Observe the following notes if you want to route the fiber-optic cable (sensor)
of the MSENSE® FO device in the control cabinet:
– Route the fiber-optic cable in the middle cable duct in the control cabinet.
– Route the fiber-optic cable as straight as possible in the control cabinet. En-
sure sufficiently large bend radii and do not kink the fiber-optic cable.
– Bundle the fiber-optic cable below the MSENSE® FO ECU-I assembly using a
cable tie and attach to the grounding bar to ensure strain relief.
Figure 179: Routing the fiber-optic cable in the middle cable duct
6.12.10 Information on connecting the socket circuit

Connecting a socket that is not suitable for the grid type can lead to electric
shock. This can lead to death or severe injuries.
Connect the socket circuit in accordance with the connection diagram.
Fuse the socket circuit in accordance with the specifications in the connec-
tion diagram.
6.12.11 Information on connecting the power supply
Observe the following information on connecting the control cabinet to the

power supply.
6.12.11.1 Requirements on the power supply

The connection of the device to an isolated supply grid (IT system) makes the
protective grounding of the device ineffective. As a result, parts of the device
(e.g. housing) can conduct voltage in the event of a malfunction and can re-
sult in electric shock when touched. This can lead to death, injuries and prop-
erty damage.
Connect the device exclusively to supply grids that correspond to the TT
system or TN system in accordance with IEC 60364-1.
146 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

Side Drive
The power supply for the motor-drive unit must be able to provide 5…7 times
the nominal operating current of the motor-drive unit for one second. A maxi-
mum voltage tolerance of -15%…+10% of the nominal voltage must be ob-
served to avoid damage to the drive.
Top Drive You have to connect the motor-drive unit to an uninterruptible power supply to
be able to switch the on-load tap-changer if the power supply fails.
6.12.11.2 Disconnecting switch and fuses

Observe the following requirements on the disconnecting switch and fuses for
the control cabinet circuits.
Integrated fuse disconnect switch (optional)

If the control cabinet is fitted with an integrated fuse disconnect switch, you can
connect the circuit directly to the power supply.
Circuits without integrated fuse disconnect switch

You may only connect the control cabinet to circuits with an external overcur-
rent protection device and an isolating device with all poles disconnected so the
equipment can be fully de-energized if required (service, maintenance etc.).
Suitable equipment includes isolating devices in accordance with IEC 60947-3

(e.g. switch disconnectors). Observe the properties of the relevant circuits (volt-
age, maximum currents) when selecting the circuit breaker type. In addition, ob-
serve the following:
– It must be easy for the operator to access the isolating device
– The isolating device must be labeled for the device and the circuits to be iso-
lated
– The isolating device may not be a part of the power line
– The isolating device may not interrupt the main protective conductor
Select the miniature circuit breaker based on the product's electrical power data
(voltage and current; see nameplate) and the internal wiring's conductor cross-
sections (see connection diagram):
– Max. 10 A at 0.75 mm²
– Max. 16 A at 1.5...2.5 mm²
6.12.11.3 Conductor cross-section

Unless specified otherwise, the connections for the supply circuits must have a
conductor cross-section of at least 2.5 mm2 (AWG 13). Check applicable stan-
dards and directives to ensure that the specified minimum cross-section of the
supply line is sufficient.
7815063/10 EN Mounting 147

6.13 Checking functional reliability
To ensure that the device is wired correctly, check its functional reliability.
NOTICE Damage to device and system periphery!

An incorrectly connected device can cause damage to the device and system
periphery.
Check the entire configuration before commissioning.
With ambient temperatures below 0°C, we recommend switching the con-

i trol cabinet heater on for at least 1 hour prior to commissioning.
Apply voltage to the control cabinet.

The device control system boots up; after a brief period (up to 5 minutes) the
relay switches the make contact O: Status Ok.
The device is fully mounted and can be configured. The actions required for this
are described in the following chapter.
148 Mounting 7815063/10 EN

7 Commissioning
7.1 Commissioning the motor-drive unit (side

drive)
Preparation
1. Make sure that the motor-drive unit is connected as shown in the connection
diagram provided.
2. Ensure that all protective conductors are connected correctly.
3. Ensure that the preliminary fuse is selectively configured for the protective
devices in the motor-drive unit.
4. Ensure that motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer are correctly coupled
and the operating positions of the motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer
match.
5. Ensure that the hand crank is not inserted in the hand crank aperture.
6. Ensure that all signaling contacts provided in the connection diagram are out-
put and monitored in the control room.
7. Ensure that the fuse F14 for fusing the internal power supply is switched on.
8. Ensure that the motor protective switch and the fuse for the control circuit
are switched off.
Commissioning
With ambient temperatures below 0°C, we recommend switching the control
cabinet heater on for at least 1 hour prior to commissioning.
1. Apply voltage to the motor-drive unit.
2. Measure the voltage and frequency of the motor circuit at terminal X1 and
compare with the details on the nameplate. The details must match.
3. As an option with separate control-circuit supply: Measure the voltage and
frequency of the control circuit at terminal X1 and compare with the details
on the nameplate. The details must match.
4. As an option with separate heating-circuit supply: Measure the voltage of the
heater circuit at terminal X1 and compare with the details on the connection
diagram. The details must match.
5. As an option with three-phase motor: Ensure that the voltage applied to the
connection terminals has a clockwise phase sequence.
6. As an option with DC motor: Ensure that the motor voltage has the right po-
tential connection.
7. Engage the motor protective switch and fuses for the control circuit and
heater circuit (if present).
The voltage monitor LED and thermostat LED (if present) on the rear of
the swing frame must light up green.
8. Close the motor-drive unit and secure it against unauthorized opening by us-
ing a padlock.
Commissioning is complete.
Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH if anything is not clear or you

i encounter problems during commissioning.
7815063/10 EN Commissioning 149

7.2 Commissioning the ISM®
7.2.1 Establishing a connection to the visualization (with CPU I /

CPU II)
You can use the ETH 2.1 interface or the optional ETH 2.2 interface of the CPU I
or CPU II assembly to establish a connection to the visualization. The interfaces
do not use a DHCP server. Therefore, you must assign a static IP address to
your PC. To do this, observe the following configuration example:
Interface Configuration
Standard ETH 2.1 IP address: 192.168.165.1 (not adjustable)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Optional ETH 2.2 IP address: 192.0.1.230 (factory setting) [►Section 8.1.4,

Page 169]
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
PC IP address: 192.0.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Table 34: Interface configuration example
System requirements
To access the web-based visualization, you need a PC with an HTML5-capable
browser. The display is optimized for the following browsers:
– Microsoft Edge
– Google Chrome™
To establish a connection, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the PC and device using an Ethernet cable (RJ45 plug) via the
ETH 2.1 or ETH 2.2 interface.
Figure 180: Establishing a connection via the ETH 2.1 or ETH 2.2 interface
2. Assign a unique IP address to the PC. This IP address must be in the same
subnet as the device (e.g. ETH 2.1: 192.168.165.100).
3. Enter the IP address of the visualization (e.g. ETH 2.1:
http://192.168.165.1; if SSL encryption is active, enter
https://192.168.165.1) in the browser on the PC.
The visualization is accessed.
150 Commissioning 7815063/10 EN

7.2.2 Establishing a connection to the visualization (with CPU /
COM-ETH)
To establish a connection to the visualization, you must connect the CPU as-
sembly to a PC via interface X2 or X3. The interface does not use a DHCP
server, so you must assign a fixed IP address to your PC. To do this, observe the
following configuration example:
Standard CPU-X2 IP address: 192.168.165.1 (not adjustable)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Optional CPU-X3 IP address: 192.0.1.230 (factory setting)

[►Section 8.1.4, Page 169]
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
System requirements
– Microsoft Edge
1. Connect PC and device via the CPU-X2 or CPU-X3 interface using an Ether-
net cable (RJ45 plug).
CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
Figure 181: Establishing an example connection via the CPU-X2 interface
2. Assign a unique IP address to the PC in the same subnet as the device (e.g.
192.168.165.100).
3. Enter the IP address of the visualization (192.168.165.1) in the PC's
browser.

Optional COM-ETH assembly
If your device is equipped with the optional COM-ETH assembly, you can estab-
lish a connection to the visualization via various interfaces. The interfaces do
not use a DHCP server. Therefore, you must assign a static IP address to your
PC. To do this, observe the following configuration example:
Standard CPU-X3 IP address: 192.0.1.230 (factory setting)

COM-ETH-X4 [►Section 8.1.4, Page 169]
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Optional COM-ETH-X2 IP address: 192.168.165.1 (not adjustable)

COM-ETH-X3
PC / MControl IP address: 192.168.165.100

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
7.2.3 Setting the language
You can use this parameter to set the display language for the device. Depend-
ing on the device configuration, a variety of languages are available.
English Italian
German Portuguese
French Russian
Spanish Chinese
Korean Polish
Table 37: Available display languages
1. Select the Language button in the status bar, or as an alternative go to Set-

tings > Parameters > System > General > Language.
Figure 182: Setting the language
2. Select the desired language from the list field.

3. Press the Accept button to save the modified parameter.
The "Restart device" dialog appears.
4. Restart the device to apply the changed language setting.
7.2.4 Commissioning wizard
If you want the device to help when setting the relevant parameters, you can
use the commissioning wizard. The commissioning wizard provides a selection
of parameters that you can configure in order.
A detailed description of each of the parameters can be found in the Operation

[►Section 8, Page 164] chapter.
To call up the commissioning wizard, you will need the necessary access
i rights [►Section 8.1.24, Page 226].

To set the parameters with the help of the commissioning wizard, proceed as
follows:
1. Log in as a user with the necessary access rights.
2. Go to Settings > Commissioning wizard.
Information Commissioning
wizard
Home
Welcome to the commissioning wizard
Please select your language
English
Events
If you change the language, a restart is necessary in order to apply
the change. The commissioning assistant will continue
automatically after the restart.
Information
Recorder
Accept
EN LOGOUT REBOOT admin 2023-11-13 14:39 MR Settings
Figure 183: Commissioning wizard
3. Press the Accept button to launch the commissioning wizard.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Once you have entered all of the parameters relevant to commissioning, con-
tinue with the function test.
7.2.5 Downloading the operating instructions
Download the operating instructions from the device to start device commis-
sioning and parameterization.
Select in the status line.
The operating instructions will be downloaded.
The document is also available for download in the MR Customer Portal and on
our website www.reinhausen.com.
7.2.6 Configuring analog inputs and outputs (optional)
You can flexibly configure the device's analog inputs and outputs and assign de-
vice functions.
The device supports analog sensors with linear characteristic curves and only
outputs analog signals with linear characteristic curves.
If you have connected sensors over the MR sensor bus, you must select the
"Modbus" signal type for the desired functions. Observe the additional informa-
tion provided in the MR sensor bus [►Section 8.1.20, Page 211] section.
7.2.6.1 Creating a backup

You need to create a backup to be able to reset the system in the event that any
incorrect configuration settings are made. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Export.
2. Select the option Settings to export a backup copy of the current settings.
3. Select the desired Interface (USB or PC).

4. Press the Export button to start the export.
7.2.6.2 AIO configuration

Page 140].
The following information is displayed in tabular form for configuring the analog
inputs and outputs. Grayed-out elements cannot be changed.
Figure 184: Configuring analog inputs/outputs
You can only change the configuration of the analog inputs and outputs if
i you have a Parameter Configurator or Administrator role.
When in delivery status, you can log in as the administrator as follows:

– User name: admin
– Password: admin
1. Go to Settings > AIO configuration.
2. Configure the properties such as Function, Sign. type and Card/channel.
3. Select the button to configure the values as desired.
Figure 185: Entering values
4. Press the Accept button.

5. Confirm the security prompt with Save to save the changes.

Function
Function of the analog input (I: ...) or the analog output (O: ...). You can adjust
the designation.
Signal type
Select signal type of analog sensor or deactivate analog input.
– 4...20 mA
– 0...10 V
– PT100-2/3/4, PT1000-2/3/4
– Modbus MR sensor bus (only available with sensor bus)
Card/channel
Select the slot and channel of the analog sensor. Note the connection diagram
supplied. This property is only available for GPAI.
Unit
Set the unit of the signal. This property is only available for GPAI.
Decimal places
Set up to three decimal places. This property is only available for GPAI.
Minimum/maximum value
Set the minimum and maximum values of the sensor, e.g. with a 4...20 mA sig-
nal, the corresponding measured value for 4 mA and the corresponding value
for 20 mA.
This property is not available if the sensors are connected over the MR sensor
bus (Modbus).
Correction factor and correction offset

Setting a correction offsets systematic errors of the analog signals. The correc-
tion is determined by multiplying a factor by the sum of the offset. The mini-
mum and maximum values of the function values apply as a limit value for the
correction. There is no limit for the correction offset.
Measured variable
Max.
Correction factor
Correction offset
Min.
Min. Max. Analog signal
Figure 186: Analog signal with linear characteristic curve, correction factor <1 and correction
offset
Correction factor
Set the correction factor (m) for the correction of the function value (x). The cor-
rected function value (y) is: y = (m * x) + t. This property is only available for in-
puts.

Correction offset
Set the offset (t) for the correction of the function value (x). The corrected func-
tion value (y) is: y = (m * x) + t. This property is only available for inputs.
7.2.7 Checking measured values and status of digital inputs and

outputs
Upon commissioning the device, check whether the measured values and sta-
tus of digital inputs and outputs are plausible. To do so, use an additional mea-
suring device if necessary to check the individual measured values.
To display the measured values and status of the digital inputs and outputs,
proceed as follows:
1. Go to Information > Hardware.
2. Select the individual assemblies one after another and check the individual
measured values or the status of digital inputs and outputs.
3. If errors arise, check the measurement path and the wiring.
7.2.8 Checking the temperature measurement
To commission the device, check whether the measured temperatures are plau-
sible, the temperature sensors are correctly wired and are assigned to the de-
sired functions. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Display the temperature curve [►Section 8.4.3, Page 336].
2. Use a suitable measuring instrument to measure the temperatures at the
measurement points and compare these values to the displayed tempera-
tures.
The temperatures must match, though small deviations are permitted due
to the measurement tolerances.
3. If the temperatures do not match, use the connection diagram to check the
wiring. Check configuration of the analog inputs [►Section 7.2.6, Page 153].
Check the function of the temperature sensors.
7.2.9 Checking the redundant recording of the on-load tap-changer

oil temperature (optional)
The device records the oil temperature of the on-load tap-changer redundantly
with 2 sensors. If both sensors function as desired, then the device uses the
temperature from sensor A for the monitoring functions. If one sensor fails, the
device uses the temperature measured by the second sensor and issues an
event message.

During commissioning, check that the redundant recording of the on-load tap-
changer oil temperature is working correctly.
1. Call up the main screen of the visualization.
The device displays the on-load tap-changer oil temperature from sensor
A.
1 OLTC oil temperature 2 Current tap position, status of the

motor-drive unit
3 Voltage regulator 4 Tap-change operation statistics, VAM
5 OLTC status message (collective 6 Oil filter unit status message

message)
2. Disconnect sensor A.
The device displays the on-load tap-changer oil temperature from sensor
B.
3. Disconnect sensor B.
The device does not display the on-load tap-changer oil temperature.
4. Reconnect sensor A and sensor B.
The redundant recording of the on-load tap-changer oil temperature has
been checked.

7.3 Function test of the motor-drive unit (side
drive)
Risk of death or severe injury due to electrical voltage!
Make sure that the motor-drive unit is correctly connected as shown in the
connection diagrams provided.
Make sure that the supply voltage is matched to the technical data of the
motor-drive unit.
Ensure contact safety before performing the checks and tests. The trans-
mission gear cover plate must be fitted and the motor and swing frame
closed.
Ensure that the motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer/de-energized
tap-changer are correctly coupled and that they are in the same tap posi-
tion for each operating position.
Please contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH (MR) if any aspect of

i the tests is not clear.
7.3.1 Checking correct electric switch-off
1. Change over motor-drive unit by moving control switch S3.

2. Check that the pointer of the tap-change indicator stops within the gray field
after completing a tap-change operation.
3. Carry out this test in both directions.
7.3.2 Checking mechanical and electric end stop of on-load tap-

changer/de-energized tap-changer and motor-drive unit
1. Press the S3 control switch to switch the motor-drive unit to the second-to-
last operating position.
2. Open the control cabinet door and switch off motor protective switch Q01
(position O).
3. Using the hand crank, operate the motor-drive unit to move it to its last oper-
ating position. If the last operating position is not reached, check the cou-
pling between the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer and mo-
tor-drive unit.
4. Continue turning the motor-drive unit in the same direction with the hand
crank until the motor-drive unit is mechanically blocked.
5. Turn back the motor-drive unit with the hand crank to the mid-position of the
tap-change indicator.
6. Remove the hand crank.
7. Switch on motor protective switch Q01 (position I).
8. Check that the motor-drive unit no longer starts up when the S3 switch is
turned further in the same operating direction as under item 1.
9. Perform the check for both end positions.

7.3.3 Checking tripping of motor protective switch
Proceed as follows to check tripping of the motor protective switch:

The motor protective switch Q01 is switched on (position I).
1. Close X1:14 - X1:15 Q1 OFF connection to trip the motor protective switch.
The motor protective switch is tripped (position O). If the motor protective
switch is not tripped, contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
2. Switch on the motor protective switch again (position I).
The tripping of the motor protective switch is checked.

7.4 Function test of the motor-drive unit (top
drive)
Danger of death or severe injury due to electrical voltage and incorrect assem-
bly!
Ensure that the motor-drive unit is connected in accordance with the con-
nection diagrams provided.
Ensure protection against contact; the cover plates must be closed.
To check that the motor-drive unit is functioning, proceed as follows:

1. Synchronize the motor-drive unit [►Section 8.6.7, Page 422].
2. Move the motor-drive unit into the lowest operating position.
3. Lower the tap position of the motor-drive unit once more.
The motor-drive unit tap position must not change since it is in the end
position.
4. Move the motor-drive unit into the highest operating position.
5. Raise the tap position of the motor-drive unit once more.
The motor-drive unit tap position must not change since it is in the end
position.
The motor-drive unit function test is complete. Contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen if faults occurred during the function test.
7.5 Tests on the transformer
Please contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH (MR) if any aspect of

i the tests is not clear.
7.5.1 High-voltage tests on the transformer
Before performing the lightning and impulse voltage test on the transformer,
the following must be ensured:
– The connecting cable between the sealing module and the control cabinet
does not need to be disconnected.
– Disconnect the control cabinet from the electrical supply grid.
– Disconnect the supply cable from the control cabinet.
– Coil the supply cable and position it safely directly on the control cabinet.
Note the following points before performing high-voltage tests on the trans-
former:
– Ensure that the oil compartment of the on-load tap-changer is completely
filled with insulating fluid.
– Ensure that the on-load tap-changer is filled completely with insulating fluid.
– Ensure that all protective devices for the on-load tap-changer are functioning
correctly and are ready for use.
– Check that the ground connections on the control cabinet and the control
cabinet fixings are free of paint.
– Only perform a high voltage test with the control cabinet door closed.
– Disconnect the sensor cable and other external connections to electronic
components in the control cabinet to prevent damage through overvoltage.

– Remove the bushing adapter and fit the cap of the bushing test tap.
– When connecting the control cabinet supply voltage, only use the cable
bushings provided for this in the control cabinet base.
– Guide all ground connecting leads to one central connection point (establish-
ment of suitable reference earth).
– Disconnect all electronic components before the high voltage test. Before a
dielectric test of the wiring, remove all devices with a withstand voltage of
< 1,000 V.
– Remove leads used for testing before the high voltage test, because these
function as antennas.
– Wherever possible, route the measurement leads and data leads separately
to the energy cables.
Contact the manufacturer if you have any questions about possible sources of
danger.
7.5.2 Dielectric tests on transformer wiring
Note the following points for dielectric tests on the transformer wiring:
The motor-drive unit is put through dielectric tests before delivery.

Before the dielectric test for the transformer wiring, disconnect drive from
the section to be tested to rule out increased component loading for those
components fitted in the motor-drive unit.

7.6 Transporting transformer to the operating site
Side Drive
If the drive must be removed in order to transport the transformer, proceed as
follows:
1. Ensure that the drive and the on-load tap-changer are in the adjustment posi-
tion.
2. Remove the drive.
3. Do not actuate the drive while the on-load tap-changer is uncoupled and do
not turn the output shaft.
4. Do not actuate an on-load tap-changer which is uncoupled and do not turn
its drive shaft.
5. Transport the drive to the installation site in the MR delivery packaging.
6. Fit the drive and the drive shaft to the transformer at the installation site.
Top Drive
You can leave the motor-drive unit completely on the transformer if you would
like to transport the transformer to the installation location. If you have to re-
move the gear motor for transporting the transformer, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the connecting cable plug.
2. Remove gear motor screw connection on the on-load tap-changer head
cover (3x M12).
3. Use lifting gear to remove gear motor from the on-load tap-changer head
cover.
4. Cover exposed shafts and seals to protect them from dirt and damage.
5. Set the gear motor on the installation location of the transformer from above
onto the on-load tap-changer head cover using the lifting gear.
6. Tighten fixing screws (3x M12) using a tightening torque of 62 ± 6 Nm.
7. Connect the gear motor.
7.7 Commissioning the transformer at the operat-

ing site
Damage to the device due to condensate in the control cabinet.
Always keep the control cabinet tightly closed.
In the event of downtimes of more than 8 weeks prior to initial commis-
sioning or an operational interruption of more than 2 weeks, connect and
operate the anti-condensation heater in the control cabinet. If this is not
possible, place a sufficient amount of desiccant (silicon-free) in the control
cabinet.

NOTICE Damage to the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit!
Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit due to incorrect use of
position transmitter equipment.
Only circuits stated in the chapter Technical data for position transmitter
equipment [►Section 12.2.2, Page 486] may be connected to the position
transmitter module connections.
The switchover point of the position transmitter equipment in the motor-
drive unit is not the same as the switchover point of the diverter switch op-
eration. This depends on the type of diverter switch. This fact should be
noted when project planning the locking circuits between the motor-drive
unit and external equipment (e.g. transformer circuit breaker).
1. Commission motor-drive unit [►Section 7.1, Page 149].

2. Ensure correct function of motor-drive unit.
3. Commission the transformer.

8 Operation
8.1 System

CPU II)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Page 169]
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
System requirements
– Microsoft Edge
164 Operation 7815063/10 EN


COM-ETH)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
System requirements
– Microsoft Edge
CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
192.168.165.100).
7815063/10 EN Operation 165

browser.


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

COM-ETH-X3

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
8.1.3 General
You can set general parameters in this menu item.
8.1.3.1 Setting general device functions

You can set general device functions with the following parameters.
Settings Parameters General
Name Value
Home
Language English
Commissioning wizard Yes
Auto-logout Off
Time until auto-logout 15.0 min Events
Measured value display Primary values
Transformer name Transformer
Remote behavior Hardware and SCADA
USB interface Off Information
Service user access activation Activated

SNMP Agent Off
Recorder
EN CHANGE REBOOT admin 14.04.2020 14:22 Settings
Figure 190: General
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > General.
Commissioning wizard
You can use this parameter to set whether the commissioning wizard [►Sec-
tion 7.2.4, Page 152] is to launch automatically when the device is restarted.
Measured value display

You can use this parameter to set whether the displayed measured values and
control parameters are to refer to the primary side or secondary side of the
measuring transducers.

Transformer name
You can use this parameter to enter a transformer name for identification pur-
poses. The transformer name will be displayed on the main screen in the visual-
ization.
Remote behavior
You can use this parameter to select the behavior of the device in remote oper-
ating mode. Depending on the device configuration, you can set the remote be-
havior as follows:
– Through the visualization (optional)
– By setting the digital inputs (optional)
You can select the following settings:
Setting Description
Hardware only The device accepts commands through digital inputs.
SCADA only The device accepts commands via SCADA.
Hardware and SCADA The device accepts commands via digital inputs and
SCADA.
Table 41: Selecting remote behavior
USB interface
You can use this parameter to deactivate the USB interface. You can select the
following options:
– On: USB interface is activated
– Off: USB interface is deactivated
Control system protocol

You can use this parameter to set which control system protocol the device
should use.
8.1.3.1.1 Report defective temperature sensors

You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to issue an event mes-
sage if it detects a temperature sensor defect.
8.1.3.1.2 Temperature unit

You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to display the tempera-
ture in degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
8.1.3.2 Set up automatic logout

You can change the settings so that the device of a logged-in user automatically
logs the user out after a certain period of inactivity.
These settings apply to all users. If you have activated the Auto login
i [►Section 8.1.24.3, Page 229] function for a user, then this user will not be
automatically logged out.

Name Value
Home
Language English
Auto-logout Off

SNMP Agent Off
Recorder
Figure 191: General
Auto logout
You can use this parameter to activate th automatic logout function.
Time until auto logout

You can use this parameter to set the time period of inactivity after which a user
is automatically logged out.
8.1.3.3 Activating/deactivating service user access

The device is equipped with user access for the Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
GmbH Technical Service department. This access is for error diagnostics and
troubleshooting in the event of device faults. To safeguard IT security, only acti-
vate service user access for a limited time period for remedying faults.
If you deactivate the service user access and lose your password for the ad-
i ministrator role, it is not possible to reset the administrator password. If the
administrator password is lost, the device must be reset to the default set-
tings. When doing so, all information stored on the device (parameters,
measured values, etc.) will be lost.
Name Value
Home
Language English
Auto-logout Off

SNMP Agent Off
Recorder
Figure 192: General
You must be assigned the administrator role to set parameters.

– Password: admin

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > General.
2. Set the parameter.
3. Restart the device to apply the change.
Service user access activation

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate service user access.
8.1.3.4 Setting SNMP

The device supports the SNMP network management protocol (SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2c). The protocol uses the port 161/UDP. To use SNMP, you must acti-
vate the SNMP agent.
Name Value
Home
Language English
Auto-logout Off

SNMP Agent Off
Recorder
Figure 193: General
SNMP agent
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the SNMP agent. If you
change the setting, you must then restart the device.
8.1.4 Configuring the network
You can use this menu item to configure the network interfaces of the CPU as-
sembly.
You can only set the parameters for ETH 1 if the device is equipped with the op-
tional control system connection via Ethernet (TCP/IP):
– IEC 61850
– IEC 60870-5-104
– Modbus (Modbus type TCP active)
– DNP3 (DNP3 transmission type TCP active)
– MQTT

You can only set the parameters for ETH 2.2 if the device is equipped with the
optional interface for visualization.
Settings Parameters Network se...ngs
Name Value
Home
IP address Eth 1 192.168.10.254
Subnet mask ETH 1 255.255.255.0
Gateway address ETH 1 0.0.0.0
Target address gateway ETH 1 0.0.0.0 Events
IP address Eth 2.2 192.0.1.230
Subnet mask ETH 2.2 255.255.255.0
Gateway address ETH 2.2 0.0.0.0
Target address gateway ETH 2.2 0.0.0.0 Information
Visualization release Only ETH 2.x

SSL/TLS encryption Off
TLS version >= 1.0
Recorder
Figure 194: Network settings
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Network settings.
IP address ETH 1/ETH 2.2

You can use this parameter to assign an IP address to the device.
Assign IP addresses to both web-based visualization and SCADA (optional)

i in different subnets. Otherwise you will not be able to establish a connec-
tion.
Subnet mask ETH 1/ETH 2.2

You can use this parameter to set the subnet mask.
Be sure to enter a valid network mask that is not 0.0.0.0, otherwise it will
i not be possible to connect to the device.
Gateway address ETH 1/ETH 2.2

You can use this parameter to set the gateway's IP address.
If you set the value to 0.0.0.0, no gateway is used.

i
Gateway ETH 1/ETH 2.2 target address
You can use this parameter to set the gateway's IP address.
Visualization release
You can use this parameter to set the interfaces via which you can access the
visualization:
– Only ETH 2.x
– ETH 1 and ETH 2.x
You can only set this parameter if the device is equipped with the optional
i control system connection via Ethernet (TCP/IP) and the optional interface
for visualization.

SSL/TLS encryption
You can use this parameter to set whether the process for accessing the visual-
ization should be carried out over an SSL/TLS-encrypted connection.
TLS version
You can use this parameter to set the accepted TLS versions. If you would like
to establish an encrypted connection to the visualization, you must use an ac-
cepted TLS version. You can select the following options:
Option Accepted TLS versions
>= 1.0 – 1.0

– 1.1
– 1.2
– 1.3
>= 1.1 – 1.1

– 1.2
– 1.3
16
>= 1.2 – 1.2
– 1.3
>= 1.3 16 – 1.3

Table 42: TLS version
Activate DNS (optional)

You can use this parameter to activate DNS for name resolution. If you would
like to use the MQTT protocol, you can establish the connection to the MQTT
via a DNS server as an option. Also set the parameters necessary for the MQTT
[►Section 8.1.9, Page 176] protocol.
DNS server (optional)

You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the DNS server.
8.1.5 Configuring the network
The device network configuration is split into 3 areas:

– Network setting: IP address setting, subnet mask setting, etc.
– Network assignment: Assignment of one or more Ethernet interfaces to a
network
– Network release: Release of network services such as web visualization and
SCADA
16 This option can be selected only if the TLS version is supported by the connected peripheral equipment.

Network assignment Network settings Network service assignment
CPU X2 Network 1 Web visualization
COM-ETH X3
COM-ETH X1 Network 2 SCADA
Figure 195: Configuration example: The CPU X2 and COM-ETH X3 interfaces are assigned to
network 1. The web visualization service is available in network 1. The COM-ETH X1 interface
is linked to network 2. The web visualization service and a SCADA service are available in
network 2 (e.g., IEC 61850).
Ensure that you do not bundle the network interfaces (so-called bonding or
i NIC teaming). NIC teaming may disrupt the network connection.
8.1.5.1 Configure network

You can configure the network settings in this menu. Depending on the device
configuration, there are a different number of networks available.
Network 1 is a service interface. A connection to the web-based visualiza-

i tion is also possible in network 1.
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Network settings.
Network X IP address
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the network.

Assign the IP addresses for each of the individual networks in different sub-
i nets. Otherwise you will not be able to establish a connection.
Network X subnet mask

You can use this parameter to set the subnet mask of the network.
Be sure to enter a valid network mask that is not 0.0.0.0, otherwise it will
i not be possible to connect to the device.
Network X gateway address

You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the gateway of the network.
If you set the value to 0.0.0.0, no gateway is used.

i
8.1.5.2 Assign network interfaces
This menu is used to assign the Ethernet interfaces of the device to a network.
The number of available interfaces depends on your device configuration.

i
If you change the assignment of the network interfaces, the MAC address
i of the network may change.
Figure 197: Network interface assignment
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Network interface assignment.
CPU X2 network assignment

You can use this parameter to set which network is to be available via the
CPU X2 interface.
CPU X3 network assignment

You can use this parameter to set which network is to be available via the
CPU X3 interface.

COM-ETH X1 network assignment
You can use this parameter to set which network is to be available via the COM-
ETH X1 interface.
8.1.5.3 Assign network services

This menu is used to assign the available network services of the device to the
various networks.
Figure 198: Network service assignment
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Network service assignment.
Web visualization network release

You can use this parameter to set via which network the device's web visualiza-
tion is to be available.
Regardless of your configuration, the web visualization service is always

i available in network 1 as well.
SCADA network release

You can use this parameter to set via which network the connection to the con-
trol system (SCADA) is to be available.
8.1.6 Web visualization
In this menu you can make settings for the web visualization.
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Web visualization.
SSL/TLS encryption
You can use this parameter to set whether the process for accessing the visual-
ization should be carried out over an SSL/TLS-encrypted connection.

TLS version
You can use this parameter to set the accepted TLS versions. If you would like
to establish an encrypted connection to the visualization, you must use an ac-
cepted TLS version. You can select the following options:
Option Accepted TLS versions
>= 1.0 – 1.0

– 1.1
– 1.2
– 1.3
>= 1.1 – 1.1

– 1.2
– 1.3
>= 1.2 17 – 1.2

– 1.3
>= 1.3 17 – 1.3

Table 43: TLS version
8.1.7 Configuring serial interfaces
You can configure the following parameters of the device's serial interfaces.
Figure 199: Serial interface configuration
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Serial interfaces configuration.
Baud rate
You can use this parameter to set the serial interface's baud rate. You can select
the following options:
– 9600 baud
– 19200 baud
– 38400 baud
– 57600 baud
– 115200 baud
Number of data bits

You can use this parameter to set the number of databits.
17 This option can be selected only if the TLS version is supported by the connected peripheral equipment.

Parity
You can use this parameter to set the parity. You can select the following op-
tions:
– None
– Even
– Odd
Number of stop bits

You can use this parameter to set the number of stop bits.
8.1.8 Assigning serial interfaces
You can assign a service (e.g., a control system) to the device's serial interfaces.
Figure 200: Serial interface assignment
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Serial interface assignment.
Interface X: Assignment
You can use this parameter to assign a service to the serial interface. Various
services are available, depending on the interface and device configuration.
8.1.9 MQTT
You can activate and configure the MQTT message protocol in this menu
point. To do so, you must connect the device to an MQTT server (Broker) via
Ethernet via the ETH 1 or ETH2.x interface on the CPU assembly. Note that the
device will only send messages (publish). The receive messages function is not
active.
The device is prepared for communication with the TESSA® server by de-
i fault.
There are 2 options available for configuring the protocol:

– Via the IP address of the MQTT server:
– Enter the IP address as the broker address.
– It is not necessary to configure a DNS server.
– Via DNS server:
– Configure the DNS server in "Network settings".
– Enter the URL as the broker address.

Settings Parameters MQTT
Name Value
Home
Activate MQTT Off
Broker address
Broker port 8883
Client username Events
Password
SSL/TLS encryption Off
Information
Recorder
Figure 201: MQTT
When using a URL on the broker, it may be necessary to enter and activate
[►Page 171] the IP address [►Page 171] of the DNS server.
If a DNS server is not available, enter the IP address [►Page 170] of the
MQTT server.
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > MQTT.
Activate MQTT
You can use this parameter to activate the transmission of messages to the
MQTT server (broker).
Broker address
If you use a URL address, you can use this parameter to enter the domain name
of the MQTT server (broker). Otherwise, you can enter the IP address of the
MQTT server.
Broker port
You can use this parameter to set the port of the MQTT server (broker). The fol-
lowing ports are used as standard:
– 8883 (SSL/TLS)
– 1883
Client username (optional)

You can use this parameter to set the client user name for authentication at the
broker. When using authentication, you must configure the broker accordingly.
Password (optional)
You can use this parameter to set the password for authentication at the bro-
ker. When using authentication, you must configure the broker accordingly.
SSL/TLS encryption
You can use this parameter to set whether the data should be transmitted over
an SSL/TLS-encrypted connection.
Note that an encrypted data transmission does not work if you are using an
i SSL proxy.

8.1.10 Setting the device time
You can set the device time manually or automatically via a time server. The de-
vice must be connected to a time server via Ethernet for this purpose.
You can operate SNTP and PTP at the same time. In this case, the PTP time is
queried in slave operation.
The device displays the date and time in accordance with ISO 8601 as follows:
YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss.000+00:00
YYYY Year
MM Month
DD Day
T Separator character for time
hh Hours
mm Minutes
ss Seconds
.000 Milliseconds
+00:00 Time shift to UTC

Table 44: Date and time format
Settings Parameters Time synch...ion
Name Value
Home
Time synchronization via SNTP Off
Time synchronization via SNTP Off
SNTP time server 0.0.0.0
Synchronization interval 60 s Events
PTP hops 1
PTP version IEEE 1588-2008
PTP interface ETH 2.x
Automatic Daylight Savings Time Off Information
Time zone UTC +01:00

Time zone (UTC+01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin,
Activate second time server Off
Recorder
SNTP time server 2 0.0.0.0
Figure 202: Time synchronization
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Time synchronization.
Time synchronization via SNTP

You can use this parameter to activate time synchronization using an SNTP
time server.
SNTP time server

You can use this parameter to enter the IP address of a SNTP time server. If you
are using a time server, the device uses the time of the time server as the sys-
tem time.
Be sure to enter a valid time server address that is not 0.0.0.0, otherwise it
i will not be possible to connect to the device.

Synchronization interval
You can use this parameter to set the interval at which the device is to call up
the time from the time server.
Automatic daylight saving / standard time

You can use this parameter to activate the automatic switchover between day-
light saving time and standard time. Depending on the time zone (region) set,
the device switches automatically between daylight saving time and standard
time on the specified days.
Time zone
If the time information is transmitted to the device by a network service (SNTP
or SCADA), this time is transferred depending on the set reference time. To ad-
just the device time to your local time, you can use the time shift parameter to
set the time shift to UTC.
Example:
Region Time shift to UTC
Mumbai, India UTC +5:30 h
Beijing, China UTC +8:00 h
Brasilia, Brazil UTC -3:00 h

Table 45: Time shift to UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
Time
You can use this parameter to set the date and time manually.
SNTP time server 2 (optional)

You can use this parameter to enter the IP address of the second time server
(optional).
Time synchronization via PTP

You can use this parameter to activate time synchronization via a PTP time
server.
PTP hops
You can use this parameter to enter the number of network sections between
master and slave. You can set up to 16 hops.
PTP version
You can use this parameter to select the PTP version.
– PTP version 1 (IEEE 1588-2002)
– PTP version 2 (IEEE 1588-2008)
PTP interface
You can use this parameter to select the interface that the device is to use for
PTP.

8.1.11 Configuring syslog
The device supports the transmission of log messages via the syslog protocol in
accordance with the standards RFC 5424 and RFC 3164.
Settings Parameters Syslog
Name Value
Home
Activate syslog Off
Syslog standard RFC 5425
Syslog server 0.0.0.0
Syslog server port 6514 Events
Reconnect delay time 10 s
Device designation m200
Emergency severity level Off
Alert severity level Off Information
Critical severity level Off

Error severity level Off
Warning severity level Off
Recorder
Notice severity level Off
Info severity level Off
Figure 203: Syslog
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Syslog.
Activate syslog
You can use this parameter to activate transmission of syslog messages via the
device.
Syslog standard
You can use this parameter to adjust the transmission process and the format
for the syslog messages. You can select the following options:
Standard Transport Message format
RFC 5425 (recom- TLS RFC 5424

mended)
RFC 5426 UDP
RFC 6587 TCP RFC 3164
RFC 3164 UDP

Table 46: Syslog standard
If you use the standard RFC 5245 (TLS), you have to import the root certifi-
i cate and the client certificate with the corresponding key to the syslog
server. For more information, refer to the section titled Importing data
[►Section 8.1.28.2, Page 237].
Syslog server
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the syslog server.
Syslog server port

You can use this parameter to set the port of the syslog server.
Enable 2nd syslog server

You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to transmit the syslog
messages to a 2nd server. If you have selected the option "disabled" for the pa-
rameter Enable syslog [►Page 180], transmission to the 2nd syslog server will
also be disabled.

2nd syslog server
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the 2nd syslog server.
2nd syslog server port

You can use this parameter to set the port of the 2nd syslog server.
Reconnect delay time

You can use this parameter to determine how long the device will wait before it
attempts to reconnect after the connection has been interrupted earlier or a
syslog message could not be transmitted (only for TCP or TLS).
Device designation
You can use this parameter to set the device designation that the device will be
identified with on the syslog server.
Severity level
You can set which syslog messages the device will send. You can also activate
or deactivate messages for each severity level.
Severity level Description
Emergency The system is unusable.
Alert Immediate intervention required.
Critical Critical state
Error Error state
Warning Warning state
Notice Notice state
Info Information state
Debug Debug state

Table 47: Severity levels
8.1.12 SCADA
The following section describes how you can configure the device to connect to
a control system (SCADA). You can download the data points with the help of
the export manager [►Section 8.1.28, Page 235].

8.1.12.1 Configuring IEC 61850 (optional)
If you want to use the IEC 61850 control system protocol, you must set the fol-
lowing parameters. Also refer to the section Configuring the network [►Section
8.1.4, Page 169].
Settings Parameters IEC 61850
Name Value
Home
IED name TAPCON
Device ID TAPCON
Access point MRTCAP
Edition Edition 1 Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 204: IEC 61850
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > IEC 61850.
IED name
You can use this parameter to assign the device an IED name in order for it to
be identified in the IEC 61850 network.
Device ID
You can use this parameter to assign a device ID to the device so that it can be
identified in the IEC 61850 network.
Access point
You can use this parameter to assign a name to the access point in the IEC
61850 network.
Edition
You can use this parameter to switch between the editions of the IEC 61850
control system protocol.
IP address client 1...6

With these parameters, you can set the IP addresses of clients 1 to 6.
8.1.12.1.1 Downloading an ICD file

You can download the ICD file from the device via the Import/Export Manager
[►Section 8.1.28, Page 235]. To do this, you have to establish an Ethernet con-
nection between the device and your PC.
8.1.12.1.2 Importing CID/SCD file (optional)

Note the following definitions for importing a CID file or SCD file.
Only the following elements may differ between the imported IED and the ex-
ported IED from the TEMPLATE.icd:
– DataSet elements can be created in each LN
– ReportControl elements can be created in the LN containing the associated
DataSet
– IP address (if this is not present, the preset one is used)
– Subnet mask (if this is not present, the preset one is used)
– Gateway IP address (if this is not present, the preset one is used)

– Name of the IED (IED name)
– Name of the access point (AccessPoint attribute name)
– Name of the logical device (LDevice attribute inst)
OSI-PSEL, OSI-SSEL, and OSI-TSEL cannot be adjusted.
The SCD file may contain no more than 45 IEDs. It may take several minutes to
import a complete SCD file. The SCD file should only contain the IEDs needed.
You can import the CID/SCD file via the Import/Export Manager. To do so, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Import.
2. Select the desired CID/SCD file and then press the Start upload button.
The file integrity is checked.
3. Select the desired IED and then press the Accept button.
The configuration integrity is checked.
4. Upon successful completion of the import, restart the device.
8.1.12.2 Configuring IEC 60870-5-101 (optional)

If you want to use the IEC 60870-5-101 control system protocol, you must set
the following parameters.
Settings Parameters IEC 60870-5-101
Name Value
Home
Serial interface RS232
Baud rate 9600
Transmission procedure Unbalanced
Number of link address octets 1 Events
Link address 1
Number of ASDU address octets 1
ASDU address 1
No. of information object address... 1 Information
Number of cause of transmission o... 1

Number of databits 8
Parity Even
Recorder
Number of stop bits 1
ASDU single character confirmatio... Off
Figure 205: IEC 60870-5-101
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > IEC 60870-5-101.
Serial interface
You can use this parameter to select the serial interface for data transmission.
You can select the following options:
– RS232
– RS485
Baud rate
– 9600 baud
– 19200 baud
– 38400 baud
– 57600 baud
– 115200 baud

Transmission procedure
You can use this parameter to set the transmission procedure. You can select
– Unbalanced transmission
– Balanced transmission
Number of link address octets

You can use this parameter to set how many octets are provided for the link ad-
dress.
Link address
You can use this parameter to set the link address.
Number of ASDU address octets

You can use this parameter to set how many octets are provided for the ASDU
address.
ASDU address
You can use this parameter to set the address of the ASDU.
No. of information object address octets

You can use this parameter to set how many octets are provided for the infor-
mation object address.
Number of cause of transmission octets

You can use this parameter to set how many octets are provided for the cause
of transmission.
Number of data bits

Parity
tions:
– None
– Even
– Odd
Number of stop bits

ASDU single character confirmation

You can use this parameter to set whether a confirmation is to be sent as single
characters instead of as a complete message. Single character confirmation is
only possible for requesting data of class 2 (Class 2 Request).
RES bit test

You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to check the RES bit
(Reserved Bit) in the control field. You can select the following options:
Option Description
On Messages from the master with RES bit = 1 are declined by the
device.
Off Messages from the master with RES bit = 1 are accepted by
the device.
Table 48: RES bit test

ASDU sequence optimization
With this parameter, you can set which method is to be used for optimizing the
ASDU types. The standard enables optimization in order to be able to transfer
multiple value changes in a telegram in a sequence of ascending information
object addresses. This is displayed by the sequence bit. The selection of ASDU
types for which this optimization is allowed is based on the edition of the stan-
dard.
Option Description
None The device does not optimize the ASDU types.
Ed. 1 Optimization in accordance with IEC 60870 Edition 1 (type 1,

3, 9, 11, 21, 126).
Ed. 1 Amendment 2 Optimization in accordance with IEC 60870 Edition 1, Amend-

ment 2 (type 1, 3, 9, 11, 13, 15 21, 126).

3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 20, 21, 126).
Table 49: ASDU sequence optimization
Reference time
You can use this parameter to set which time is to be transmitted by the control
system. The device uses this information for time synchronization [►Section
8.1.10, Page 178]. You can select the following options:
Option Description
Local The control system transmits the local time.

Note: If you use this option, you must deactivate the auto-
matic changeover between daylight saving time and standard
time [►Page 179]. Otherwise the device will use an incorrect
time.
UTC The control system transmits the time as UTC. The device cal-
culates the local time from UTC and the set time zone
[►Page 179].
Table 50: Reference time

the following parameters.
Name Value
Home
Baud rate 9600
ASDU address 1
Number of databits 8 Events
Parity Even
DFC compatibility Standard
Reference time UTC Information
Recorder
Figure 206: IEC 60870-5-103

Serial interface
– RS232
– RS485
Baud rate
– 9600 baud
– 19200 baud
– 38400 baud
– 57600 baud
– 115200 baud
ASDU address
Number of data bits

Parity
tions:
– None
– Even
– Odd
Number of stop bits

DFC compatibility
You can use this parameter to set how the device is to use the DFC bit (Data
Flow Control) in the control field. You can select the following options:
Option Description
Standard The device sets the DFC bit in each response to a command.
The device thus indicates that the master may not send any
further commands. The master must react to the ACD bit (Ac-
cess Demand) and retrieve the response to the command e.g.
via a request for data of class 1 from the slave queue.
Alternative The device sets the DFC bit in a response if a second com-
mand is received without the master having previously sent a
request for data of class 1.
Table 51: DFC compatibility

Reference time
Option Description

time.
[►Page 179].

the following parameters. Also refer to the section Configuring the network
[►Section 8.1.4, Page 169].
Name Value
Home
TCP port 2404
ASDU address 1
ASDU sequence optimization None
Reference time UTC Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 207: IEC 60870-5-104
TCP port
You can use this parameter to set the TCP port.
ASDU address
ASDU sequence optimization

With this parameter, you can set which method is to be used for optimizing the
ASDU types. The standard enables optimization in order to be able to transfer
multiple value changes in a telegram in a sequence of ascending information
object addresses. This is displayed by the sequence bit. The selection of ASDU
types for which this optimization is allowed is based on the edition of the stan-
dard.

Option Description
None The device does not optimize the ASDU types.

3, 9, 11, 21, 126).
Ed. 1 Amendment 2 Optimization in accordance with IEC 60870 Edition 1, Amend-

ment 2 (type 1, 3, 9, 11, 13, 15 21, 126).

3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 20, 21, 126).
Table 53: ASDU sequence optimization
Reference time
Option Description

time.
[►Page 179].
IP address Client 1/2/3 (optional)

If you use the optional "Multi-client" function, you can use these parameters to
set the IP addresses of the SCADA clients. The device only accepts commands
through the control system from end devices that have their IP addresses set
here.
Note that all SCADA clients communicate with the device on an equal ba-
i sis, because the device does not prioritize commands. If you transmit com-
mands from several SCADA clients to the device at the same time, the de-
vice will execute the last transmitted command.
Receiver IP address
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the receiver.
Number of clients (optional)

If you use the "multi-client" function, you can use this parameter to set the
number of permitted client connections.
Client IP check (optional)

If you use the "multi-client" function, you can use this parameter to activate
client IP-address checking. If you activate this function, you must set an IP ad-
dress [►Page 188] for each client.

8.1.12.5 Configuring Modbus (optional)
If you want to use the Modbus control system protocol, you must set the corre-
sponding parameters depending on the Modbus type selected. Also refer to the
section Configuring the network [►Section 8.1.4, Page 169] if you want to use
Modbus TCP.
Settings Parameters Modbus
Name Value
Home
Modbus type RTU
Modbus address 1
TCP port 502
Maximum TCP connections 10 Events
TCP Keepalive Off
Baud rate 9600
Number of databits 8 Information
Parity Even
Recorder
Figure 208: Modbus
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Modbus.
Modbus type
You can use this parameter to set the Modbus type. You can select the follow-
ing options:
– RTU
– TCP
– ASCII
Modbus address
You can use this parameter to set the Modbus address.
TCP port
Maximum TCP connections

You can use this parameter to set the maximum number of TCP connections.
TCP Keepalive
You can use this parameter to activate/deactivate the "TCP Keepalive" function.
Serial interface
– RS232
– RS485
Baud rate
– 9600 baud
– 19200 baud
– 38400 baud
– 57600 baud
– 115200 baud

Number of data bits
Parity
tions:
– None
– Even
– Odd
Number of stop bits

Receiver IP address
8.1.12.6 Configuring DNP3 (optional)

If you would like to use the DNP3 control system protocol, you must set the pa-
rameters listed below. Also refer to the section Configuring the network [►Sec-
tion 8.1.4, Page 169] if you want to use the DNP3 via TCP.
Settings Parameters DNP3
Name Value
Home
DNP3 transmission type TCP
TCP port 20000
Device address 1
Timeout for response confirmation 5s Events
Unsolicited messages Off
Destination address 10000
Timeout confirmation 5s
Indefinite unsolicited retries Off Information
Number of unsolicited retries 3

User ID code ISM
Reference time UTC
Recorder
Figure 209: DNP3
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > DNP3.
8.1.12.6.1 DNP3 transmission type

You can use this parameter to set the transmission type. You can select the fol-
lowing options:
– TCP
– Serial
TCP port
Serial interface
– RS232
– RS485

Baud rate
– 9600 baud
– 19200 baud
– 38400 baud
– 57600 baud
– 115200 baud
Number of data bits

Number of stop bits

Parity
tions:
– None
– Even
– Odd
Device address
You can use this parameter to set the device link address.
Destination address
You can use this parameter to set the destination master link address.
Unsolicited messages
You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to support unsolicited
messages. If you activate unsolicited messages, the device sends a message via
the control system every time a value is changed.
Repetition of unsolicited messages

You can use this parameter to set how often the device is to send an unsolicited
message until it receives a response from the DNP3 master.
Repeat unsolicited messages indefinitely

You can use this parameter to set the device to send an indefinite number of
unsolicited messages until it receives a response from the DNP3 master.
Timeout
You can use this parameter to set the timeout for unsolicited messages.
Timeout for response confirmation

You can use this parameter to set the timeout for response confirmation for un-
solicited messages.
User ID code
You can use this parameter to set the user ID code.

Reference time
Option Description

time.
[►Page 179].
Receiver IP address
Enable cold start

You can use this parameter to set whether the device can be restarted via the
control system.
8.1.12.7 Configuring GOOSE (optional)

You can use the optional GOOSE function to send GOOSE messages (GOOSE
publisher) or receive GOOSE messages (GOOSE subscriber) via the IEC 61850
control system protocol with the device.
The configuration of GOOSE is described in the following chapters.
8.1.12.7.1 Configuring GOOSE publisher

If you configure the device as a GOOSE publisher, you can send all data points
which the device provides via MMS as GOOSE messages. To do this, you have
to configure the data points using DataSets in an SCD/CID file.
SCD/CID file requirements

– The GOOSE control block (GSEControl) and the associated DataSet can only
be created in LLN0.
– GSE elements for the configuration of the GOOSE message can be created
under ConnectedAP.
– The maximum number of data points per GOOSE message is defined in Pri-
vate Element type="MR-MAX-GOOSE-PUBLISH-FCDA". You cannot adjust
this value.
– The maximum number of usable GSEControl elements is defined in TEM-
PLATE.icd under Services GOOSE. You cannot adjust this value.
– The shortest repeat time is defined in Private Element type="MR-MINTIME-
GOOSE". You cannot adjust this value.
Example:

Configuration
To configure the device as a GOOSE publisher, you have to call up the visu-
i alization via a PC. You must have a parameter configurator or administrator
user role.
To configure the device as a GOOSE publisher, proceed as follows:

Figure 210: Exporting SCADA configuration
2. Select the SCADA configuration option.

The SCADA configuration is exported as a zip archive.
3. Unzip the zip archive and adapt the TEMPLATE.icd file to the requirements.
5. Select the PC or USB option, select the SCD/CID file and select Transfer.
Figure 211: Importing an SCD/ICD file

6. Select the desired IED name with the configuration that is to be imported and
select Accept to start the import.
Figure 212: Selecting an IED
7. Upon successful completion of the import, restart the device.

The system restarts and checks the configuration. If the configuration failed,
an error message appears and the device resets the configuration to the one
with which it was delivered.
8.1.12.7.2 Configuring GOOSE subscriber

If you configure the device as a GOOSE subscriber, you can receive GOOSE
messages from an IED in the network and link them to device functions. You
can use this function to display all of the device's digital input signals via
GOOSE.
GOOSE datagram requirements
The data point string may contain a maximum of 52 characters. The data
i point string is comprised of the following values: IED name, FCDA IdInst,
prefix, InClass, InInst, fc, doName, daName.
In order to link GOOSE datagrams of an IED with device functions, the IED must
contain a GOOSE control block (GSEControl) in the LN0 node and a valid
DataSet and GSE block. The referenced DataSet may contain data objects (DO)
or data attributes (DA). The maximum number of usable data points per
GOOSE message is defined in Private Element type="MR-MAX-GOOSE-SUB-
SCRIBER-FCDA". You cannot adjust this value.
You can only use data points with bType BOOLEAN (true | false) and Dbpos (in-
termediate-state | off | on | bad-state). The functional constraint must be of
type ST.
Value Description
true | on Is used as logical value 1
false | off Is used as logical value 0
intermediate-state Last value received is retained
bad-state Error status, value is identified as invalid

Table 56: Description of values

The device automatically assesses the quality. If the device receives a quality
not equal to 0, the value is also interpreted as invalid. The device then gener-
ates the IEC 61850 GOOSE communication defective event message.
Example:
Configuration
To configure the device as a GOOSE subscriber, you have to call up the vi-
i sualization via a PC. You must have a parameter configurator or adminis-
trator user role.
To configure the device as a GOOSE subscriber, proceed as follows:

The SCD file for your system with all required IEDs has been imported.
1. Go to Settings > GOOSE mapping.
The list of functions available on the device appears.
Figure 213: Overview of device functions available
2. Select the desired Function.

3. Select the desired IED, AccessPoint, LDevice, and GSEControl.

4. Select the desired Data point.
Figure 214: Selecting the data point
5. Press the Accept button to save the configuration.

The Restart device dialog appears.
6. Select Cancel if you want to configure further data points or OK to complete
the modified configuration by restarting the device.
Deleting a configuration
If necessary, you can delete the data point configuration. To do so, proceed as
follows:
1. Go to Settings > GOOSE mapping.
2. Select the desired Function.
3. Press the Delete button to delete the configuration.
8.1.12.8 Configure data points (optional)

You can use the optional "Configure data points" function to adjust the control
system data points of the device. You can only configure the data points on a
PC using the web-based visualization.
8.1.12.8.1 Configuring IEC 60870-5-101 data points

You can adjust the following data point properties for the IEC 60870-5-101 con-
trol system protocol:
Column Description Modifiable Setting range
Active You can use the checkbox to set whether the data point is to be Yes Active/inactive
transferred via the control system protocol or not.
IOA Data point address. The setting range is based on the setting Yes Octet 2: 1...65535
for the "Octet number of information object address" parameter Octet 3: 1...16777215
(octet 2 or 3).
Name Data point designation. No -
Type Data point type. No -
Group Data point group or groups. You must enter the group member- Yes 00000...11111
ship as a binary code (5 bits). A maximum of 5 groups is possi-
ble. Example:
– 00000: belongs to no groups
– 00001: group 1
– 01000: group 4
– 01001: group 1 and group 4

INTG The value indicates whether the data point is to be included in a Yes 0, 1
general query (1) or not (0).
TH Threshold value for measured values. The data point is only Yes 0...32768
transferred again if the change of value is greater than the
threshold value.
– If you enter the value 0, no threshold value is active.
– If you do not enter any value, the device adopts the thresh-
old value defined by the device parameter. If no device pa-
rameter is available for the threshold value, no threshold
value is active either.
– Notice: You can only enter a threshold value for data points
of type 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 21, 34, 35 or 36.
CT Interval in ms for periodic transmission of the data point. If you Yes 0...10000
set 0, the data point is not transmitted periodically.
Notice: You can only enter an interval for data points of type 9,
11 or 13.
Table 57: Configuring IEC 60870-5-101 data points
Figure 215: Configuring IEC 60870-5-101 data points
1. Go to Settings > Data point configuration.

2. Adjust the data points as required.
3. Press the Accept button to adopt the modified list of data points.
4. Restart the device to activate the modified list of data points.

TYP Data point type code. No -
FUN Data point function type. Yes 0...255

Notice: You can only use function type 254 for data points with
type code 10 or 11.
INF Data point information number. Yes 0...255

Notice: You can only use information number 0 for data points
with function type 254.

GIN Data point generic identification number. Yes 0...65535

Notice: You can only use generic identification number 0 for
data points with a function type other than 254.
Data Type Data point data type. No -
Interrogation The value indicates whether the data point is to be included in a Yes 0, 1
Threshold Threshold value for measured values. The data point is only Yes 0...1000000000
threshold value.


IOA Data point address. Yes 1...16777215
Type Data point type. No -

Group Data point group or groups. You must enter the group member- Yes 00000...11111
ship as a binary code (5 bits). A maximum of 5 groups is possi-
ble. Example:
– 00000: belongs to no groups
– 00001: group 1
– 01000: group 4
– 01001: group 1 and group 4
INTG The value indicates whether the data point is to be included in a Yes 0, 1
TH Threshold value for measured values. The data point is only Yes 0...32768
threshold value.
Notice: You can only enter a threshold value for data points of
type 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 21, 34, 35 or 36.
CT Interval in ms for periodic transmission of the data point. If you Yes 0...10000
set 0, the data point is not transmitted periodically.
Notice: You can only enter an interval for data points of type 9,
11 or 13.


8.1.12.8.4 Configuring Modbus data points
You can adjust the following data point properties for the Modbus control sys-
tem protocol:
Type Data point type No -
Index1 Data point address Yes 0...65535
Index2 Optional second data point address. This is used automatically No -

for data points able to transfer values greater than 16 bits.
Please note that the Index2 address always follows on from the
Index1 address exactly.
Name Data point designation No -
Table 60: Configuring Modbus data points
Figure 218: Configuring Modbus data points

8.1.12.8.5 Configuring DNP3 data points

You can adjust the following data point properties for the DNP3 control system
protocol:
OBJGROUP The OBJGROUP column indicates the data point object group: No -
– AI = Analog Input
– AO = Analog Output
– BI = Binary Input
– BO = Binary Output
– CT = Counter
INDEXADDR Data point address. Yes 0...4294967296

CLASS Data point class. Yes 0...3

– 0: Static
– 1...3: Event
Notice: You can only set the data point class for data points of
object groups AI, BI, and CT.
PREFSTATICVAR For a data point of class 0 (Static), you can define the following Yes 0...6
variation depending on the object group:
– BI: 1, 2
– BO: 2
– AI: 2, 4
– AO: 2
– CT: 1, 2, 5, 6
PREFEVENTVAR For a data point of classes 1...3 (Event), you can define the fol- Yes 0...6
lowing variation depending on the object group:
– BI: 1, 2, 3
– BO: no value
– AI: 2, 4
– AO: no value
– CT: 1, 2, 5, 6
NAME Data point designation. No -
Deadband Threshold value for analog inputs. The data point is only trans- Yes 0...32768
ferred again if the change of value is greater than the threshold
value.
Notice: The threshold value has the same unit as the data point
value. Take note of the list of data points.
Table 61: Configuring DNP3 data points
Figure 219: Configuring DNP3 data points


8.1.12.8.6 Resetting the data point configuration to factory settings
If you want to reset the data point configuration to factory settings, proceed as
follows:
2. Press the Reset button.
The message Reset appears.
3. Press the Yes button to reset the data point configuration to the factory set-
tings.
8.1.12.8.7 Exporting and importing the data point configuration

You can export the data point configuration, e.g., to back it up or import it into
another device. You will find more information in the Import/Export Manager
[►Section 8.1.28, Page 235] section.
8.1.12.9 Display status of the SCADA connection

This display shows you the status of the connection to the control system. The
following information is displayed:
– Connected: The device has established a connection to the control system.
– Rx: The device has received a message from the control system.
– Tx: The device has transmitted a message to the control system.
The display is not available for the Modbus ASCII, Modbus RTU, Modbus
i TCP or DNP3 serial control systems.
Figure 220: Communication
Go to Home > Communication.

8.1.13 Displaying the status of the communication services
The status of the communication services is shown in this display. In addition, it

includes a link to the respective communication service settings. The following
information is displayed:
Service Status
IEC 61850, Gray: Not configured

DNP3, Blue: Connection active
Modbus, Red: No connection
IEC 60870-5-104
MR sensor bus
Syslog Gray: Syslog disabled

Blue: Syslog enabled
Time server Gray: Time synchronization disabled

Blue: Time synchronization successful
Red: Time synchronization failed
Table 62: Status messages
Figure 221: Communication
Go to Home > Communication.
8.1.14 Name plate
You can enter the data of the nameplates from the transformer, on-load tap-
changer and motor-drive unit and display it later.
When operating devices with the MSENSE® VAM option, you must enter
i the correct serial number for every on-load tap-changer. This entry is nec-
essary to ensure the correct assignment of the vibro-acoustic records in
the external database.

8.1.14.1 Enter the name plate data
You can enter the name plate data for the transformer, the on-load tap-changer
and the motor-drive unit.
Figure 222: Nameplate
Go to Settings > Parameter > System > Name plate.
8.1.14.2 Displaying the name plate

You can display the nameplate data for the transformer, on-load tap-changer,
and motor-drive unit.
Figure 223: Transformer nameplate
Go to Information > System > Name plate > On-load tap-changer/Motor.
8.1.15 Measured value recorder
The device is equipped with a measured value recorder for saving and display-
ing the recorded measured values. The device reserves a memory area which
can contain a maximum of 100,000 data points for each configured measured
value. The memory area is configured as a ring memory, i.e. when the 100,000
data-point limit has been reached, the device begins to overwrite the oldest
data point with a new data point.
The device does not save the data points cyclically, but only when the mea-
sured value changes. A separate tolerance limit is preconfigured for each mea-
sured value in order to achieve a sufficiently high level of accuracy and a long
recording time at the same time.

Due to the recording method, the measured values in the diagrams are pre-
sented in a stepped form. In order to better distinguish between different
recordings of measured values, only the measured values that belong together
in one recording are connected. Consequently, after restarting the device, a gap
is shown in the recording.
8.1.16 Displaying measured value recorder (optional)
You can use the optional measured value recorder function to display the
progress of measured values and signals over time.
If you access it via the web visualization, you can select a maximum of 10
i measured values.
To display the measured value recorder, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Recorder.
Figure 224: Recorder
2. Select the signals to be displayed.

3. If necessary, set the desired Axis for each signal.
4. Set the Time period for the measured value display.
5. Press Display to call up the measured value display (data log).
Figure 225: Data log
6. Move the mouse indicator to a measurement point for more information.

7. Use the mouse to drag a selection window in order to zoom into the dia-
gram. Select the button to reduce the diagram back to its original size.
8. Select the button to save the displayed measured values as a csv file.
8.1.17 Setting the measured value recorder
The measured value recorder records a maximum of 500,000 values per mea-
sured variable. Depending on the set average value interval, the measured value
recorder can display the measured values over a shorter or longer time period:
– Average value interval = 1 s: approx. 6 days
– Average value interval = 86,400 s (= 24 h): approx. 1,340 years
Note that, for measured values via analog input signals (e.g. temperature),
i a maximum of 100,000 measured values with an average value interval of
3,600 s (= 1 h) will be saved. This is equivalent to a time period of approx. 11
years.
Settings Parameters Recorder
Name Value
Home
Mean value interval 360 s
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 226: Recorder
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Recorder.
Average value interval

You can use this parameter to set the average value interval of the measured
value recorder for electrical measured variables (current, voltage, phase angle
etc.).

8.1.18 Generic temperatures (optional)
If you are using additional temperature sensors (generic temperature 1...8), you
can display the temperature curve for these temperatures over the last 10 days.
Figure 227: Generic temperatures
Go to Information > System > Generic temperatures.
8.1.19 Linking signals and events
The device allows you to link digital inputs (GPI) and control system commands
(SCADA) with device functions, digital outputs (GPO), and control system mes-
sages.
The digital inputs available are each permanently linked to a General purpose in-
put event message and the control system commands available are each per-
manently linked to a Generic SCADA command event message for this purpose.
Input/command Event message
Digital input 1 18 General purpose input 1
Digital input 2 18 General purpose input 2
... ...
18
Digital input 42 General purpose input 42
Generic SCADA command 1 Generic SCADA command 1
... ...

Table 63: Linking of digital inputs and control system commands with event messages
You can link the event messages with device functions, digital outputs and con-
trol system messages. You can also link all other event messages (e.g., Limit
value U<) with digital outputs and control system messages. Corresponding pa-
rameters, for which you need to enter the relevant event number, are provided
for this purpose.
18 The number of available digital inputs depends on the order-specific device configuration.

8.1.19.1 Linking functions
You can link the General purpose input or Generic SCADA command events
with device functions. This allows you to remotely control the device using digi-
tal inputs or commands via the control system (SCADA). Depending on your de-
vice configuration, various functions are available for this purpose via parame-
ters.
To establish the link, you have to enter the corresponding event number in the
desired parameter.
Note that you can only enter the event numbers of the General purpose in-
i put or Generic SCADA command events.
If you enter event number 500, the link is disabled.
Settings Parameters Link functions
Name Value
Home
Master parallel operation method 500
Follower parallel operation metho... 500
Parallel op. meth. auto. tap sync... 500
Independent regulation 500 Events
Blocking 500
High-speed return 500
Target-tap-position operation 500
Activate desired value 1 500 Information
Activate desired value 2 500

Activate desired value 3 500
Recorder
Figure 228: Linking functions
The desired event number is known [►Section 8.1.23, Page 224].

1. Go to Settings > Parameter > System > Link functions.
2. Select the desired parameter.
3. Enter the desired event number.
Master parallel operation method

If the assigned event is active, the device activates the master parallel operation
method.
Follower parallel operation method

If the assigned event is active, the device activates the follower parallel opera-
tion method.
Automatic tap synchronization parallel operation method

If the assigned event is active, the device activates the automatic tap synchro-
nization parallel operation method.
Independent regulation
If the assigned event is active, the device activates the independent regulation
independent mode.
Deactivate parallel operation

If the assigned event is active, the device deactivates the parallel operation.
Blocking
If the assigned event is active, automatic control is blocked.

Activate remote mode
If the assigned event is active, the device activates remote mode.
High-speed return
If the assigned event is active, the device activates high-speed return. With
high-speed return, the device ignores the set delay time of automatic voltage
regulation.
Target-tap-position operation
If the assigned event is active, the device switches to the defined target tap po-
sition.
Activate desired value 1

If the assigned event is active, the device activates the desired value 1.




Increase desired value

If the assigned event is active, the device prompts an increase in the desired
value.
Decrease desired value

If the assigned event is active, the device prompts a decrease in the desired
value.
8.1.19.2 Linking digital outputs

You can link each event with a digital output. The device provides a maximum
of 20 digital outputs for this purpose. When you link a digital output to an
event, the device issues a signal to this output if the event occurs. The signal
persists until the event stops. A parameter is available for each available digital
output.
To forward input signals or control system commands, you need to link the
i digital outputs or control system messages with the General purpose input
or Generic SCADA command events.

Settings Parameters Link outputs
Name Value
Home
Generic digital output 1 500
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 229: Linking digital outputs
The desired event number is known [►Section 8.1.23, Page 224].

1. Go to Settings > Parameter > System > Link outputs.
3. Enter the desired event number.
Generic digital output X

You can use this parameter to link the digital output with an event message. To
do so, enter the desired event number.

i
8.1.19.3 Linking control system messages
You can link each event with a control system message. The device provides
25 SCADA messages for this purpose. When you link a SCADA message to an
event, the device sets the data point to "On" when the event occurs. When the
event stops, the device sets the data point to "Off". A parameter is available for
each available SCADA message.
To forward control system commands, you need to link the control system
i messages to the General purpose input or Generic SCADA command
events.
Settings Parameters Link messages
Name Value
Home
Generic status message 1 500
Generic status message 4 500 Events
Generic status message 8 500 Information

Recorder
Figure 230: Linking SCADA messages

The desired event number is known.
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Link messages.
Generic status message X

You can use this parameter to link the SCADA message with an event message.
To do so, enter the desired event number.

i
8.1.20 MR sensor bus
The optionally available MR sensor bus function lets you connect digital and
analog sensors to the device over Modbus RTU. The MR sensor bus supports
the connection of up to 31 sensors (Modbus server). The ISM® device operates
as a Modbus client.
Ensure that no other Modbus client is connected over the MR sensor bus.
i Assign a unique Modbus address to each sensor you are connecting over
MR sensor bus. The MR sensor bus may experience errors if multiple sen-
sors are using the same Modbus address.
8.1.20.1 Configuring the MR sensor bus (with CPU I / CPU II)

If you would like to use the MR sensor bus via the CPU I or CPU II assembly, you
can configure the Modbus protocol with the following parameters.
Note that the data transmission depends heavily on the number of sensors and
data points as well as the query rate and send delay time parameters. Value
changes can be transmitted on a delay lasting from several seconds to a few
minutes as a result.
The data values transmitted over Modbus do not get checked for validity (valid
flag). Therefore, the failure of a sensing element cannot be detected.
Settings Parameters Sensorbus
Name Value
Home
Baud rate 19200
Number of databits 8
Parity Even Events
Polling rate 1s
Send delay time 0.075 s
Information
Recorder
Figure 231: Sensor bus
The operation described below is only possible if you access the visualiza-
i tion using a computer. You must also have a Parameterizer or Administra-
tor user role.
Go to Settings > Parameter > System > Sensor bus.

Baud rate
– 9600 baud
– 19200 baud
– 38400 baud
– 57600 baud
– 115200 baud
Number of data bits

Parity
tions:
– None
– Even
– Odd
Number of stop bits

Polling rate
This parameter lets you set the minimum time interval to be used to poll the
sensors.
Send delay time

This parameter lets you set the period that the device is to wait between the re-
sponse of one sensor and the query of another sensor.
8.1.20.2 Configuring the MR sensor bus (with CPU)

In order to use the MR sensor bus via the CPU module, you must assign a serial
interface [►Section 8.1.8, Page 176] to the Sensor bus service. In addition, you
must configure the parameters of the serial interface [►Section 8.1.7, Page
175].
Note that the data transmission depends heavily on the number of sensors and
data points as well as the query rate and send delay time parameters. Value
changes can be transmitted on a delay lasting from several seconds to a few
minutes as a result.
The data values transmitted over Modbus do not get checked for validity (valid
flag). Therefore, the failure of a sensing element cannot be detected.
8.1.20.3 Managing sensors

This menu lets you manage sensors connected to the device over the MR sen-
sor bus. The following information is displayed:
– Sensor name
– Sensor version
– Sensor manufacturer
– Sensor Modbus address
– Status
– Blue: The sensor is connected to the sensor bus
– Red: The sensor is not connected to the sensor bus

Figure 232: Managing sensors
tor user role.
Adding a sensor
If you would like to add a sensor, then you have to set the Modbus address,
sensor name and version. In addition, you can select whether the device is to
perform an automatic function assignment of the data points.
Proceed as follows to add a sensor:

1. Go to Settings > Sensor bus > Sensor management.
2. Press the New sensor button.
Figure 233: Add sensor
3. Enter the Modbus address or press the Next free address button.
4. Select Select sensor name.
5. Select Version.
6. If necessary, enable the Assign functions option.
8. After adding a sensor or several sensors, restart the device to apply the
changes.
Before restarting the device, you can add even more sensors or change ad-
i ditional settings such as the function assignment or configuration of ana-
log or digital inputs.

Removing a sensor
Proceed as follows to delete a sensor:
1. Go to Settings > Sensor bus > Sensor management.
2. Press the button to delete the sensor.
8.1.20.4 Function assignment

You can link the transmitted signals from the sensor to functions on the device.
This requires configuring the desired device functions of the digital and analog
inputs for Modbus. Observe the following sections for more information:
– Linking digital inputs and outputs [►Section 8.1.22, Page 222]
– Linking analog inputs and outputs [►Section 8.1.21, Page 219]
If device functions are configured for Modbus, you can link the functions to the
data points of the sensors.
Figure 234: Assigning functions
tor user role.
Proceed as follows to assign the functions:

The functions of the digital signals [►Section 8.1.22, Page 222] and analog
signals [►Section 8.1.21, Page 219] are configured for Modbus.
1. Go to Settings > Sensor bus > Function assignment.
2. Select the desired sensor address (Adr.).
3. Select the desired Data point.
4. Press the Accept button to save the changes.
5. After assigning the functions, reset the device to apply the changes.
8.1.20.5 Defining the sensors

This menu lets you define your own sensors, which you can connect to the de-
vice over the MR sensor bus. The defined sensors are then available in the sen-
sor management function as a selection option.
The sensor editor shows you an overview of the defined sensors:

– Name
– Version
– Manufacturer

You can add, edit or delete sensor definitions.
Figure 235: Sensor editor
Incorrect configurations can cause unwanted device behavior. Ensure that

i the sensor configuration is performed only by specialists with knowledge
of the overall system and use the two-man rule for reviewing the configura-
tion.
Adding a sensor definition

You have to set the following values to add a sensor:
Value Description
Sensor name Entry field, max. 20 characters
Sensor version Format: X.Y.Z (e.g. 1.5.2), used together with the sensor name to
provide unique identification of the sensor in the sensor manage-
ment menu.
Sensor manufacturer Entry field, max. 15 characters

(optional)
Data points Configuration of the sensor data points

Table 64: Adding sensors
tor user role.

Proceed as follows to add a sensor:
1. Go to Settings > Sensor bus > Sensor editor.
2. Press the New sensor button.
Figure 236: Defining a new sensor
3. Enter Sensor name, Sensor version, Sensor manufacturer (optional).

4. Press the Accept button to save the settings and configure the data points.
Configuring data points

You must set the following values in accordance with the sensor data sheet to
configure a data point:
– Data type
– IREG: Input register (analog input)
– DISC: Discrete input (digital input)
– HREG: Holding register
– COIL: Digital input/output
– Register
– Description
– Word order
– Little-endian
– Big-endian
– Data type
– Multiplier (only with IREG or HREG) for converting the sensor value
– Optional: Validation (only with IREG or HREG), i.e. checking the sensor with
the help of limit values
– DISC or COIL for validation designation
– Minimum and maximum permitted value of the sensor (based on the raw
value determined by the sensor, setting range dependent on the data
type)

Figure 237: Configuring data points
To configure a data point, proceed as follows:

1. Select the desired Type.
2. Press the + New button to add a new data point or press the button to
edit a data point.
Figure 238: Adding a data point
3. Enter the Description.

4. Select the Data type and Register.
5. Select the Word order of the sensor.
6. Only with IREG or HREG: Enter the Multiplier.
7. Optional (only with IREG or HREG): Enter the Register of the DISC or COIL for
validation and select the value for Validity (High-active: 1 = valid; Low-active:
0 = valid).
8. Optional (only with IREG or HREG): Enter the Minimum value/Maximum
value for the validation. If the raw value is not within the set range, the value
is interpreted as being invalid.
9. Press the Accept button to save the data point.
Editing a sensor definition
Editing the sensor definition does not have any effect on sensors that have
i already been added to the sensor management function. The edited sen-
sor definition is available only if you add a new sensor to the sensor man-
agement function.

To edit the sensor definition, proceed as follows:
2. Press the button.
Figure 239: Editing a sensor definition
3. Enter Sensor name, Sensor version, Sensor manufacturer (optional).

4. Optional: Press the Edit button to go to the data point configuration. Any
changes made are applied in this case.
5. Press the Accept button to save the settings.
Deleting a sensor definition
Deleting the sensor definition does not have any effect on sensors that
i have already been added to the sensor management function.
To delete the sensor definition, proceed as follows:

8.1.20.6 Displaying information on the connected sensors

You can display information on the status and the current values of all sensors
that you have added to the sensor management function. The overview screen
displays the following information:
– Sensor status
– Red: Error
– Blue: OK
– Name
– Version
– Manufacturer
– Modbus address

Figure 240: Overview screen
Go to Information > System > Sensor bus.
Detailed information on the sensor

You can display the current transmitted data point for each sensor on the over-
view screen. The following information is displayed:
– Register (Reg.)
– Description
– Raw value
– Function value
– Function
If a value is identified as being "invalid", this value is displayed in red. If you have
assigned a function to the sensor, the function value is also displayed.
Figure 241: Detailed information

2. Select the desired Type.
8.1.21 Configuring analog inputs and outputs (optional)
You can flexibly configure the device's analog inputs and outputs and assign de-
vice functions.
The device supports analog sensors with linear characteristic curves and only
outputs analog signals with linear characteristic curves.

8.1.21.1 Creating a backup

You need to create a backup to be able to reset the system in the event that any
incorrect configuration settings are made. To do so, proceed as follows:
2. Select the option Settings to export a backup copy of the current settings.
3. Select the desired Interface (USB or PC).
4. Press the Export button to start the export.
8.1.21.2 AIO configuration

Page 140].
The following information is displayed in tabular form for configuring the analog
Figure 242: Configuring analog inputs/outputs
You can only change the configuration of the analog inputs and outputs if
i you have a Parameter Configurator or Administrator role.

– Password: admin
1. Go to Settings > AIO configuration.
2. Configure the properties such as Function, Sign. type and Card/channel.

3. Select the button to configure the values as desired.
Figure 243: Entering values

5. Confirm the security prompt with Save to save the changes.
Function
Function of the analog input (I: ...) or the analog output (O: ...). You can adjust
the designation.
Signal type
Select signal type of analog sensor or deactivate analog input.
– 4...20 mA
– 0...10 V
– PT100-2/3/4, PT1000-2/3/4
Card/channel
Select the slot and channel of the analog sensor. Note the connection diagram
supplied. This property is only available for GPAI.
Unit
Set the unit of the signal. This property is only available for GPAI.
Decimal places
Set up to three decimal places. This property is only available for GPAI.
Minimum/maximum value
Set the minimum and maximum values of the sensor, e.g. with a 4...20 mA sig-
nal, the corresponding measured value for 4 mA and the corresponding value
for 20 mA.
This property is not available if the sensors are connected over the MR sensor
bus (Modbus).

Correction factor and correction offset
Setting a correction offsets systematic errors of the analog signals. The correc-
tion is determined by multiplying a factor by the sum of the offset. The mini-
mum and maximum values of the function values apply as a limit value for the
correction. There is no limit for the correction offset.
Measured variable
Max.
Correction factor
Correction offset
Min.
Min. Max. Analog signal
Figure 244: Analog signal with linear characteristic curve, correction factor <1 and correction
offset
Correction factor
Set the correction factor (m) for the correction of the function value (x). The cor-
rected function value (y) is: y = (m * x) + t. This property is only available for in-
puts.
Correction offset
Set the offset (t) for the correction of the function value (x). The corrected func-
tion value (y) is: y = (m * x) + t. This property is only available for inputs.
8.1.22 Configuring digital inputs and outputs
Upon delivery, the configurable digital inputs and outputs of the device are con-
figured as follows:
– Input: High active
– Output: N/O contact (NO)
You can change this configuration if necessary.
8.1.22.1 DIO configuration
Ensure that the configuration of the digital inputs and outputs is suitable
i for the functions used. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur in the device
and the connected periphery.

The following information is displayed in tabular form for configuring the digital
Figure 245: Configuring digital inputs and outputs
i tion using a computer. You can only change the configuration of the digital
inputs and outputs if you have a Parameter Configurator or Administrator
role.

– Password: admin
To configure the device's digital inputs and outputs, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > DIO configuration.
2. Where necessary, select the buttons ▲ or ▼ to sort the properties in a col-
umn alphabetically.
3. Configure the properties as desired.
5. Confirm the security prompt with Yes to save the changes.
Function
Function of the digital input (I: ...) or the digital output (O: ...). You can adjust the
designation.
Signal type
Select signal type:
– Digital: Digital input
Configuration
Configure the device's digital inputs and outputs as follows:
– DI: High active or low active
– DO: N/O contact (NO), N/C contact (NC); Note: If the device is disconnected
or in the event of an error, the digital outputs are always open (no bi-stable
relay).
Assembly Channel
Channel of the DIO assembly to which the function is linked. Functions that are
not linked with a channel are identified with "-". Note the connection diagram
supplied.

8.1.23 Event management
The device is equipped with event management, which allows you to detect
various device operating statuses and to adapt the behavior of the device. You
can call up an overview of the possible events in the device.
8.1.23.1 Displaying and acknowledging events

To display the events currently active, proceed as follows:
Go to Events.
A list of currently pending events appears.
Events
No. Event Time

Home
17.03.2020
8 Limit value I>>
10:56:59/669
17.03.2020
12 Limit value S>>
10:56:59/669
Events
17.03.2020
16 Limit value P>> 10:56:59/669
17.03.2020
18 Limit value Q<<
10:56:59/669
17.03.2020 Information
1001 Ambient temperature invalid
10:56:59/669
17.03.2020
1002 Ambient temperature
3 12 38
Recorder
Confirm Log
Figure 246: Overview of events currently active
Acknowledging events
Acknowledgeable events must be acknowledged in the event overview so that
they are no longer displayed. All other events are automatically removed once
the cause has been fixed (e.g. limit value is no longer exceeded).
To acknowledge the events, proceed as follows:

To acknowledge the events, highlight the desired events in the column,
then press the Acknowledge button.
The events have been acknowledged.
8.1.23.2 Configuring events

The events have the following properties:
Property Description
Event name Brief name of event. If you delete all of the text, the standard
text is displayed.
Event description Description of event. If you delete all of the text, the standard
text is displayed.
Event troubleshooting Instructions for troubleshooting the cause of an event. If you

delete all of the text, the standard text is displayed.
Category – Error (red)

– Warning (yellow)
– Info (gray)
This setting affects the color of the Alarm LED and the event
symbol in the primary navigation.
Report If you activate this option, the event is shown on the display
and, if configured accordingly, issued via an output and the
control system protocol.

Property Description
Save If you activate this option, the event is stored in the event
memory.
Multi-set The event can be triggered several times without having been
(not configurable) deactivated in the meantime.
High active High active: The device generates a signal if the event is pend-
(not configurable) ing.
Low active: The device generates a signal so long as the event
is not pending. If the event is pending, the signal is reset.
Acknowledgeable Acknowledgeable events must be acknowledged in the event

(not configurable) overview so that they are no longer displayed. All other events
are automatically removed once the cause has been fixed (e.g.
limit value is no longer exceeded).
Blocking If the event is active, it blocks automatic voltage regulation.

(not configurable)
Table 65: Properties of events
Settings Events Limit value U<
Name
Limit value U< Home
Description
Value has fallen below the limit value for undervoltage U<.
Remedy Events
Check the current operating conditions of the transformer and the set U<
parameters.
Information
Category Report High active

Save Acknowledgeable
Warning Multi-set Blocking
Recorder
Cancel Accept
Figure 247: Configuring events
To configure an event, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Events.
2. Select the event to be changed in the list.
3. Select the desired options.
4. Press the Accept button to save the change.
8.1.23.3 Displaying event memory

Past events are stored in the event memory. You can adjust the display of
events using different filters. The following filters are available for this purpose:
Filter Description
Time Date and time of event
Category Event category:

– Error (red)
– Warning (yellow)
– Info (gray)
Status Event coming/going:

Event coming
Event going

Filter Description
Components System components
Event Up to 3 events can be selected

To call up the event memory, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Events > Event memory.
Figure 248: Event memory
2. Set the desired Filter.

3. Select the desired events in the Events list.
4. Press the Search button to display the desired events.
Exporting events
You can export the event memory entries currently displayed as a csv file. If you
first create a filter, only the filtered entries are exported.
To export the events, proceed as follows:

First, connect using Connect PC or connect a storage medium to the USB
port on the CPU I/CPU II module.
1. Press the Export button.
2. Select the desired option for data transmission (PC or USB).
The data is exported.
8.1.23.4 Exporting the event messages overview

You can call up an overview of the possible events in the device.
First, connect using Connect PC or connect a storage medium to the USB
port on the CPU I [►Section 4.4.1.5.4, Page 42] module.
1. Go to Export > Event list.
2. Select the location where you want to save it.
3. Press the Start export button.
The overview of event messages is exported.
8.1.24 User administration
User administration is based on a system of roles. You must assign a role to ev-
ery user. You can define access rights to parameters and events for each role.

8.1.24.1 User roles
The access rights to device functions and settings are controlled using a hierar-
chical system of roles. The system has 5 different roles with different access
rights. Some of these access rights are fixed, but you can configure the access
rights to particular parameters and events. Note the Setting access rights to pa-
rameters and events [►Section 8.1.24.4, Page 230] section.
If you are not logged in on the device, you will assume the "Data display"
i user role.
Upon delivery, the following roles are provided:
Role Description
Data display User who can only view data of relevance to operation.
– Display all parameters
– Display all events
Diagnostics User who can view data and log data of relevance to operation.
– Display all events
– Export log data
Operator User who can view data of relevance to operation and acknowl-
edge events. The user can perform manual tap-change opera-
tions using the device's controls.
– Display and acknowledge all events
Parameter configurator User who can view and modify data of relevance to operation.
– Display and modify all parameters
– Import and export parameters
– Display, modify, and acknowledge all events
Administrator User who can view and modify all data.

– Read all parameters
– Display, modify, and acknowledge all events
Table 66: Roles in delivery status
Access to the following areas of the device is linked to the roles:
Function Data display Diagnostics Operator Parameter con- Administrator

figurator
Administration - - - - +
Restart device - - + + +
Import - - - + +
Export - + - + +
Set date and time - - + + +
Calling up the commissioning - - - + +

wizard
Calibrate resistor contact series - - - + +
Actuation of the RAISE, LOWER, - - + + +

REMOTE, AVR AUTO, and AVR
MANUAL keys
Setting topology - - - + +

Function Data display Diagnostics Operator Parameter con- Administrator
figurator
Configuring analog inputs and - - - + +

outputs
Configuring digital inputs and - - - + +

outputs
Setting TPLE - - - + +
Configuring data points - - - + +
Calling up the maintenance wiz- - - - + +

ard
Changing tap position table - - - + +
Enabling ECOTAP Modbus - - - + +
Adding sensors to the MR sensor - - - + +

bus
Table 67: Access rights permanently linked to the roles
8.1.24.2 Changing the password

All users can change their passwords provided that the user account is not set
up as a group account. You can only change a group account's password if you
are logged in as the administrator.
Note that the password must satisfy the following requirements:

– At least eight characters
– At least three of the four following character types
– Upper case letters
– Lower case letters
– Numbers
– Special characters
To change the password, proceed as follows:
1. Select Username in the status line.
Figure 249: Changing the password
2. Enter the new Password twice.

3. Press the Accept button to save the changed password.

8.1.24.3 Creating, editing and deleting users
You can set the following options for all users:
– Username and password
– User role: You can assign a role to every user. The access rights to parame-
ters and events are linked to the roles.
– Group access: With this option, you can declare a user account to be a group
account (e.g. for access by different people). Users with group access cannot
change their own password. The password can only be changed by the ad-
ministrator.
– Active: You can activate or deactivate the user. Deactivated users cannot log
in. The user data is still stored in the device.
– Auto login: You can activate the Auto-login function for a user. This user is
automatically logged in when the system is restarted or another user logs
out.
Figure 250: Overview of users created
You can only create, edit, and delete users if you are assigned an adminis-
i trator role.

– Password: admin
Creating users
To create a new user, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > User administration > User accounts.
2. Press the Create user button.
3. Enter the Username and then the Password twice.
4. Select the desired User role.
5. If necessary, activate the Group access, Active or Automatic login options.
6. Press the Accept button to save the user.
Editing users
To edit an existing user, proceed as follows:
2. In the list, select the button for the desired user.
3. Make the amendments desired.
4. Press the Accept button to save the user.

Deleting a user
To delete an existing user, proceed as follows:
2. In the list, select the button for the desired user.
3. Press the Accept button to delete the user.
8.1.24.4 Setting access rights to parameters and events

You can configure access rights to parameters and events for the available
roles. The following options are available for this purpose:
– Read: Parameter/event may be displayed.
– Write: Parameter/event may be modified.
– Acknowledge: Event may be acknowledged.
Figure 251: Setting access rights for an event
You can only change access rights if you are assigned an administrator
i role.

– Password: admin
Setting access rights to parameters/events

1. Go to Settings > User administration > Parameter authorizations or Event
authorizations.
A list of all parameters or events appears.
2. Edit the desired entry in the list using the button.
3. Select the desired options.
4. Press the Accept button to save the change.
5. Restart the device to apply the changed rights.
8.1.24.5 User authentication via RADIUS (optional)

The device supports user authentication via RADIUS in accordance with
RFC 2865. In this case, the device also functions as a RADIUS client. To use RA-
DIUS, you must create a dictionary for ISM® devices on your RADIUS server and
set the parameters for RADIUS on the device.

Note the following information:
– Only use RADIUS in a secure network, as sensitive information is transmit-
ted.
– If a user ID has been created both on the RADIUS server and locally on the
device, the device first tries to log in via the RADIUS server. If it is not possible
to log in, the device will use the locally saved login data.
– If a user ID has not been created on the RADIUS server, the device uses the
locally saved login data.
8.1.24.5.1 Creating a dictionary on the RADIUS server

You must create a dictionary for ISM® devices on your RADIUS server in accor-
dance with the following specification.
VENDOR MR 34559
BEGIN-VENDOR MR
# Attributes
ATTRIBUTE MR-ISM-User-Group 1 integer
# Predefined values for attribute 'MR-ISM-User-Group'
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Administrator 1
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Parameter-configurator 2
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Operator 3
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Diagnostics 4
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Data-display 5
END-VENDOR MR
If your RADIUS server supports the importing of a dictionary, you can export the
dictionary for ISM® devices from the device and import it onto your RADIUS
server. For more information, refer to the information in the section titled Ex-
porting data [►Section 8.1.28.1, Page 235].
The user groups of the dictionary correspond to the user roles [►Section
8.1.24.1, Page 227] of the device and the corresponding authorizations.
8.1.24.5.2 Configuring RADIUS

To establish a connection to the RADIUS server, you must set the following pa-
rameters.
Settings Parameters RADIUS
Name Value
Home
Activate RADIUS client Off
RADIUS server 0.0.0.0
RADIUS server port 1812
Authentication protocol CHAP Events
Key (shared secret) default
Information
Recorder
Figure 252: Configuring RADIUS
You can only configure RADIUS if you are assigned an administrator role.
i

– Password: admin
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > RADIUS.
Activate RADIUS client

You can use this parameter to activate the RADIUS client.
RADIUS server
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the RADIUS server.
RADIUS server port

You can use this parameter to set the port of the RADIUS server.
Authentication protocol
You can use this parameter to set the authentication protocol through which
the server and client communicate. You can select the following options:
– PAP (password authentication protocol)
– CHAP (challenge handshake protocol)
Key (shared secret)

You can use this parameter to set the key (shared secret). You must set up the
same key on the RADIUS client and the RADIUS server. The key may contain a
maximum of 127 characters from the ASCII character set.
8.1.25 Brute-force protection
The device is equipped with a brute-force protection function for the login
screen of the web-based visualization. This feature allows you to prevent an
unauthorized person from learning a user password for the device through sim-
ple guessing/trial and error. This is achieved by blocking the user from logging
into the device for a certain period of time if their password has been entered
incorrectly several times in a row.
Figure 253: Brute-force protection
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Brute-force protection..
Activate brute-force protection

You can use this parameter to activate the brute-force protection function.

Failed attempts interval
You can use this parameter to set the time interval for detecting incorrect lo-
gins. If the user makes unsuccessful login attempts multiple times within this
time interval, the user will be blocked from logging in.
Number of failed attempts

You can use this parameter to set the number of incorrect attempts within the
time interval. If the user makes the set number of unsuccessful login attempts
within the time interval, the user will be blocked from logging in.
Block time
You can use this parameter to set how long the user will be blocked from log-
ging in for. Once this time has elapsed, login attempts can be made again.
8.1.26 Hardware
Under Hardware, you can display information on the device's hardware. You will
find information about the signal level of the individual channels for the assem-
blies.
Figure 254: Displaying information for the device's hardware (example)
1. Go to Information > System > Hardware.

2. Select the desired Assembly in order to display the signal levels of the chan-
nels.
8.1.26.1 Status of the DIO assembly

You can display the status of the digital inputs and outputs of the DIO assem-
bly.
– Terminal pin
– Status of the input (I: …) or output (O: …)
– Blue: There is a signal (logical 1) at the input or output.
– Gray: There is no signal (logical 0) at the input or output.
– Linked function

Figure 255: Status of the DIO assembly
8.1.26.2 Status of the AIO assembly

You can display the status of the analog inputs and outputs of the AIO assem-
bly. If a value is not within the permitted range, this value will be displayed in
red.
Figure 256: Status of the AIO assembly

8.1.27 Software
Under Software, you can display the version status of the software components
of the device.
Figure 257: Information about the device's software
Go to Information > System > Software.
8.1.28 Import/export manager
The device is equipped with an import/export manager, which can be used to

export and import various data.
To transfer the data, the following options are available:
Option Description
USB Data transfer via USB port on rear of CPU I/CPU II assembly.
PC Data transfer via PC using web-based visualization.

Table 68: Data transfer options
8.1.28.1 Exporting data
The device stops logging the measured value log data for the duration of
i the export.
You can export the following data from the device, depending on your device
configuration:

Backup
Option Description
System image (.rhi / .rhp) Complete image of the system (software and configura-
tion). If you are using the option "with history", all of the
event memory entries are also exported. If you select the
"with TPLE" option, the customer program is exported. You
can select whether you would like to export all records or
only records from the last 10 days.
Settings (.rhi / .rhp) Device settings:

– Parameters (settings, access rights)
– Events (category, behavior, text, access rights)
– User configuration
If available, the settings of the following functions are also
exported:
– Topology
– AIO configuration
– DIO configuration
– Tap position table
– Sensor bus
Customer program (TPLE) Customer program export (TPLE).

(.rhi)
Data point configuration Data point configuration of the control system.

(.rhi)
Sensor-bus device descrip- Sensor description of the sensors for MR sensor bus.
tion (.rhi)
Custom sensor-bus dev. de- Sensor description of the sensors for MR sensor bus that
scription (.rhi) have been created with the sensor editor.
Table 69: Exporting data: Backup group
Information
Option Description
Operating instructions (.zip) Operating instructions, protocol specifications.
Licenses (.zip) License text of the software components used.
SCADA configuration (.zip) Control system configuration (e.g. ICD file for IEC 61850).
Table 70: Exporting data: Information group
System
Option Description
Event list (.csv) Complete list of all possible events.
Parameter list (.csv) Parameter list with descriptive text and values (min, max,
current).
System configuration (.xml) System configuration.
RADIUS library (.zip) Dictionary for importing on a RADIUS server.

Table 71: Exporting data: System group

Records
Option Description
Event log (.csv) All event memory entries.
Security log (.csv) Logbook of all instances of access and changes relating to
Optional: System log (.csv) security.
Recorder (.zip) Measured value memory export.
VAM export (.zip) Export of vibro-acoustic records. You can export the data in
its entirety or select certain records.
Maintenance logbook (.xml) Export of entries in the maintenance logbook.

Table 72: Exporting data: Records group
Only remove the USB stick once the data transfer is complete. Otherwise,
i data may be lost.
To export data, proceed as follows:

2. Select the desired option for the export and follow the instructions on the
screen.
8.1.28.2 Importing data (software version 3.800 and later)

Depending on your device configuration, you can import the following data:
Option Description
System image Complete image of the system (software and configura-

tion), with or without history (recorded data).
During import, you can select which of the following set-
tings are to be imported:
If available, you can also import the settings of the following
functions:
– Topology
– Sensor bus
– Certificates
Customer program Customer program import (TPLE).
Language Import of additional languages. You can install a maximum

of five different languages on the device. If five languages
are already installed, you will be asked to delete one during
the import process.

Option Description
SSL certificate Import of an SSL certificate with associated key:

– Server certificate (.crt + .pem)
– Client certificate (.crt + .pem)
– Client CA (.crt)
For the import, you will have to compress the certificate
(*.crt) and key (*.pem) in a zip file.
You can import certificates with the following key authenti-
cation:
– RSA with 1,024 bits
– ECDSA with 256 bits ("secp256r1" or "prime256v1"
curve).
Settings You can import device settings from a backup file of this de-
vice, an update file or a different device. During import, you
can select which of the following settings are to be im-
ported:
If available, you can also import the settings of the following
functions:
– Topology
– Sensor bus
– Certificates
Data point configuration Data point configuration import
SCADA configuration Import of the control system configuration (e.g. SCD file for
IEC 61850).
Sensor bus Sensor description of the sensors for MR sensor bus.

Table 73: Importing data
If you import the settings of the AIO/DIO configuration of a system in

i which sensors are linked via sensor bus, you must also select the sensor
bus option for the import. Otherwise you must re-link the sensor signals
with the device functions (AIO configuration [►Section 8.1.21, Page 219] or
DIO configuration [►Section 8.1.22, Page 222]). The same applies if you
want to import a sensor bus configuration. In this case, you must also im-
port the AIO/DIO configuration or manually link the sensor signals with the
device functions manually.
NOTICE Damage to the file system!

The file system can be damaged due to an incorrect data transmission
process. A damaged file system can lead to the device no longer being func-
tional.
Do not disconnect the device from the power supply during the import.
In addition, during the download, do not remove the USB flash drive or dis-
connect the network connection.
To import data, proceed as follows:

3. Select Browse, select the file to be imported and select Start upload.
The file is checked.

4. Optional: Select the desired options for the import.
5. Press the Start update button.
NOTICE! The device function (monitoring/control) is stopped.
The data is imported, then the device is restarted. During the restart, the re-
lays are reset.
8.1.28.3 Recorder.zip
The data of the measured value memory (recorder) will be exported as CSV files
with the following properties:
– The file name of the CSV file shows the time stamp of the first data set in the
file.
– Invalid values will be marked as "#NV".
– If a value has not been saved for a time stamp, the previous value will be
adopted. If no previous values exist, a value will not be issued.
– SampleClassIndex: The sample class index indicates which data sets belong
together. The sample class index is increased when a start condition for mea-
sured value recording is satisfied (e.g. torque recording at the start of an on-
load tap-changer), when the device is restarted, or when you change the de-
vice time.
8.1.29 Transformer Personal Logic Editor (TPLE)
You can use the Transformer Personal Logic Editor (TPLE) function to program
simple logical links via the web-based visualization. You can also link the inputs
and outputs available on the device using function modules.
Note that the device does not meet the requirements of a protective de-
i vice. Therefore, do not use TPLE to produce protective functions.
8.1.29.1 Function
8.1.29.1.1 Function groups

There are 10 function groups available that you can use to combine various sub-
tasks into one function. In one function group, you can link up to 12 function
modules with variables. You can rename function groups and activate or deacti-
vate them individually.
8.1.29.1.2 Variables
The following types of variables for information processing are available for
TPLE:
– Event inputs: You can use all the device's events as inputs for a function.
– Event outputs: 100 generic events are available as outputs for functions.
– Binary inputs: You can use all the device's configured digital inputs and up to
42 generic inputs of the device as inputs for a function.
– Binary outputs: You can use all the device's configured digital outputs and up
to 20 generic outputs of the device as outputs for a function. If there is a con-
trol system present, 10 generic control system messages are available.
– Analog inputs: You can use all the device's configured analog inputs as in-
puts for a function.
– Binary flags: You can use up to 100 binary flags as variables to store interme-
diate values. You can use binary flags as inputs and outputs for a function.
– Analog flags: You can use up to 50 analog flags as variables to store interme-
diate values. You can use analog flags as inputs and outputs for a function.
– Discrete inputs: You can use all the device's available discrete inputs as in-
puts for a function.

8.1.29.1.3 Function modules
TPLE provides various function modules for processing the information.
8.1.29.1.3.1 AND
Description AND, logical AND link
Inputs Input 1…4 (BOOL)
Outputs Output (BOOL)
Parameter None
Function If all configured inputs are TRUE, the output is TRUE, other-
wise it is FALSE.
Initial state All inputs and outputs are FALSE.

Non-configured inputs are assumed to be TRUE.
If no input is configured, the module is not run so it remains
in its initial state.
Table 74: AND function module
8.1.29.1.3.2 NAND
Description NAND, logical NOT-AND link
Parameter None
Function If all configured inputs are TRUE, the output is FALSE, oth-
erwise it is TRUE.

Non-configured inputs are assumed to be TRUE so that
they have no impact on the output.
If no input is configured, the output therefore remains in the
initial state of FALSE.
Table 75: NAND function module
8.1.29.1.3.3 OR
Description OR, logical OR link
Parameter None
Function If one of configured inputs is TRUE, the output is TRUE, oth-

erwise it is FALSE.

Non-configured inputs are assumed to be FALSE.
Table 76: OR function module
8.1.29.1.3.4 NOR
Description NOR, logical NOT-OR link

Parameter None
Function If all configured inputs are FALSE, the output is TRUE, oth-
erwise it is FALSE.

Non-configured inputs are assumed to be FALSE so that
If no input is configured, the output remains in the initial
state of FALSE anyway.
Table 77: NOR function module
8.1.29.1.3.5 XOR
Description XOR, logical EXCLUSIVE-OR link
Parameter None
Function If an odd number of inputs is TRUE, the output is TRUE, oth-

erwise it is FALSE.

If no input is configured, the output therefore remains in the
initial state of FALSE.
Table 78: XOR function module
8.1.29.1.3.6 NOT
Description NOT, logical NOT link
Inputs Input (BOOL)
Parameter None
Function If the input is TRUE, the output is FALSE, otherwise it is

TRUE.

If the input is not configured, it is assumed to be TRUE so
that the output remains in the initial state of FALSE.
Table 79: NOT function module
8.1.29.1.3.7 Current impulse relay

Description RS, current impulse relay
Inputs Trigger (BOOL)

Set (BOOL)
Reset (BOOL)
Parameter None

Function If the Reset input is TRUE, Output forcibly becomes FALSE.
If the Reset input is FALSE and the Set input is TRUE, Out-
put forcibly becomes TRUE.
If the Reset and Set inputs are FALSE, the status of Output
changes when there is a rising edge at the Trigger input. If
there is no edge at the Trigger input, Output remains un-
changed.

Table 80: Current impulse relay function module
Figure 258: Example of RS
1 Trigger 2 Set
3 Reset 4 Output
8.1.29.1.3.8 Switch-on delay

Description TON, switch-on delay
Inputs Input (BOOL)
Parameter Time ms (UINT32), 1...1,000,000, default = 1,000
Function If Input has a rising edge, the internal timer is set to zero
and starts to run.
When the internal timer has reached or exceeded the pa-
rameter value, Output becomes TRUE and the counter
stops running.
If Input becomes FALSE, Output also instantly becomes
FALSE.
If the value of Time_ms is less than the cycle time, the cycle
time applies instead.

Table 81: Switch-on delay function module

8.1.29.1.3.9 Switch-off delay
Description TOFF, switch-off delay

Reset (BOOL)
Function If Input becomes TRUE, Output also instantly becomes

TRUE, this condition takes priority.
If Input has a falling input, the internal timer is set to zero
and starts to run.
When the internal timer has reached or exceeded the pa-
rameter value, Output becomes FALSE and the counter
stops running.
If Input is FALSE and the Reset input becomes TRUE, Out-
put instantly and forcibly becomes FALSE and the internal
timer is set to the configured desired value.

Table 82: Switch-off delay function module
8.1.29.1.3.10 Pulse
Description PLSE, pulse
Function If there is a rising edge at the Trigger input at any time, the
internal timer is set to zero and starts to run, the output be-
comes TRUE.
If the Trigger input becomes FALSE again during the pulse
time, this has no impact on the expiration of the pulse time.
Once the internal timer has expired, the output becomes
FALSE.

Table 83: Pulse function module
8.1.29.1.3.11 Symmetrical pulse generator

Description CLCK, symmetrical pulse generator
Inputs Enable (BOOL)

Function The internal timer runs for a long as Enable is TRUE.
When the internal timer has reached or exceeded the con-
figured time value, the status of the output changes and the
timer is restarted. The configured time therefore corre-
sponds to half the period duration of the resulting signal. If
the Enable input becomes FALSE, the output also instantly
becomes FALSE and the internal timer is reset.

Table 84: Symmetrical pulse generator function module
8.1.29.1.3.12 Counter (forwards/backwards)

Description COUNT, incremental counter

Direction (BOOL)
Reset (BOOL)
Lock (BOOL)
Outputs SINT32 (SINT32)

REAL32 (REAL32)
Parameter Reset value (SINT32), -10,000,000… +10,000,000, default =

0
Function If there is a rising edge at Reset, the output value is set to

the value of the Reset value parameter. A rising edge at Re-
set takes priority over all other inputs.
For as long as Lock is TRUE, the pulse signal is not evalu-
ated and the counter reading is retained. If no input is as-
signed, the default value FALSE is assumed.
When Direction input = FALSE, the output value is incre-
mented by one with every rising edge at the Trigger input.
When Direction input = TRUE, the output value is decre-
mented by one with every rising edge at the Trigger input.
Initial state All inputs and outputs are zero or FALSE.

Table 85: Counter (forwards/backwards) function module

Figure 259: Example of COUNT
1 Trigger 2 Direction
3 Reset 4 Lock
5 Output
8.1.29.1.3.13 Analog threshold value switch with hysteresis

Designation THRES, threshold value switch with hysteresis
Inputs Input (REAL32)

Error (BOOL)
Parameter On Limit (REAL32), -10,000,000… +10,000,000, default =

10,000,000
Off Limit (REAL32), -10,000,000 … +10,000,000, default =
-10,000,000
Function On Limit ≥ Off Limit setting:

– If the value of Input is greater than On Limit, Output be-
comes TRUE.
– If the value of Input is less than or equal to Off Limit,
Output becomes FALSE.
On Limit < Off Limit setting:
– If the value of Input is greater than On Limit and at the
same time less than Off Limit, Output becomes TRUE.
Otherwise, the Output is FALSE.

Table 86: Analog threshold value switch with hysteresis function module

Input
On
Off
Output FALSE TRUE FALSE
Figure 260: Analog threshold value switch with the On Limit > Off Limit setting
Input
Off
On
Output TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE
Figure 261: Analog threshold value switch with the On Limit < Off Limit setting
8.1.29.1.3.14 Analog multiplication

Description MUL, analog multiplication
Inputs Value (REAL32)

Multiplier (REAL32)
Outputs Result (REAL32)

Overflow (BOOL)
Parameter Constant multiplier (REAL32), -1,000,000...+1,000,000; de-

fault = 1
Function Result = Value * Multiplier * Constant multiplier

If the REAL32 range of numbers is exceeded, the Overflow
output becomes TRUE.

Table 87: Analog multiplication function module
8.1.29.1.3.15 Analog division

Description DIV, analog division
Inputs Divident (REAL32)

Divisor (REAL32)

DivByZero (BOOL)
Overflow (BOOL)

Parameter Constant divisor (REAL32), -1,000,000...+1,000,000; default
=1
Function Result = Dividend / Divisor / Constant Divisor

If dividing by zero, the DivByZero output becomes TRUE
and Result is set to zero.
output becomes TRUE and Result is set to zero.

Table 88: Analog division function module
8.1.29.1.3.16 Analog addition

Description ADD, analog addition
Inputs Input 1 (REAL32)

Input 2 (REAL32)

Overflow (BOOL)
Parameter Offset (REAL32), -1,000,000...+1,000,000; default = 0
Function Result = Input 1 + Input 2 + Offset


Table 89: Analog addition function module
8.1.29.1.3.17 Analog subtraction

Description SUB, analog subtraction
Inputs Input 1 (REAL32)

Input 2 (REAL32)

Overflow (BOOL)
Parameter Offset (REAL32), -1,000,000...+1,000,000; default = 0
Function Result = Input 1 - Input 2 – Offset


Table 90: Analog subtraction function module
8.1.29.1.3.18 Rising edge

Description RTRG, rising edge trigger
Inputs Input (BOOL)
Parameter -
Function When the input changes from FALSE to TRUE, the output
becomes TRUE for one cycle of the function group and then
changes back to FALSE.

Table 91: Rising edge function module

8.1.29.1.3.19 Falling edge
Description FTRG, falling edge trigger
Inputs Input (BOOL)
Parameter -
Function When the input changes from TRUE to FALSE, the output
becomes TRUE for one cycle of the function group and then
changes back to FALSE.

Table 92: Falling edge function module
8.1.29.1.3.20 Average value

Description AVRG, average value

Enable (BOOL)
Reset (BOOL)
Autorepeat (BOOL)
Outputs Average (REAL32)

Done (BOOL)
Started (BOOL)
SampleCount (UINT32)
Parameter Time ms (UINT32): 1...2,000,000,000, default = 10,000

Sample time ms (UINT32): 1...10,000,000, default = 1,000
Function Averaging starts with a rising edge of Enable. This does not
affect averaging which is already underway. Any output
value remaining from earlier is retained. The Done output
becomes FALSE, the Started output becomes TRUE.
Active averaging is interrupted with a rising edge of Reset.
Average is set to zero, Done and Started become FALSE. If
Enable is also TRUE during the rising Reset edge, a new av-
eraging process is started.
Done becomes TRUE and Started becomes FALSE once av-
eraging is complete. Done remains TRUE until a Reset is de-
tected or new averaging is triggered by a rising edge of En-
able.
If AutoRepeat and Enable are TRUE, a new averaging
process is automatically started each time averaging is com-
pleted. Done is set for one cycle each time averaging is
completed.
The SampleCount output states how many samples have al-
ready been recorded.
Sample time ms is the desired sample time in milliseconds.
It is rounded up to the next whole multiple of the task cycle
time and has a lower limit of at least one task cycle time.
Time ms is the time period desired for averaging. It is inter-
nally rounded up to the next whole multiple of the sample
time and has a lower limit of at least one sample time.

Table 93: Average value function module

Figure 262: AVRG
1 Input 2 Enable
3 Reset 4 AutoRepeat
5 Average 6 Done
7 Started 8 SampleCount
8.1.29.1.3.21 Scaling
Description SCAL, scaling
Outputs Output (REAL32)

Error (BOOL)
Parameter Min In (REAL32): -10,000,000...+10,000,000, default =

-10,000,000
Max In (REAL32): -10,000,000...+10,000,000, default =
+10,000,000
Min Out (REAL32): -10,000,000...+10,000,000, default =
-10,000,000
Max Out (REAL32): -10,000,000...+10,000,000, default =
+10,000,000
Function Output is calculated using the following formula:

Output = Min Out + (Max Out - Min Out) x (In-
put – Min In) / (Max In – Min In)
Output is set to 0 and Error = TRUE when:
– Input is not within the parameters Min In and Max In
– Min In is greater than Max In
– Min Out is greater than Max Out
– Max In is the same size as Min In (division by zero)

Table 94: Scaling function module

8.1.29.1.3.22 Bridge
Designation BRDG, Bridge
Inputs Analog Input (REAL32)

Digital Input (BOOL)
Outputs Analog Output (REAL32)

Digital Output (BOOL)
Parameter -
Function Copies the value of Analog Input to Analog Output and Digi-
tal Input to Digital Output.

Table 95: Bridge function module
8.1.29.1.3.23 RTOI
Description RTOI, Real-to-Integer conversion
Inputs Analog Input (REAL32)
Outputs Analog Output (SINT32)
Parameter -
Function Copies the value of Analog Input to Analog Output and con-
verts REAL32 to SINT32.
Initial state All inputs and outputs are zero.

Table 96: RTOI function module
8.1.29.1.3.24 ITOR
Description ITOR, Integer-to-real conversion
Inputs UINT32 (UINT32)

SINT32 (SINT32)
Outputs Output U (REAL32)

Output S (REAL32)
Parameter -
Function The value of UINT32 is output converted to Output U, the

value of SINT32 is output converted to Output S.
Initial state All inputs and outputs are zero.

Table 97: NAND function module
8.1.29.2 Configuring TPLE

You can configure TPLE on a PC using the web-based visualization. Only a live
view is available on the device's display. To configure TPLE, you have to hold
the role of Administrator or Parameterizer.
– Password: admin
8.1.29.2.1 Editing variables

You can adapt the name and description of the following variables:
– Binary inputs
– Binary outputs
– Analog inputs

– Binary flags
– Analog flags
– Discrete inputs
The names and descriptions of the generic events can also be adapted like
i all other device events. Note the Event management [►Section 8.1.23,
Page 224] section.
The permissible number of characters is limited:

– Name: Maximum of 20 characters
– Description: Maximum of 80 characters
Figure 263: Editing variable
To edit the variable, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > TPLE > Variables.
2. Select the variable you want.
3. Enter the Name and Description.
4. Press the Accept button to save the modified variable.
8.1.29.2.2 Creating functions

Within one function group, you can create up to 12 function modules to depict
one function. To create, edit or delete a function, you have to call up the func-
tion group you want. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > TPLE > Function group.
2. Select the desired Function group.
Figure 264: Function group

Creating function modules
To create a function module, proceed as follows:
Press the + button to create a new function module.
Deleting function modules

To delete a function module, proceed as follows:
Drag the desired function module to the trash can using drag & drop.
Sorting function modules

To sort a function module, proceed as follows:
Drag the desired function module to the desired position using drag & drop.
Editing function module

To edit a function module, proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired function module.
2. Press the Edit button.
Figure 265: Editing function module
3. Select the inputs and outputs you want and set the parameters.
4. Press the Accept button to save the change to the function module.
8.1.29.2.3 Renaming function group

If necessary, you can rename the function group in order to better assign it.
To rename a function group, proceed as follows:


3. Select the text field with the name of the function group and enter the name
you want.
Figure 266: Renaming function group
4. Press [Enter] to accept the change.
8.1.29.2.4 Activating/deactivating function group

You can fully activate or deactivate a function group. When you deactivate a
function group, none of the function group's function modules are processed.
To activate/deactivate a function group, proceed as follows:

3. Press the inactive button.
Red X: Function group is inactive; gray X: Function group is active.
8.1.30 Configuring media converter with managed switch
Observe the following information on configuring the media converter with

managed switch SW 3-3. Use the following browser to call up web-based visual-
ization:
– Firmware version 02.0.01: Internet Explorer 11
– Firmware version 07.1.00 or higher: HTML5-compatible browser, e.g., Google
Chrome
8.1.30.1 Commissioning
Before integrating the Ethernet switch into your network, you must review the
most important settings and adjust them if necessary. During this process, fol-
low the information outlined in this chapter for commissioning the Ethernet
switch.
Establishing a connection to the web-based visualization
The Ethernet switch is supplied with the following factory default settings:
i IP address 192.168.1.1; subnet mask 255.255.255.0; gateway address
0.0.0.0.
For commissioning the Ethernet switch, proceed as follows:

1. Establish connection with a computer via an Ethernet connection.
2. Configure the computer so that it is in the same subnet as the Ethernet
switch.
3. Access the IP address 192.168.1.1 using a browser.

4. Login with the user information (login = admin; password = private). Switch
the language if necessary (German/English).
Figure 267: Login using a web interface
Changing the user name and password

1. Go to Device security > User administration.
2. Create a new use with the administrator user role. Activate the user and as-
sign a password.
3. NOTICE! Ensure that an additional user with the administrator user role is
present in addition to the "admin" user. Then delete the "admin" user.
4. Click on the button or Write to save the change.
Disabling unnecessary services

If you disable all services, you will no longer be able to access the device later
to configure or update it.
Leave at least one service for secure communication enabled (e.g., SN-
MPv3, SSH or HTTPS).
1. Go to Device security > Management Access.
Figure 268: Management Access
2. Select the tab for the desired service.

3. Select Off to disable a service or use the checkboxes to disable sub-functions
of a service.
4. Click on the button or Write to save the change.

Setting network settings
1. Go to Basic settings > Grid > Global.
2. Adjust the network settings and click on the button or Write to save the
changes.
3. In the Basic settings > Load/Save menu, click on the Save button to perma-
nently store the settings.
4. If necessary, establish a connection to the new IP address to continue chang-
ing settings. Click on the Help button to find out more information.
5. Attach the cable for connecting to your network.
8.1.30.2 Configuration
You can use the web interface to configure the Ethernet switch. You can find
more information about the configuration using the online help in the web in-
terface.
Calling up the web interface

To access the web interface, follow the instructions outlined in the Commis-
sioning [►Section 8.1.30.1, Page 253] chapter.
Selecting the redundancy protocol

To select the redundancy protocol, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Redundancy.
2. Select the specific menu item for the redundancy protocol.
3. Change the configuration and select the On option in the Function group
field.
4. In the Basic settings > Load/Save menu, click on the Save button to perma-
nently store the settings.
Deactivate the unused redundancy protocols by selecting the Off option in

i the Function group field.
Resetting to factory settings

To reset the Ethernet switch to its factory default settings, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Basic settings > Load/Save and click on the Reset to factory de-
faults… button.
2. Reestablish the connection to the IP address of 192.168.1.1 if necessary.
3. Set the MR factory settings in accordance with the following table.

Menu Parameter MR factory setting
Redundancy Redundancy protocol PRP
Security > Pre-login Login banner MR-specific

banner
Basic setting > Port Ports 5+6 Deactivated

configuration
Table 98: MR factory setting
8.1.30.3 Updating the Firmware

To ensure the IT security of the device, we recommend always keeping the SW
3-3 assembly firmware up to date. The SW 3-3 assembly is based on the
Belden/Hirschmann EES-25 product. Therefore, follow the information in the
security bulletins published by Belden/Hirschmann:
– https://www.belden.com/security-assurance
You can obtain the firmware updates directly from the manufacturer Belden/
Hirschmann:
– https://catalog.belden.com/index.cfm?event=pd&p=PF_942050003
Install the updates as described by the manufacturer Belden/Hirschmann.
Establishing a Connection
1. Establish connection with a computer via an Ethernet connection.
2. Configure the computer so that it is in the same subnet as the Ethernet
switch.
3. Access the IP address 192.168.1.1 using a browser.
4. Log in with the user data (default settings: login = admin; password = pri-
vate). Switch the language if necessary (German/English).
Exporting the configuration

Prior to any update, the device configuration should be saved so that it can be
reloaded if necessary.
1. Go to Basic settings > Load/Save.
2. Select the NVM storage type and click on the […] > Export button. Save the
file to the PC.
Installing firmware updates

To update the firmware, proceed as follows:
The firmware update has been downloaded.
1. Go to Basic settings > Software and click on the […] button or .
Figure 270: Uploading a firmware update

2. Select the downloaded firmware update file. When doing so, ensure you se-
lect the correct version (HSR or PRP).
The file will be loaded onto the assembly.
3. Click on the update or start button to start the update.
The firmware will be updated.
4. Once the update has been completed successfully: Go to Basic setting >
Restart and click on the Cold start button to restart the assembly.
Figure 271: Restarting the assembly
5. Disconnect the PC connection via the Ethernet connection and re-establish

connection to your network.
8.1.31 Linking to the visualization of external devices
You can create links to the web-based visualization of up to 5 devices. This en-
ables you to call up the visualizations of other devices directly from the visual-
ization of the ISM® device without having to know their IP address.
You can only call up the link to the visualization of an external device if you
i call up the visualization via a PC web browser. If you want to call up the vi-
sualizations of external devices via the MControl touch panel, you must
add the IP addresses of the external devices as additional "servers" in the
touch panel configuration.

8.1.31.1 Setting up an external visualization
To set up a link to the visualization of an external device, you must set the pa-
rameters described in the following.
Figure 272: External visualization
Go to Settings > Parameters > System > External visualization.
External visualization name

Use this parameter to set the designation for the link to the visualization of the
external device (e.g., the designation of the external device).
External visualization product

Use this parameter to select the product whose visualization is to be called up.
By doing so, depending on the product, a defined path is linked to the IP ad-
dress of the external visualization (e.g., <IP address>/visu/home). If you se-
lect the "Generic IP address" option, a path will not be used.
External visualization protocol

Use this parameter to set the protocol for calling up the external visualization.
– https
– http
External visualization IP address

Use this parameter to set the IP address of the external visualization.

8.1.31.2 Calling up an external visualization
To call up an external visualization, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Information > System > External visualization.
Figure 273: External visualization
2. Select the desired visualization.

The visualization will be opened in a new tab in the browser.
3. If necessary, select the Reopen button to reopen the external visualization.
Figure 274: Visualization 1
8.1.32 Configuring the touch panel
8.1.32.1 Server
You can configure the connection to the ISM® devices in this menu.
Figure 275: Configuring servers

SSL/TLS
If you activate the SSL option, the connection to the ISM® device is established
using SSL/TLS encryption.
SSL/TLS warning
If you activate the SSL/TLS warning option, the display shows a warning mes-
sage if the SSL/TL connection to the device cannot be authenticated using a
trustworthy certificate.
Server 1...10
In the entry fields, you can enter the IP address or the hostname of the ISM® de-
vice to which a connection is to be established. You can enter an IP address or
host name for a maximum of 10 devices.
8.1.32.2 Network
You can configure the EHT0 and ETH1 network interfaces of the device in this
menu.
Figure 276: Configuring the network
Host name
You can enter the host name of the device in the entry field.
ETH0/ETH1 interface
You can activate automatic network configuration (DHCP) or set a fixed IP ad-
dress, subnet mask and standard gateway for the ETH0 and ETH1 interfaces.
DNS
You can set whether the DNS server is to be automatically determined. Alterna-
tively, you can enter a preferred and an alternative DNS server address.

8.1.32.3 Display
You can configure the display in this menu.
Figure 277: Configuring the display
Screen brightness
You can set the screen brightness as required.
Switching the screen off

You can set whether the screen is to switch off after a certain period of time.
Deactivating the function "Switch screen off" reduces the service life of the
i display.
Dimming the screen

You can set whether the screen is to dim after a certain period of time. You can
also set the level of brightness to which the screen is to be dimmed.
You can only use the function "Dim screen" if you have activated the function
"Switch screen off".
8.1.32.4 Time
You can set the date and time in this menu.
Figure 278: Setting date and time
Setting date and time

You can set the device date and time manually. Alternatively, you can use an
NTP time server.

NTP
You can synchronize the device time automatically using an NTP time server.
The device must be connected to an NTP time server via Ethernet for this pur-
pose. You can set the following parameters:
– Activating/deactivating NTP
– NTP server 1
– NTP server 2 (optional, in the event of the first time server failing)
– Time zone
8.1.32.5 Security
You can set the security functions in this menu.
Figure 279: Security
Changing the administrator password

You can change the administrator password.
Certificates
You can import your own certificates for authenticating the SSL/TLS connec-
tion. This is necessary, for example, if you use your own certificate for your ISM®
device (server). The device supports the import of certificates of the format
Base64 (file extension .pem).
You can delete all of your own certificates in the device using the function
"Delete certificate memory".
Syslog
You can set whether the device is to send syslog messages to a server. If you
activate this option, you must set the server address (IP address or host name),
the transfer protocol and the port.

8.1.32.6 General
You can set the user interface language and reset the device to the default set-
tings in this menu.
Figure 280: General
8.1.32.7 Import & Export

You can import a system image and export and import the system settings in
this menu.
Figure 281: Import & Export

tional.
Importing a system image or system settings from a USB stick

To import a system image or system settings from a USB stick, proceed as fol-
lows:
Ensure that the USB stick is formatted with the FAT32 file system.
1. Connect the USB stick to the USB port on the device.
2. Call up the configuration menu.
3. Select the menu Import & Export.
4. Select Import system image or Import system settings.
5. Select the desired file and confirm with OK.
The system image or system settings are imported.
Restart the device to complete the import procedure.

Exporting system settings to a USB stick
To export system settings to a USB stick, proceed as follows:
Ensure that the USB stick is formatted with the FAT32 file system.
1. Connect the USB stick to the USB port on the device.
4. Select Export system settings.
The system settings will be exported.
Importing a system image over a network connection

You can import the system image over the network connection. This requires
activating the remote update function. The remote update function supports a
connection over the following web browsers:
– Chrome version 64 or higher
– Internet Explorer version 11 (only with deactivated compatibility mode)
– Firefox version 47 or higher
– Opera version 38 or higher
Communication between the device and PC is unencrypted. Only use the

i remote update function on a secure network.
In order to import the system image over a network connection, proceed as fol-
lows:
3. Activate the remote update option.
4. Enter the IP address of the device in the web browser of your PC (factory set-
ting of MControl 7" ETH0: 192.168.165.243; MControl 10" ETH0:
192.168.165.245).
5. Log in as administrator (user name admin, password as defined during com-
missioning).
6. Select the system image and start the import.
The system image or system settings are imported.
Restart the device to complete the import procedure.
Restoring the system via USB stick

If the device is faulty, you can perform a system restore using a USB stick. Con-
tact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH to receive a USB stick for system
restoration.
In order to restore the system using a USB stick, proceed as follows:

The device has been switched off.
1. Plug the USB stick into the device.
2. Switch on the device.
3. Start the system restore.
The device restarts to complete the system restore.

8.1.32.8 Information
You can have the system properties displayed via this menu.
Figure 282: Displaying device information

8.2 Power grid
8.2.1 Transformer data
The transformation ratios and measuring set-up for the voltage and current
transformers used in the system can be set with the following parameters. The
device uses this information to calculate the corresponding measured values on
the primary side of the current transformer (and therefore the transformer)
from the recorded measured values. These are then displayed.
8.2.1.1 Setting transformer data

You can use the following parameters to set the transformer data. Also note the
Examples for standard circuits for current transformers and voltage transform-
ers [►Section 8.2.1.2, Page 268].
Settings Parameters Transfor...ata
Name Value
Home
Primary transformer voltage 100 kV
Secondary transformer voltage 100 V
Primary transformer current 100 A
Secondary transformer current 1A Events
Phase angle correction 0°
Voltage-transformer circuit 1 Ph phase voltage
Current-transformer circuit 1 Ph phase current
Information
Recorder
Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > Transformer data.
Primary transformer voltage

You can use this parameter to set the primary voltage of the voltage trans-
former in kV.
Secondary transformer voltage

You can use this parameter to set the secondary voltage of the voltage trans-
former in kV.
Current measurement
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the current measurement
function on the device. Deactivate current measurement if you have not con-
nected the current measurement function to the device.
If you deactivate current measurement, device functions that use the cur-
i rent measurement value as an input variable (e.g. power monitoring) will
not work.
Primary transformer current

You can use this parameter to set the primary current of the current trans-
former.
If you use the optional function "Hot-spot calculation on 3 different windings

(W1, W2, W3)", you must set the parameter for W1, W2 and W3 respectively.

Secondary transformer current
You can use this parameter to set the secondary current of the current trans-
former. You can select the following options:
– 0.2 A
– 1A
– 5A
If you use the optional function "Hot-spot calculation on 3 different windings

(W1, W2, W3)", this parameter setting applies to all 3 windings.
Measurement mode
If you are measuring the voltage and current with the 3-phase measuring mod-
ule, you can use this parameter to set whether you have connected the voltage
transformer between two phases or between a phase and neutral.
Phase angle correction

You can use this parameter to set the phase angle correction for your trans-
former circuit.
Voltage-transformer circuit
You can use this parameter to set your voltage transformer's circuit. You can se-
lect the following options:
Option Description
1 Ph phase voltage Measurement in 1-phase grid between the

conductor and neutral conductor.
3 Ph differential voltage Measurement in 3-phase grid between 2 con-

ductors
3 Ph phase voltage Measurement in 3-phase grid between the

conductor and neutral conductor
Table 99: Voltage-transformer circuit
Current-transformer circuit
You can use this parameter to set the circuit for your current transformer. You
can select the following options:
Option Description
1 Ph phase current Measurement of phase current in 1-phase

grid.
3 Ph total current Measurement of differential current in 3-

phase grid.
3 Ph phase current Measurement of phase current in 3-phase

grid.
Table 100: Current-transformer circuit
Voltage balance
You can use this parameter to set a correction value for the voltage measure-
ment in order to compensate for deviations through the measuring section. The
devices adds the correction value to the measured voltage (secondary side).
If the voltage is measured with a 3-phase measurement module, you can only
set the voltage balance if you select the "1-ph. measurement" option for the pa-
rameter UI measuring channels [►Page 281].

8.2.1.2 Circuit examples for voltage transformers and current transformers
Below you will find different examples of circuits for voltage transformers and
current transformers and the corresponding settings.
8.2.1.2.1 1-phase measurement
Circuit 1-A
UI
L N k l
VT
CT L1
UL1 IL1
– The voltage transformer VT is connected to the phase conductor and neutral

conductor.
– The current transformer CT is looped into the phase conductor.
– The voltage UL1 and current IL1 are in phase.
– The voltage drop on a phase conductor is determined by the current IL1.
If you use this circuit, set the device as follows:
Parameters Option

Table 101: Circuit 1-A
Circuit 1-B
UI UL3 IL3
L N k l
VT
CT UL1 IL1
L1
UL2 IL2
L2
L3
N
UL1 IL1
– The voltage transformer VT is connected to the phase conductor L1 and the

neutral conductor.
– The current transformer CT is looped into the phase conductor L1.
– The voltage U and current I are in phase.

Parameters Option

Table 102: Circuit 1-B
Circuit 1-C
UL3 IL3
UI
L N k l
UL1 IL1
VT IL2
UL2
CT1
L1
CT2 -UL2 -IL2
L2 UL1-UL2 IL1-IL2
L3
UL1 IL1
– The voltage transformer VT is connected to the phase conductors L1 and L2.

– The current transformer CT1 is looped into the phase conductor L1 and CT2
into the phase conductor L2.
– The current transformers CT1 and CT2 are connected crosswise in parallel
(total current = IL1 + IL2).
– The total current IL1 + IL2 and voltage UL1-UL2 are in phase.
– The voltage drop on a phase conductor is determined by the current:
(IL1 + IL2) / √3.
Parameters Option
Voltage-transformer circuit 3 Ph differential voltage
Current-transformer circuit 3 Ph total current

Table 103: Circuit 1-C
Circuit 1-D
UL3 IL3
UI
L N k l
UL1 IL1
VT IL2
UL2
L1
-UL2 IL3
L2 UL1-UL2
CT
L3
UL1

– The current IL3 is ahead of voltage UL1-VL2 by 90°. This corresponds to a phase
shift of -90°.

Parameters Option

Table 104: Circuit 1-D
Circuit 1-E
UL3 IL3
UI
L N k l
UL1 IL1
VT
UL2 IL2
L1
-UL1
CT
L2
L3 UL2 IL2
UL2-UL1

– The current IL2 is ahead of voltage UL2-UL1 by 30°. This corresponds to a phase
shift of -30°.
Parameters Option

Table 105: Circuit 1-E
Circuit 1-F
UL3 IL3
UI
L N k l
VT
UL1 IL1
CT
L1 UL2 IL2
L2 -UL2
UL1-UL2
L3
UL1 IL1

– The current IL1 lags behind voltage UL1-UL2 by 30°. This corresponds to a
phase shift of +30° and a correction value of -30°.

Parameters Option
Phase angle correction -30°

Table 106: Circuit 1-F
8.2.1.2.2 3-phase measurement
Circuit 3-A
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
CT
L1
CT
L2
CT
L3
– Three-phase measurement.
– The voltage transformers are connected between the phases.
– The current lags behind the voltage by 30°.
Parameters Option
Voltage-transformer circuit -
Current-transformer circuit -
UI measuring channels 3-phase measurement (channels 1, 2, 3)
Measurement mode Phase-phase

Table 107: Circuit 3-A
Circuit 3-B
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
CT
L1
CT
L2
CT
L3
N
– Three-phase measurement.
– The voltage transformers are connected between the phase and neutral con-
ductor.

Parameters Option
UI measuring channels 3-phase measurement (channels 1, 2, 3)
Measurement mode Phase-neutral

Table 108: Circuit 3-B
Only use the circuits 3-C, 3-D and 3-E on symmetrical grids. Otherwise the
i device will calculate incorrect performance values.
Circuit 3-C
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT
CT
L1
L2
L3
– Three-phase voltage measurement, single-phase current measurement.

– The current transformer is connected to phase L1.
Parameters Option
UI measuring channels 3-ph. voltage, 1-ph. current

Table 109: Circuit 3-C
Circuit 3-D
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT
L1
CT
L2
L3


Parameters Option

Table 110: Circuit 3-D
Circuit 3-E
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT
L1
L2
CT
L3

Parameters Option

Table 111: Circuit 3-E
Circuit 3-F
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
CT
L1
L2
L3
N

ductor.

Parameters Option

Table 112: Circuit 3-F
Circuit 3-G
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
L1
CT
L2
L3
N

ductor.
Parameters Option

Table 113: Circuit 3-G
Circuit 3-H
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
L1
L2
CT
L3
N

ductor.

Parameters Option

Table 114: Circuit 3-H
8.2.1.2.3 Current measurement for hot-spot calculation on 3 different windings

(optional)
The following circuits (S-1, S-2, S-3 and S-4) describe special cases of current
measurement for hot-spot calculation on 3 different windings (e.g. three-wind-
ing transformer or transformer with tertiary winding).
Only use these circuits in symmetrical grids. Note that you must always take
the W1 voltage and current measurements on the low-voltage side of the trans-
former.
– W1: Voltage measurement and current measurement for the power calcula-
tion and hot-spot calculation on winding 1
– W2: Current measurement for hot-spot calculation on winding 2
– W3: Current measurement for hot-spot calculation on winding 3
Circuit S-1
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
CT
L1
W1 L2
L3
N
CT L1
L2
W2
L3
CT
L1
W3 L2
L3
N

Parameters Option
Current-transformer circuit W2 Total current
Current-transformer circuit W3 Phase current

Table 115: Circuit S-1
Circuit S-2
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT
CT
L1
W1 L2
L3
N
CT L1
L2
W2
L3
CT
L1
W3 L2
L3
N
Parameters Option
Current-transformer circuit W2 Total current
UI measuring channels 1-ph. measurement: Channel 1, 2, 3
Measurement mode -

Circuit S-3
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT
CT
L1
W1 L2
L3
CT
L1
W2 L2
L3
CT
L1
W3 L2
L3
Parameters Option


Circuit S-4
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT
CT
L1
W1 L2
L3
CT
L1
W2 L2
L3
CT
L1
W3 L2
L3
Parameters Option
UI measuring channels 1-ph. measurement: Channel 1, 2, 3
Measurement mode -
8.2.1.2.4 Current measurement via clamp-on current transformer (optional)

With the RSC 18-15 A/0.2 A clamp-on current transformer you can measure the
current on the secondary side of the transformer's current transformer without
contact. This is particularly helpful for installation situations in which the sec-
ondary circuit of the transformer's current transformer cannot be separated
(e.g. in existing systems).

The transmission ratio of the clamp-on current transformer is 75:1 (15 A : 0.2 A).
If the secondary circuit of your current transformer has a lower rated value (e.g.
5 A), you must wind the core of the clamp-on current transformer several times
so that the transmission ratio is correct. You must select the option 0.2 A for
the parameter secondary transformer current [►Page 267].
Figure 284: Connection example, clamp-on current transformer with 3x winding (transmis-
sion from 5 A to 0.2 A)
Observe the supplied operating instructions for the RSC 18-15 A/0.2 A
i clamp-on current transformer.
8.2.2 Setting the transformer data for the reference system (op-
tional)
You can use the following parameters to set the transformer data. You can only
access these parameters when the device allows for the measurement of the
reference line voltage.
If bushing monitoring with the option "Monitoring of 6 bushings" is used,

i the parameters for both field 1 (F1) and field 2 (F2) must be set. Field 1 and
field 2 each describe a set consisting of 3 bushings respectively. If bushing
monitoring with the option "Monitoring of 3 bushings" is used, only the pa-
rameters for field 1 are displayed.

Figure 285: Transformer data for the reference system
Go to Settings > Parameter > Power grid.
F1/F2: Reference system primary transformer voltage

You can use this parameter to set the primary voltage of the reference system
voltage transformer for field 1 or field 2.
F1/F2: Reference system secondary transformer voltage

You can use this parameter to set the secondary voltage of the reference sys-
tem voltage transformer for field 1 or field 2.
8.2.3 Measurement
You can use the following parameters to configure the measurement of current
and voltage.
Settings Parameters Measurement
Name Value
Home
Regulation mode Single-phase
Control variable L1/N or L1/L2
UI measuring channels 3-phase measurem.: Ch. 1,2,3
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 286: Measurement
Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > Measurement.

UI measuring channels
If you are measuring the voltage and current with the 3-phase UI 3 measuring
module, you can use this parameter to set the measurement channels in use:
Option Description
1-ph. measurement: Channel 1 The device uses 1 channel each for measurement of
voltage and current.
3-ph. measurement: Channel 1, 2, 3 The device uses 3 channels each for measurement of
voltage and current.
3-ph. voltage, 1-ph. current The device uses 3 channels for voltage measurement
and 1 channel for current measurement.
Table 119: UI measuring channels
Control variable
module and using the "single-phase" regulation mode, this parameter can be
used to select the phase used for voltage regulation. You can select the follow-
ing options:
– L1/N or L1/L2
– L2/N or L2/L3
– L3/N or L3/L1
Regulation mode
module, you can use this parameter to set whether you want 1-phase voltage
regulation or voltage regulation to the average value of the 3 phases. You can
select the following options:
– Single-phase: Voltage is automatically regulated to one selected phase. Limit
value monitoring, line drop compensation, and parallel operation also take
place on the selected phase using the circulating reactive current minimiza-
tion method.
– Average value regulation: Voltage is automatically regulated to the average
of the 3 phases. Limit value monitoring, line drop compensation, and parallel
operation also take place using the circulating reactive current minimization
method to the average of the 3 phases.
If you activate the average value regulation option, automatic voltage regu-
i lation is blocked should the voltage or current measurement of one of the 3
phases fail.
Display power factor negative

You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to display a negative
power factor. You can select the following options:
Option Description
Off The power factor is always shown as positive.
P>0 The power factor is shown as negative if the active power is positive.
P<0 The power factor is shown as negative if the active power is negative.
Q>0 The power factor is shown as negative if the reactive power is posi-
tive.
Q<0 The power factor is shown as negative if the reactive power is nega-
tive.
Table 120: Setting the display for the power factor

8.2.4 Voltage monitoring
In order to monitor the transformer's current output voltage, you can set 4 limit
values:
– Undervoltage U<<: Lower limit 2
– Undervoltage U<: Lower limit 1
– Overvoltage U>: Upper limit 1
– Overvoltage U>>: Upper limit 2
If the measured value is higher than the upper limit (> or >>) or lower than the
lower limit (< or <<), the device transmits an event message.
U
U>>
H
U>
U<
U<<
tV tE t
Figure 287: Example of voltage monitoring with the limit value Overvoltage U> being ex-
ceeded
U>> Overvoltage U>> U> Overvoltage U>
U< Undervoltage U< U<< Undervoltage U<<
tV Delay time tE Event duration
H Hysteresis
You can set the following parameters for each limit value:
– Relative/absolute limit value
– Limit value [V]: Absolute limit value
– Limit value [%]: Limit value relative to the desired voltage value (only for de-
vices with voltage regulation)
– Hysteresis limit value
– Delay time limit value
– Behavior limit value (only for devices with voltage regulation)

Settings Parameters Voltage ...ing
<< < > >>

Home
Mode Relative Absolute Absolute Absolute
Absolute 60.1 V 80.0 V 110.9 V 120.0 V
Relative 60.1 % 80.0 % 110.9 % 120.0 % Events
Hysteresis 0.0 V 0.0 V 0.0 V 0.0 V
Delay time 10.0 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 10.0 s
Reaction Off Auto blockin... High-sp. ret... High-sp. ret...

Information
Recorder
Figure 288: Voltage monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > Voltage monitoring.
Mode
You can use this parameter to set which limit value you would like to use:
– Absolute: The device uses the absolute limit value in V.
– Relative: The device uses the relative limit value in %, relative to the desired
voltage value.
Absolute
You can use this parameter to specify an absolute limit value in V (relative to the
secondary value of the voltage transformer) or in kV (relative to the primary
value of the voltage transformer). Unlike the relative value, this limit is not de-
pendent on a reference value.
Percentage
You can use this parameter to set the limit value relative to the desired voltage
value.
Behavior
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device if the measured
value is higher than the upper limit (> or >>) or lower than the lower limit (< or
<<). You can select the following options:
Setting Behavior
Off No reaction.
High-speed return For U</U<<: The device performs tap-change operations in

the raise voltage direction (U+) until the measured voltage is
back above the limit value.
For U>/U>>: The device performs tap-change operations in
the lower voltage direction (U-) until the measured voltage is
back below the limit value.
With high-speed return, the device ignores the set delay time
of automatic voltage regulation.
Auto blocking Automatic regulation is blocked.

You can continue to perform tap-change operations in man-
ual mode.
Auto/manual blocking Automatic regulation is blocked.

You cannot perform tap-change operations in manual mode.

Setting Behavior
Auto blocking position+ The automatic control does not perform a tap-change opera-
tion in the direction of a higher tap position (position+).
You can still perform a tap-change operation in the direction
of a higher tap position (position+) in manual mode.
Auto blocking position- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change opera-
tion in the direction of a lower tap position (position-).
You can still perform a tap-change operation in the direction
of a lower tap position (position-) in manual mode.
Auto/manual blocking posi- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change opera-
tion+ tion in the direction of a higher tap position (position+).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the direction
tion- tion in the direction of a lower tap position (position-).
Table 121: Behavior when an event message is issued
Hysteresis
You can use this parameter to set the hysteresis. You can use this to avoid the
unnecessary generation of messages if the measured value fluctuates around a
threshold value.
Delay time
You can use this parameter to set the delay time in order to delay the issuing of
the event message.
8.2.5 Current monitoring
For monitoring the transformer's current load current, you can set 4 limit values
:
– I<<: Lower limit 2
– I<: Lower limit 1
– I>: Upper limit 1
– I>>: Upper limit 2

lower limit (< or <<), the device transmits an event message.
I
I>>
H
I>
I<
I<<
tV tE t
Figure 289: Example of current monitoring with the limit value I> being exceeded
I>> Upper limit 2 I> Upper limit 1
I< Lower limit 1 I<< Lower limit 2
tV Delay time tE Event duration
H Hysteresis
– Relative/absolute limit value
– Limit value [A] or [kA]: Absolute limit value
– Limit value [%]: Limit value relative to the rated current of current trans-
former. With current measurements via the analog input, the value is relative
to the maximum value of the analog input (e.g. 100% = 20 mA).
Settings Parameters Current ...ing
<< < > >>

Home
Mode Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute
Absolute 0.0 A 0.0 A 7.7 A 10.0 A
Relative 0.0 % 0.0 % 110.0 % 110.0 % Events
Hysteresis 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A
Delay time 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
Reaction Auto blockin... Off Auto blockin... Off Information
Recorder
Figure 290: Current monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > Current monitoring.
Mode
You can use this parameter to set which limit value you would like to use:
– Absolute: The device uses the absolute limit value in A/kA.
– Relative: The device uses the relative limit value in %, relative to the rated
current of current transformer.

Absolute
You can use this parameter to specify an absolute limit value in A (in relation to
the secondary value of the current transformer) or in kA (in relation to the pri-
mary value of the current transformer).
Percentage
You can use this parameter to set the limit value relative to the rated current of
current transformer. With current measurements via the analog input, the value
is relative to the maximum value of the analog input (e.g. 100% = 20 mA).
Hysteresis
threshold value.
Delay time
the event message.
Reaction
Setting Behavior
Off No reaction.

ual mode.

8.2.6 Power monitoring
For monitoring the transformer's current power, you can set the following limit
values:
Measured value Lower limit 2 Lower limit 1 Upper limit 1 Upper limit 2
Apparent power S<< S< S> S>>
Active power P<< P< P> P>>
Reactive power Q<< Q< Q> Q>>
Power factor (amount) |cos φ|<< |cos φ|< - -

Table 123: Limit values for power monitoring
– Limit value: Absolute limit value

lower limit (< or <<), the device issues an event message.
Settings Parameter Power monitoring
<< < > >>

Home
S absolute 0 VA 0 VA 10 MVA 10 MVA
S hysteresis 100 kVA 100 kVA 100 kVA 100 kVA
S delay 5 s 5s 5s 5s Events
S behavior Off Off Off Off
P absolute -10 MW -10 MW 10 MW 10 MW
P hysteresis 100 kW 100 kW 100 kW 100 kW

Information
P delay 5 s 5s 5s 5s
P behavior Off Off Off Off

Recorder
Q absolute 0 Mvar 0 Mvar 10 Mvar 10 Mvar
Figure 291: Power monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > Power monitoring.
Absolute
You can use this parameter to specify a limit value.
Hysteresis
threshold value.
Delay time
the event message.
Reaction
Setting Behavior
Off No reaction.

ual mode.
Auto blocking position- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change opera-
tion in the direction of a lower tap position (position-).
ual mode.
Auto blocking position+ The automatic control does not perform a tap-change opera-
tion in the direction of a higher tap position (position+).
ual mode.


Setting Behavior
tion- tion in the direction of a lower tap position (position-).
tion+ tion in the direction of a higher tap position (position+).
8.2.7 Power flow monitoring
A reversal of power flow occurs if the active power is negative. You can set the
following parameters for this:
– Hysteresis
– Delay time
– Behavior
Settings Parameters Power fl...ing
Name Value
Home
Reversal of power flow hysteresis 100 kW
Reversal of power flow delay 5.0 s
Behavior for reversal of power fl... Off
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 292: Power flow monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > Power flow monitoring.
Hysteresis
threshold value.
Delay time
the event message.

Behavior for reversal of power flow
You can use this parameter to set the behavior in the event of a reversal of
power flow. You can select the following options:
Setting Behavior
Off – The negative power flow is ignored.

– Automatic regulation remains active.
Event only – The Reversal of power flow event is issued.

– If Z compensation is activated, this function is deacti-
vated.
– Automatic regulation remains active.
Auto blocking – The Reversal of power flow event is issued.

vated.
– Automatic regulation is blocked.
Auto/manual blocking – The Reversal of power flow event is issued.

vated.
– Automatic regulation is blocked.
– You cannot perform tap-change operations in manual
mode.
Target tap position – The Reversal of power flow event is issued.

vated.
– The device triggers a tap-change operation to the tap po-
sition you defined in the "Target tap position" [►Section
8.3.11, Page 331] parameter.
– The device blocks further tap-change operations.
– The target-tap-position operation is ignored if there is no
tap-position capture. Automatic regulation is blocked.
Table 125: Behavior in the event of a reversal of power flow
8.2.8 Phase symmetry monitoring
module, you can set the maximum permitted differences for voltage and phase
angle between the 3 phases. The difference is determined from the highest and
lowest measured value of the 3 phases.
Settings Parameters Phase sy...ing
ΔU Δφ
Home
Max. diff. 5.0 V 5.0 deg
Response for exceed Off Off
Delay time 0s 0s Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 293: Phase symmetry monitoring

Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > Phase symmetry monitoring.
Maximum difference
You can use this parameter to specify a limit value for the voltage difference in
V (in relation to the secondary value of the voltage transformer) or in kV (in rela-
tion to the primary value of the voltage transformer) or the phase angle differ-
ence.
Behavior
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device when the event
message is issued. You can select the following options:
Setting Behavior
Off The limit value is not monitored.

ual mode.

8.2.9 Monitoring settings
Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > Monitoring settings.
Monitoring U < 30 V
You can use this parameter to activate events and function monitoring. You can
Setting Behavior
Activate Monitoring is activated, even if the measured voltage U <

30 V.
Deactivate Monitoring is activated. Between 19 V < U < 30 V, the fol-

lowing monitoring processes are suppressed:
– Voltage monitoring
– Power monitoring
– Power flow monitoring
Table 127: Activate function monitoring
8.2.10 TAPCON® 2xx retrofit
The TAPCON® 2xx retrofit function allows you to operate the device in parallel
operation with existing devices. Parallel operation with the following existing
devices is supported:

TAPCON® 230 pro TAPCON® 240 TAPCON® 250
TAPCON® 230 expert TAPCON® 260
TRAFOGUARD® 19
If you wish to operate several devices in parallel operation with existing devices,
you have to activate the TAPCON® 2xx retrofit function on each device.
Figure 294: Parallel operation of 2 devices with one TAPCON® 2xx. The TAPCON® 2xx retro-
fit function must be active on both devices.
Settings Parameters TAPCON® ...fit
Name Value
Home
Retrofit TAPCON®2xx Off
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 295: Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx
Go to Settings > Parameters > Power grid > TAPCON® 2xx retrofit.
TAPCON® 2xx retrofit

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx
function.
19 TRAFOGUARD® with "Voltage regulation" options package

If you activate this parameter, you have to reverse the prefix of the "Phase
i angle correction" parameter for the transformer data (from - to + or from +
to -).
8.2.11 Displaying current measured values
The current measured values can be displayed on the measured value screen.
Note that the displayed measured values may differ from the raw values dis-
played in the information display of the UI assembly. The measured values are
prepared for the measured value display by the device as follows:
– The tap-change operation set for the current transformer and voltage trans-
former is taken into account, as is a corresponding phase displacement.
– The UI assemblies use the generator sign convention. The device displays
the measured values using the load sign convention.
You can change the measured value display to the generator sign conven-
i tion by activating the Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx [►Section 8.2.10, Page 290]
parameter.
The following measured values are displayed:

– Voltage
– Current
– Power factor (cos ϕ)
– Frequency
– Reactive power
– Active power
– Apparent power
Figure 296: Measured values
Go to Information > Power grid > Measured values.
8.2.12 Displaying minimum and maximum measured values
You can display the minimum and maximum values reached and the corre-
sponding time for the following measured values:
– Voltage
– Current
– Reactive power
– Active power
– Apparent power

Figure 297: Min. and max. measured values
1. Go to Information > Power grid > Min. and max. measured values.
2. As needed, select the Reset button to reset the minimum and maximum val-
ues.

8.3 On-load tap-changer regulator
8.3.1 Regulation
The general functions for regulating the on-load tap-changer are described in
this section.
8.3.1.1 Response to control system disconnection (optional)

If your device is equipped with a connection to a control system (SCADA), you
can use the following parameters to set how the device is to behave if the con-
nection to the control system is interrupted.
This function only works in the REMOTE operating mode.

i
Settings Parameters Control
Name Value
Home
Control variable Voltage
Response to SCADA disconnection No reaction
SCADA disconnection delay time 5s
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 298: Regulation
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Regulation.
Response to SCADA disconnection

You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device when the connec-
tion to the control system is interrupted. You can select the following options:
– No response: The device remains in the current operating mode.
– Switchover to auto mode: The device switches to auto mode.
– Desired value 1…5: The device uses the selected voltage desired value. This
desired value will also continue to be used once the connection is reestab-
lished. Depending on the device configuration, you can select up to 5 desired
values.
SCADA disconnection delay time

You can use this parameter to set the delay time before the device responds to
the SCADA interruption. If the connection to the control system is interrupted
for longer than the delay time, the device triggers an event and responds with
the set behavior.

8.3.1.2 Setting control variable (optional)
If the device is equipped with the optional power regulation function, you can
set which control variable the device should regulate.
Settings Parameters Control
Name Value
Home
Control variable Voltage
Response to SCADA disconnection No reaction
SCADA disconnection delay time 5s
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 299: Regulation
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Regulation.
Control variable
You can use this parameter to set which control variable the device is to regu-
late. You can select the following options:
– Voltage
– Reactive power
– Active power
Depending on your selection, the device uses the associated parameter set for
each option (desired value, bandwidth, etc.).
Standard regulation mode

You can set use this parameter to set the operating mode of the on-load tap-
changer regulation.
8.3.2 Voltage regulation (optional)
All of the parameters required for the voltage regulation are described in this
section.
Settings Parameters Voltage re...ion
Name Value
Home
Desired value 1 100 V
Selecting a desired value Desired value 1 Events
Bandwidth setting Percentage
Bandwidth 1.0 %
Delay time T1 40 s
Time response T1 Linear Information
Activate delay time T2 Off

Delay time T2 10 s
Recorder
Figure 300: Voltage regulation (example)

8.3.2.1 Setting the desired value
In accordance with the order, the device is equipped with one of the following
variants for setting the desired value:
8.3.2.1.1 Desired value 1
You have to set the parameters for both winding 1 (W1) and winding 2
i (W2).
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Regulation > Desired
value 1.
2. Enter the desired value.
8.3.2.1.2 Desired value 1...3

You can set 3 different desired values. The device always uses one of the set
desired values for control. You can define the desired value used for control by
means of the "Select desired value" parameter or with the digital inputs.
The device only processes commands via digital inputs or the control sys-
i tem when it is in the Remote mode. You must also set the Remote behav-
ior [►Page 167] parameter accordingly.
i (W2).
Setting the desired value

value 1.
Selecting a desired value

You can use this parameter to select the desired value used for control.
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Regulation > Select de-
sired value.
2. Select the desired value from the list.
8.3.2.1.3 Step-by-step setting of the desired value

For step-by-step setting of the desired value, you can increase or decrease the
desired value 1 for the automatic voltage regulation by an adjustable step width
using digital inputs or control system commands.
For each "Increase desired value" or "Decrease desired value" command, de-
sired value 1 is increased or decreased by the set step width. It is not possible to
set desired values outside of the permitted setting range (49...140 V).

Name Description
I: Desired value step width + A pulse signal at the input increases desired value 1
by the set step width.
I: Desired value step width - A pulse signal at the input reduces desired value 1 by
the set step width.
Table 128: Digital inputs (I)
The device only processes commands via digital inputs or the control sys-
i tem when it is in the Remote mode. You must also set the Remote behav-
ior [►Page 167] parameter accordingly.
In order to configure the step-by-step setting of the desired value, you can set
the parameters as described below.
Setting desired value 1

value 1.
Setting desired value step width

value step width.
2. Enter the desired value step width.
8.3.2.1.4 Active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value

The TAPCON® Dynamic Setpoint Control (TDSC) function is used to adapt the
desired voltage value depending on the measured active power. This allows you
to compensate for a voltage drop during increased load or a voltage increase
due to a decentralized feed-in.
Depending on whether positive or negative active power is measured, the de-

sired value calculation is based on 2 linear equations (see example in diagram
below).
Parameter Function Settings (see diagram be-

low)
Umax: Maximum desired value Maximum set desired value is activated when Pmax is ex- 103.0 V
ceeded.
Umin: Minimum desired value Minimum set desired value is activated when value falls be- 99.0 V
low Pmin.
U0: Desired value at 0 active power Set desired value is activated when measured active power 100.00 V
is 0 MW.
Pmax: Active power at max. desired Set maximum active power value above which the power- 20.0 MW
value dependent desired value is to attain the maximum value
Umax.
Pmin: Active power at min. desired Set minimum active power value below which the power- -20.0 MW
value dependent desired value is to attain the minimum value
Umin.
Table 129: Parameters to be set for active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value

Figure 301: Active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value
Uref Desired value Umin Minimum desired value
Pmeas Measured active power Umax Maximum desired value
Pmin Active power at minimum de- U0 Set desired value when mea-
sired value sured active power = 0
Pmax Active power at maximum de-

sired value
Response to active power Pmax being exceeded

If the measured active power Pmeas exceeds the set parameter Pmax, the value
Umax is adopted as the desired value.
U ref = U max
Response to value falling below active power Pmin

If the measured active power Pmeas falls below the set parameter Pmin, the value
Umin is adopted as the desired value.
U ref = U min
Response to a measured active power Pmeas = 0 MW:

If the measured active power Pmeas = 0, the set parameter U0 is adopted.
U ref = U 0
Linear dependency with negative active power:

If the measured active power Pmin ≤ Pmeas ≤ 0, the desired value is calculated us-
ing the following equation:
U 0 - U min
U ref = × P meas+ U 0
0 - P min
Linear dependency with positive active power:

If the measured active power 0 ≤ Pmeas ≤ Pmax, the desired value is calculated us-
U max - U 0
P max

To set the TDSC parameters, proceed as follows:
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Voltage regulation.
i (W2).
Activating TDSC
The TDSC function is only active when the device can calculate the active
power (correct current measurement and voltage measurement) and the re-
quired parameters are set. If this is not the case, the voltage is regulated to the
set desired value [►Section 8.3.2.1.1, Page 296]. You can activate or deactivate
the power-dependent adjustment of the desired voltage value as follows:
– Parameter
– Digital inputs I: TDSC® on and I: TDSC® off (optional)
– Control system command (optional)
If you activate TDSC, the line drop compensation (R&X compensation or Z

i compensation) function is deactivated.
TDSC Umax
You can use this parameter to set the maximum desired value. The maximum
desired value is activated when the measured active power reaches the set
maximum active power.
TDSC Umin
You can use this parameter to set the minimum desired value. The minimum
desired value is activated when the measured active power reaches the set min-
imum active power.
TDSC U0
You can use this parameter to set the desired value which is to be used when
the measured active power is 0.
TDSC Pmax
You can use this parameter to set the maximum active power-dependent de-
sired value that is to be used for regulation.
TDSC Pmin
You can use this parameter to set the minimum active power-dependent de-
8.3.2.1.5 Active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value with 3

different desired values
The TAPCON® Dynamic Setpoint Control (TDSC) function is used to adapt the
desired voltage value depending on the measured active power. This allows you
to compensate for a voltage drop during increased load or a voltage increase
due to a decentralized feed-in.
The device provides you with 3 different sets of parameters for this purpose.
Depending on the selection of the desired value 1, 2 or 3, the device uses the
parameter set 1, 2 or 3 for TDSC.

Depending on whether positive or negative active power is measured, the de-
sired value calculation is based on 2 linear equations (see example in diagram
below).
Parameter Function Settings (see diagram be-

low)
Umax: Maximum desired value Maximum set desired value is activated when Pmax is ex- 103.0 V
ceeded.
Umin: Minimum desired value Minimum set desired value is activated when value falls be- 99.0 V
low Pmin.
U0: Desired value at 0 active power Set desired value is activated when measured active power 100.00 V
is 0 MW.
Pmax: Active power at max. desired Set maximum active power value above which the power- 20.0 MW
value dependent desired value is to attain the maximum value
Umax.
Pmin: Active power at min. desired Set minimum active power value below which the power- -20.0 MW
value dependent desired value is to attain the minimum value
Umin.
Table 130: Parameters to be set for active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value
Figure 302: Active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value
Uref Desired value Umin Minimum desired value
Pmeas Measured active power Umax Maximum desired value
Pmin Active power at minimum de- U0 Set desired value when mea-
sired value sured active power = 0
Pmax Active power at maximum de-

sired value
Response to active power Pmax being exceeded

If the measured active power Pmeas exceeds the set parameter Pmax, the value
Umax is adopted as the desired value.
U ref = U max

Response to value falling below active power Pmin
If the measured active power Pmeas falls below the set parameter Pmin, the value
Umin is adopted as the desired value.
U ref = U min
Response to a measured active power Pmeas = 0 MW:

If the measured active power Pmeas = 0, the set parameter U0 is adopted.
U ref = U 0
Linear dependency with negative active power:

If the measured active power Pmin ≤ Pmeas ≤ 0, the desired value is calculated us-
U 0 - U min
0 - P min
Linear dependency with positive active power:

If the measured active power 0 ≤ Pmeas ≤ Pmax, the desired value is calculated us-
U max - U 0
P max
To set the TDSC parameters, proceed as follows:
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Voltage regulation.
i (W2).
Activating TDSC
The TDSC function is only active when the device can calculate the active
power (correct current measurement and voltage measurement) and the re-
quired parameters are set. If this is not the case, the voltage is regulated to the
set desired value [►Section 8.3.2.1.1, Page 296]. You can activate or deactivate
the power-dependent adjustment of the desired voltage value as follows:
– Parameter
– Digital inputs I: TDSC® on and I: TDSC® off (optional)
– Control system command (optional)
If you activate TDSC, the line drop compensation (R&X compensation or Z

i compensation) function is deactivated.
TDSC Umax
You can use this parameter to set the maximum desired value. The maximum
desired value is activated when the measured active power reaches the set
maximum active power.
TDSC Umin
You can use this parameter to set the minimum desired value. The minimum
desired value is activated when the measured active power reaches the set min-
imum active power.

TDSC U0
You can use this parameter to set the desired value which is to be used when
the measured active power is 0.
TDSC Pmax
You can use this parameter to set the maximum active power-dependent de-
TDSC Pmin
You can use this parameter to set the minimum active power-dependent de-
8.3.2.1.6 Desired value setting according to the day profile

You can use the function "Desired value setting according to the day profile" to
set 24 desired values respectively for 2 profiles (Working day or Non-working
day). You can set a start time for each of these desired values. As soon as the
current device time reaches the start time, the device will activate the assigned
desired value.
6
Desired value
4
5
7
3
2
8
1 1
0 6 7 9 1213 17 2223 Time
Figure 303: Desired value setting according to the day profile
1 Desired value 1 active 2 Desired value 2 active
If you use the automatic daylight saving/standard time [►Page 179] func-
i tion and the device sets the time 1 hour forward or back, the current de-
sired value remains active until the "new" device time reaches the next start
time. This applies in particular if a start time is skipped due to the auto-
matic changeover between daylight saving/standard time.
8.3.2.1.6.1 Selecting a day profile

You can select the active day using a digital input. The device will report the ac-
tive day profile using a digital output and as an event message.
8.3.2.1.6.2 Activating the next desired value

You can use the digital input next desired value to activate the next desired
value based on the start time of the day profile.

Example: It is 11:30; currently, the desired value with the start time 11:00 is
active. The start time of the next desired value is 13:00 and the start time of
the desired value after that is 18:00. Using a command via the next desired
value input, you can activate the next desired value (13:00), and with an-
other command the desired value after that (18:00).
8.3.2.1.6.3 Setting the desired values for the "Working day" profile
You can input 24 desired values and 24 start times each for the "Working day"
profile.
Figure 304: Working day voltage regulation
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Working day voltage reg-
ulation.
Desired value 1...24

You can use these parameters to set up to 24 different desired values. The de-
sired values are coupled to the respective start times. If you would like to use
less than 24 different desired values, you must enter the same desired value
multiple times (e.g. desired value 21, 22, 23, 24 = 100 V).
Start time 1...24

You can use the parameters to set the start time for each desired value. As soon
as the current device time reaches the start time, the device will activate the as-
sociated desired value. Note that you must input different times for each pa-
rameter.

8.3.2.1.6.4 Setting the desired values for the "Non-working day" profile
You can input 24 desired values and 24 start times each for the "Non-working
day" profile.
Figure 305: Non-working-day voltage regulation
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Non-working-day voltage

regulation.
Desired value 1...24

You can use these parameters to set up to 24 different desired values. The de-
sired values are coupled to the respective start times. If you would like to use
less than 24 different desired values, you must enter the same desired value
multiple times (e.g. desired value 21, 22, 23, 24 = 100 V).
Start time 1...24

You can use the parameters to set the start time for each desired value. As soon
as the current device time reaches the start time, the device will activate the as-
sociated desired value. Note that you must input different times for each pa-
rameter.
Bandwidth setting
You can use this parameter to set whether you want the bandwidth as an abso-
lute variable (V or kV) or relative variable (%) in relation to the desired value.
Bandwidth
You can use this parameter to set the maximum permissible deviation of the
measured voltage Uactual from the desired value Udesired.
In order to set the correct value, the transformer step voltage and nominal
i voltage must be known. Note that a large bandwidth will result in a large
control deviation.
The bandwidth must always be greater than the following value:

U n-1 - U n
B≥ 0,6× × 100%
UN
Un-1 Step voltage of tap position n-1
Un Step voltage of tap position n
UN Nominal voltage

The following transformer values are used to determine the minimum
bandwidth:
Nominal voltage UN = 11000 V
Step voltage in tap position 4 UStep4 = 11275 V
Step voltage in tap position 5 UStep5 = 11000 V
Delay time T1
Delay time T1 delays the issuing of a tap-change command for a defined period.
This prevents unnecessary tap-change operations if the tolerance bandwidth is
exited briefly.
Response to delay time T1 If the control variable is within the set bandwidth , no control commands
are issued to the motor drive unit for the tap change. Control commands will
also not be issued to the motor-drive unit if the control variable returns to the
bandwidth within the set delay time T1 . However, if the control variable
deviates from the set bandwidth for a long period , a tap-change command
is issued after expiration of the set delay time T1. The on-load tap-changer
carries out a tap-change in a raise or lower direction to return to the tolerance
bandwidth.
V 5
2 6
4
A B C D
Figure 306: Behavior of the control function with delay time T1
1 Upper limit of bandwidth 4 Set delay time T1
2 Desired value 5 Control variable measured value
3 Lower limit of bandwidth 6 Bandwidth range

A Control variable is outside of the B Control variable returned to within
bandwidth. Delay time T1 starts. the bandwidth before delay time T1
has expired.
C Control variable is outside of the D Control variable is still outside the

bandwidth. Delay time T1 starts. bandwidth when delay time T1 is
complete. Tap-change operation is
initiated.
Time response T1
You can use this parameter to set the time response for delay time T1. You can
– Linear time response
– Integral time response
Linear time response With linear time response, the device responds with a constant delay time re-
gardless of the control deviation.
Integral time response With integral time response, the device responds with a variable delay time de-
pending on the control deviation. The greater the control deviation (ΔU) in rela-
tion to the set bandwidth (B), the shorter the delay time. This means that the
device responds faster to large voltage changes in the grid. Regulation accuracy
improves as a result but the frequency of tap-changes increases too.
Figure 307: Diagram for integral time response
ΔU/B Control deviation "ΔU" as % of desired value in relation to the set bandwidth "B"
as % of desired value
1 "Delay time T1" parameter
Delay time T2
You can use this parameter to set delay time T2. Delay time T2 is used to com-
pensate for large control deviations faster.
The delay time T2 only takes effect if more than one tap-change operation is re-
quired to correct the control deviation. The first output pulse occurs after the
set delay time T1. After the set tap-change delay time T2 has elapsed, additional
pulses occur in order to correct the existing control deviation.

The following requirements must be noted to set delay time T2:
– The delay time T2 must be greater than the switching pulse time.
– The delay time T2 must be greater than the maximum operating time of the
motor-drive unit.
– The delay time T2 must be less than the value set for delay time T1.
Behavior with delay times T1 and If the control variable deviates from the set bandwidth for a long period ,a
T2 control impulse is output to the motor-drive unit after the set delay time T1 .
If the control variable is still outside the bandwidth, delay time T2 starts to
count down. Once delay time T2 is complete, a control impulse is again issued
to the motor-drive unit for the tap change to return to the tolerance band-
width.
V 5
1
2 6
4
A B C
Figure 308: Behavior of the regulation function with delay times T1 and T2
1 Upper limit of bandwidth 4 Set delay times T1 and T2.
A Control variable is outside of the B Delay time T1 complete. Tap change

bandwidth. Delay time T1 starts. triggered.
C Delay time T2 complete. Tap change

triggered.
Activate delay time T2

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the delay time T2.

8.3.2.2 Several parameter sets (optional)
If your device is equipped with the optional "Several parameter sets" function,
you can set the associated control parameters (bandwidth, delay times, etc.) for
each desired value individually.
Figure 309: Voltage regulation with the "Several parameter sets" option
8.3.3 Reactive power regulation (optional)
All of the parameters required for reactive power regulation are described in this
section.
Settings Parameters Reactive p...ion
Name Value
Home
Desired value 0 var
Bandwidth 0 var
Delay time T1 40 s
Time response T1 Linear Events
Delay time T2 10 s
Information
Recorder
Figure 310: Reactive power regulation
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Reactive power regula-
tion.
Desired value
You can use this parameter to set the desired value for the reactive power regu-
lation.
Bandwidth
You can use this parameter to set the maximum permissible deviation of the re-
active power from the desired value.
Delay time T1
exited briefly.

bandwidth.
V 5
2 6
4
A B C D

has expired.

initiated.
Time response T1

Delay time T2

motor-drive unit.

width.
V 5
1
2 6
4
A B C


triggered.

8.3.4 Active power regulation (optional)
All of the parameters required for active power regulation are described in this
section.
Settings Parameters Active pow...ion
Name Value
Home
Desired value 0.0 MW
Bandwidth 0.0 MW
Delay time T1 40 s
Time response T1 Linear Events
Delay time T2 10 s
Information
Recorder
Figure 314: Active power regulation
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Active power regulation.

Desired value
You can use this parameter to set the desired value for active power regulation.
Bandwidth
You can use this parameter to set the maximum permissible deviation of the re-
active power from the desired value.
Delay time T1
exited briefly.
bandwidth.
V 5
2 6
4
A B C D

has expired.

initiated.
Time response T1

Delay time T2

motor-drive unit.

width.
V 5
1
2 6
4
A B C


triggered.

8.3.5 Displaying control parameters
You can display an overview of the control parameters in the control parame-
ters menu. You can select the parameters displayed to change their settings.
Figure 318: Control parameters

1. Optional: Select the voltage regulator symbol on the main screen.
2. In the secondary navigation, select the Control parameters button.
8.3.6 Line drop compensation
You can use the compensation function to compensate for the load-dependent
voltage drop between the transformer and consumer. The device provides 2
methods of compensation for this purpose:
– R&X compensation
– Z compensation
8.3.6.1 R&X compensation

R&X compensation can compensate for voltage losses on the lines and there-
fore ensure correct voltage at the load. This requires precise line data. After you
have entered all of the line data, the device automatically calculates the ohmic
and inductive voltage drop and takes this into account for automatic voltage
regulation.
U I
ULine-Drop
VT
UTr CT ULoad
R X
Figure 319: Equivalent circuit of R&X compensation
Figure 320: Phasor diagram of R&X compensation
To use R&X compensation, you have to enter the following line data:
– Ohmic resistance load in mΩ/m
– Inductive resistance load in mΩ/m
– Length of line in km

Settings Parameters Compensation
Name Value
Home
Compensation method R & X compensation
Ohmic resistance load 0.0 Ohm/m
Inductive resistance load 0.0 Ohm/m
Length of line 0.00 m Events
Voltage increase 0.0 %
Voltage limit value 0.0 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 321: Compensation
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Compensation.
Compensation method
You can use this parameter to set the compensation method.
Ohmic resistance load

You can use this parameter to set the ohmic resistance load.
Inductive resistance load

You can use this parameter to set the inductive resistance load.
Length of line
You can use this parameter to set the length of line.
8.3.6.2 Z compensation
To keep the voltage constant for the consumer, you can use Z compensation to
activate a current-dependent voltage increase. You can also define a limit value
to avoid excess voltage on the transformer.
ΔU%
ΔU% max
ΔU%
I
Figure 322: Z compensation

To use Z compensation, you need to calculate the voltage increase (ΔU) taking
the current into account. Use the following formula for this purpose:
U Tr - U Load I N× kCT
ΔU = × × 100 %
U Load I
∆U Voltage increase I Load current in A
UTr Transformer voltage at current I IN Nominal current of current-trans-

former connection in A
ULoad Voltage on line end at current I kCT Current transformer transmission

and on-load tap-changer in same ratio
operating position
Sample calculation: UTr = 100.1 V, ULoad = 100.0 V, IN = 5 A kCT = 200 A/5 A, I

= 100 A
Produces a voltage increase ∆U of 0.2%
Settings Parameters Compensation
Name Value
Home
Compensation method R & X compensation
Ohmic resistance load 0.0 Ohm/m
Inductive resistance load 0.0 Ohm/m
Length of line 0.00 m Events
Voltage increase 0.0 %
Voltage limit value 0.0 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 323: Compensation
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Compensation.
Compensation method
You can use this parameter to set the compensation method.
Voltage increase
You can use this parameter to set the current-dependent voltage increase ∆U.
Voltage limit value

You can use this parameter to define the maximum permissible voltage in-
crease to avoid excess voltage on the transformer.
8.3.7 Parallel operation (optional)
Parallel transformer operation is used to increase the throughput capacity or

short-circuit capacity at one location. The device provides you with specific
functions for regulating transformers.
Conditions for parallel operation Compliance with the following general conditions is required for operating
transformers in parallel:
– Identical rated voltages
– Transformer power ratio (< 3 : 1)

– Maximum deviation of short-circuit voltages (UK) for transformers connected
in parallel < 10%
– Same number of switching groups
– For parallel operation with CAN communication: Current transformers with
the same rated values must be used for all devices operating in parallel
8.3.7.1 Parallel operation methods

You can undertake parallel operation with various parallel operation methods.
8.3.7.1.1 Tap synchronization

With the tap synchronization parallel operation method, one voltage regulator
works as the master and all others as followers.
T1 Master Follower T2
M AVR AVR M
Tap position
CAN bus
Figure 324: Tap synchronization
The master handles voltage regulation and transmits its current tap positions to
all followers via the CAN bus. The followers compare the tap position received
with their own tap position. If the tap position is not the same, the followers
switch to the tap position received from the master. This ensures that the trans-
formers operating in parallel are always in the same tap position.
You can set whether the master transfers the change in tap position to the fol-
lowers before or after its own tap-change operation. The devices then either
change position sequentially (first the master, then the followers) or in synch
(master and followers at the same time).
If there is a tap difference between the master and followers, the master re-
frains from issuing any control commands to the motor-drive unit until all of the
followers have reached the same tap position. If the tap difference persists for
longer than the set delay time for parallel operation error messages, the master
triggers the Step difference to follower event.
You can explicitly designate the voltage regulators as master and followers, or
set automatic designation using the CAN bus address.
For the tap synchronization parallel operation method, you have to set the fol-
lowing parameters:
Parameter Auto Master Follower
Activating parallel operation Yes
Parallel operation method Auto. tap sync. Master Follower
CAN bus address Yes

Circulating reactive current Optional, if master/follower current blocking is active

blocking limit
Master/follower current Yes

blocking
Master/follower switching Yes

characteristics
Maximum tap difference Yes (if follower) No Yes
Error if no communication Yes

present
Behavior if no communica- Yes

tion present
Parallel operation error de- Yes

lay time
Table 131: Parameter
Activate parallel operation Yes
Parallel operation method Auto. tap synchro- Master Follower

nization
CAN bus address Yes
Master/follower switching Yes

characteristics
Maximum tap difference Yes (if follower) No Yes
Error if no communication Yes

present
Behavior if no communica- Yes

tion present
Parallel operation error de- Yes

lay time
Table 132: Parameter

8.3.7.1.2 Circulating reactive current minimization with CAN bus communica-
tion
With the circulating reactive current parallel operation method, parallel opera-
tion is carried out using the circulating reactive current minimization method.
T1 T2
M AVR AVR M
U, I, cosφ
CAN bus
Figure 325: Circulating reactive current minimization with CAN bus communication
The circulating reactive current is calculated from the transformer currents and
their phase angles. The voltage regulators in the parallel operation group share
this information via CAN bus. An extra control deviation proportional to circulat-
ing reactive current is added to the independently regulating voltage regulators
as a correction for the control deviation determined on the basis of the mea-
surement voltage. You can use the circulating reactive current sensitivity pa-
rameter to decrease or increase this extra control deviation.
The circulating reactive current method is suited to transformers connected in

parallel with a similar nominal output and short-circuit voltage UK and to vector
groups with the same and different step voltages. This does not require any in-
formation about the tap position.
Note that the following prerequisites must be met for the "circulating reactive
current minimization" parallel operation method:
– You have to use current transformers with the same rated values for all trans-
formers in parallel operation.
– If you wish to operate in parallel operation with existing devices, you have to
activate the Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx [►Section 8.2.10, Page 290] parameter.
For the circulating reactive current minimization parallel operation method with
CAN communication, you have to set the following parameters:
– Activate parallel operation
– Parallel operation method: Circulating reactive current
– CAN bus address
– Circulating reactive current sensitivity
– Circul. reactive current blocking limit
– Error if no communication present
– Behavior if no communication present
– Parallel operation error delay time

8.3.7.1.3 Circulating reactive current minimization without CAN bus communi-
cation
With this method, you can operate several voltage regulators without a com-
munication connection (CAN bus) in parallel with circulating reactive current
minimization.
Desired cosφ Desired cosφ

T1 T2
M AVR AVR M
T1: U, I, (cosφ) T2: U, I, (cosφ)
U, I, (cosφ)
Figure 326: Circulating reactive current minimization without CAN bus communication
The circulating reactive current is calculated using the desired power factor pa-
rameter, the desired load stress type parameter, and the measured transformer
current. An extra control deviation proportional to circulating reactive current is
added to the independently regulating voltage regulators as a correction for the
control deviation determined on the basis of the measurement voltage. This ex-
tra control deviation depends on how much the measured power factor devi-
ates from the desired power factor.
To use the power factor method, you need to know the conditions of your net-
work in order to correctly set the device parameters.
The power factor method is suited to transformers connected in parallel with a

similar nominal output and short-circuit voltage UK and to vector groups with
the same and different step voltages. This does not require any information
about the tap position.
For the circulating reactive current minimization parallel operation method with-
out CAN communication, you have to set the following parameters:
– Activating parallel operation
– Parallel operation method: Power factor
– Circulating reactive current blocking limit
– Desired power factor
– Desired load stress type
Note that the parameters "Error if no communication" and "Behavior if no

i communication" have no function in the circulating reactive current mini-
mization without CAN communication parallel operation method.

8.3.7.1.4 Circulating reactive current minimization with measured circulating re-
active current (without CAN bus communication)
With the measured circulating reactive current parallel operation method, par-
allel operation is carried out using the circulating reactive current minimization
method. The transformer circulating reactive current is measured directly by the
device using analog wiring. The devices do not communicate via CAN bus.
T1 T2
M AVR AVR M
Ip Ip
T1: I Iu T2: I
PB#1 PB#2
U, I, (cosφ)
Figure 327: Parallel operation with circulating reactive current measurement via parallel as-
sistant (PB, paralleling balancer)
An extra control deviation proportional to circulating reactive current is added

to the self-regulating voltage regulators as a correction for the control deviation
determined due to the measured circulating reactive current.
For the circulating reactive current minimization parallel operation method with
measured circulating reactive current, you have to set the following parameters:
– Activating parallel operation
– Parallel operation method: Measured circulating reactive current
– Circulating reactive current blocking limit
– Circulating reactive current measured input rated value
– Rotating the circulating reactive current prefix
8.3.7.2 Configuring parallel operation

In the Parallel operation menu item, you can set the parameters needed for par-
allel transformer operation.
Settings Parameters Parallel...ion
Name Value
Home
Activating parallel operation On
Parallel operation method Master
CAN bus address 1
Circulating reactive current sens... 0.0 % Events
Circulating reactive current bloc... 20.0 %
Desired power factor 0.9
Desired load stress type Inductive
Master/follower current blocking Off Information
Maximum tap difference 1

Master/follower switching charact... Sequential
Error if no communication present No error
Recorder
Behavior if no communication pres... Independent regulation
Parallel operation error delay ti... 10 s
Figure 328: Parallel operation
Go to Settings > Parameter > Voltage regulator > Parallel operation.

Activating parallel operation
You can use this parameter to activate parallel operation.
Setting parallel operation method

You can use this parameter to set the parallel operation method. You can select
Option Description
Master The device is designated as the Tap synchronization [►Sec-

master. tion 8.3.7.1.1, Page 318] paral-
lel operation method
Follower The device is designated as the
follower.
Auto. tap sync. Automatic assignment of mas-

ter or follower.
If a master is not detected, the
device with the lowest CAN
bus address is automatically
designated as the master. All
other devices are designated
as followers.
Circulat. react. current Circulating reactive current minimization with CAN bus commu-
nication [►Section 8.3.7.1.2, Page 320] parallel operation
method
Power factor Circulating reactive current minimization without CAN bus

communication [►Section 8.3.7.1.3, Page 321] parallel opera-
tion method
Table 133: Setting parallel operation method
Only change the parallel operation method when the on-load tap-changers
i are not performing tap-change operations.
To select the parallel operation method, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Parallel operation > Parallel operation
method.
2. Select the desired option.
CAN bus address

You can use this parameter to assign a CAN bus address to the device. So that
all devices can communicate using the CAN bus, each device requires a unique
identifier. If the value is set to 0, then no communication takes place.
Circulating reactive current sensitivity

You can use this parameter to set the influence of circulating reactive current
on how the control deviation is calculated. The higher the set value, the greater
the calculated control deviation as a result of circulating reactive current.
To determine the ideal circulating reactive current sensitivity, note the relevant
section in the Commissioning chapter.
Circulating reactive current blocking limit

You can use this parameter to set the limit value for the maximum permissible
circulating reactive current. This value relates to the rated current of the current
transformer. If, during parallel operation, the circulating reactive current ex-

ceeds the set limit value, the device triggers the Circulating reactive current
blocking limit exceeded event. All devices operating in the parallel operation
group are blocked.
Desired power factor

You can use this parameter to set the power factor, which the transformer has
under normal operating conditions. If the measured power factor deviates from
the desired one, the device calculates a correction which is added to the control
deviation.
Enter a desired power factor other than 0. If you enter a desired power fac-
i tor of 0, the device is not able to calculate the voltage correction.
Desired load stress type

You can use this parameter to set the load stress type, which the transformer
has under normal operating conditions.
You can determine the load stress type using the phase angle difference be-
tween voltage and current. You calculate the phase angle difference as follows:
φUI = φU - φI
φUI Phase angle difference between voltage and current
φU Phase angle of voltage
φI Phase angle of current
Depending on the calculated phase angle difference, you have to select the fol-
lowing option:
– φUI > 0: Inductive
– φUI < 0: Capacitive
Master/follower current blocking

You can use this parameter to activate the circulating reactive current blocking
limit for the tap synchronization parallel operation method. The device thereby
calculates and monitors the circulating reactive current in the same manner as
the parallel operation method for circulating reactive current minimization, and
provides you with the safety function of circulating reactive current blocking.
The Circulating reactive current blocking parameter is used to set the limit
value.
Master/follower switching characteristics

You can use this parameter to set the switching characteristics for the tap syn-
chronization parallel operation method.. You can select the following options:
– Sequentially: When a tap-change operation takes place, the master commu-
nicates its new tap position to the followers via the CAN bus as soon as the
master has completed its tap-change operation. The tap-change operations
of the master and followers thereby take place one after another (sequen-
tially).
– In sync: When a tap-change operation takes place, the master communicates
its new tap position to the followers via the CAN bus as the master starts its
tap-change operation. The tap-change operations of the master and follow-
ers thereby take place at almost the same time (in synch).
Maximum tap difference

You can use this parameter to set the maximum permissible tap difference be-
tween followers and master on the follower.

If the tap difference is greater than the set maximum tap difference to the mas-
ter, the follower blocks and no longer attempts to attain the master's tap posi-
tion. After the set delay time for parallel operation error messages has elapsed,
the follower issues the Permitted tap difference to master exceeded message.
Error if no communication present

You can use this parameter to set whether it is an error if the device does not
receive any messages via the CAN bus or if there are no other CAN bus partici-
pants in the same parallel operation group.
Behavior if no communication present

You can use this parameter to set how the voltage regulator behaves if commu-
nication via the CAN bus is not possible.
The setting for this parameter is only effective if you have selected the Er-
i ror option for the Error if no communication present parameter.
Option Description
Independent regulation The device switches from parallel operation to normal automatic
voltage regulation
Auto blocking Automatic voltage regulation is blocked.
cosφ interpolation Continuation of parallel operation with interpolated values (only

possible with circulating reactive current parallel operation
method)
Power factor Circulating reactive current minimization without CAN bus com-
munication [►Section 8.3.7.1.3, Page 321] parallel operation
method
Table 134: Behavior if no communication present
Parallel operation error delay time

You can use this parameter to set the delay time for a parallel operation error
message so that brief fault messages are not received if the motor-drive units
involved in the parallel operation have different runtimes.
Circulating reactive current measured input rated value

With this parameter, you can set the rated value of the current input for mea-
suring the circulating reactive current. The set value corresponds 100%.
Swap circulating reactive current polarity

With the parameter, you can invert the sign of the circulating reactive current.
8.3.7.3 Detecting parallel operation via group inputs (optional)

You can control up to 16 transformers connected in parallel in one or 2 groups
without detecting the system topology.
The devices in parallel operation only use the information communicated by de-
vices in the same parallel operation group via CAN bus.
You can use the PARALLEL GROUP 1 and PARALLEL GROUP 2 inputs to assign
the device to a parallel operation group. If you create a signal at both inputs, the
device is assigned to both parallel operation groups.

If no parallel operation group is assigned to a device, it doesn't take part in
i the parallel operation and undertakes its own voltage regulation.
8.3.7.4 Parallel operation

In the parallel operation menu, you can display information about the devices
that are connected by CAN bus.
Description
Parallel operation status:

– - = Independent mode
– = Parallel operation is active
– = Parallel operation error
CAN CAN bus address
Grp. Parallel operation group
Method Active parallel operation method
Position Current tap position
U Voltage
I_p Active current
I_q Reactive current
Block. Blocking:
– Gray: Parallel operation not blocked
– Red: Parallel operation blocked
Table 135: Information about parallel operation
Figure 329: Parallel operation
1. Go to Information > Voltage regulation > Parallel operation.

2. If necessary, select the Parameter button to display the parallel operation
settings for the device.
3. Select the desired parameter to change its setting.

8.3.7.5 Displaying measured circulating reactive current (optional)
You can display the measured circulating reactive current and the additional
voltage deviation resulting from it for voltage regulation.
Settings Parameters Measured c...ent
Name Value
Home
Apparent I at the measurement i... 22,531 mA
Reactive I polarity at the meas... -1
Calculated circulating reactive... -11,176 A
Correction for voltage regulation - Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 330: Measured circulating reactive current
Go to Information > Voltage regulator > Measured circulating reactive cur-

rent.
8.3.8 U bandwidth monitoring
The following limit values are monitored via bandwidth monitoring. The set
bandwidth [►Page 304] of the voltage regulation is used for this purpose.
– Upper bandwidth
– Lower bandwidth
– Hysteresis limit value: Specification as a percentage relative to the desired
voltage value.
Behavior If the measured value is higher than the upper limit or lower than the lower
limit, the device triggers the Upper bandwidth limit value / Lower bandwidth
limit value message.
The "Function monitoring" function is used to detect long periods when values
are above or below the bandwidth. Long periods when values are above or be-
low the bandwidth indicate a problem with the device function because the de-
vice is not able to correct the control deviation.
If the value is above or below the set bandwidth [►Page 304], the Function
monitoring event is displayed after the set delay time for function monitoring
has elapsed. The event is automatically acknowledged as soon as the measured
value is back within the set bandwidth.
The following parameters are available for setting function monitoring:

– Hysteresis
– Delay time

Settings Parameters U bandwidt...ing
Name Value
Home
Function monitoring Auto and Manual
Hysteresis 0.0 %
Delay time 15 min
Lower bandwidth hysteresis 0.1 % Events
Lower bandwidth delay time 2s
Upper bandwidth hysteresis 0.1 %
Upper bandwidth delay time 2s
Information
Recorder
Figure 331: U bandwidth monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameter > Voltage regulator > U bandwidth monitoring.
Function monitoring
You can use this parameter to activate function monitoring. You can select the
following options:
Setting Behavior
Off Function monitoring is deactivated.
Only Auto Function monitoring is only active in AVR AUTO operating

mode.
Auto and Manual Function monitoring is active in AVR AUTO and AVR MAN-
UAL operating modes
Hysteresis
threshold value.
Delay time
the event message.
8.3.9 Q bandwidth monitoring (optional)
The following limit values are monitored via bandwidth monitoring. The set
bandwidth [►Page 304] for reactive power regulation is used for this purpose.
– Upper bandwidth
– Lower bandwidth


– Hysteresis
– Delay time
Settings Parameters U bandwidt...ing
Name Value
Home
Hysteresis 0.0 %
Delay time 15 min
Lower bandwidth hysteresis 0.1 % Events
Upper bandwidth hysteresis 0.1 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 332: Q bandwidth monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameter > Voltage regulator > Q bandwidth monitoring.
Function monitoring
following options:
Setting Behavior

mode.
UAL operating modes
Hysteresis
threshold value.
Delay time
the event message.

8.3.10 P bandwidth monitoring (optional)
The following limit values are monitored via bandwidth monitoring. The band-
width [►Page 304] set for active power regulation is used for this purpose.
– Upper bandwidth
– Lower bandwidth

– Hysteresis
– Delay time
Settings Parameters P bandwidt...ing
Name Value
Home
Hysteresis 0.0 MW
Delay time 15 min
Lower bandwidth hysteresis 0.0 MW Events
Upper bandwidth hysteresis 0.0 MW
Information
Recorder
Figure 333: P bandwidth monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameter > Voltage regulator > P bandwidth monitoring.

Function monitoring
following options:
Setting Behavior

mode.
UAL operating modes
Hysteresis
threshold value.
Delay time
the event message.
8.3.11 Target-tap-position operation
When target-tap-position operation is activated, the device automatically

switches to this target tap position.
Settings Parameters Move to ...ion
Name Value
Home
Target tap position 0
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 334: Move to the defined target tap position
Go to Settings > Parameter > On-load tap-changer > Move to the defined
target tap position.
Target tap position

You can use this parameter to define a target tap position.

Target-tap-position operation allowed
You can use this parameter to set in which operating mode the Target-tap-posi-
tion operation function is allowed or blocked.
Option Behavior with the operating mode
AVR Auto AVR Manual
Local Remote Local Remote
AVR Auto Allowed Allowed Blocked Blocked
AVR Manual Blocked Blocked Blocked Allowed
AVR Auto + Manual Allowed Allowed Blocked Allowed

Table 139: Behavior of the Target-tap-position operation function depending on the selected option and
the operating mode of the device
8.3.12 Three-winding transformer and HV/LV regulation
The voltage is regulated via one of the two windings (winding 1 or winding 2).
Depending on the device configuration, there are various ways of selecting the
active winding:
– Automatic winding selection
– Selection based on apparent current (only with three-winding transformer)
– Selection based on voltage (only with three-winding transformer)
– Selection based on active power flow (only with HV/LV regulation)
– Manual winding selection (optional)
– Selection using parameters
– Selection using inputs
– Selection using control system commands
8.3.12.1 Configuring automatic winding selection

If you want to regulate a three-winding transformer, the winding can be se-
lected automatically via the calculated apparent current or measured voltage. If
you want to regulate the high-voltage side or low-voltage side of a transformer,
the winding can be selected automatically via the calculated active power flow.
Settings Parameters Three-wind...mer
Name Value
Home
Regulation type Three-winding transformer
Winding selection Auto
Autom. winding selection mode Apparent current
Switching delay Apparent current 5s Events
Switching delay Voltage 5s
W1: U> Switching limit 110 kV
W1: U< Switching limit 90 kV
W2: U> Switching limit 110 kV Information
W2: U< Switching limit 90 kV

Monitoring for non-regulated wi... On
Recorder
Figure 335: Three-winding transformer
Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Three-winding trans-

former.

Regulation type
You can use this parameter to set which type of voltage regulation the device is
to use. You can select the following options:
– Three-winding transformer: Regulation of a three-winding transformer
– HV/LV regulation: Regulation of the high-voltage side or low-voltage side of
a transformer
Winding selection
You can use this parameter to set which winding the device is to regulate. You
– Winding 1
– Winding 2
– Automatic: The device decides which winding to regulate based on the set
parameters.
Automatic winding selection mode

You can use this parameter to set the control variable the device is to use to se-
lect which winding is to be regulated. Depending on the regulation type [►Page
333], you can select the following options:
– Apparent current (only with three-winding transformers): The device regu-
lates the winding across which the higher apparent current flows. The
changeover between the windings takes place once the set delay time has
elapsed.
– Voltage (only with three-winding transformer): The device regulates the
winding on which the measured voltage violates one of the two switching
limits (U<, U>). The changeover between the windings takes place once the
set delay time has elapsed. Observe the following information when testing:
– If no switching limits are violated, the device regulates the winding last ac-
tive. The initial status after switching on the device is winding 1.
– If the switching limits for both windings are exceeded at the same time in
the same direction (e.g. winding 1 U> and winding 2 U>), the device regu-
lates the winding last active.
– If the switching limits for both windings are violated at the same time in
opposite directions (e.g. winding 1 U> and winding 2 U<), the device
blocks automatic voltage regulation.
– Pos. active power: Winding 1 (only with HV/LV regulation): With positive ac-
tive power (active power flow from winding 2 to winding 1), the device regu-
lates winding 1. With negative active power, the device regulates winding 2.
– Pos. active power: Winding 2 (only with HV/LV regulation): With positive ac-
tive power (active power flow from winding 2 to winding 1), the device regu-
lates winding 2. With negative active power, the device regulates winding 1.
Apparent current change delay

You can use this parameter to set the change delay for the automatic winding
selection using the calculated apparent current. Once the delay time has
elapsed, the device regulates the winding with the greater apparent current.
Change delay voltage

You can use this parameter to set the change delay for the automatic winding
selection using the measured voltage. If a switching limit is exceeded, the de-
vice regulates the corresponding winding once the delay time has elapsed.
W1/W2: U>/U< Switching limit

You can use these parameters to set the switching limits for automatic winding
selection using the measured voltage. You can set a lower limit (U<) and upper
limit (U>) for each winding.

Monitoring of the unregulated winding
You can use this parameter to deactivate the monitoring function for the unreg-
ulated winding if the measured voltage of the unregulated winding is less than
30 V (e.g. with open circuit breaker). You can select the following options:
Option Description
On If the measured voltage of the unregulated winding is less than

30 V, the voltage regulation is blocked. Furthermore, the follow-
ing monitoring functions of the unregulated winding will con-
tinue to be performed:
– Current monitoring
Off If the measured voltage of the unregulated winding is less than

30 V, the voltage regulation is not blocked. Furthermore, the fol-
lowing monitoring functions of the unregulated winding will not
be performed:
– Current monitoring
Table 140: Monitoring of the unregulated winding
8.3.12.2 Manually selecting winding (optional)

You have the option of manually selecting the winding to be regulated. If your
device is equipped with this function, you can use a parameter on the device,
digital inputs or control system commands to select the winding to be regu-
lated. The following options are available:
– Automatic winding selection
– Winding 1
– Winding 2
Selecting winding using parameters

To select the winding to be regulated using parameters, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Voltage regulator > Three-winding trans-
former > Winding selection.
2. Select the desired option from the list box.
Selecting winding using digital input or control system

To select the winding to be regulated using digital input or control system, pro-
ceed as follows:
Create pulse at the desired input or send desired control system command to
the device.

8.4 Active part
8.4.1 Asset intelligence
The Asset intelligence function is used to diagnose possible transformer states

with the aide of a statistical model using the data from the sensors that are con-
nected to the device. This is to simplify interpreting the recorded measured val-
ues and the event messages occurring.
The more sensors there are connected to the transformer and connected to the
device, the more precisely the device can perform the diagnosis. If the device
only has access to a few sensors, not all states can be displayed. Due to the sta-
tistical model, it can take up to 1 hour for Asset intelligence to provide possible
causes and interpretations for an error that has occurred.
The device display shows the following information for the selected states:
– The determined probability that a state has arisen.
– Description of the state.
– Possible effects on the transformer and further possibilities for determining
the cause.
– Measurements from the sensors that led to the determined probability value.
Note that the diagnosis is based on a statistical model that cannot evaluate
i local particularities, the history of the transformer or states that are rare
and difficult to diagnose. In the event of doubts, consult a transformer ex-
pert to prevent damage to the transformer.
Figure 336: Asset intelligence
1. Go to Information > System > Asset intelligence.

2. Select the desired Diagnostics to display further information.

8.4.2 Temperature monitoring
95.0 °C
100.0
-20.0
-30.0 °C
°C
You can set different limit values for every measured/calculated temperature. If
the measured temperature is greater than limit value > or >>, the device trig-
gers an event message. If the measured temperature is less than limit value < or
<<, the device triggers an event message.
Settings Parameters Temperat...ing
<< < > >>

Home
Hot-spot - - 117.0 °C 122.0 °C
Top oil -25.0 °C -20.0 °C 90.0 °C 105.0 °C
Ambient -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 50.0 °C 60.0 °C Events
Bottom oil -25.0 °C -20.0 °C 90.0 °C 105.0 °C
OLTC -25.0 °C -20.0 °C 100.0 °C 110.0 °C
GP 1 -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 95.0 °C 100.0 °C

Information
GP 2 -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 95.0 °C 100.0 °C
GP 3 -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 95.0 °C 100.0 °C

Recorder
GP 4 -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 95.0 °C 100.0 °C
Figure 337: Temperature monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameter > Temperature monitoring.
8.4.3 Displaying temperature curve (optional)
You can display the temporal progression of the temperatures measured over
the last 10 days.
Figure 338: Temperature curve
Go to Information > Active part > Temperatures.

8.4.4 Setting Tx statistics monitoring
You can set 2 limit values each for the calculated loss-of-life of the transformer:
If the calculated loss-of-life is greater than the limit value, the device triggers an
event.
Settings Parameters Tx stati...ing
> >>
Home
Relative aging rate 1.5 1.6
Loss-of-life 95.0 % 100.0 %
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 339: Tx statistics monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameter > Active part > Tx statistics monitoring.
Relative loss-of-life >/>>

With these parameters you can set the limit values for the relative loss-of-life of
the transformer.
Loss of life >/>>

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the loss-of-life of the
transformer.
8.4.5 Displaying winding temperatures (optional)
If you record the winding temperatures with a sensor, you can display the tem-
poral progression of the measured winding temperatures over the last 10 days.
To do so, proceed as follows:
Figure 340: Winding temperature
Go to Information > Active part > Winding temperatures 1-12 / Winding

temperatures 13-24.

As an option, you can also display the measured value trend over a time period
that you define (max. the last 10 days). You will find more information on this in
the section "Measured value recorder".
8.4.6 Hot-spot temperature of the transformer winding (optional)
Depending on the device configuration, you can determine the transformer

winding hot-spot temperature via measurement or calculation.
8.4.6.1 Hot-spot measurement

Hot-spot measurement requires that you connect [►Section 8.1.20, Page 211] a
sensor for recording the winding temperature to the device via an MR sensor
bus and link [►Section 8.1.21, Page 219] the transmitted data points to the
function of the analog input (winding temperature 1...24). In addition, you must
select the "Measurement" option for the parameter "Hot-spot determination".
Figure 341: Hot-spot
Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Hot-spot.
Hot-spot determination
You can use this parameter to set how the device is to determine the hot-spot
temperature. You can select the following options:
– Hot-spot measurement
– Hot-spot calculation
8.4.6.2 Hot-spot calculation

The device can calculate the hot-spot in accordance with the thermal models of
the standards IEC 60076-7 and IEEE Std C57.91. Observe the following sections
when doing so.
If you use the optional function "Hot-spot calculation on 3 different wind-

i ings (W1, W2, W3)", you must set the parameters "IEC: Gradient", "IEEE:
Gradient", "IEC: Hot-spot factor" and "Nominal current" for W1, W2 and W3
respectively.
If you are using a cooling system, you also need to enter the calculation pa-
i rameters for each cooling stage in the menu under "CS x hot-spot".

If you are to control a cooling system with the optional Frequency-based
i cooling system control [►Section 8.7.7, Page 430] function, you must set
the calculation parameters for both the minimum fan speed and the maxi-
mum fan speed. The device interpolates the values of the parameters be-
tween the two operating points.
8.4.6.2.1 Hot-spot calculation in accordance with IEC 60076-7

For the hot-spot calculation in accordance with the thermal model as per
IEC 60076-7, you can set the parameters described in the following.
Calculation method
You can use this parameter to set which method the device is to use to calcu-
late the hot-spot temperature:
– IEC 60076-7
– IEEE Std C57.91
Depending on the calculation method, you have to set various additional calcu-
lation parameters.
Self-learning thermal model

You can use this parameter to activate the self-learning algorithm which opti-
mizes the parameters of the thermal model of the transformer over the operat-
ing lifetime. The device uses the set parameters as start parameters and adjusts
the parameters cyclically with an optimization algorithm. With this procedure,
the thermal model calculation continually moves closer to the actual trans-
former temperature.

Depending on the Hot-spot determination [►Page 339], the device optimizes
the following parameters:
Parameter Hot-spot determination
Calculation Measurement
Winding exponent No Yes
Oil exponent Yes Yes
Winding time constant Yes Yes
Oil time constant No Yes
k11 Yes Yes
k21 No Yes
k22 No Yes
Increase of the upper oil temperature Yes Yes
Increase of the hot-spot temperature No Yes
Ratio of the evaluated power loss Yes Yes

Table 141: Optimized parameters
The device must record the following values to optimize the parameters:
– With hot-spot calculation option:
– Load factor (current/voltage measurement)
– With hot-spot measurement option:
– Hot-spot temperature
– Load factor (current/voltage measurement)
Cooling method
You can use this parameter to set the cooling method of the transformer. Based
on your selection, the device sets the parameters for the hot-spot temperature
calculation to the standard values in accordance with IEC 60076-7. You can se-
lect the following options:
– Standard: Factory setting
– ONAN: Oil Natural Air Natural (natural oil flow and natural air flow)
– ONAF: Oil Natural Air Forced (natural oil flow and forced air flow)
– OD: Oil Directed (directed oil flow)
– OF: Oil Forced (forced oil flow)
Parameter Standard ONAN ONAF OD OF
Oil exponent 0.9 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0
Winding exponent 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.0 1.3
k11 1.0 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0
k21 1.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.3
k22 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0
Oil time constant 210 210 150 90 90
Winding time con- 10 10 7 7 7

stant
Table 142: Standard values in accordance with IEC 60076-7

If you change the cooling method, the start parameters for the self-learning
i thermal model will be reset and the optimization process restarts.
If you device is equipped with the optional cooling system control function
i and you select the option ONAF, then the device interpolates the parame-
ters for the hot-spot calculation for each cooling group. For step 0 (no cool-
ing groups active), the device uses the parameters of ONAN; for step n (all
cooling groups active), the device uses the parameters for ONAF. For the
intermediate steps, the device uses the interpolated values.
IEC: hot-spot factor

You can use this parameter to set the hot-spot factor for calculating the hot-
spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: gradient
You can use this parameter to set the gradients for calculating the hot-spot
temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: winding exponent

You can use this parameter to set the winding exponents for calculating the
hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: Oil exponent

You can use this parameter to set the oil exponent of the transformer in accor-
dance with IEC 60076-7.
Winding time constant

You can use this parameter to set the winding time constant for calculating the
hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or IEEE Std C57.91.
Oil time constant

You can use this parameter to set the oil time constant for calculating the hot-
spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or IEEE Std C57.91.
IEC: k21
You can use this parameter to set the thermal model constant k21 for calculat-
ing the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: k22
You can use this parameter to set the thermal model constant k22 for calculat-
ing the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: k11
You can use this parameter to set the thermal model constant k11 used for cal-
culating the upper oil temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
Nominal current
You can use this parameter to set the nominal current of the transformer for
calculating the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or
IEEE Std C57.91.
Rated power of the transformer

You can use this parameter to set the rated power of the transformer. This pa-
rameter is used for calculating the actual power based on the determined load
factor.

Increase of the hot-spot temperature
You can use this parameter to set the increase in the hot-spot temperature
above the ambient temperature. The value to be set depends on the design of
your transformer.
Increase of the upper oil temperature

You can use this parameter to set the increase of the upper oil temperature
above ambient temperature (at rated load). The value to be set depends on the
design of your transformer.
Ratio of the evaluated power loss

You can use this parameter to set the ratio of the power losses at rated current
to the idling losses of the transformer. The value to be set depends on the de-
sign of your transformer.
8.4.6.2.1.1 Displaying the self-learning thermal model parameters

You can display the start parameters and the optimized parameters of the self-
learning thermal model of the transformer.
Figure 343: Self-learning thermal model
Go to Information > Active part > Self-learning thermal model.
Rated voltage of LV winding 1

You can use this parameter to set the rated voltage of winding 1 (low-voltage
side of the transformer). The device uses this specification to calculate the hot-
spot temperature for a three-winding transformer.

Rated voltage of HV winding 3 in highest position

You can use this parameter to set the rated voltage of winding 3 (high-voltage
side of the transformer) in the highest tap position for the on-load tap-changer.
The device uses this specification to calculate the hot-spot temperature for a
three-winding transformer.
You have to set different values for the rated voltage of winding 3 (high-
i voltage side) in the highest tap position and lowest tap position.

Rated voltage of HV winding 3 in lowest position
side of the transformer) in the lowest tap position for the on-load tap-changer.
8.4.6.2.2 Hot-spot calculation in accordance with IEEE Std C57.91

For the hot-spot calculation in accordance with the thermal model as per
IEEE Std C57.91, you can set the parameters described in the following.
Calculation method
You can use this parameter to set which method the device is to use to calcu-
late the hot-spot temperature:
– IEC 60076-7
– IEEE Std C57.91
Depending on the calculation method, you have to set various additional calcu-
lation parameters.
Winding time constant

You can use this parameter to set the winding time constant for calculating the
hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or IEEE Std C57.91.
Oil time constant

You can use this parameter to set the oil time constant for calculating the hot-
spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or IEEE Std C57.91.
IEEE: gradient
You can use this parameter to set the gradients for calculating the hot-spot
temperature in accordance with IEEE Std C57.91.

IEEE: exponent
You can use this parameter to set the exponents for calculating the hot-spot
temperature in accordance with IEEE Std C57.91.
Nominal current
You can use this parameter to set the nominal current of the transformer for
calculating the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or
IEEE Std C57.91.

factor.
Increase of the hot-spot temperature

You can use this parameter to set the increase in the hot-spot temperature
above the ambient temperature. The value to be set depends on the design of
your transformer.
Increase of the upper oil temperature

You can use this parameter to set the increase of the upper oil temperature
above ambient temperature (at rated load). The value to be set depends on the
design of your transformer.
Ratio of the evaluated power loss

You can use this parameter to set the ratio of the power losses at rated current
to the idling losses of the transformer. The value to be set depends on the de-
sign of your transformer.


Rated voltage of HV winding 3 in highest position

side of the transformer) in the highest tap position for the on-load tap-changer.
Rated voltage of HV winding 3 in lowest position

side of the transformer) in the lowest tap position for the on-load tap-changer.

8.4.6.3 Hot-spot forecast (optional)

You can use the optional hot-spot forecast to calculate the hot-spot tempera-
ture based on load profile and ambient temperature for a 24-hour time period.
The calculation can either be made in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or IEEE Std
C57.91 (Clause 7 model). The diagram also shows you the load factor and the
relative aging rate of the transformer.
Figure 345: Hot-spot forecast
For the hot-spot forecast calculation, you must enter the desired values for load
factor and ambient temperature for every hour. The device uses the currently
measured values as the starting values. The remaining values are pre-populated
with the measured values from the previous day. If no measured values are
available, the device uses the factory setting.
If you call up the visualization using a PC, you can export the calculated values
as a csv file.
To be able to use the hot-spot forecast, you must first set the parameters for
the following functions:
– Hot-spot calculation [►Section 8.4.6.2, Page 338]
– Dynamic Transformer Rating [►Section 8.4.8.1, Page 347]
1. Go to Information > Active part > Fore. values.

2. Enter the desired values for Ambient temperature and Load factor K.
3. Press the Start calculation button.
The diagram appears.
4. Optional: Press to save the calculated values as a csv file.
5. If required, press Adjust values to make changes to the entered values.

8.4.7 Setting calculation of transformer's loss of life (optional)
In order to calculate the transformer's loss-of-life, you need to set the following
parameters.
Figure 346: Relative loss-of-life
Go to Settings > Parameter > Active part > Relative aging rate.
IEC: Insulating paper

You can use this parameter to set whether the transformer is equipped with
thermally stabilized insulation paper or not. This parameter is used to calculate
the relative aging rate and is only relevant if you calculate the hot-spot tempera-
ture in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
Transformer age
You can use this parameter to set the current age of the transformer in years.
This parameter is used to calculate the loss of life.
Transformer purchase price

This parameter can be used to set the purchase price of the transformer.
Anticipated service life

You can use this parameter to set the anticipated service life of the transformer
in years. This parameter is used to calculate the loss of life.
8.4.8 Dynamic Transformer Rating (optional)
NOTICE Damage to the transformer!

An impermissibly strong or long overload can irreversibly damage the trans-
former's insulation system. This can lead to increased gas formation and
could cause the transformer to fail. Note that the permitted overload is calcu-
lated based on a thermal model in accordance with IEEE Std C57.91 or
IEC 60076-7 and, as a result, deviations in the transformer's thermal model
can occur.
Ensure that the transformer's protective devices and equipment are func-
tional.
During overload operation, also monitor the measured values for tempera-
ture, power and gas content.
We recommend determining the design-specific parameters of the trans-

i former using a heat test in order to improve the forecast calculation of the
thermal model.

You can use the optional Dynamic Transformer Rating function (DTR) to deter-
mine the theoretical overload capacity of the transformer and the loss-of-life
caused by it. The value can either be calculated in accordance with the
IEEE Std C57.91 or IEC 60076-7 calculation model.
Two operating modes are distinguished for the Dynamic Transformer Rating.
You can set the limit values for both operating modes:
Emergency mode
In emergency mode, unplanned malfunctions or failures occur in the grid which
require the transformer to take on an increased load. Emergency mode helps
support the grid in this process without damaging the equipment or triggering
protection systems.
Insulation-friendly mode
In insulation-friendly mode, you must adjust the limit values for temperatures
and for the maximum permitted aging for 24 hours depending on the planned
duration of use of the transformer. This allows you to ensure a longer service
life for the transformer.
Measurement uncertainties
To calculate the permissible overload, the moisture in oil value of the trans-
former is recorded in addition to the measured temperature of the uppermost
oil layer and the calculated hot-spot temperature. The bubbling temperature is
calculated from the moisture in oil value.
The calculation of the bubbling temperature is only sufficiently accurate if the

transformer was in operation for a time period longer than 60 days and loaded
evenly.
If your transformer has been out of operation for a long time and in operation
for less than 60 days, or if your transformer is subject to large load deviations,
the device cannot calculate the permissible load precisely.
8.4.8.1 Configuring the Dynamic Transformer Rating

To calculate the overload capability of the transformer, the following parame-
ters must be set.
Before you can use this function, you must set the parameters in the "Hot-
i spot" [►Section 8.4.6.2, Page 338] menu item.
Figure 347: Dynamic Transformer Rating

Go to Settings > Parameter > Active part > Dynamic Transformer Rating
(DTR).
Calculation method
You can use this parameter to set the method for calculating the overload. You
– IEC 60076-7
– IEEE Std C57.91

factor.
Emergency mode max. hot-spot temperature

You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum hot-spot tempera-
ture of the transformer for emergency mode.
IFM: max. hot-spot temperature

You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum permissible hot-
spot temperature of the transformer for insulation-friendly mode (IFM).
Emergency mode max. top-oil temperature

You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum temperature of the
transformer top-oil for emergency mode.
IFM: max. top-oil temperature

You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum permitted temper-
ature of the transformer top-oil for insulation-friendly mode (IFM).
IFM: max. relative aging rate

You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum permitted loss-of-
life of the transformer for 24 hours for insulation-friendly mode (IFM).
Emergency mode max. load factor

You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum load factor K of the
transformer for emergency mode.
IFM: max. load factor

You can use this parameter to set the customer-specific limit for the maximum
permitted load factor of the transformer for insulation-friendly mode(IFM).
IFM: Activating/Deactivating the relative aging rate limit

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the limit for the maximum
permitted loss-of-life of the transformer for 24 hours for insulation-friendly
mode (IFM).
8.4.8.2 Displaying the Dynamic Transformer Rating

You can display the calculated values for insulation-friendly mode and the maxi-
mum possible load factor of the transformer in a tabular display or as a diagram.
Based on the latest transformer measured values and the set limit values, the
Dynamic Transformer Rating (DTR) function calculates the maximum remaining
time and the maximum possible load factors for specified times.

DTR table
The following values are displayed in this menu:
– Current load factor K [%]
– Remaining time [min], depending on the current load factor for emergency
mode
– Remaining time [min], depending on the current load factor for insulation-
friendly mode at > 24 h (IFM)
– Maximum possible load factor for different times (IFM); see overview:
Column Meaning
Time Overload duration
Load factor K [%] Calculated load factor K in %.

Displays the permissible load factor for the corresponding
overload duration.
Power [MVA] Displays the permissible transformer apparent power for

the corresponding overload duration. This value is calcu-
lated from the rated power and the load factor K.
Limit Displays the limit value reached first if the transformer is

overloaded with the recommended load factor K for the
corresponding overload duration.
Rel. LOL [%] Relative aging rate of the transformer in %.

Overload refers to the service life of the transformer. Calcu-
lation is based on the set parameter "Anticipated service
life" [►Page 346].
Table 143: Overload overview
Figure 348: Overload table
Go to Information > Active part > Dynamic Transformer Rating (DTR).
DTR diagram
In this menu, you can display the calculated values graphically. For the selected
overload period, the diagram shows the permissible load factor K and the fore-
cast progression of the temperatures (hot-spot, top-oil) as well as the associ-
ated limit values. Furthermore, the diagram shows the progression of the fore-
cast loss-of-life and the ambient temperature at the time of the calculation.

If you call up the visualization via a PC and your user role is either "Diagnostics",
"Parameter Configurator" or "Administrator", you can export the DTR diagram
data values as a csv file.
Figure 349: DTR diagram
1. Go to Information > Active part > DTR diagram.

2. Select the desired Overload time.
3. If necessary, select the Update button to update the view.
4. If required, select the button to export the overload diagram data.
8.4.9 Dissolved gas analysis (optional)
You can use the optional function "Dissolved gas analysis" (DGA) to monitor the
gas content and the moisture in the transformer oil. Depending on the device
configuration, the device records the measured values from the sensors either
as analog signals (4...20 mA) or MR sensor bus. For the configuration of the
sensors, refer to sections "Configuring analog inputs and outputs" [►Section
8.1.21, Page 219] and "MR sensor bus" [►Section 8.1.20, Page 211].
The values determined and calculated using the function "Dissolved gas
i analysis" can exhibit measuring inaccuracies that arise from the measuring
inaccuracies of the sensors. Therefore, refer to the sensor operating in-
structions for further information on the measuring accuracy and any nec-
essary calibration.
Depending on the device configuration, the dissolved gas analysis includes the
following sub-functions:
– Display of the absolute values
– Display of the rates of increase
– Display of the measured value trend
– Additional, as an option:
– Duval analysis
– Rogers analysis
– Dörnenburg analysis
– IEC 60599 analysis

8.4.9.1 Configuring DGA monitoring
For the DGA monitoring "DGA", you can set 3 limit values for the absolute val-
ues and for the rates of increase. Depending on the device configuration, you
can monitor up to 11 DGA signals.
Settings Parameters DGA monitoring
Name Value
Home
Sensor measuring accuracy 15.0 %
Reset diagnostic error memory Off
Rates of increase evaluation in... 7 days
Nitrogen measurement method Sensor Events
C2H2 > 1.0 ppm
C2H2 >> 10.0 ppm
C2H2 >>> 35.0 ppm
C2H4 > 50.0 ppm Information
C2H4 >> 100.0 ppm

C2H4 >>> 200.0 ppm
C2H6 > 65.0 ppm
Recorder
C2H6 >> 100.0 ppm
C2H6 >>> 150.0 ppm
Figure 350: Configuring DGA monitoring
To set the DGA monitoring, proceed as follows:

Go to Settings > Parameter > Active part > DGA monitoring.
Sensor measuring accuracy

You can use this parameter to enter the sensor measuring accuracy as a per-
centage value. When doing so, refer to the sensor operating instructions.
Reset diagnostic errors

You can use this parameter to reset the recorded diagnostic errors for all dis-
solved gas analyses. This can be useful after a transformer oil change, for exam-
ple.
Rates of increase evaluation interval

You can use this parameter to set the interval for the rate of increase which is
used as the basis for the limit value consideration.
Substitute relative water content value

You can use this parameter to enter a value for the relative water content of the
transformer (e.g. from the last oil analysis). This value can be used as a substi-
tute value if the transformer is not equipped with a sensor for measuring the
relative water content or if the sensor is defective.
Use substitute relative water content value

You can use this parameter to activate the alternative value for the relative wa-
ter content. The device then performs all calculations for which the relative wa-
ter content of the transformer oil is used with the substitute value. Note that
the calculations can be less accurate when you use the substitute value, and
that the substitute value deviates from the actual transformer relative water
content value.

Nitrogen measurement method
You can use this parameter to select how the device is to determine the
amount of nitrogen.
– Sensor: The device uses the measured value for nitrogen that the DGA sen-
sor sends to the device.
– Calculation: The device calculates the proportion of nitrogen based on the
available measured values from the DGA sensor using a mathematical
model.
Limit values for absolute values

Measured value Parameter
Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3
H2 (ppm) H2> H2>> H2>>>
N2 (ppm) N2< N2<< N2<<<
CO (ppm) CO> CO>> CO>>>
CO2 (ppm) CO2> CO2>> CO2>>>
CH4 (ppm) CH4> CH4>> CH4>>>
C2H2 (ppm) C2H2> C2H2>> C2H2>>>
C2H4 (ppm) C2H4> C2H4>> C2H4>>>
C2H6 (ppm) C2H6> C2H6>> C2H6>>>
O2 (ppm) O2< O2<< O2<<<
TDCG (ppm) TDCG> TDCG>> TDCG>>>
Transformer relative wa- Tx rel. H2O cont. > Tx rel. H2O cont. -
ter content (%) >>
On-load tap-changer rela- OLTC rel. H2O OLTC rel. H2O -

tive water content (%) cont. > cont. >>
Table 144: Limit values for the absolute values
Limit values for rates of increase

Gas Parameter
H2O (%/d) H2O rate of increase> H2O rate of in- H2O rate of in-
crease>> crease>>>
H2 (ppm/d) H2 rate of increase> H2 rate of increase>> H2 rate of in-

crease>>>
N2 (ppm/d) N2 rate of increase< N2 rate of increase<< N2 rate of in-

crease<<<
CO (ppm/d) CO rate of increase> CO rate of increase>> CO rate of in-

crease>>>
CO2 (ppm/d) CO2 rate of increase> CO2 rate of in- CO2 rate of in-
crease>> crease>>>
CH4 (ppm/d) CH4 rate of increase> CH4 rate of in- CH4 rate of in-
crease>> crease>>>
C2H2 (ppm/d) C2H2 rate of in- C2H2 rate of in- C2H2 rate of in-
crease> crease>> crease>>>

Gas Parameter
O2 (ppm/d) O2 rate of increase< O2 rate of increase<< O2 rate of in-

crease<<<
TDCG (ppm/d) TDCG rate of in- TDCG rate of in- TDCG rate of in-
Table 145: Limit values for the rates of increase
8.4.9.2 Displaying measured values

The overview screen displays the current status of the dissolved gas analysis.
Figure 351: Overview screen
Depending on the analysis method, the following status values are displayed:
Value Description
Gray Limit value not exceeded
Yellow Yellow limit exceeded
Red Red limit exceeded

Table 146: Status values for absolute values and rates of increase
Value Description Duv. Rog. Dörn. IEC
-- Analysis not possible + + + +
N Normal operation - + - -
D1 Discharge of low energy + + - +
D2 Discharge of high energy + + + +
D1/D2 Discharge of low/high energy - - - +
T1 Thermal fault <300 °C + + - +
T2 Thermal fault 300...700 °C + + - +
T3 Thermal fault >700 °C + + - +
PD Partial discharge + - + +

Value Description Duv. Rog. Dörn. IEC
TD Mixed thermal/electrical fault + - - -
T1-T3 Thermal decomposition - - + -

Table 147: Status values for the Duval, Rogers, Dörnenburg and IEC 60599 analyses
For the Duval, Rogers, Dörnenburg and IEC 60599 analyses, the values mea-
sured by the sensor have to exceed the following detection limits. If the mea-
sured values are less than the detection limit, the device will use the detection
limit value for the calculation.
Gas Detection limit
H2 50 ppm
CH4 10 ppm
C2H2 10 ppm
C2H4 10 ppm
C2H6 10 ppm
Table 148: Detection limits
8.4.9.2.1 Absolute values

You can display the current absolute measured values of the sensors. Further-
more, a bar chart shows a graphical representation of the measured value and
the set limit values (yellow, red).
Figure 352: Display of absolute values
Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Abs. values.

8.4.9.2.2 Rates of increase
You can display the calculated rates of increase of the gases (ppm/d and ppm/
y). The bar chart shows a graphical representation of the actual rate of increase
(ppm/d) and the set limit values (yellow, red). The set evaluation interval is the
decisive factor for the display of rates of increase.
Figure 353: Displaying the rates of increase
Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Rates of inc..
8.4.9.2.3 Measured value trend

You can display the temporal progression of the measured DGA measurements
over the last 10 days.
Figure 354: DGA measured value trend
Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Graph.
You can also display the DGA measured value trend over a time period that you
define. You will find more information on this in the section "Measured value
recorder".
8.4.9.2.4 Duval analysis

The display of the Duval analysis shows the following information:
– Duval triangle, with the allocation of the last 10 measured values in the areas
of the various error types.
– Latest measured value: Darkest area with a display of the measurement
error.
– Earliest measured value: Lightest area

– Display of the error types. The error type of the latest measured value is high-
lighted in white.
– Gas concentrations of the latest measured value
If you call up the visualization using a PC, the gas concentrations and the time
of the measurement are displayed for each measured value via tooltip.
Figure 355: Display of the Duval analysis
Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Duval.
8.4.9.2.5 Rogers analysis

The display of the Rogers analysis shows the following information:
– 3D diagram, with the allocation of the last 10 measured values in the areas of
the various error types.
error.
lighted in white.
– Proportion of the gas concentrations of the latest measured value
If you call up the visualization using a PC, the proportions of the gas concentra-
tions and the time of the measurement are displayed for each measured value
via tooltip. Furthermore, you can rotate the diagram using the mouse.
Figure 356: Display of the Rogers analysis
Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Rogers.

8.4.9.2.6 Dörnenburg analysis
The display of the Dörnenburg analysis shows the following information:
– Tabular display of the latest 10 errors
lighted in white.
tions are displayed for each measured value via tooltip.
Figure 357: Display of the Dörnenburg analysis
Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Dörnenburg.
8.4.9.2.7 IEC 60599 analysis

The display of the IEC 60599 analysis shows the following information:
– 3D diagram, with the allocation of the last 10 measured values in the areas of
the various error types.
error.
lighted in white.
tions and the time of the measurement are displayed for each measured value
via tooltip. Furthermore, you can rotate the diagram using the mouse.
Figure 358: Display of the IEC 60599 analysis

Go to Information > Active part > DGA > IEC 60599.
8.4.10 Monitoring the gas volume of the Buchholz relay (trans-

former)
When you record the gas volume of the Buchholz relay of the transformer, you
can set 2 limit values for the gas volume. If the measured gas volume is greater
than the limit value > or >>, the device triggers an event message.
Settings Parameters Buchholz relay
> >>
Home
Transformer gas volume 0.3 l 0.4 l
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 359: Limit values for the gas volume of the Buchholz relay of the transformer
Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Buchholz relay.
8.4.11 Monitoring the oil pressure (transformer)
When you record the oil pressure of the transformer, you can use the pressure
relief device (PRD) to set 2 limit values for the gas volume. If the measured oil
pressure is greater than the limit value > or >>, the device triggers an event
message.
Settings Parameters Pressure...ice
> >>
Home
Transformer oil press. 15 kPa 20 kPa
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 360: Limit values for the oil pressure of the transformer
Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Pressure relief device.

8.4.12 Displaying transformer statistics
You can display the calculated loss-of-life of the transformer.
Figure 361: Transformer statistics
Go to Information > Active part > Statistics.
8.4.13 Breakdown voltage monitoring
You can use this function to monitor the dielectric strength of the insulating
fluid of the transformer or of the on-load tap-changer. To do so, the device
measures the temperature and the water content of the insulating fluid with a
sensor and calculates the actual insulating fluid breakdown voltage in accor-
dance with CIGRE TB 741. Measurements and calculations are made once per
hour and a mean value is derived for the breakdown voltage. A more accurate
value is available after approximately 48 hours. If the measured values for tem-
perature or water content are invalid, the device does not make a calculation.
The device is preconfigured for monitoring the following oil types:

– Nynas Nytro Taurus
– Shell Diala S4
– Midel eN 1204
– Midel 7131
If you would like to monitor a different oil, you must set the saturation parame-
ters and the curve parameters.
Saturation limit
B
A- T Oil
Ws = 10
Ws Oil saturation limit TOil Oil temperature
A Saturation parameter A (base 10) B Saturation parameter B (base 10)
Breakdown voltage
Ud = a +d
- b(Wrel - c)
1+e
Ud Breakdown voltage Wrel Relative water content of the oil
a Curve parameter a b Curve parameter b
c Curve parameter c d Curve parameter d

Events
No. Name Description
3459 Tx breakdown voltage < limit The calculated breakdown voltage in the
value transformer is less than the specified < limit
value.
3460 OLTC breakdown voltage < limit The calculated breakdown voltage in the on-
value load tap-changer is less than the specified <
limit value.
3461 OLTC A breakdown voltage < The calculated breakdown voltage in on-
limit value load tap-changer column A is less than the
specified < limit value.
3462 OLTC B breakdown voltage < The calculated breakdown voltage in on-
limit value load tap-changer column B is less than the
3463 OLTC C breakdown voltage < The calculated breakdown voltage in on-
limit value load tap-changer column C is less than the
3464 Tx breakdown voltage << limit The calculated breakdown voltage in the
value transformer is less than the specified <<
limit value.
3465 OLTC breakdown voltage << The calculated breakdown voltage in the on-
limit value load tap-changer is less than the specified
<< limit value.
3466 OLTC A breakdown voltage << The calculated breakdown voltage in on-
limit value load tap-changer column A is less than the
specified << limit value.
3467 OLTC B breakdown voltage << The calculated breakdown voltage in on-
limit value load tap-changer column B is less than the
3468 OLTC C breakdown voltage << The calculated breakdown voltage in on-
limit value load tap-changer column C is less than the
Table 149: Events

8.4.13.1 Configuring the transformer breakdown voltage monitoring function
Settings Parameters Breakdown ...ion
Name Value
Home
Transformer oil type Other
Tx saturation parameter A 1.0
Tx saturation parameter B 100.0
Tx curve parameter a -500.0 Events
Tx curve parameter b 0.0
Tx curve parameter c -40.0
Tx curve parameter d 500
Use Tx calibration point No Information
Tx rel. water content calib. point 10.0

Tx breakdown voltage calib. point 60.0
Tx breakdown voltage SD calib. ... 2.0
Recorder
Tx breakdown volt. ref. temp. 25 °C
Tx limit values IEC 60422
Figure 362: Breakdown voltage calculation
Go to Settings > Parameter > Active part > Breakdown voltage calculation.
Transformer oil type

You can use this parameter to select the transformer oil type. You can select
– Shell Diala S4
– Midel eN 1204
– Midel 7131
– Other
If you select the option "Other", you must set the saturation parameters A
i and B and curve parameters a, b, c and d.
Tx saturation parameter A
You can use this parameter to set the saturation parameter A for the trans-
former insulating oil.
Tx saturation parameter B
You can use this parameter to set the saturation parameter B for the trans-
former insulating oil.
Tx curve parameter a
You can use this parameter to set the parameter a for calculating the break-
down voltage of the transformer insulating oil.
Tx curve parameter b
You can use this parameter to set the parameter b for calculating the break-
Tx curve parameter c
You can use this parameter to set the parameter c for calculating the break-
Tx curve parameter d
You can use this parameter to set the parameter d for calculating the break-

Use Tx calibration point
You can use this parameter to set whether you want to use a data point from an
oil analysis for calculating the breakdown voltage of the transformer insulating
oil. With this data, you can calibrate the calculation model and thus attain a
more precise calculation.
If you would like to use the calibration point, you also have to set the following
parameters:
– Tx rel. water content calib. point
– Tx breakdown voltage calib. point
– Tx breakdown voltage SD calib. point
Tx rel. water content calib. point

You can use this parameter to enter the relative water content of the trans-
former insulating oil from the oil analysis. The device uses the measured value
for the calibration of the calculation model.
Tx breakdown voltage calib. point

You can use this parameter to enter the breakdown voltage of the transformer
insulating oil from the oil analysis. The device uses the measured value for the
calibration of the calculation model.
Tx breakdown voltage SD calib. point

You can use this parameter to enter the standard deviation of the breakdown
voltage of the transformer insulating oil from the oil analysis. The device uses
the measured value for the calibration of the calculation model.
Tx breakdown volt. ref. temp.

You can use this parameter to set the reference temperature of the transformer
insulating oil for breakdown voltage monitoring. You can select the following
options:
– Current oil temperature
– 25 °C
Use the option 25 °C if you enter your own dielectric strength limit values that
reference an oil temperature of 25 °C.
Tx limit values
You can use this parameter to set which limit values the device should use for
monitoring the transformer breakdown voltage. You can select the following
options:
Option Nominal voltage of Limit values

transformer
Tx breakdown volt- Tx breakdown volt-
age << age <
IEC 60422 < 72.5 kV 30 kV 40 kV
72.5...170 kV 40 kV 50 kV
170...400 kV 50 kV 60 kV
> 400 kV 50 kV 60 kV
Operator limit values - Freely selectable Freely selectable

Table 150: Tx limit values
If you select the option "Operator limit values", you must set the limit values
yourself.

8.4.13.1.1 Tx nominal voltage
You can use this parameter to set the nominal voltage of the transformer.
Based on the nominal voltage, the device selects the limit values for the break-
down voltage in accordance with IEC 60422.
Tx breakdown voltage <

You can use this parameter to set the first lower limit value for monitoring the
transformer breakdown voltage. If the calculated breakdown voltage is lower
than the limit value, the event Tx breakdown voltage < limit value is triggered.
Tx breakdown voltage <<

You can use this parameter to set the second lower limit value for monitoring
the transformer breakdown voltage. If the calculated breakdown voltage is
lower than the limit value, the event Tx breakdown voltage << limit value is trig-
gered.
Sensor selection for calculation

You can use this parameter to select which sensor is to be used for the trans-
former breakdown voltage calculation.
This parameter is only available if the device is configured at the factory for
i the connection of a DGA sensor and a humidity sensor via MR sensor bus
[►Section 8.1.20, Page 211].

– Humidity sensor
– DGA sensor
8.4.13.2 Displaying transformer breakdown voltage monitoring

The device displays the transformer breakdown monitoring status. The follow-
ing states will be displayed:
LED Meaning
Gray The calculated breakdown voltage is greater than the limit values.
Yellow The calculated breakdown voltage is less than the Tx breakdown volt-
age < limit value.
Red The calculated breakdown voltage is less than the Tx breakdown volt-
age << limit value.
Table 151: States
Figure 363: Transformer breakdown voltage monitoring

Go to Information > Active part > Tx breakdown voltage monitoring.
8.4.13.3 Configuring the on-load tap-changer breakdown voltage monitoring

function
If you would like to monitor several on-load tap-changer columns, you

i must set the parameters for each column (OLTC A, OLTC B, OLTC C).
Settings Parameters Breakdown ...ion
Name Value
Home
Tap changer oil type Other
OLTC saturation parameter A 1.0
OLTC saturation parameter B 100.0
OLTC curve parameter a -500.0 Events
OLTC curve parameter b 0.0
OLTC curve parameter c -40.0
OLTC curve parameter d 500
Use OLTC calibration point No Information
OLTC rel. water content calib. ... 10.0

OLTC breakdown volt. calib. point 60.0
OLTC break. volt. SD calib. point 2.0
Recorder
OLTC breakdown volt. ref. temp. 25 °C
OLTC limit values VACUTAP®
Figure 364: Breakdown voltage calculation
Go to Settings > Parameter > On-load tap-changer > Breakdown voltage cal-
culation.
Tap changer oil type

You can use this parameter to select the on-load tap-changer oil type. You can
– Shell Diala S4
– Midel eN 1204
– Midel 7131
– Other
If you select the option "Other", you must set the saturation parameters A
i and B and curve parameters a, b, c and d.
OLTC saturation parameter A

You can use this parameter to set the saturation parameter A for the on-load
tap-changer insulating oil.
OLTC saturation parameter B

You can use this parameter to set the saturation parameter B for the on-load
tap-changer insulating oil.
OLTC curve parameter a

You can use this parameter to set the parameter a for calculating the break-
down voltage of the on-load tap-changer insulating oil.

OLTC curve parameter b
You can use this parameter to set the parameter b for calculating the break-
OLTC curve parameter c

You can use this parameter to set the parameter c for calculating the break-
OLTC curve parameter d

You can use this parameter to set the parameter d for calculating the break-
Use OLTC calibration point

You can use this parameter to set whether you want to use a data point from an
oil analysis for calculating the breakdown voltage of the on-load tap-changer in-
sulating oil. With this data, you can calibrate the calculation model and thus at-
tain a more precise calculation.
If you would like to use the calibration point, you also have to set the following
parameters:
– OLTC rel. water content calib. point
– OLTC breakdown volt. calib. point
– OLTC break. volt. SD calib. point
OLTC rel. water content calib. point

You can use this parameter to enter the relative water content of the on-load
tap-changer insulating oil from the oil analysis. The device uses the measured
value for the calibration of the calculation model.
OLTC breakdown volt. calib. point

You can use this parameter to enter the breakdown voltage of the on-load tap-
changer insulating oil from the oil analysis. The device uses the measured value
for the calibration of the calculation model.
OLTC break. volt. SD calib. point

You can use this parameter to enter the standard deviation of the breakdown
voltage of the on-load tap-changer insulating oil from the oil analysis. The de-
vice uses the measured value for the calibration of the calculation model.
OLTC breakdown volt. ref. temp.

You can use this parameter to set the reference temperature of the on-load tap-
changer insulating oil for breakdown voltage monitoring. You can select the fol-
lowing options:
– Current oil temperature
– 25 °C
Use the option 25 °C if you enter your own dielectric strength limit values that
reference an oil temperature of 25 °C.

OLTC limit values
You can use this parameter to set which limit values the device is to use for
monitoring the on-load tap-changer breakdown voltage. You can select the fol-
lowing options:
Option Limit values
OLTC breakdown voltage << OLTC breakdown voltage <
VACUTAP® 30 kV 40 kV
OILTAP® neutral point 30 kV 40 kV
OILTAP® delta 40 kV 45 kV
Operator limit values Freely selectable Freely selectable

Table 152: OLTC limit values
If you select the option "Operator limit values", you must set the limit values
yourself.
OLTC breakdown voltage <

You can use this parameter to set the first lower limit value for monitoring the
on-load tap-changer breakdown voltage. If the calculated breakdown voltage is
lower than the limit value, an event is triggered.
OLTC breakdown voltage <<

You can use this parameter to set the second lower limit value for monitoring
the on-load tap-changer breakdown voltage. If the calculated breakdown volt-
age is lower than the limit value, an event is triggered.
8.4.13.4 Displaying on-load tap-changer breakdown voltage monitoring

The device displays the on-load tap-changer breakdown monitoring status. The
following states will be displayed:
LED Meaning
Gray The calculated breakdown voltage is greater than the limit values.
Yellow The calculated breakdown voltage is less than the OLTC breakdown
voltage < limit value.
Red The calculated breakdown voltage is less than the OLTC breakdown
voltage << limit value.
Table 153: States
Figure 365: On-load tap-changer breakdown voltage monitoring

Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > OLTC breakdown voltage monitor-
ing.

8.5 On-load tap-changer
8.5.1 Tap position monitoring (optional)
You can set 2 limit values for tap position monitoring:

– Pos<
– Pos>
You can set the following parameters for each limit value.
– Behavior limit value
Settings Parameters Tap posi...ing
Name Value
Home
Number of tap-change operations 775571
Pos< 1
Pos< delay time 0.0 s
Pos< behavior Off Events
Pos> 26
Pos> delay time 0.0 s
Pos> behavior Off
Information
Recorder
Figure 366: Tap position monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameter > On-load tap-changer > Tap position monitor-
ing.
Delay time
the event message.
Behavior limit value

You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device when the event
message is issued. You can select the following options:
Setting Behavior
Off Tap position monitoring is disabled.
Auto blocking posi- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change operation in
tion+ the direction of a higher tap position (position+).
You can still perform a tap-change operation in the direction of a
higher tap position (position+) in manual mode.
Auto blocking posi- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change operation in
tion- the direction of a lower tap position (position-).
You can still perform a tap-change operation in the direction of a
lower tap position (position-) in manual mode.

Setting Behavior
Auto/manual The automatic control does not perform a tap-change operation in

blocking position+ the direction of a higher tap position (position+).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the direction of a
higher tap position (position+) in manual mode.
Auto/manual The automatic control does not perform a tap-change operation in

blocking position- the direction of a lower tap position (position-).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the direction of a
lower tap position (position-) in manual mode.
Operations counter
The device's operations counter is automatically increased with every tap-
change operation. You can use this parameter to set the number of tap-change
operations, such as for a comparison with the operations counter of the motor-
drive unit.
8.5.2 Switching interval monitoring
You can use this function to monitor the typical tap-change behavior of your
transformer. To do so, you can set the number of consecutive tap-change oper-
ations permissible in auto mode within a defined time period.
You can have the following operations monitored:

– Total operations: Total RAISE operations and LOWER operations
– LOWER operations: Total LOWER operations
– RAISE operations: Total RAISE operations
Settings Parameters Total sw...ing
Total Lower Raise

Home
Total No. ops 25 10 10
Time interval 1440.0 min 5.0 min 5.0 min
Event duration 1.0 min 15.0 min 15.0 min Events
Response Auto blockin... Auto block. ... Auto block. ...
Count behavior - Off On

Information
Recorder
Figure 367: Switching interval monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Switching interval

monitoring.
Total tap-change operations

If the maximum permissible number of tap-change operations within the set
time interval is exceeded, the device triggers a corresponding response.
Time interval
You can use this parameter to set the time interval in which the maximum num-
ber of tap-change operations may not be exceeded.

Event duration
You can use this parameter to set how long the device is to respond with the
set behavior.
Behavior
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device if the maximum
permissible number of tap-change operations is exceeded:
Setting Behavior
Off Switching interval monitoring is disabled.
Switching to man- The event is displayed for the set duration of the response. The de-
ual mode vice automatically switches to manual mode.
Auto blocking The event is displayed for the set duration of the response. Auto-
matic voltage regulation is blocked. You can wait for the blocking
time to expire or switch to manual mode by hand and then to auto
mode. The event is reset and blocking is disabled.
Table 154: Behavior
Counting behavior (only with raise or lower tap-change operations)

You can use this parameter to set whether intermediate RAISE or LOWER tap-
change operations reset the internal counter. You can select the following op-
tions:
– On:
– The internal counter for consecutive LOWER tap-change operations is re-
set during a RAISE operation.
– The internal counter for consecutive RAISE tap-change operations is reset
during a LOWER operation.
– Off: The internal counter is not reset by intermediate RAISE or LOWER tap-
change operations.
8.5.3 Switching interval monitoring
You can use this function to monitor the typical tap-change behavior of your
transformer.
Time interval
You can use this parameter to set the time interval in which the maximum num-
ber of tap-change operations may not be exceeded.
Maximum permissible number of tap-change operations

If the maximum permissible number of tap-change operations within the set
time interval is exceeded, the device triggers an event.
Behavior
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device if the maximum
permissible number of tap-change operations is exceeded:
Setting Behavior
Off Switching interval monitoring is disabled.
On Switching interval monitoring is activated.

Table 155: Behavior

Setting switching interval monitoring
To set switching interval monitoring, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Switching interval
monitoring.
8.5.4 Changing tap position designation (optional)
This function allows you edit the designation of the tap position. The designa-
tions are displayed on the main screen when each of the tap positions is active
and are used for the control system.
Settings Tap position table
Raw value Tap position Control system Home

1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
Events
4 4 1
5 5 2
6 6 1
7 7 3 Information
8 8 4
9 9 5
10 10 6 Recorder
Cancel Accept
Figure 368: Tap position table
1. Go to Settings > Tap position table.

2. Enter the designation for the tap position and for the control system.
3. Click on the Accept button.
8.5.5 Setting the tap position message (optional)
If you issue the tap position of the on-load tap-changer via an analog output or
digital outputs (BCD, gray, etc.), you can set whether the device is to use the
raw value or the adjusted value for the control system in accordance with the
tap position table [►Section 8.5.4, Page 371]. You can use this setting to en-
sure that pass-through positions of the on-load tap-changer are not reported as
a separate tap position.

If you issue the tap position via several outputs, you can set this behavior for
each output separately.
Settings Parameters OLTC data
Name Value
Home
Tap position message (analog) Raw value
Tap position message (analog) 2 Raw value
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 369: OLTC data (example with 3x tap position message via analog outputs)
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > OLTC data.

3. Set the desired parameter.
Tap position message (analog)

You can use this parameter to set which range of values from the tap position
table the device should use for the tap position message using the analog out-
put.
If you change this parameter, you must then ensure that the configured
i analog output value range [►Section 8.1.21, Page 219] matches the value
range in the tap position table [►Section 8.5.4, Page 371]. Otherwise, the
tap position will not be reported correctly.
BCD tap position message

table the device is to use for the tap position message via digital outputs (BCD).
Gray code tap position message

table the device is to use for the tap position message via digital outputs (gray
code [►Section 8.5.20, Page 399]).
Dual code tap position message

table the device is to use for the tap position message via digital outputs (dual
code).
Decimal tap position message

table the device is to use for the tap position message via digital outputs (deci-
mal coding).

8.5.6 Displaying tap-change operation statistics (optional)
In the switching statistics view, you can display how often the on-load tap-
changer has been switched to a particular tap position and how long it has re-
mained in a particular tap position.
The top diagram shows how often the on-load tap-changer was switched into a
particular tap position and how long it spent there. The bottom diagram shows
the time spent in the tap positions over the last 10 days.
Figure 370: Tap-change operation statistics
Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Tap-change operation statis-

tics.
8.5.7 Displaying information about contact wear (only OILTAP®)
If you are monitoring an on-load tap-changer of type OILTAP®, you can display
the current wear values of the main switching contacts (MSCA, MSCB) and tran-
sition contacts (TCA, TCB).
The device also shows the differences in contact wear for different contacts.
Figure 371: Contact wear
Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Contact wear.

8.5.8 Information about the on-load tap-changer
Under "OLTC" you can display information about the on-load tap-changer:
– Current tap position
– Total tap-change operations (operations counter)
Figure 372: OLTC
Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > OLTC.
8.5.9 Maintenance (optional)
The device monitors the following maintenance depending on the on-load tap-
changer type:
Maintenance Description
OLTC maintenance The on-load tap-changer must be maintained in accordance with

the MR standards.
OLTC replacement The on-load tap-changer must be replaced with a new on-load tap-
changer.
DSI replacement The diverter switch insert must be replaced with a new diverter
switch insert.
IEM replacement The interrupter exchange module (IEM) of the on-load tap-changer
must be replaced with a new IEM.
Contact wear The main switching contacts or transition contacts of the on-load
tap-changer must be exchanged or replaced.
Oil exchange and The oil must be changed and the diverter switch insert, oil com-
cleaning partment, and oil conservator must be cleaned.
Selector maintenance The on-load tap-changer selector must be maintained in accor-

dance with the MR standards.
Cleaning/lubrication The on-load tap-changer needs to be cleaned and lubricated.
Oil sample An oil sample must be taken and analyzed; the limit values speci-
fied by MR for added insulating oil must be observed.
Oil filter unit The oil filter of the oil filter unit must be replaced.

Maintenance Description
OLTC operator inter- Maintenance interval for the on-load tap-changer; the interval de-
val pends on the number of tap-change operations or on time, and
the operator can specify it.
Transformer operator Time-dependent maintenance interval for the transformer, which

interval the operator can specify.
Table 156: Maintenance (availability depends on the on-load tap-changer type)
8.5.9.1 Setting operator interval for OLTC maintenance

You can define the maintenance interval of your choice for the on-load tap-
changer. You can define the maintenance interval as dependent on time and/or
number of tap-change operations. If the limit is reached (100%), the device trig-
gers an event message (red).
Settings Parameters Maintena...tor
Name Value
Home
Interval type Deactivated
Number of tap-change operations 150000
Duration 1.0 a
Date of next maintenance 17.09.2066 23:59:21 Events
Event (yellow) 90.0 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 373: Maintenance: OLTC operator
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Maintenance: OLTC

operator.
Interval type
You can use this parameter to define the interval type for OLTC maintenance or
to deactivate maintenance. You can select the following options:
– Deactivated: The maintenance interval is deactivated.
– Time: The maintenance interval is dependent on time.
– Counter: The maintenance interval is dependent on number of tap-change
operations.
– Time and counter: The maintenance interval is dependent on time and num-
ber of tap-change operations. The limit reached first triggers the event.
Number of tap-change operations

You can use this parameter to define the reading of the tap-change operation
counter at which the device should issue an event message.
Duration
You can use this parameter to set how long this interval should be. The device
uses this to calculate the current maintenance progress.
Date of next maintenance

You can use this parameter to set the target date for the next maintenance. The
device uses this to calculate the current maintenance progress.

Event (yellow)
You can use this parameter to set the maintenance progress (as a percentage)
after which the device should issue an event message (yellow).
8.5.9.2 Setting operator interval for transformer maintenance

You can define a maintenance interval of your choice for the transformer. The
maintenance interval is dependent on time. If the limit is reached (100%), the
device triggers an event message (red).
Settings Parameters Mainten....tor
Name Value
Home
Activate interval Off
Duration 1.0 a
Date of next maintenance 17.09.2066 23:59:21
Event (yellow) 90.0 % Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 374: Maintenance: Transformer operator
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Maintenance: Transformer op-
erator.
Activate interval
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the maintenance interval.
Duration
You can use this parameter to set how long this interval should be. The device
uses this to calculate the current maintenance progress.
Date of next maintenance

You can use this parameter to set the target date for the next maintenance. The
device uses this to calculate the current maintenance progress.
Event (yellow)
You can use this parameter to set the maintenance progress (as a percentage)
after which the device should issue an event message (yellow).

8.5.9.3 Undertaking and confirming maintenance
Once you have undertaken maintenance, you can confirm this on the device
and thereby reset the maintenance interval. The following maintenance param-
eters can be entered based on the maintenance type:
Value Description
Date Date of maintenance.
Operation counter Reading of the operations counter at the time of maintenance.

You can enter the current counter reading or a smaller counter
reading.
Contact wear (only Overall contact wear on the stationary contact and moving
OILTAP®) contact.
– MSCA If you have measured the contact wear during maintenance
– MSCB and continue to use the contacts in their original positions,
– TC1A then enter the measured values and select "No" in the prompt
– TC1B that reads "Contacts exchanged/replaced" to confirm it. This
– TC2A causes the monitoring system to optimize its calculation
– TC2B model, and subsequent calculation of the contact wear is more
precise.
If you have exchanged (other position) or replaced contacts,
then enter the contact wear found on the mounted contacts
(for new contacts: 0.000 mm) and select "Yes" in the prompt
that reads "Contacts exchanged/replaced" to confirm it.
Table 157: Maintenance parameters
Determining the contact wear (only OILTAP®)

The thickness of the wear to be entered is the sum of the wear of the movable
and the fixed contact part.
Figure 375: Determining contact wear
1 Fixed contact y1 Thickness of the worn contact coat-

ing (fixed contact)
2 Moving contact x2 Thickness of the contact coating

when new (moving contact)
x1 Thickness of the contact coating y2 Thickness of the worn contact coat-

when new (fixed contact) ing (moving contact)
The wear thickness z to be entered is determined as follows:

z = x1 - y1 + x2 - y2

Confirming maintenance
To confirm maintenance, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Maintenance wizard.
Figure 376: Maintenance wizard
2. Select the maintenance to be confirmed.

3. Press the Next button.
4. Enter the maintenance parameters.
Figure 377: Undertaking and confirming maintenance
5. Press the Accept button to save the modified parameters.

6. Optional: A prompt appears asking if the contacts were exchanged or re-
placed. Press Yes or No to confirm the prompt.
8.5.9.4 Displaying maintenance overview

The maintenance overview displays the progress of the individual maintenance
intervals. You can also see the limit values for the "yellow" and "red" event mes-
sages. For the maintenance intervals of the on-load tap-changer, the device
uses the recorded operating data to predict the date for the next maintenance
appointment. The date is not displayed until enough operating data has been
recorded.
If you have deactivated the "OLTC operator maintenance" or "Transformer

i operator maintenance" interval, the interval is shown grayed out in the
maintenance overview.

Figure 378: Maintenance overview
Go to Information > System > Maintenance.
8.5.9.5 Displaying the maintenance logbook

All maintenance tasks that have been performed are displayed in the mainte-
nance logbook. The entries are generated automatically if you perform mainte-
nance using the maintenance wizard. You can also create separate entries.
The maintenance logbook displays the following information:

– Time of maintenance
– Mainten.type
– Description
Figure 379: Maintenance logbook
To call up the maintenance logbook, proceed as follows:

Go to Settings > Maintenance logbook.

Editing an entry in the maintenance logbook
You can edit the entries in the maintenance logbook as needed.
Figure 380: Editing an entry in the maintenance logbook
Proceed as follows to edit an entry in the maintenance logbook:

1. Go to Settings > Maintenance logbook.
2. Press the button in order to edit an entry.
Creating an entry in the maintenance logbook

Proceed as follows to create an entry in the maintenance logbook without using
the maintenance wizard:
2. Press the New entry button.
3. Enter the maintenance data.
4. Press the Accept button to save the entry.
Deleting an entry in the maintenance logbook

You can delete the entries in the maintenance logbook as needed. To do so,
proceed as follows:
2. Press the button in order to delete the entry.

8.5.9.6 Suppressing a maintenance event
You can use this function to suppress the event messages of maintenance
tasks whose limit values have been reached for a specific number of on-load
tap-change operations. If you acknowledge a maintenance event without per-
forming maintenance, the device will report the event message after the set
number of on-load tap-change operations.
Settings Parameters Maintena...nts
Name Value
Home
Suppressing transformer maint. ev... 1
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 381: Suppressing a maintenance event
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Maintenance events or Set-
tings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Maintenance events.
8.5.10 Torque monitoring (optional)
The torque monitoring function is used to monitor the torque of the on-load
tap-changer. For the torque, different limit values are defined across the entire
tap-change sequence and, if exceeded, the monitoring system triggers a corre-
sponding event message.
You can use torque monitoring only for the on-load tap-changer calibrated
i ex works and the motor-drive unit. Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
GmbH if you want to perform torque monitoring for another on-load tap-
changer.

8.5.10.1 Tap-change ranges (windows) M1...M8
The torque curve is divided into as many as 8 ranges, or windows, depending
on the on-load tap-changer and tap-change operation type (M1...M8). These
ranges describe the individual tap changes that the on-load tap-changer passes
through during a tap-change process.
Figure 382: Torque curve of an on-load tap-change operation divided into 8 tap-change
ranges (M1...M8)
8.5.10.2 Types of tap-change operations

The monitoring system distinguishes between the following types of tap-
change operations:
– Change-over selector operation: The change-over selector also changes in
this tap-change operation.
– Small tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between the
stationary selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is small.
– Moderate tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between
the attached selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is moder-
ate.
– Large tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between the
attached selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is large.
– Reverse tap-change operation: Tap-change operation in which the tap
changes in the opposite direction to the most recent tap-change operation
and does not involve actuation of the selector.
8.5.10.3 Limit values

The monitoring system monitors the tap-change sequence for the following
limits:
– Limit value > (M1...M8 >)
– Limit value >> (M1...M8 >>)
– Maximum permissible torque of the on-load tap-changer (Md,max)
Limit value > and limit value >>

2 limit values (> and >>) are defined for each tap-change range (windows
M1...M8). These limit values depend on the tap changer, type of tap-change op-
eration, and the diverter switch and transformer oil temperatures currently
measured.
Once the tap-change operation is complete, the monitoring system checks the
torque curve for the defined limit values. If the limit value was exceeded, the
monitoring system generates a corresponding event message. If the limit value
>> is exceeded, additional tap-change operations are blocked based on the de-

vice configuration. In this case, the Blocking active event is triggered. You must
acknowledge events to ensure they are no longer displayed and to disable the
associated blocking function.
Maximum permissible torque of the on-load tap-changer (Md,max)

During the tap-change operation, the maximum permissible on-load tap-
changer torque is monitored. This prevents physical damage to the on-load tap-
changer. If the limit value for the maximum permissible on-load tap-changer
torque is exceeded, the monitoring system triggers the motor protective switch
Q01. Additionally, the monitoring system triggers the event Max. motor torque
limit value exceeded. During a change-over selector operation, the Q01 motor
protective switch is not triggered in windows M3...M5.
As soon as the motor protective switch is triggered, the monitoring system re-
ceives a signal to this effect from the motor-drive unit. The monitoring system
then triggers the event Motor protective switch is triggered!.
You cannot insert the motor protective switch again until the event Max.
i motor torque limit value exceeded has been acknowledged. Follow the op-
erating instructions for fault elimination in the motor-drive unit operating
instructions.
8.5.10.4 Tap-change supervisory control

The tap-change supervisory control monitors both the drive shaft between on-
load tap-changer(s) and motor-drive unit and the correct switching of the di-
verter switch. The tap-change supervisory control is also performed when the
motor-drive unit is actuated using the hand crank.
If the on-load tap-changer is equipped with tap-change supervisory control,

then the monitoring system uses the status of the monitoring contacts S80 and
S81 for the following evaluations:
– If both monitoring contacts report "OFF" (there is no signal) and no tap-
change operation is being performed at that time, then the monitoring sys-
tem triggers the event Both tap-change supervisory control contacts OFF.
– If both monitoring contacts report "ON" (there is a signal) and no tap-change
operation is being performed at that time, then the monitoring system trig-
gers the event Both tap-change supervisory control contacts ON.
– If a tap-change operation is performed and no change in the signals on the
monitoring contacts occurs (e.g. from 1 to 2), then the monitoring system
triggers the event Tap-change operation without diverter switch operation.
– Checking whether the tap-change supervisory control is correctly connected
and the position sensor is correctly calibrated. If not, the monitoring system
triggers the event Tap-change supervisory control wiring error.
– If the signal of a monitoring contact changes from "ON" to "OFF" during a
tap-change operation, then this position is marked in the torque curve with a
vertical line. This indicates that a diverter switch action has occurred.
– Monitoring the diverter switch action. If the diverter switch action does not
occur at the right time, then the monitoring system triggers the event mes-
sage OLTC and MD insufficiently centered.
– For on-load tap-changer sets or on-load tap-changer combinations (multi-col-
umn versions), the monitoring system monitors synchronous switching of
the on-load tap-changers. If synchronization is not sufficient, then the moni-
toring system triggers the event OLTC synchronization insufficient.

8.5.10.5 Evaluated and unevaluated tap-change operations
The monitoring system distinguishes between evaluated and unevaluated tap-
change operations. A tap-change operation is considered to have been evalu-
ated if a diverter switch action is detected and it was possible for the torque lim-
its to be checked. The M1...M8 >/>> torque limits are not checked during an un-
evaluated tap-change operation.
The entire torque curve is stored in the database, both for evaluated as well as
unevaluated tap-change operations.
A tap-change operation is not evaluated in the following cases:

– The motor voltage, motor current or motor frequency are outside of the per-
missible range.
– The recorded temperatures are outside of the permissible range.
– Faulty rotary encoder signal.
– A diverter switch action was not detected. For on-load tap-changers with tap-
change supervisory control, there was no change in the tap-change supervi-
sory control contacts and the event Tap-change operation without diverter
switch operation is triggered. For tap-changers without tap-change supervi-
sory control, the diverter switch action is determined using the torque curve.
If the diverter switch action could not be correctly determined, then the tap-
change operation cannot be evaluated.
– For multi-column applications: Synchronization error.
The torque is also checked for the maximum permitted motor torque
i (Md,max) in cases where a diverter switch action was not detected.
8.5.10.6 Displaying torque monitoring

You can display the torque curve for each tap-change operation. An overview
screen displays the following information for each tap-change operation:
– Tap-change operation type
– Switching direction (from position to position)
– Time of the tap-change operation
– Event message
– Blue: Evaluated tap-change operation without exceeded limit value
– Yellow: Evaluated tap-change operation with exceeded limit value >
– Red: Evaluated tap-change operation with exceeded limit value >>
– Gray: Unevaluated tap-change operation

You can use a selection field to filter for the desired tap-change operation types.
You can click the header of the table to sequence the display in ascending or
descending order according to the desired column.
Figure 383: Torque monitoring overview
Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Torque monitoring.
Displaying the torque curve

You can display the torque curve for each recorded tap-change operation. The
limit values > and >> are displayed and the time of the diverter switch action
(vertical line) is displayed for each tap-change range (M1...M8).
Figure 384: Torque curve
You can select several torque curves to compare (max. 10 torque curves on the
device display; max. 100 torque curves in a web-based visualization on the PC).
If you select several torque curves of various tap-change operation types, the
limit values are not displayed.
If you call up the torque curve, the torque monitoring data is intermediately
i stored in the browser cache. If you switch back to the torque overview
from the torque curve, the data is loaded from the browser cache. For this
reason, on-load tap-change operations that have occurred in the meantime
are not displayed in the overview. Press the Home button to clear the data
from the browser cache and then call up torque monitoring again.

Figure 385: Comparison of torque curves
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Torque monitoring.

2. Select the tap-change operations you want.
3. Press the Display button.
8.5.11 Performing trial tap-change operations
In order to complete the commissioning of the monitoring system, you have to

perform trial tap-change operations. To do so, you can activate the trial tap-
change operations mode. In this mode, the wear and soot accumulation caused
by the tap-change operations that are performed are not calculated and switch-
ing interval monitoring is deactivated. As long as this mode is active, the device
reports the event Trial tap-change operations active.
The "Trial tap-change operations" mode is automatically deactivated under the

following conditions:
– 8 hours after the mode was activated.
– If the device is restarted.
Figure 386: Trial tap-change operations
To activate trial tap-change operations mode, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Trial tap-change operations.
2. Press the Activate button.
Trial tap-change operations mode is active.
3. After the trial tap-change operations are complete, press the Deactivate but-
ton to exit trial tap-change operations mode.

8.5.12.1 Setting VAM update guidelines

Using the update guidelines, you can define which tap-change operations are
recorded and analyzed. You can select the following options:
Option Description
Evaluation and statistics The tap-change operation is recorded, checked for plausibility
update and evaluated.
The statistics update ensures the self-learning of the yellow limit
value curve (envelope curve).
No statistics update The tap-change operation is recorded, checked for plausibility

and evaluated.
The statistics are not updated.
If a limit value curve has already been learned, limit value viola-
tions can nevertheless occur. In the event of doubt, contact the
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH Technical Service depart-
ment.
No evaluation The tap-change operation recording will not be analyzed or eval-

uated.
The VAM analysis display does not show any information for
Table 158: VAM update guidelines
Figure 387: VAM update guidelines
1. Go to Settings > VAM update guidelines.

2. Select the desired tap position and, with multi-column application, the de-
sired on-load tap-changer column (A, B or C).
8.5.12.2 Displaying VAM analysis

For each recorded tap-change operation, you will receive the following informa-
tion:
– Tap-change operation type
– Start position and end position of the tap-change operation.
– Time of the tap-change operation
– Status

Figure 388: VAM analysis
Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > VAM analysis.
Tap-change operation type

The monitoring system distinguishes between the following types of tap-
change operations:
– Change-over selector operation: The change-over selector also changes in
– Small tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between the
stationary selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is small.
– Moderate tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between
the attached selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is moder-
ate.
– Large tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between the
attached selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is large.
– Reverse tap-change operation: Tap-change operation in which the tap
changes in the opposite direction to the most recent tap-change operation
and does not involve actuation of the selector.
Status information
Color code Meaning
Blue No anomalies: Plausibility criteria met and limit values not exceeded
Yellow Limit value was exceeded
Gray The evaluation could not be carried out
Filter options
Using the drop-down menu, you can limit the selection of tap-change opera-
tions to those of a specific tap-change operation type or to those involving a
specific property.
– Selection according to tap-change operation type:
– Change-over selector operation
– Small, medium or large tap change
– Reverse tap-change operation
– Selection according to property:
– All
– Marked
– Evaluation ok
– Anomalies
– Without evaluation

Display of selected tap-change operations
To display individual tap-change operations with the associated VAM signal and
the stored limit value as a curve, proceed as follows:
1. Place a check mark in the first column in front of the tap-change oper-
ation that is to be displayed as a curve. Up to 100 tap-change operations can
be shown in the visualization via web browser. A maximum of 10 tap-change
operations can be shown on the device display.
2. Confirm via the Display button.
They will be displayed differently depending on the number of selected
tap-change operations.
If more than one tap-change operation is selected, then the limit value curve
display will be omitted for the purpose of clarity:
Number of selected tap-change operations 1 2–100 >100
Display of VAM signal Yes Yes No
Display of limit value curve Yes No No

The following figure shows an example of the visualization of an individual tap-
change operation:
Figure 389: Display of a tap-change operation
The following figure shows an example of how multiple selected tap-change

operations are shown at the same time:
Figure 390: Display of multiple tap-change operations
If multiple tap-change operations are selected for the visualization, it is possible

to hide or show individual tap-change operations by clicking on them in the key.

Using the web-based ISM™ Intuitive Control visualization allows you to zoom
into an area of the signal. To do this, hold down the left mouse button and draw
a frame around the desired area. To return to the original representation, click
on the symbol.
8.5.12.3 Resetting VAM

The software in the MSENSE® VAM monitoring system uses a self-learning algo-
rithm which approximates the limit values towards the vibro-acoustic signal pro-
gression as the number of tap-change operations increases. The statistics
stored for this can be reset in this display window.
Resetting the counter

The first and the second anomalies in an evaluation cluster are indicated via a
yellow status message in the VAM analysis display. A third anomaly arising in an
evaluation cluster triggers an additional event message. This event message is
transmitted to a connected SCADA system.
By selecting "Counters", you reset the counters that are used to trigger the
events for the vibro-acoustic evaluation. The learned statistics are retained.
Resetting the statistics

The stored statistics are used, among other things, to display the learned limit
value (yellow curve).
When you select "Statistics", you reset the learned statistics and the counters
that are used to evaluate the vibro-acoustic signals.
1. Go to Settings > Reset VAM.
3. Press the Accept button to reset the values.
8.5.13 OLTC data
In this menu, you can set parameters for the on-load tap-changer (OLTC).
Name Value
Home
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 391: OLTC data
Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > OLTC data.
OLTC A/B/C serial number

You can use this parameter to set the serial number of the on-load tap-changer.

In applications with several columns, you can enter a unique serial number
i for each on-load tap-changer.
8.5.13.1 Setting the tap position message (optional)

If you issue the tap position of the on-load tap-changer via an analog output or
digital outputs (BCD, gray, etc.), you can set whether the device is to use the
raw value or the adjusted value for the control system in accordance with the
tap position table [►Section 8.5.4, Page 371]. You can use this setting to ensure
that pass-through positions of the on-load tap-changer are not reported as a
separate tap position.
If you issue the tap position via several outputs, you can set this behavior for
each output separately.
Name Value
Home
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 392: OLTC data (example with 3x tap position message via analog outputs)
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > OLTC data.

Tap position message (analog)

table the device should use for the tap position message using the analog out-
put.
If you change this parameter, you must then ensure that the configured
i analog output value range [►Section 8.1.21, Page 219] matches the value
range in the tap position table [►Section 8.5.4, Page 371]. Otherwise, the
tap position will not be reported correctly.
BCD tap position message

table the device is to use for the tap position message via digital outputs (BCD).
Inrush current blocking
This parameter can only be set by the Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH

i Technical Service department.

You can use this parameter to set how long on-load tap change operations are
blocked for after switching on the circuit breaker. This prevents damage to the
on-load tap-changer due to switching operations when inrush currents are
present
Maximum permissible OLTC operating temperature

You can use this parameter to set the upper limit of the permissible operating
temperature of the on-load tap-changer. If the operating temperature is higher
than the set limit value, tap-change operations are blocked. The switch-off hys-
teresis is 2 Kelvins.
Minimum permissible OLTC operating temperature

You can use this parameter to set the lower limit of the permissible operating
temperature of the on-load tap-changer. If the operating temperature is lower
than the set limit value, tap-change operations are blocked. The switch-off hys-
teresis is 2 Kelvins.
8.5.13.2 Tap-change operations waiting time

You can set the waiting time between 2 consecutive tap-change operations
with this parameter. This function is used to prevent the on-load tap-changer
from overheating due to frequent tap-change operations.
Highest tap position (numerical designation)

You can use this parameter to set the highest tap position for the on-load tap-
changer (numerical designation). The device uses this specification to calculate
the hot-spot temperature for a three-winding transformer.
Lowest tap position (numerical designation)

You can use this parameter to set the lowest tap position for the on-load tap-
changer (numerical designation). The device uses this specification to calculate
the hot-spot temperature for a three-winding transformer.
8.5.13.3 Setting the warning message for the operating temperature of the on-
load tap-changer
You can set two limit values for monitoring the operating temperature of the
on-load tap-changer. If the operating temperature is greater than the upper limit
value or less than the lower limit value, the device triggers an event message.

Events
No. Event Description
3405 OLTC operating tempera- The operating temperature of the OLTC has ex-
ture warning ceeded the limit for the warning.
Table 159: Events
Digital inputs and outputs

Name Description
O: Warn. OLTC temp. The operating temperature of the OLTC has ex-
ceeded the limit for the warning.
Table 160: Digital inputs (I) and outputs (O)
Upper limit warning OLTC temp.

You can use this parameter to set the upper limit of the warning message for
the operating temperature of the on-load tap-changer. The switch-off hystere-
sis is 2 kelvins.
Lower limit warning OLTC temp.

You can use this parameter to set the lower limit of the warning message for
the operating temperature of the on-load tap-changer. The switch-off hystere-
sis is 2 kelvins.
8.5.14 Displaying power characteristics
You can display the recorded power characteristics of the motor-drive unit for
the last 1000 tap-change operations. The following data is displayed:
– Tap position
– Active power of motor-drive unit
– Active power limit value
Information Perf. char. curves
Home
20.01.2020 Date
500 14 13:36:33 Time

14 > 13 Tap position
400 14
Events
Tap position
300 14
Pm[W]
200 14
P_Motor Information
100 13
Threshold
0 13 Tap position
Recorder
5 / 1000
Figure 393: Displaying power characteristics
Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Power characteristics.

8.5.15 Monitoring the gas volume of the Buchholz relay (OLTC)
When you record the gas volume of the Buchholz relay of the on-load tap-
changer, you can set 2 limit values for the gas volume. If the on-load tap-
changer has multiple columns, you can set 2 limit values for each column. If the
measured gas volume is greater than the limit value > or >>, the device triggers
an event message.
Settings Parameters Buchholz relay
>
Home
OLTC gas volume 0.3 l 0.4 l
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 394: Limit values for the gas volume of the Buchholz relay of the on-load tap-changer
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Buchholz relay.

8.5.16 Monitoring the oil pressure (on-load tap-changer)
When you record the oil pressure of the on-load tap-changer, you can use the
pressure relief device (PRD) to set 2 limit values for the gas volume. If the on-
load tap-changer has multiple columns, you can set 2 limit values for each col-
umn. If the measured oil pressure is greater than the limit value > or >>, the de-
vice triggers an event message.
Settings Parameters Pressure...ice
>
Home
OLTC oil pressure 15 kPa 20 kPa
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 395: Limit values for the oil pressure of the on-load tap-changer
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Pressure relief de-
vice.

8.5.17 Oil filter unit control
If your device is equipped with the optional "Oil filter unit control" function, the
oil filter unit is controlled by the ISM assembles of the device. Depending on the
configuration, the device can control up to 3 oil filter units. The following set-
tings always apply to all oil filter units equally.
The following operating modes are possible:

– Normal operation: In normal operation, the device activates the oil filter unit
pump automatically after each on-load tap-change operation. Depending on
the on-load tap-changer type, the device switches the pump back off again
after a defined runtime:
– OILTAP® V/M/MS: 30 minutes
– OILTAP® R/RM/T: 60 minutes
– OILTAP® G: 90 minutes
– Cold-weather operation (optional): At oil temperatures below 0 °C, the device
activates the oil filter unit pump automatically. When the oil temperature
reaches 5 °C, the device switches the pump back off.
– Time-controlled operation: In addition to normal operation, you can set up to
3 intervals in which the device is to activate the oil filter unit pump.
– Test operation: You can select test operation using the S30 switch. In test
operation, the device activates the oil filter unit pump.
– Optional for VACUTAP® VR: Oil cooling
Events
No. Event Description
1165 Plan oil filter replacement Overpressure detected in the oil filter unit,
the oil filter must be replaced soon.
1166 Overpressure detected in the oil Ensure that the stop-cock of the return line
filter unit, the oil filter must be is open. Otherwise, change the filter car-
replaced soon. tridge. If the fault cannot be fixed, contact
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen's Technical
Service department.
3370 Oil filter unit controller error The power supply for the oil filter unit con-
trol circuit has been interrupted.
3371 Oil filt. unit 1 motor protective The motor protective switch of the oil filter
switch unit 1 pump has triggered.
3421 Oil filter unit test operation Test operation of the oil filter unit has been
activated.
3422 Oil filter unit cold-weather oper- Cold-weather operation of the oil filter unit
ation has been activated.
3423 Oil filter unit switched on The signal for switching on the oil filter unit
is active.
Table 161: Events

Digital inputs and outputs
Name Description
O: Oil filter supply Message that the power supply circuit of the oil filter
unit is interrupted.
O: Oil filt. MPS 1 Message that the power supply circuit of oil pump 1 is
interrupted.
interrupted.
interrupted.
I: Oil filt. test operation Input for activating test operation of the oil filter unit
I: Oil filt. cold weather op Input for activating cold-weather operation of the oil
filter unit.
O: Oil filt. ON (control) Output for activating the oil filter unit
O: Oil filt. ON (message) Message that the oil filter unit is activated.
O: Oil filt. overpressure Message that overpressure was detected in the oil fil-
ter unit.
O: Oil filter unit active Signal for actuating an external oil filter unit
Table 162: Digital inputs (I) and outputs (O)
8.5.17.1 Setting time-controlled operation

You can activate the oil filter unit pump on a time-controlled basis. To do so,
you can set times for the start and end of up to 3 intervals. The device activates
the pump during the period between the start and end. The runtime of the
pump after a tap-change operation remains unaffected by this setting.
Start: 19:00 End: 1:00 Start: 7:00 End: 9:00
18:00 00:00 6:00 h
Figure 396: Time-controlled operation with 2 intervals (example)
If you set the same time for the start and end times, the time switch is de-
i activated.

Settings Parameters Oil filter unit
Name Value
Home
Time switch start 1 00:00
Time switch end 1 02:00
Time switch end 2 00:00 Events
Operating duration 903600 s
Number of starts 251 Information
Recorder
Figure 397: Oil filter unit
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Oil filter unit.
Time switch start

You can use this parameter to set the time after which the device is to switch
on the oil filter unit pump.
Time switch end

You can use this parameter to set the time after which the device is to switch
off the oil filter unit pump.
8.5.17.2 Setting the operating duration and number of starts

You can set the operating duration and number of starts of the oil filter unit.
You can use this function to reset the counters after maintenance (e.g. oil filter
replacement).
The counters are not reset automatically after servicing the oil filter unit.
i
Settings Parameters Oil filter unit
Name Value
Home
Time switch end 2 00:00 Events
Operating duration 903600 s
Number of starts 251 Information
Recorder
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Oil filter unit.

Operating duration
You can use this parameter to set the operating duration of the oil filter unit.
Number of starts
You can use this parameter to set the number of starts of the oil filter unit.
8.5.17.3 Displaying the oil filter unit status

The device displays the following information about the status of the oil filter
unit:
– Status (blue = oil filter unit active, gray = oil filter unit inactive)
– Operating mode
– Operating duration
– Oil filter unit overpressure message
– Oil filter unit controller error (optional)
– Filter unit motor protective switch 1/2/3 (optional)
Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Oil filter unit.

8.5.18 Displaying the minimum and maximum tap position
You can display the minimum and maximum tap position reached and the cor-
responding time. You can reset the display, which will cause the device to
restart recording. The time of the reset will be logged as an event. If you reset
the display, the drag hands will also be reset.
Figure 400: Minimum and maximum tap position
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Min. and max. tap position (de-
sig.).
2. As needed, select the Reset button to reset the minimum and maximum val-
ues.
8.5.19 Messages
Name Description
O: Pulse switch The output switches when the on-load tap-changer is

in the range between the tap-change indicator sec-
tions (SSE) 17…30. The output does not switch if you
operate the motor-drive unit with the hand crank.
Only use the output to connect display instruments,
not to connect devices with a control function.
O: OLTC running (S15) The output switches when the on-load tap-changer is
in the range between the tap-change indicator sec-
tions (SSE) 4…29. The output does not switch if you
operate the motor-drive unit with the hand crank.
8.5.20 Tap position message as gray code
The device uses the following outputs to report the tap position as gray code.
Name Description
O: Tap position Gray + Tap position message as gray code, prefix "+".
O: Tap position Gray - Tap position message as gray code, prefix "-".
O: Tap position Gray 01 Tap position message as gray code, bit 1.

Name Description

Table 163: Outputs of the device to report the tap position as gray code
The following table shows an example of the coding of the tap position as gray
code for the range from -35…+35.
Item + - 06 05 04 03 02 01
-35 X X X X
-34 X X X X X
-33 X X X X
-32 X X X
-31 X X
-30 X X X
-29 X X X X
-28 X X X
-27 X X X X
-26 X X X X X
-25 X X X X
-24 X X X
-23 X X X X
-22 X X X X X
-21 X X X X X X
-20 X X X X X
-19 X X X X
-18 X X X X X
-17 X X X X
-16 X X X
-15 X X
-14 X X X
-13 X X X X
-12 X X X
-11 X X X X
-10 X X X X X
-9 X X X X
-8 X X X

Item + - 06 05 04 03 02 01
-7 X X
-6 X X X
-5 X X X X
-4 X X X
-3 X X
-2 X X X
-1 X X
-1 X X
1 X X
2 X X X
3 X X
4 X X X
5 X X X X
6 X X X
7 X X
8 X X X
9 X X X X
10 X X X X X
11 X X X X
12 X X X
13 X X X X
14 X X X
15 X X
16 X X X
17 X X X X
18 X X X X X
19 X X X X
20 X X X X X
21 X X X X X X
22 X X X X X
23 X X X X
24 X X X
25 X X X X
26 X X X X X
27 X X X X
28 X X X
29 X X X X

Item + - 06 05 04 03 02 01
30 X X X
31 X X
32 X X X
33 X X X X
34 X X X X X
35 X X X X
Table 164: Tap position message as gray code (example pos. -35…+35)
8.5.21 Tap position message as BCD code
The device uses the following outputs to report the tap position as BCD code.
Name Description
O: BCD + Tap position message as BCD code, prefix "+".
O: BCD - Tap position message as BCD code, prefix "-".
O: BCD 1 Tap position message as BCD code, place value 1.

Table 165: Outputs of the device to report the tap position as BCD code
The following table shows an example of the coding of the tap position as BCD
Item BCD + BCD - BCD 20 BCD 10 BCD 8 BCD 4 BCD 2 BCD 1
-35 x x x x x
-34 x x x x
-33 x x x x x
-32 x x x x
-31 x x x x
-30 x x x
-29 x x x x
-28 x x x
-27 x x x x x
-26 x x x x
-25 x x x x
-24 x x x
-23 x x x x

-22 x x x
-21 x x x
-20 x x
-19 x x x x
-18 x x x
-17 x x x x x
-16 x x x x
-15 x x x x
-14 x x x
-13 x x x x
-12 x x x
-11 x x x
-10 x x
-9 x x x
-8 x x
-7 x x x x
-6 x x x
-5 x x x
-4 x x
-3 x x x
-2 x x
-1 x x
1 x x
2 x x
3 x x x
4 x x
5 x x x
6 x x x
7 x x x x
8 x x
9 x x x
10 x x
11 x x x
12 x x x
13 x x x x
14 x x x
15 x x x x

16 x x x x
17 x x x x x
18 x x x
19 x x x x
20 x x
21 x x x
22 x x x
23 x x x x
24 x x x
25 x x x x
26 x x x x
27 x x x x x
28 x x x
29 x x x x
30 x x x
31 x x x x
32 x x x x
33 x x x x x
34 x x x x
35 x x x x x
Table 166: Tap position message as BCD code (example pos. -35…+35)
8.5.22 Tap position message as dual code
The device uses the following outputs to report the tap position as dual code.
Name Description
O: Tap position Dual + Tap position message as dual code, prefix "+".
O: Tap position Dual - Tap position message as dual code, prefix "-".
O: Tap position Dual 1 Tap position message as dual code, place value 1.
Table 167: Outputs of the device to report the tap position as dual code

The following table shows an example of the coding of the tap position as dual
Item + - 32 16 8 4 2 1
-35 x x x x
-34 x x x
-33 x x x
-32 x x
-31 x x x x x x
-30 x x x x x
-29 x x x x x
-28 x x x x
-27 x x x x x
-26 x x x x
-25 x x x x
-24 x x x
-23 x x x x x
-22 x x x x
-21 x x x x
-20 x x x
-19 x x x x
-18 x x x
-17 x x x
-16 x x
-15 x x x x x
-14 x x x x
-13 x x x x
-12 x x x
-11 x x x x
-10 x x x
-9 x x x
-8 x x
-7 x x x x
-6 x x x
-5 x x x
-4 x x
-3 x x x
-2 x x
-1 x x

Item + - 32 16 8 4 2 1
1 x x
2 x x
3 x x x
4 x x
5 x x x
6 x x x
7 x x x x
8 x x
9 x x x
10 x x x
11 x x x x
12 x x x
13 x x x x
14 x x x x
15 x x x x x
16 x x
17 x x x
18 x x x
19 x x x x
20 x x x
21 x x x x
22 x x x x
23 x x x x x
24 x x x
25 x x x x
26 x x x x
27 x x x x x
28 x x x x
29 x x x x x
30 x x x x x
31 x x x x x x
32 x x
33 x x x
34 x x x
35 x x x x
Table 168: Tap position message as dual code (example pos. -35…+35)

8.5.23 Tap position message as decimal coding
The device uses the following outputs to report the tap position as decimal cod-
ing.
Name Description
O: Tap position decimal - Tap position message as decimal coding, prefix "-".
O: Tap position decimal 0 Tap position message as decimal coding, single digit
value 0.
value 1.
value 2.
value 3.
value 4.
value 5.
value 6.
value 7.
value 8.
value 9.
O: Tap position decimal 00 Tap position message as decimal coding, tens digit
value 00.
value 10.
value 20.
value 30.
value 40.
value 50.
value 60.
value 70.

Name Description
value 80.
value 90.
Table 169: Outputs of the device to report the tap position with decimal coding
The following table shows an example of the coding of the tap position as deci-
mal coding for the range from -35…+35.
Item - 30 20 10 00 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
-35 x x x
-34 x x x
-33 x x x
-32 x x x
-31 x x x
-30 x x x
-29 x x x
-28 x x x
-27 x x x
-26 x x x
-25 x x x
-24 x x x
-23 x x x
-22 x x x
-21 x x x
-20 x x x
-19 x x x
-18 x x x
-17 x x x
-16 x x x
-15 x x x
-14 x x x
-13 x x x
-12 x x x
-11 x x x
-10 x x x
-9 x x x
-8 x x x
-7 x x x
-6 x x x
-5 x x x

Item - 30 20 10 00 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
-4 x x x
-3 x x x
-2 x x x
-1 x x x
0 x x
1 x x
2 x x
3 x x
4 x x
5 x x
6 x x
7 x x
8 x x
9 x x
10 x x
11 x x
12 x x
13 x x
14 x x
15 x x
16 x x
17 x x
18 x x
19 x x
20 x x
21 x x
22 x x
23 x x
24 x x
25 x x
26 x x
27 x x
28 x x
29 x x
30 x x
31 x x
32 x x
33 x x

Item - 30 20 10 00 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
34 x x
35 x x
Table 170: Tap position message as decimal coding (example pos. -35…+35)

8.6 Motor-drive unit and control cabinet
8.6.1 Actuate motor-drive unit (side drive)
Note that the boot process of the device controller (e.g., after a power in-
i terruption) can take up to 5 minutes. You cannot actuate the motor-drive
unit electrically during this time.
Design in accordance with JEC

The device is equipped with a time relay (K31) which bridges the intervention of
the controller in the control circuit while the controller is booting (e.g., after a
power interruption). The following monitoring functions are not available for a
period of approximately 5 minutes:
– Interruption of the control circuit in the event of an impermissible on-load
tap-changer temperature
– Interruption of the control circuit for preventing on-load tap-change opera-
tions in the event of inrush current impulses
– Interruption of the control circuit in the event of F1/F2 being switched on
– Interruption of the control circuit in the event of the main switch being
switched off.
8.6.1.1 Operating the motor-drive unit remotely

Activate the motor-drive unit remotely during normal operation.
You can initiate actuation via a single control impulse, for example using the op-
tional "Automatic voltage regulation" function package.
This adjustment operation is always completed regardless of any other control

impulses issued during the tap-change operation. In the standard design, the
next tap-change operation can only proceed once all control devices have
reached their resting positions.
For on-load tap-changers with pass-through positions: Ensure that the de-
i vice controller (ISM) is switched on. Otherwise, switching operations
through the pass-through positions of the on-load tap-changer will not be
carried out correctly.

If the voltage is interrupted during a tap-change operation, the motor-drive unit
will complete the started tap-change operation once the voltage supply returns.
8.6.1.2 Operating motor-drive unit locally

In special operating cases (such as during maintenance tasks), the motor-drive
unit can also be operated electrically on site via control switch S3.
For on-load tap-changers with pass-through positions: Ensure that the de-
i vice controller (ISM) is switched on. Otherwise, switching operations
through the pass-through positions of the on-load tap-changer will not be
carried out correctly.

8.6.1.3 Operating the motor-drive unit with the hand crank
WARNING Danger of explosion!
Unauthorized operation of the motor-drive unit with the hand crank may re-
sult in death or serious injury.
Never operate the motor-drive unit electrically or with the hand crank be-
fore the transformer has been disconnected if you think there may be a
fault in the transformer or on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer.
Never use the hand crank to complete a tap-change operation that has be-
gun electrically, but has not been ended completely.
If the hand crank is difficult to move, you must stop using it.
When operating the motor-drive unit with the hand crank, never reverse
the direction of rotation.
If there is any doubt about the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-
changer being in proper working condition or about the cause of a fault in
the motor-drive unit, contact the Technical Service department of Maschi-
nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH immediately.
To operate the motor-drive unit manually, only use the hand crank
mounted in the motor-drive unit.
For information about fault rectification, refer to the "Fault elimination" chapter.
Normal operation
During normal operation, there is no need to operate the unit with the hand
crank. The hand crank is mainly required during installation and for tests in the
transformer plant.
Use of the hand crank for operating the motor-drive unit is permitted if the
transformer is disconnected, e.g. for maintenance tasks, if there is no de-
tectable fault on the transformer or on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-
changer and the previous tap-change operation has been completed correctly.
Emergency operation exception

An operation is considered an emergency operation if a tap-change operation is
absolutely necessary when a transformer is energized, despite a fault in the mo-
tor-drive unit. In this case, be sure to observe the warnings listed above.
Operating the motor-drive unit with the hand crank

To carry out a tap-change operation with the hand crank, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door of the protective housing for the motor-drive unit.
2. Switch off motor protective switch Q01 (position 0).
3. Insert the hand crank mounted in the motor-drive unit into the hand crank
aperture in the upper cover plate.
The built-in hand crank interlock switch interrupts the motor circuit at two
poles. The control circuit will not be interrupted.
4. NOTICE! Damage to the on-load tap-changer due to tap-change operation
not being completed correctly. Turn the hand crank in one direction until the
pointer has fully circled the tap-change indicator once and is again in the mid-
position of the area marked in gray on the tap-change indicator.
The tap-change operation is complete.
5. Remove the hand crank and return it to the mounting bracket.
6. Switch on motor protective switch Q01 (position I).
7. Close the door of the protective housing for the motor-drive unit.

8.6.2 Actuate motor-drive unit (top drive)
Note that the boot process of the device controller (e.g., after a power in-
i terruption) can take up to 5 minutes. You cannot actuate the motor-drive
unit electrically during this time.
8.6.2.1 Actuating motor-drive unit locally

To actuate the motor-drive unit locally, proceed as follows:
Operating mode switch S32 or S132 is in the LOC position.
Turn control switch S3 in the raise or lower direction.
The motor-drive unit performs the tap-change operation.
8.6.2.2 Selecting the operating mode

You can select the following operating modes:
– LOC (Local)
– REM (Remote)
– AUTO (only with option "Automatic voltage regulation")
To select the operating mode, proceed as follows:

Turn control switch S32 or S132 to the desired position.
8.6.3 Control of the motor-drive unit
The following parameters let you configure control of the motor-drive unit. You
can set the following:
– Switching pulse
– Motor runtime
– Switching direction
Settings Parameters Motor co...nit
Name Value
Home
Switching pulse type Time-controlled pulse
Switching pulse time 1.5 s
Switching pulse pause 2.5 s
Activate motor runtime monitoring Off Events
Motor runtime 6s
Activate switching direction moni... Off
Switching direction Standard
Information
Recorder
Figure 401: Motor control unit
Go to Settings > Parameters > Motor and control cabinet > Torque moni-
toring .
8.6.3.1 Setting the switching pulse for controlling the motor-drive unit
You can use the parameters Switching pulse type, Switching pulse time and
Switching pulse pause to adapt the device switching pulse to the requirements
of the motor-drive unit controller.
Go to Settings > Parameter > Motor and control cabinet > Motor control
unit.

Switching pulse type
You can use this parameter to toggle the switching pulse between a continuous
pulse or a time-controlled switching pulse.
Continuous pulse Selecting the "Continuous pulse" option causes the device to issue the switch-
ing pulse in AVR Auto operating mode until the measured value is back within
the bandwidth. In AVR Manual operating mode, the device issues the switching
pulse for as long as you press the or key.
If the device is operated as a follower in parallel operation in this case, then the
TAPCON® will issue the switching pulse until one of the following requirements
has been met:
– The set motor runtime has been reached
– The Motor running signal switches from state 1 to 0
– The tap position required by the master has been reached
A pause is enforced after every switching pulse before another switching pulse
is issued.
Time-controlled switching pulse Selecting the "Time-controlled switching pulse" option causes the device to is-
sue the switching pulse for a set duration. A pause is enforced after every
switching pulse before another switching pulse is issued.
If you use a motor-drive unit from Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH, you

i need to select the "Time-controlled switching pulse" option.
s
1 2 1
Figure 402: Switching pulse time and switching pulse pause
1 Switching pulse time 2 Switching pulse pause
Switching pulse time

You can use this parameter to set the maximum duration of the switching
pulse. The switching pulse resets after the switching pulse time has elapsed or
if the device receives the Motor running signal beforehand or the tap position is
changed.
Switching pulse pause

You can use this parameter to set the switching pulse pause between 2 switch-
ing pulses. The device can only issue another switching pulse once the switch-
ing pulse pause has elapsed.
8.6.3.2 Setting motor runtime monitoring

The runtime of the motor-drive unit can be monitored by the device. This func-
tion is used to identify motor-drive unit malfunctions during the tap-change op-
eration and to trigger any actions needed.

Behavior The motor-drive unit issues the Motor-drive unit running signal during the tap-
change operation. This signal is present until the tap-change operation is com-
plete. The device compares the duration of this signal with the set motor run-
time. If the set motor runtime is exceeded, the device triggers the following ac-
tions:
1. Motor runtime exceeded event.
2. Pulse signal via Trigger motor protective switch output relay
Note that motor-drive units with pass-through positions or motor-drive

i units without stepped switching behavior will run for longer under certain
circumstances. Set a longer motor runtime for such units.
unit.
Motor runtime monitoring limit

This parameter lets you set the motor runtime monitoring limit.
Motor runtime monitoring

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate motor runtime monitoring.
8.6.3.3 Setting the switching direction

You can set the switching direction of the motor-drive unit.
unit.
U switching direction
You can use this parameter to set the switching direction for voltage regulation.
You can use this to adjust the behavior of the device based on how your on-
load tap-changer and motor-drive unit are configured. You can select the fol-
lowing options:
Setting Meaning
Standard The device issues a signal via the Raise output to increase the volt-
age.
The device issues a signal via the Lower output to reduce the volt-
age.
Swapped The device issues a signal via the Lower output to increase the volt-
age.
The device issues a signal via the Raise output to reduce the volt-
age.
Table 171: Behavior

Q switching direction (optional)
You can use this parameter to set the switching direction for reactive power
regulation. You can use this to adjust the behavior of the device based on how
your on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit are configured. You can select
Setting Meaning
Standard The device issues a signal via the RAISE output to increase the reac-
tive power.
The device issues a signal via the LOWER output to reduce the reac-
tive power.
Swapped The device issues a signal via the LOWER output to increase the re-
active power.
The device issues a signal via the RAISE output to reduce the reac-
tive power.
Table 172: Behavior
Switching direction monitoring

You can use this parameter to set the switching direction monitoring. This func-
tion monitors whether a tap-change operation in the wrong direction has been
undertaken (e.g. due to a wiring mistake).
If a tap-change operation in the wrong direction is detected, the device issues

the event message Switching direction monitoring and blocks automatic regula-
tion. Automatic regulation is blocked until you acknowledge [►Section 8.1.23.1,
Page 224] the event.
Switching direction monitoring is not active if you control the motor-drive

i unit with a continuous pulse [►Section 8.6.3.1, Page 413].
8.6.4 Drive overview
The overview display of the motor-drive unit shows you the following informa-
tion:
– Current tap position, including drag hands (can be reset [►Section 8.5.18,
Page 399])
– Display of tap-change indicator sections (SSE, optional)
– Operations counter, optionally with resettable operations counter
– Status messages
– Operating mode
– Switching blocking (optional)
– Motor protective switch
– Control cabinet door open/closed
– Next maintenance (optional)
– Ambient temperature (optional)
– Internal temperature of the motor-drive unit (optional)

1 6
4
7
Figure 403: Drive overview
1 Tap position 2 Drag hands
3 Resettable operations counter (op- 4 Operation counter

tional)
5 Tap-change indicator section (op- 6 Status messages

tional)
7 Temperature displays (optional)
Go to Information > Motor and control cabinet > Drive.
Resetting the operations counter (optional)

If your device is equipped with the resettable operations counter, you can reset
the operations counter as follows:
1. In the status messages area, press the Operations counter reset button.
The time of the last reset will be displayed.
2. Press the Reset button to reset the operations counter.

8.6.5 Motor Current Index (MCI)
The term Motor Current Index (in accordance with IEEE PC57.143) describes the
area below the curve of the motor current during an on-load tap-change opera-
tion. The Motor Current Index is a measurement that takes into account the in-
rush current, the present tap-change conditions and the tap-change duration.
Motor current Motor Current Index

15 1000
A
12 800
9 600
I 6 MCI 400
3 200
0 0
0 1 2 3 s 4
t Tap-change operations
Figure 404: Example illustration of the temporal progression of the motor current I and of
the Motor Current Index MCI calculated from this in comparison with the values of the MCI
for further on-load tap-change operations
The motor runtime and therefore the Motor Current Index differ depending on
the type of tap-change operation. The Motor Current Index will therefore be cat-
egorized in accordance with the following types of tap-change operation to aid
comparison:
Tap-change operation type Description
TSO/CSO The switching direction is the same as the previous

Tap selector operation / change-over switching direction. Example:
selector operation – Previous tap-change operation: pos. 2 → pos. 3
– Current tap-change operation: pos. 3 → pos. 4
RSO The switching direction is not the same as the pre-

Reverse tap-change operation vious switching direction. Example:
– Previous tap-change operation: pos. 2 → pos. 3
– Current tap-change operation: pos. 3 → pos. 2
Unknown The tap-change operation type is unknown. This is

the case after the device has been restarted or if
the motor protective switch has been triggered.
Table 173: Tap-change operation types
For the correct determination of the Motor Current Index, you must use a
i signaling module for the tap position that also signals the pass-through po-
sition as a separate tap position.

8.6.5.1 Setting MCI monitoring
The device can monitor the Motor Current Index (MCI) and trigger an event
message if the Motor Current Index is outside of the permissible range. If you
would like to monitor the Motor Current Index, you must set the following pa-
rameters.
Settings Parameters Motor Curr...dex
Name Value
Home
Limit value monitoring Off
Primary transformer current 10 A
K1/K2 signal assignment Standard
TSO/CSO > 1045 Events
TSO/CSO < 849
RSO > 1195
RSO < 849
Information
Recorder
Figure 405: Motor Current Index
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Motor-drive unit > Motor Current Index.
Determining the limit values Upon delivery, the limit values have not been determined. Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH recommends the following procedure for determining the
limit values:
1. When commissioning the product, deactivate limit value monitoring.
2. After one year, display the minimum and maximum values of the Motor Cur-
rent Index (MCI extreme values [►Section 8.6.5.2, Page 420]).
3. Use the maximum value of the MCI + 20% for the upper limit value, and the
minimum value of the MCI - 20% for the lower limit value.
4. Repeat this procedure annually, and then reset the MCI extreme values.
Limit value monitoring

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate Motor Current Index moni-
toring.
TSO/CSO >
You can use this parameter to set the upper limit value for tap selector opera-
tions / change-over selector operations. If the Motor Current Index is greater
than the upper limit value, the device triggers an event message.
TSO/CSO <
You can use this parameter to set the lower limit value for tap selector opera-
tions / change-over selector operations. If the Motor Current Index is less than
the lower limit value, the device triggers an event message.
RSO >
You can use this parameter to set the upper limit value for reverse tap-change
operations. If the Motor Current Index is greater than the upper limit value, the
device triggers an event message.

RSO <
You can use this parameter to set the lower limit value for reverse tap-change
operations. If the Motor Current Index is less than the lower limit value, the de-
vice triggers an event message.
Primary transformer current

You can use this parameter to set the primary current of the current trans-
former for measuring the motor current. The secondary current is 5 A.
8.6.5.2 Displaying the MCI

You can display the progression and the extreme values of the Motor Current
Index.
MCI values
In the MCI values menu, you can display the Motor Current Index recorded val-
ues and the corresponding tap position of the last 3000 tap-change operations.
The following buttons are available for navigation within the diagram:
– : Call up first page.
– : Call up previous page.
– : Call up next page.
– : Call up last page.
– : Update the display.
Figure 406: MCI values
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > MCI values.

2. Where necessary, select the navigation buttons to change pages.

MCI extreme values
In the MCI extreme values menu, you can display the maximum and minimum
values of the Motor Current Index and the corresponding dates.
Figure 407: MCI extreme values
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > MCI extreme values.

2. Where necessary, select the Reset button to clear the displayed extreme val-
ues.
8.6.6 Calibrating the position sensor
This function is used to calibrate the position sensor if the position sensor of
the motor-drive unit has been replaced or is incorrectly calibrated. Follow the
notes in the service instructions.
Only calibrate the position sensor if the position sensor has been replaced
i and after consultation with Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH. If incor-
rectly calibrated, the motor-drive unit might no longer function correctly.
Figure 408: Calibrating the position sensor
To calibrate the position sensor, proceed as follows:

The position sensor is replaced according to the service instructions and the
motor-drive unit is in the adjustment position (red mark on the flywheel).
1. Go to Settings > Calibrate hardware > Position sensor.
2. Press the Calibrate button.
3. Press Yes to confirm the prompt.
The position sensor will be calibrated.

4. Go to Information > Drive and compare the display for the tap position and
the tap-change indicator sections (SSE) to the motor-drive unit display. The
values must match.
8.6.7 Synchronizing the motor-drive unit
For commissioning, you have to synchronize the tap position of the on-load
tap-changer using the control unit of the motor-drive unit.
8.6.7.1 Single-column on-load tap-changer model

In the single-column design of the on-load tap-changer, you can synchronize
the tap position in two different ways:
– Manual entry of the current tap position
– Automatic synchronization
Settings Calibrate hardware
Home
Tap position (manual) Synchronize by entering the
current tap position
Tap position (automatic)
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 409: Synchronizing the motor-drive unit
Manual
To manually enter the current tap position, you have to know the current on-
load tap-changer tap position. You can read the current tap position from the
on-load tap-changer head. To do so, follow the operating instructions for the
on-load tap-changer.
For manual calibration, if your device is equipped with the torque monitoring
function, the device will perform 2 tap-change operations in the "RAISE" direc-
tion and 2 tap-change operations in the "LOWER" direction. Prior to manual cali-
bration, ensure that the on-load tap-changer is not in an end position.
Make sure you set the correct tap position. Otherwise the correct function
i of the motor-drive unit cannot be guaranteed.
Proceed as follows to enter the current tap position manually:

1. Go to Settings > Calibrate hardware > Tap position (designation): manual.
2. Select the current tap position of the on-load tap-changer.
Automatic
During automatic synchronization, the motor-drive unit control unit automati-
cally determines the current tap position of the on-load tap-changer. To do so,
the on-load tap-changer is moved across the entire regulating range.

Automatic synchronization is not possible if your on-load tap-changer has tap
positions that may not be switched to ("blocked positions"). In this case, per-
form synchronization manually.
Note that the entire regulating range of the on-load tap-changer is traveled
i through during automatic synchronization. This allows strong voltage
changes to occur on the transformer. Therefore, carry out the automatic
synchronization on a de-energized transformer.
Conditions for automatic synchronization:

– The motor-drive unit is in "Local" operating mode.
– The motor protective switch is switched on (position I).
– The motor voltage is below the permissible range.
1. Go to Settings > Calibrate hardware > Tap position (automatic).

2. Press the Start button.
3. Press the Start button to confirm the message.
The automatic synchronization is carried out.
8.6.7.2 Multi-column on-load tap-changer model

In the multi-column design of the on-load tap-changer, you can carry out the
synchronization automatically. To do so, the on-load tap-changers are moved
across the entire regulating range. All on-load tap-changers are controlled si-
multaneously.
Note that the entire regulating range of the on-load tap-changer is traveled
i through during automatic synchronization. This allows strong voltage
changes to occur on the transformer. Therefore, carry out the automatic
synchronization on a de-energized transformer.
Conditions for automatic synchronization

– The motor-drive unit is in "Local" operating mode.
– The motor protective switch is switched on (position I).
– The motor voltage is below the permissible range.
Figure 410: Synchronizing the motor-drive unit
1. Go to Settings > Calibrate hardware > Tap position (automatic).

2. Select the Synchronize button.

3. Press the Start button to confirm the message.
The on-load tap changers are switched into the lower final position (the
lowest or the highest tap position, depending on the drive configuration).
Once the final position has been reached, a message with the current tap
position will appear.
4. Through the inspection window, check whether all on-load tap-changers are
in the same tap position as indicated in the message text.
5. If the tap positions are the same, press the Yes button to confirm the mes-
sage. Otherwise, press the Cancel button and follow the instructions in the
Troubleshooting [►Section 9.1.7, Page 455] chapter.
The on-load tap changers are switched into the upper final position (the
highest or the lowest tap position depending on the drive configuration).
Automatic synchronization is complete.
8.6.8 Control cabinet monitoring
You can use the control cabinet monitoring function to monitor the climatic
conditions within the control cabinet. With this function, the device monitors
the following measured values:
– Temperature
– Relative humidity
8.6.8.1 Setting control cabinet monitoring

You can set limit values and a delay time for each of the measured values ac-
quired. If the measured value is higher than the upper limit (> or >>) or lower
than the lower limit (< or <<), the device transmits an event message. Moreover,
the device issues a signal at the output Limit value interior climate control cabi-
net exceeded.
Figure 411: Control cabinet monitoring
Go to Settings > Parameters >Motor and control cabinet > Control cabinet
monitoring.
Control cabinet RH >/>> limit value

You can use these parameters to set the two upper limit values for monitoring
the relative humidity in the control cabinet.
RH delay time
You can use this parameter to set the delay time for delaying the issuing of the
event message Control cabinet RH >/>> limit value.

Temperature <
You can use this parameter to set the lower limit value for monitoring the tem-
perature in the control cabinet.
Temperature delay time

You can use this parameter to set the delay time for delaying the issuing of the
event message Control cabinet temp limit value <.
8.6.8.2 Displaying measured values from the control cabinet sensors

You can display the temporal progression of the measured values from the con-
trol cabinet sensors for the last 10 days.
Figure 412: Control cabinet sensors
Go to Information > Motor and control cabinet > Control cabinet sensors.

8.7 Cooling system control (optional)
You can use the cooling system control function package to control and/or
monitor up to 6 cooling stages depending on device configuration.
8.7.1 Configuring cooling stages
To control the cooling system, you have to set the following parameters for
each cooling group:
Settings Parameters Control, c...p 1
Name Value
Home
Activate On
Switch-on input variable Hot-spot temperature
Switch-off input variable Top-oil temperature
Switching point 60°C Events
Hysteresis 5K
Switch-on delay 2 min
Activate altern. mode On
Activate period. mode On Information
Active if error On
Recorder
Figure 413: Cooling stage
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling group X control.
Activate
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the cooling stage.
– On: The cooling stage is used for cooling system control.
– Off: The cooling stage is not used for cooling system control.
Activate cooling stage X

In the "Manual" operating mode [►Section 8.7.2, Page 427], you can use this
parameter to start and stop the cooling stage.
If you have started the cooling stages manually and a power failure occurs,
i the device restarts the cooling stages once power has been restored.
Switch on input variable

You can use this parameter to set which measured temperature value is to be
used to switch on the cooling stage. You can select the following options:
– Upper oil temperature
– Lower oil temperature
– OLTC oil temperature
– Generic temperature

Switch off input variable
You can use this parameter to set which measured temperature value is to be
used to switch off the cooling stage. You can select the following options:
– Upper oil temperature
– Lower oil temperature
– OLTC oil temperature
– Generic temperature
Switching point
You can use this parameter to set the temperature at which the cooling stage is
to be switched on or off. If the temperature exceeds the switching point, the
cooling stage is switched on. If the temperature is less than the switching point
minus the optional hysteresis, the cooling stage is switched off.
Hysteresis
You can use this parameter to set a hysteresis below the switching point. The
cooling stage is only switched off if the temperature is less than the switching
point minus the hysteresis.
Switch-on delay
You can use this parameter to set the switch-on delay for the cooling stage. The
cooling stage is only switched on if the measured temperature is higher than
the switching point for longer than the set switch-on delay.
Alternating mode
You can use this parameter to activate alternating mode [►Section 8.7.6, Page
430] for the cooling stage.
Periodic mode
You can use this parameter to activate periodic mode [►Section 8.7.5, Page
429] for the cooling stage.
Active if error
You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to activate the cooling
stage in the event of an error (fail-safe mode). The following types of error are
recognized:
– The input signal for the temperature is in an impermissible range (e.g. cable
break, sensor defective)
– The transformer load current is in an impermissible range
8.7.2 Set the operating mode
You can use this parameter to set the cooling system control operating mode.
– Automatic: The device starts and stops the individual cooling stages auto-
matically.
– Manual: You can start and stop the individual cooling stages via the visualiza-
tion [►Section 8.7.1, Page 426] or the control system.
To set the operating mode, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling system control >
Operating mode.

8.7.3 Deactivating cooling system control
Via a signal at the digital input I: Deactivate ISM cooling system control you can
deactivate the cooling system control, for example to control the cooling stages
via an external device. When configuring the digital input, refer to the section
Configuring digital inputs and outputs [►Section 8.1.22, Page 222].
8.7.4 Configuring load-dependent mode
In load-dependent mode all cooling stages are activated if the load current of
the transformer is greater than the set switching point. You can set the switch-
ing point as a percentage in relation to the transformer rated current. Once the
switch-on delay has elapsed, the cooling stages are activated. To limit the in-
rush current of the cooling stages, they are activated one after another with a
delay time of 60 seconds.
Settings Parameters Cooling ...rol
Name Value
Home
Operating mode Manual
Load-dep. mode Off
Load-dep. mode: Switching point 100.0 %
Load-dep. mode: Switch-on delay 2.0 min Events
Load-dep. mode: Overrun time 30.0 min
Activate period. mode Off
Period. mode: Interval 24 h
Period. mode: Switch-on duration 30 min Information
Period. mode: Switch-on delay 120 min

Activate altern. mode Off
Altern. mode: Change interval 24 h
Recorder
Figure 414: Cooling system control
To use this function, you need to activate the corresponding cooling stage
i [►Section 8.7.1, Page 426].
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling system control.
Activate load-dependent mode

You can use this parameter to activate the load-dependent mode of the cooling
system control.
Load-dependent mode: Switching point

You can use this parameter to set the switching threshold as a percentage in re-
lation to the nominal current of the transformer. All cooling stages are activated
if the load current of the transformer is greater than the set switching point.
Load-dependent mode: Switch-on delay

You can use this parameter to set the delay time for switching on the first cool-
ing stage.

Load-dependent mode: Overrun time
You can use this parameter to set the time period for which the cooling stages
remain switched on when the transformer load current returns to a value below
the set switching point.
8.7.5 Configuring periodic mode
Periodic mode is used to prevent the bearings of the cooling stages from seiz-
ing up as a result of long idle periods. To do this, the cooling stages are oper-
ated for a certain period at regular intervals regardless of the measured temper-
ature. You can activate/deactivate periodic mode individually for every cooling
stage (Configuring cooling stages [►Section 8.7.1, Page 426]).
Name Value
Home
Load-dep. mode Off

Recorder
Figure 415: Cooling system control
Activate periodic mode

You can use this parameter to activate the periodic mode of the cooling system
control.
Periodic mode: Interval

You can use this parameter to set the time period after which the cooling
stages are to be switched on for the first time.
Periodic mode: Switch-on duration

You can use this parameter to set the length of time that the cooling stages are
to be switched on for.
Periodic mode: Switch-on delay

You can use this parameter to set the time period after which the cooling
stages are to be switched back on again.

8.7.6 Configuring alternating mode
If the transformer is equipped with several similar cooling stages, you can run
the stages in alternating mode. In alternating mode, each of the cooling stages
is run in turn to evenly distribute the load of the cooling stages. You can acti-
vate/deactivate alternating mode individually for every cooling stage (Configur-
ing cooling stages [►Section 8.7.1, Page 426]).
Only use alternating mode for similar cooling stages.

i
Example: If you activate alternating mode for 2 cooling stages and set a
change interval of 24 h, then cooling stage 1 is switched off after 24 h and
cooling stage 2 is switched on. After another 24 h, cooling stage 2 is
switched off and cooling stage 1 is switched on, etc.
Name Value
Home
Load-dep. mode Off

Recorder
Figure 416: General cooling
Activate alternating mode

You can use this parameter to activate the alternating mode of the cooling sys-
tem control.
Alternating mode: Change interval

You can use this parameter to set the time period after which the cooling stage
is to be changed.
8.7.7 Configuring the frequency-based cooling system control
The optional frequency-based cooling system control function lets you control
the fans in a cooling system using the frequency. The device calculates the fan
speed based on the temperature of the top-oil and the load factor. The device
uses the highest speed derived based on the configured dependencies.

The device outputs the fan speed as an analog signal (0...10 V), using in-
i verse logic in the process: 100% = 0 V, 0% = 10 V. The device records the
status of the connected frequency converter using inverse logic (low ac-
tive).
Fan speed based on the top-oil temperature

If the top-oil temperature is less than the lower threshold, then the device uses
the minimum fan speed. If the top-oil temperature is greater than the upper
threshold, then the device uses the maximum fan speed. If the top-oil tempera-
ture is between the lower threshold and upper threshold, then the device calcu-
lates the necessary speed using a straight line between both points S1 and S2.
The following diagrams show an example of a graph of the fan speeds based on
the top-oil temperature according to the set parameters.
θ S1 θ S2
S2
100 n max
%
80
70
60
50
n 40
30
20
S1
10 n min
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 °C 140
θ Top oil
Figure 417: Fan speed based on the top-oil temperature
n Fan speed θTop-oil Top-oil temperature
nmin Minimum fan speed nmax Maximum fan speed
θS1 Lower threshold for top-oil temp. θS2 Upper threshold for top-oil
temp.
Fan speed based on load factor

The load factor is the ratio of load current to nominal current. If the load factor
is less than the lower threshold, then the device uses the minimum fan speed. If
the load factor is greater than the upper threshold, then the device uses the
maximum fan speed. If the load factor is between the lower threshold and up-
per threshold, then the device calculates the necessary speed using a straight
line between both points S1 and S2.

The following diagrams show an example of a graph of the fan speeds based on
the load factor according to the set parameters.
L S1 L S2
100 n max
%
80
70
60
50
n 40
30
20
10 n min
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 % 140
Load factor I L/ I n
Figure 418: Fan speed based on load factor
n Fan speed θTop-oil Top-oil temperature
nmin Minimum fan speed nmax Maximum fan speed
LS1 Lower load factor threshold LS2 Upper load factor threshold
Settings Parameters Cooling sy...rol
Name Value
Home
Min. fan run time after error 300 s
Minimum fan speed 10 %
Maximum fan speed 100 %
Lower threshold for top-oil temp. 20°C Events
Upper threshold for top-oil temp. 60°C
Lower load factor threshold 0%
Upper load factor threshold 100 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 419: Frequency-based cooling system control
Min. fan run time after error

You can use this parameter to set how long the fans are to continue running if
an error occurs in the cooling system control. The fans run at full power for this
duration.
Minimum fan speed

You can use this parameter to set the minimum fan speed.

Maximum fan speed
You can use this parameter to set the maximum fan speed.
Upper top-oil temperature threshold

You can use this parameter to set the top-oil temperature at which the fans are
to run at maximum speed.
Lower top-oil temperature threshold

You can use this parameter to set the top-oil temperature at which the fans are
to run at minimum speed.
Upper load factor threshold

You can use this parameter to set the load factor at which the fans are to run at
maximum speed.
Lower load factor threshold

You can use this parameter to set the load factor at which the fans are to run at
minimum speed.
8.7.8 Displaying status of cooling stages
You can display the status of the cooling stages. The following information is
available to you for every cooling stage:
– Status
– Gray: Cooling stage inactive
– Blue: Cooling stage active
– Yellow, red: Event message
– Operating time
– Parameter set
– Delay time
– Hysteresis
– Switch-on threshold
Figure 420: Status of cooling stages
Go to Information > Cooling system > Cooling system control.

8.8 Cooling system monitoring (optional)
With the optional cooling monitoring function, you can monitor the cooling sys-
tem of a transformer.
8.8.1 Setting the cooling system monitoring function
You can set the general cooling system monitoring functions with the following
parameters.
Settings Parameters Cooling sy...ing
Name Value
Home
Run-in time evaluation 60 s
Operating duration 0s
Number of starts 0
Operating duration 0s Events
Number of starts 0
Information
Recorder
Figure 421: Cooling system monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling system monitor-
ing.
Run-in time evaluation

You can use this parameter to set the length of time a cooling stage has to be
active before the device performs an evaluation of the values to be monitored
for the "Cooling system flow monitoring" function. This is used to prevent incor-
rect event messages during the cooling system startup process.
Number of starts
The device records the number of starts of the cooling stage. You can use this
parameter to reset the number of starts of the relevant cooling stage if you
have replaced fans or pumps on the cooling system, for example.
Operating duration
The device records the operating duration of the cooling stage. You can use this
parameter to reset the operating duration of the relevant cooling stage if you
have replaced fans or pumps on the cooling system, for example.

8.8.2 Displaying status of cooling stages
You can display the status of the cooling stages. The following information is
available to you for every cooling stage:
– Status
– Gray: Cooling stage inactive
– Blue: Cooling stage active
– Yellow, red: Event message
– Operating time
– Parameter set
– Delay time
– Hysteresis
– Switch-on threshold
Figure 422: Status of cooling stages
Go to Information > Cooling system > Cooling system control.
8.8.3 Cooling efficiency monitoring (optional)
The device can monitor the efficiency of a cooling system. To do this, the de-
vice evaluates the cooling efficiency using the following values:
– Thermal resistance Rth
– Comparison of the measured and the calculate upper oil temperature
– Comparison of the cooling system feed temperature and return temperature

8.8.3.1 Setting the cooling efficiency monitoring function
For cooling efficiency monitoring, you have to set the following parameters.
Settings Parameters Cooling ef...ing
Name Value
Home
Transformer no-load losses 20 kW
Transformer short-circuit losses 200 kW
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 423: Cooling efficiency monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling efficiency moni-
toring.
Transformer short-circuit losses

You can use this parameter to set the transformer short-circuit losses (copper
losses) PCU for calculating the thermal resistance of the cooling system.
Transformer no-load losses

You can use this parameter to set the transformer no-load losses P0 for calculat-
ing the thermal resistance of the cooling system.
8.8.3.2 Displaying the cooling efficiency

You can display the temporal progression of the average value of the thermal
resistance Rth of the cooling system over the last 10 days.
Figure 424: Cooling efficiency
Go to Information > Cooling system > Cooling efficiency.

8.8.4 Cooling system flow monitoring (optional)
The device can monitor a cooling system with 2 oil-water cooling stages. To do
this, the device monitors the following values for the cooling media oil and wa-
ter:
– Temperature
– Feed
– Return
– Difference feed/return (oil only)
– Pressure
– Flow rate
– Pump current consumption
Oil
Water
Cooling stage 1 Cooling stage 2
0.96 bar 1.10 bar 0.96 bar 1.10 bar
3.6 m³/h 3.9 m³/h 3.6 m³/h 3.6 m³/h
45°C 8°C 47°C 8°C
38°C 14°C 41°C 15°C
Figure 425: Cooling system flow monitoring values
8.8.4.1 Setting the cooling system flow monitoring function

You can set the following limit values for the cooling media oil and water re-
spectively for monitoring the cooling system flow:
Measured value Lower limit 2 Lower limit 1 Upper limit 1 Upper limit 2
Feed temperature << < > >>
Return temperature << < > >>
Temperature difference << < - -
Pressure << < - -
Flow rate << < - -
Pump current << < > >>

Table 174: Limit values for cooling system flow monitoring

Behavior If the measured value is higher than the upper limit (> or >>) or lower than the
lower limit (< or <<), the device triggers an event message.
Figure 426: Monitoring, cooling stage 1
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling stage 1/2 monitor-
ing.
Feed oil temperature

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible feed
temperature of the oil circuit. You can set two upper and two lower limit values
for each cooling stage.
Return oil temperature

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible return
temperature of the oil circuit. You can set two upper and two lower limit values
for each cooling stage.
Oil temperature difference

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible tem-
perature difference between the feed and return of the oil circuit. You can set
two lower limit values for each cooling stage.
Δθ = θ flow - θ return
Δθ Temperature difference θflow Feed temperature
θreturn Return temperature
Oil pressure
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible pres-
sure of the oil circuit. You can set two lower limit values for each cooling stage.
Oil flow
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible flow
rate of the oil circuit. You can set two lower limit values for each cooling stage.
Oil pump current

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible current
consumption of the oil circuit pump. You can set two upper and two lower limit
values for each cooling stage.

Feed water temperature
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible feed
temperature of the water circuit. You can set two upper and two lower limit val-
ues for each cooling stage.
Return water temperature

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible return
temperature of the water circuit. You can set two upper and two lower limit val-
ues for each cooling stage.
Water pressure
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible pres-
sure of the water circuit. You can set two lower limit values for each cooling
stage.
Water flow
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible flow
rate of the water circuit. You can set two lower limit values for each cooling
stage.
Water pump current

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible current
consumption of the water circuit pump. You can set two upper and two lower
limit values for each cooling stage.
8.8.4.2 Displaying the cooling system flow

You can display the temporal progression of the measured values of the cooling
system flow monitoring over the last 10 days.
Figure 427: Cooling system flow
Go to Information > Cooling system > Cooling stage 1/2.

8.9 Bushings
8.9.1 Configuring bushing monitoring
Follow the notes in the following sections when configuring capacitance moni-
toring and dissipation factor monitoring.
8.9.1.1 Set the field designation

The field designation is displayed in the bushing monitoring overview screen
[►Section 8.9.2, Page 447]. You can set a unique field designation for each
field.
Settings Parameters Bushing ...d 1
Name Value
Home
F1-C: Activate cap. monitoring On
F1-C: C1 phase L1 0.6 nF
F1-C: C1 phase L3 0.6 nF Events
F1-C: ΔC1 > 5.0 %
F1-C: ΔC1 >> 10.0 %
F1-C: Perform standardization No
F1-tanδ: Activate diss. factor mo... On Information
F1-tanδ: Δtanδ > 0.5 %

F1-tanδ: Perform standardization No
Recorder
Figure 428: Bushing monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Bushing monitoring > Bushing monitoring

field1/field2.
Field designation
You can use this parameter to set the field designation.
8.9.1.2 Configuring capacitance monitoring

The device monitors the amendment in the difference of capacitance C1 be-
tween the phases. If the capacitance C1 of all three bushings changes in the
same way (e.g. due to a temperature change), the difference in capacitances
ΔC1 remains constant. If the capacitance of one or two bushings changes, the
difference in capacitance also changes.
You can set two limit values for monitoring the bushings in field 1 and field 2:
– F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >
– F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>
If the limit values are exceeded, the monitoring system triggers an event mes-
sage and issues a signal at the digital output.
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen recommends the following limit values: F1/

i F2-C: ΔC1 >: 5%, F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>: 10%

0,7 Pt, Pfeil (Voll, 4, 30) Min. Max. Analogsignal
C1
L3
L1
L2
ΔC1
ΔC1>>
10 %
ΔC1> L3
5%
L1
L2
t
Figure 429: Capacitance monitoring
1 Status of the bushing (gray: C1 Capacitance C1

ok, yellow/red: limit value
exceeded)
ΔC1 Capacitance difference ΔC1 ΔC1> Limit value ΔC1>
ΔC1>> Limit value ΔC1>> L1, L2, L3 Phase L1, L2, L3
To monitor the capacitance of the bushings, the following parameters must be

set for commissioning the transformer:
– F1/F2-C: Activate cap. monitoring
– F1/F2-C: C1 Phase L1/L2/L3
– F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >
– F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>
– F1/F2-C: Perform standardization


Name Value
Home
F1-C: ΔC1 > 5.0 %
F1-C: ΔC1 >> 10.0 %

Recorder
Go to Settings > Parameters > Bushings > Bushing monitoring field 1 / Bush-
ing monitoring field 2.
F1/F2-C: Activate capacitance monitoring

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate capacitance monitoring for
field 1 or field 2.
After being switched on, capacitance monitoring only becomes active once
i a delay time has elapsed (factory setting of 2 minutes) in order to avoid er-
rors resulting from transients.
F1/F2-C: C1 phase L1
You can use this parameter to set the reference capacitance C1 for the bushings
of the L1 phases in field 1 or field 2. The reference value is the value you have
measured with an external measuring device for commissioning.
F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >

You can use this parameter to set the limit value F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >.
F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>

You can use this parameter to set the limit value F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>.
F1/F2-C: Perform standardization

You must perform standardization for field 1 and field 2 to commission the
monitoring system. The standardization is used to compensate for measure-
ment tolerances along the measurement chain (bushing, bushing adapter and
bushing coupling unit).

Only perform the standardization while commissioning the monitoring sys-
i tem and with bushings in good condition. Otherwise correct bushing moni-
toring functionality cannot be guaranteed.
To perform the standardization, proceed as follows:

The transformer is in a stable state (typical load, no on-load tap-change oper-
ation or significant change in the transformer load, thermally stabilized).
field 1 / Bushing monitoring field 2 > F1/F2-C: Perform standardization.
2. Select the Yes option.
3. Press the Accept button to perform the standardization.
The standardization is carried out and the parameter is reset to the No op-
tion.
4. Check the event messages [►Section 8.1.23.1, Page 224] to see if the stan-
dardization was performed successfully. If this is not the case, resolve the
cause of the error and repeat the standardization.
F1/F2-C: C BCU phase L1

Set the capacitance of the bushing coupling unit for every field for phase L1.


F1/F2-C: Min. measured voltage

Set the minimum permitted voltage on the bushing coupling units for bushing
capacitance monitoring for every field.
F1/F2-C: Standardization min. ref. volt.

Set the minimum permitted voltage on the bushing coupling units for bushing
capacitance monitoring for every field.
F1/F2-C: Standardization min.meas.volt.

Set the minimum permitted voltage on the bushing coupling unit for the stan-
dardization of capacitance monitoring for every field.
F1/F2-C: Standardization max.meas.volt.

Set the maximum permitted voltage on the bushing coupling unit for the stan-
dardization of capacitance monitoring for every field.
F1/F2-C: Min. reference voltage

Set the minimum permitted reference voltage for every field.
8.9.1.3 Configuring dissipation factor monitoring (MSENSE® BM-T)

The device monitors the change in the difference of the dissipation factor tanδ
between the phases. If the tanδ of all 3 phases changes in the same way (e.g.
due to a temperature change), the difference in the dissipation factor Δtanδ re-
mains constant. If the dissipation factor of one or two bushings changes, the
difference in the dissipation factor also changes.

1,5 Pt, rgb(0,147,214)
Min.
You can set a limit value for monitoring the bushings in field 1 or field 2. If the
0,7 Pt, Pfeil (Voll, 4, 30) Min. Max. Analogsignal
limit value is exceeded, the monitoring system triggers an event message and
issues a signal at the digital output.
tanδ
L3
L1
L2
Δtanδ L3
Δtanδ>
L1
L2
t
Figure 431: Dissipation factor monitoring
1 Status of the bushing (gray: tanδ Dissipation factor tanδ

ok, yellow/red: limit value
exceeded)
Δtanδ Dissipation factor difference Δtanδ> Limit value Δtanδ>

Δtanδ
L1, L2, L3 Phase L1, L2, L3
To monitor the dissipation factor of the bushings, you must set the following
parameters for commissioning the transformer:
– F1/F2-tanδ: Activate diss. factor monit.
– F1/F2-tanδ: tanδ phase L1/L2/L3
– F1/F2-tanδ: Δtanδ >
– F1/F2-tanδ: Perform standardization


Name Value
Home
F1-C: ΔC1 > 5.0 %
F1-C: ΔC1 >> 10.0 %

Recorder
F1/F2-tanδ: Activate dissipation factor monitoring

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate dissipation factor monitor-
ing in field 1 or field 2.
After being switched on, dissipation factor monitoring only becomes active
i once a delay time has elapsed (measured value display after approx. 7 min-
utes, monitoring after approx. 1 hour) in order to avoid errors resulting from
transients.
8.9.1.3.1 F1/F2 tanδ: tanδ phase L1

You can use this parameter to set the reference dissipation factor tanδ for the
bushing of phase L1 in field 1 or field 2. The reference value is the value you
have measured with an external measuring device for commissioning.


8.9.1.3.4 Limit value F1/F2-tanδ: Δtanδ >

You can use this parameter to set the limit value F1/F2-tanδ: Δtanδ >.
F1/F2-tanδ: Perform standardization

You can use this parameter to perform a standardization of the dissipation fac-
tor monitoring in field 1 and field 2. This clears all of the measured and calcu-
lated values for dissipation factor monitoring.
To perform the standardization, proceed as follows:

field 1 / Bushing monitoring field 2 > F1/F2-tanδ: Perform standardization.
2. Select the Yes option.

3. Press the Accept button to perform the standardization.
The standardization is carried out and the parameter is reset to the No op-
tion.
4. Check the event messages [►Section 8.1.23.1, Page 224] to see if the stan-
dardization was performed successfully.
F1/F2-tanδ: Min. measured voltage

Set the minimum permitted voltage on the bushing coupling units for dissipa-
tion factor monitoring of the bushings for every field.
8.9.1.4 Sum current method

In this menu, you can set the parameters for the sum current method. This
function allows the device to calculate the total current from the measured volt-
ages and the phase shifts in the 3-phase network as well as the capacitances of
the bushings.
The device does not perform an analysis. This function supports you when
i making a diagnosis.
I: F1-I/F2-I: Activate sum current method

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the sum current method
for every field.
Alternatively, you can activate or deactivate the sum current method via digital
inputs. While doing so, please note the following:
– You must select operating mode REMOTE.
– If a high signal is applied to both inputs simultaneously, only the first high
signal is taken into account. You can set the parameter in the menu in the vi-
sualization if needed.
– You cannot adjust the parameter in the menu in the visualization if the high
signal for activating or deactivating is applied.
I: F1-I/F2-I: Setting the interval for recording the sum current measure-
ment
You can use this parameter to set the interval for recording the measurement
and calculating the sum current for each field. Depending on the setting of this
parameter, the median value, the maximum value and the minimum value are
recorded and calculated.
8.9.1.5 Circuit breaker monitoring

You can configure up to 4 digital inputs for monitoring the status messages of
the circuit breakers in the reference system. This monitoring function is used for
detecting whether the reference system is active (circuit breaker in ON position)
or inactive (circuit breaker in OFF position).
If circuit breaker monitoring is configured and a circuit breaker is reported to be

in the OFF position, the device reacts as follows:
– Bushing monitoring is deactivated.
– You cannot perform standardization.
When configuring this function, refer to the section Configuring digital inputs
and outputs [►Section 8.1.22, Page 222].

i you can configure up to 4 inputs for field 1 (F1) and for field 2 (F2) respec-
tively. If bushing monitoring with the option "Monitoring of 3 bushings" is
used, only the inputs for field 1 are displayed. Bushing monitoring is only
deactivated for the respective field.
8.9.2 Displaying the state of the bushings
The device displays the current state of the bushings and the following mea-
sured values:
– Status indicator for the bushing based on the set limit values
– Gray: Everything OK
– Yellow: The capacitance difference ΔC1 is greater than the limit value
ΔC1 >
Only with option BM-T – Yellow: The dissipation factor difference Δtanδ is greater than the limit value
Δtanδ >
– Red: The capacitance difference ΔC1 is greater than the limit value ΔC1 >>
– C1: Calculated (compensated) bushing capacitance

– ∆C1: Percentage deviation of the capacitance difference ΔC1 from the refer-
ence capacitance C1
Only with option BM-T – 3-phase reference system:

– tanδ: Calculated (compensated) dissipation factor of the bushing
– Δtanδ: Dissipation factor difference Δtanδ
– U ref: Currently measured reference system voltage

i the following values will be displayed in two separate views for field 1 (F1)
and field 2 (F2).
Figure 433: State of the bushings
Go to Information > Bushings > Bushing monitoring field 1 / Bushing moni-

toring field 2.

8.9.3 Displaying the capacitance progression
You can display the temporal progression of the capacitance C1 and the capaci-
tance difference ΔC1 over the last 28 days.
Figure 434: Capacitance progression
Go to Information > Bushings > Capacitance C1/ΔC1 field 1 / Capacitance

C1/ΔC1 field 2.
8.9.4 Show dissipation factor curve (MSENSE® BM-T)
You can display the temporal progression of the dissipation factor tanδ and the
dissipation factor difference Δtanδ over the last 28 days.
Figure 435: Dissipation factor progression
Go to Information > Bushings > Dissipation factor tanδ/Δtanδ field 1 / Dissi-

pation factor tanδ/Δtanδ field 2.
8.9.5 Displaying sum current information
If you have activated the sum current method, you can display the recorded val-
ues as follows:

Field 1/Field 2 sum current
The tabular representation shows you the real-time values of the sum current
method for the bushings.
Figure 436: Tabular
Go to Information > Bushings > Field 1 sum current / Field 2 sum current.
Field 1/Field 2 sum current diagram

You can display the values and the average value of a certain period for each
field as a polar diagram.
Figure 437: Diagram
Go to Information > Bushings > Field 1 sum current diagram / Field 2 sum
current diagram.

8.10 Protective devices
8.10.1 Displaying the measured values of the Buchholz relay (op-

tional)
You can display the temporal progression of the measured values of the Buch-
holz relay over the last 10 days.
Figure 438: Measured value trend of the Buchholz relay
Go to Information > Protective devices > Buchholz relay.
8.10.2 Displaying the measured values of the pressure relief device

(optional)
You can display the temporal progression of the measured values of the pres-
sure relief device (PRD) over the last 10 days.
Figure 439: Measured value trend of the pressure relief device
Go to Information > Protective devices > Pressure relief device.

8.10.3 Displaying protective device status (optional)
The overview display shows you the current status of the connected protective
devices.
Figure 440: Overview display of the status of the protective devices
Go to Information > Protective devices > Protective devices status.

8.11 Insulating fluids
8.11.1 Displaying the measured value trend of the oil level and dehy-
drating breather (optional)
You can display the temporal progression of the oil level and the measured val-
ues of the dehydrating breather over the last 10 days. To do so, proceed as fol-
lows:
Figure 441: Measured value trend of the oil level and the dehydrating breather measured val-
ues
Go to Information > Insulating fluids > Oil level/d. breather history.

9 Fault elimination
9.1 Motor-drive unit fault elimination
9.1.1 Safety instructions

Danger of death or severe injury from explosive gases in the on-load tap-
changer / de-energized tap-changer, in the pipework system, at the dehydrat-
ing breather opening and from flying parts and hot oil splashing!
If a protective device has been tripped or you suspect a fault, first check the
transformer, on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer and motor-
drive unit. Never operate the motor-drive unit electrically or with the hand
crank beforehand as long as the transformer is energized.
Do not resume operation until the troubleshooting has been completed.
Make sure that only trained technicians perform the work.
Use suitable personal protective equipment/clothing.
Ensure that there are no naked flames, hot surfaces or sparks (for example
caused by static charging) in the immediate surroundings and that none
occur.
Ensure that all safety equipment for the on-load tap-changer / de-ener-
gized tap-changer is ready for use.
Ensure that the oil compartment of the on-load tap-changer is correctly
filled with oil as per the instructions.
9.1.2 General information
Document each fault, even if it is easy to fix.
In the event of faults on the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer or

motor-drive unit, which cannot be easily and immediately corrected on site, or if
a protective device has been tripped, please inform your authorized MR repre-
sentative, the transformer manufacturer or contact us directly at:

Technical Service
Postfach 12 03 60
93025 Regensburg
Deutschland
+49 941 40 90-0
[email protected]
www.reinhausen.com
You will find an overview of the services available for the product in the cus-
tomer portal: https://portal.reinhausen.com
7815063/10 EN Fault elimination 453

9.1.3 Fault in the environment of the motor-drive unit
Fault description Measure
No change in voltage on the transformer de- – Contact MR

spite change in position on motor-drive unit
Noises on drive shaft or motor-drive unit – Ensure that the motor-drive unit is at-
when changing tap position tached correctly, in accordance with the
"Assembly" chapter.
– Make sure that the drive shaft including
protective cover is assembled correctly,
in accordance with the operating instruc-
tions for the on-load tap-changer / de-en-
ergized tap-changer.
Table 175: Fault in the environment of the motor-drive unit
9.1.4 Fault in the motor-drive unit when the tap-change operation

has not been ended
If the motor-drive unit stops and the arrow of the tap-change indicator does not
point in the area highlighted in gray (see the "Indication Field" section, position
3), then the tap-change operation has not been ended correctly.
This is a stationary state that is not allowed and must be rectified immedi-
ately. If you cannot rectify the fault immediately, switch off the transformer.
Contact the Technical Service department at Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
GmbH immediately.
If you notice a fault in the motor-drive unit right away, you should immediately
start troubleshooting as described in the following table.
Fault description Action
Tripping of the motor protective switch Q01 – Hand crank operation is prohibited
– Switch on Q01 only once.
– If Q01 does not trigger again and if no
other fault is present, the motor-drive
unit automatically ends the tap-change
operation that was started.
– If Q01 is triggered again, do not attempt
any more tap-change operations and
contact MR.
Interruption of the supply voltage to the mo- – Hand crank operation is prohibited
tor-drive unit or motor controller – Reestablish the voltage supply
– Once the voltage supply returns, the mo-
tor-drive unit automatically ends the tap-
change operation that was started.
Component defect in the motor-drive unit – Hand crank operation is prohibited

– Contact MR
Table 176: Fault in the motor-drive unit when the tap-change operation has not been ended
454 Fault elimination 7815063/10 EN

9.1.5 Fault in the motor-drive unit after the tap-change operation is
ended correctly
Fault description Action
Tripping of the motor protective switch Q01 – Switch on Q01
Interruption of the supply voltage to the mo- – Reestablish the voltage supply
tor-drive unit or motor controller
Component defect in the motor-drive unit – Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen

GmbH
Table 177: Fault in the motor-drive unit after the tap-change operation is ended correctly
9.1.6 Hand crank operation in the event of faults
Hand crank operation in the event of faults

An operation is considered an emergency operation if a tap-change operation is
absolutely necessary when a transformer is energized, despite a fault in the mo-
tor-drive unit.
WARNING Danger of explosion!

Unauthorized operation of the motor-drive unit with the hand crank may re-
sult in death or serious injury.
Never operate the motor-drive unit electrically or with the hand crank be-
fore the transformer has been disconnected if you think there may be a
fault in the transformer or on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer.
Never use the hand crank to complete a tap-change operation that has be-
gun electrically, but has not been ended completely.
If the hand crank is difficult to move, you must stop using it.
When operating the motor-drive unit with the hand crank, never reverse
the direction of rotation.
If there is any doubt about the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-
changer being in proper working condition or about the cause of a fault in
the motor-drive unit, contact the Technical Service department of Maschi-
nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH immediately.
To operate the motor-drive unit manually, only use the hand crank
mounted in the motor-drive unit.
For a detailed description of operation using the hand crank, refer to the "Oper-
ation" chapter.
Characteristics/details Cause Remedy
No tap-change operation possible Motor-drive unit not synchronized Synchronize motor-drive unit [►Section 8.6.7, Page
– Motor status "Error" 422].
No tap-change operation possible Motor voltage outside the permissible Check the voltage supply.
range
No tap-change operation possible Mechanical blocking of the motor- Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
– Event "Blocking the drives" ac- drive unit or the on-load tap-changer
tive.

No tap-change operation possible The OLTC-PreCheck function is active Check measured values:
– Status display for OLTC- and one of the limit values has been – On-load tap-changer oil level
PreCheck is red exceeded. – On-load tap-changer oil temperature
– Transformer current
Check the configuration
Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
Sensor defective Replace sensor.
No tap-change operation possible Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
– No signal from cam switch S13
Cam switch S13 is defective Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
No tap-change operation possible Motor protection device defective Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
Synchronizing the motor-drive unit Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
not possible
Tap position indicator not connected. Connect the tap position indicator according to the
connection diagram.
Mechanical blocking of the motor- Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.

drive unit or the on-load tap-changer
Synchronizing the motor-drive unit Wiring error (polarity reversal) Check wiring as per connection diagram.
not possible
– Motor-drive unit switching in the
wrong direction
Table 178: Motor-drive unit

9.2 Fault elimination ISM (hardware and software)
9.2.1 General faults
No function No voltage supply Check the voltage supply

– Device not starting
Fuse tripped Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Relay chatter High EMC load Use shielded cables or external filters
Poor grounding Check the functional ground
Table 179: General faults
9.2.1.1 CPU I, CPU II

No function Rotary switch of CPU assembly moved Correct position of rotary switch:
– LED ERR lights up – 0 position
– RUN position
Configuration error Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Table 180: Faults of the CPU I, CPU II assembly
9.2.1.2 CPU
No function No power supply Check power supply

– LED RY is not lit
– LED ER is not lit
No function System start Wait until the system has fully started.
– LED RY is flashing
– LED ER is lit
No function The assembly has detected an error Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
– LED RY is lit
– LED ER is lit
Table 181: Faults of the CPU assembly
9.2.2 Human-machine interface
Characteristics/details Cause Corrective measure
No display/screen is loaded Power supply interrupted. Check the voltage supply.
Error when loading the current Press [F5] key to update the screen.
screen in the browser.
Fuse faulty. Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen.

Connection cannot be established Connection cable defective. Check connection cable.

with visualization
IP addresses of visualization and Check the setting of the IP addresses of the device
SCADA are in the same subnet. and correct where necessary.
PC not in same subnet as visualiza- Check the setting of the IP addresses of the device
tion. and PC and correct where necessary.
Browser displays an SSL warning The browser does not accept an SSL Import signed SSL certificate or adjust browser set-
when establishing a connection to connection with a signed certificate tings.
the visualization. that is non-public (this is the default
status of the device).
The device SSL certificate has ex- Import SSL certificate.

pired.
The device date/time is set incor- Set the date and time.
rectly.
When using time synchronization via SNTP: check
SNTP server.
IP address of interface ETH2.2 has Import SSL certificate with new IP address ("Alterna-
changed. tive applicant name").
Table 182: Human-machine interface
9.2.3 Torque monitoring
Limit value M1 to M6 > exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether a voltage interruption or voltage
– Event No. 1819, 1821, 1823, 1825, supply drop occurred across one or more phases of the
1827 or 1829 power supply during the tap-change operation.
If yes, you can acknowledge this event. If this event
does not reoccur, you can continue to operate the
Drive shafts sluggish Check the ease of operation of the drive shafts and
gears.
Other cause or if the event reoccurs Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH.
Limit value M7/M8 > exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether a voltage interruption or voltage
– Event No. 1831 or 1833 supply drop occurred across one or more phases of the
power supply during the tap-change operation.
gears.
With on-load tap-changer OILTAP® M, Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik
OILTAP® R or VACUTAP® VR: final Reinhausen GmbH.
locking device defective.
Other cause or if the event reoccurs Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH.

Limit value M1 to M6 >> exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether a voltage interruption or voltage
– Event No. 1820, 1822, 1824, 1826, supply drop occurred across one or more phases of the
1828 or 1830 power supply during the tap-change operation.
gears.
Other cause or if the event reoccurs Do not acknowledge the event.

Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH.
Limit value M7/M8 >> exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether a voltage interruption or voltage
– Event No. 1832 or 1834 supply drop occurred across one or more phases of the
power supply during the tap-change operation.
gears.
With on-load tap-changer OILTAP® M, Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik
OILTAP® R or VACUTAP® VR: final Reinhausen GmbH.
locking device defective.
Other cause or if the event reoccurs Do not acknowledge the event.

Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH.
Limit value Md-Max exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether there is voltage on all three phases
– Event No. 1801 supply of the power supply unit.
Error in the motor-drive unit wiring Check the RAISE/LOWER relay wiring.
Check the motor-drive unit control circuit.
Other causes (e.g. defective on-load Do not actuate the on-load tap-changer.
tap-changer) Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH.
Immediate intervention There is an immediate need for inter- Check pending events.
– Event No. 1884 vention. Eliminate fault in accordance with section Fault in
the motor-drive unit when the tap-change operation
has not been ended [►Section 9.1.4, Page 454].
Electrical tap-change operation not The tap changer is in an undefined po- Check motor protective switch and motor-drive unit
complete sition. supply voltage.
– Event No. 1817 Eliminate fault in accordance with section Fault in
Change-over selector operation not Limit value Md-Max exceeded. The tap Check motor protective switch and motor-drive unit
completed changer is in an undefined position. supply voltage.
– Event No. 1885 Eliminate fault in accordance with section Fault in
Tripping of motor protective switch The motor protective switch has Check the wiring and motor protective switch set-
faulty tripped, but tripping was not detected. tings.
– Event No. 1886

Blocking faulty On-load tap-change operations were Check wiring and contactor K53.
– Event No. 1887 blocked, but an on-load tap-change
operation was detected.
Md-Max torque monitoring not pos- The Md-Max torque monitoring is not The event is triggered with other events. Check the
sible currently possible. other events in order to localize the error search.
– Event No. 1904
8-window torque monitoring not The 8-window torque monitoring is The event is triggered with other events. Check the
possible not currently possible. other events in order to localize the error search.
– Event No. 1864
Blocking active On-load tap-change operations are The event is triggered with other events. Check the
– Event No. 1870 blocked. other events in order to localize the error search.
OLTC and MD insufficiently centered The on-load tap-changer and motor- Center the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive
– Event No. 1808 drive unit are insufficiently centered. unit in accordance with the operating instructions.
Motor-drive unit power supply faulty Voltage too high or too low Check the motor-drive unit power supply.
– Event No. 1871, 1872, 1881, 1882 Take measures to stabilize the voltage during opera-
tion of the motor-drive unit (e.g. conductor lengths,
conductor cross-section).
MD: Incorrect power supply fre- Incorrect power supply frequency Check the motor-drive unit power supply.
quency
– Event No. 1883
Power failure during switching Power failure Determine the cause of the power failure.
– Event No. 1903
MD: Voltage difference Difference in voltage between the Check the motor-drive unit power supply.
– Event No. 1803 phases greater than 10 V
MD: Current difference Difference in current between the Check the motor-drive unit power supply.
– Event No. 1804 phases greater than 0.4 A (ED100) or
0.8 A (ED200)
Increased torque in window M7 Torques in window M7 higher than in -

– Event No. 1905 window M8.
Table 183: Torque monitoring

9.2.4 Temperature monitoring
MD interior temperature limit value The motor-drive unit interior tempera- Check the measured value for plausibility.
– Event No. 1858, 1859, 1860 or ture is greater than the > limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
1861 sured value is lower than the limit value again.
The motor-drive unit interior tempera-
ture is greater than the >> limit value.
The motor-drive unit interior tempera- Check the measured value for plausibility.
ture is less than the < limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
sured value is greater than the limit value again.
The motor-drive unit interior tempera-
ture is less than the << limit value.
Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-

tion 7.2.6, Page 153].
Check the limit value setting.

– Sensor CT373, terminal X6.1:1/4
Sensor defective Replace sensor
MD interior temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-
– Event No. 1325 tion 7.2.6, Page 153].

Sensor for MD interior temperature Sensor defective Replace sensor

defective
– Event No. 1837
Ambient temperature limit value Ambient temperature is greater than Check the measured value for plausibility.
– Event No. 1026, 1027, 1028 or the > limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
1029 sured value is lower than the limit value again.
Ambient temperature is greater than
the >> limit value.
Ambient temperature is less than the Check the measured value for plausibility.
< limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
Ambient temperature is less than the
<< limit value.

tion 7.2.6, Page 153].

Ambient temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-

Sensor for ambient temperature de- Sensor defective Replace sensor

fective
– Event No. 1844

Top-oil temperature limit value Top-oil temperature is greater than Check the measured value for plausibility.
– Event No. 1112, 1113, 1114 or 1115 the > limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
sured value is lower than the limit value again.
Top-oil temperature is greater than
the >> limit value.
Top-oil temperature is less than the < Check the measured value for plausibility.
limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
Top-oil temperature is less than the <<
limit value.

tion 7.2.6, Page 153].

– Sensor CT375, terminal X6.1:9-12
Upper oil temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-

Sensor for top-oil temperature de- Sensor defective Replace sensor

fective
– Event No. 1845
OLTC oil temperature limit value On-load tap-changer oil temperature is Check the measured value for plausibility.
Single-column application: greater than the > limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
– Event No. 1106, 1107, 1108, or sured value is lower than the limit value again.
On-load tap-changer oil temperature is
1109
greater than the >> limit value.
Multi-column application:
– Event No. 1395, 1396, 1397 or On-load tap-changer oil temperature is Check the measured value for plausibility.
1398 (column A) less than the < limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
– Event No. 1332, 1334, 1336, or sured value is greater than the limit value again.
On-load tap-changer oil temperature is
1338 (column B)
less than the << limit value.
– Event No. 1333, 1335, 1337, or
1339 (column C) Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-
tion 7.2.6, Page 153].

Single-column application:
– Column A: Sensor CT387, terminal X6.1:13-16
– Column B: Sensor CT388, terminal X6.2:1-4
– Column C: Sensor CT389, terminal X6.2:5-8

OLTC oil temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-
Single-column application: tion 7.2.6, Page 153].
– Event No. 1121 Check the limit value setting.
– Event No. 1399 (column A)
– Event No. 1326 (column B)
– Event No. 1327 (column C)
Sensor for OLTC oil temperature de- Sensor defective Replace sensor
fective
– Event No. 1838
Selector oil temperature limit value Selector oil temperature is greater Check the measured value for plausibility.
Single-column application: than the > limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
– Event No. 1846, 1847, 1848 or sured value is lower than the limit value again.
Selector oil temperature is greater
1849
than the >> limit value.
Multi-column application
– 1876, 1877, 1878 or 1879 (column Selector oil temperature is less than Check the measured value for plausibility.
A) the < limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
– 1850, 1851, 1852 or 1853 (column sured value is greater than the limit value again.
Selector oil temperature is less than
B)
the << limit value.
– 1854, 1855, 1856 or 1857 (column
C) Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-
tion 7.2.6, Page 153].

Selector oil temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-
Single-column application: tion 7.2.6, Page 153].
– Event No. 1328 Check the limit value setting.
– Event No. 1330 (column C) Sensor defective Replace sensor
Sensor for selector oil temperature Sensor defective Replace sensor

defective
– Event No. 1841

Oil temperature difference limit Oil temperature difference between Check the measured value for plausibility.
value selector and diverter switch is greater This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
Single-column application: than the > limit value. sured value is lower than the limit value again.
– Event No. 1890 or 1891
Oil temperature difference between
selector and diverter switch is greater
– Event No. 1892 or 1893 (column
than the >> limit value.
A)
– Event No. 1894 or 1895 (column Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-
B) tion 7.2.6, Page 153].
– Event No. 1896 or 1897 (column Check the limit value setting.
C)
– Sensor CT387, terminal X6.1:13-16 and sensor
CT390, terminal X6.1:9-12
and sensor CT390, terminal X6.1:9-12
Sensor for bottom-oil temperature Sensor defective Replace sensor

defective
– Event No. 1862
Impermissible OLTC temperature The on-load tap-changer oil tempera- Check the measured value for plausibility.
range ture is too high or too low. This event will be reset automatically once the mea-
– Event No. 3380 sured value is within the permissible range again.
Tap-change operations are blocked.
tion 7.2.6, Page 153].

Control circuit interrupted An event has been triggered where the Check pending events.
– Event No. 3382 device is supposed to interrupt the
Tap-change operations are blocked. control circuit.
Table 184: Temperature monitoring

9.2.5 Maintenance messages
OLTC maintenance is required The limit value for maintenance has Carry out maintenance work and then confirm this
– Event No. 1146 been reached. in the visualization.
Maintenance work has been carried Confirm maintenance work in the visualization.
out but not confirmed in the visualiza-
tion.
Visualization operations counter off- Compare visualization operations counter with the
set. motor-drive unit operations counter and correct if
necessary.
Maintenance data incorrect Call up the maintenance log and check the date of
the last maintenance work.
Plan OLTC maintenance The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance work
– Event No. 1145 nance has been reached. soon, and then confirm this in the visualization.
tion.
necessary.
Oil change and cleaning required The limit value for maintenance has Carry out maintenance work and then confirm this
tion.
necessary.
Oil exchange and cleaning has to be The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance work
planned nance has been reached. soon, and then confirm this in the visualization.
– Event No. 1170
tion.
necessary.

DSI replacement is required The limit value for maintenance has Carry out maintenance work and then confirm this
tion.
necessary.
Plan DSI replacement The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance work
tion.
necessary.
Selector maintenance is required The limit value for maintenance has Carry out maintenance work and then confirm this
tion.
necessary.
Plan selector maintenance The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance work
tion.
necessary.

Oil filter replacement is required The limit value for maintenance has Carry out maintenance work and then confirm this
– Signal at X1:105 and 1000 tap-
change operations made
tion.
Wiring error Check the wiring of terminals X1:105/106.
Plan oil filter replacement The limit value for maintenance has Carry out maintenance work and then confirm this
– Signal at X1:105 and 900 tap-
change operations made
tion.
Wiring error Check the wiring of terminals X1:105/106.
Replacement or change of contacts The limit value for maintenance has Carry out maintenance work and then confirm this
is required been reached. in the visualization.
– Event No. 1168
tion.
Load current measurement faulty. Check measured values.

Check the wiring of the assembly for load current
measuring (UI or AIO).
Plan replacement or change of con- The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance work
tacts nance has been reached. soon, and then confirm this in the visualization.
– Event No. 1167
tion.
Load current measurement faulty. Check measured values.

Check the wiring of the assembly for load current
measuring (UI or AIO).
OLTC replacement is required The limit value for maintenance has Carry out maintenance work and then confirm this
tion.

Plan OLTC replacement The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance work
tion.
Table 185: Maintenance messages
9.2.6 Function monitoring
Both tap-change supervisory control Tap-change supervisory control con- Check the function of the tap-change supervisory
contacts ON tacts S80/S81 sticking. control contacts S80/S81.
– Event No. 1805
Relays K80/K81 defective. Check the function of the relays K80/K81.
Wiring error Check the wiring between the tap-change supervi-

sory contacts S80/S81 and the relays K80/K81 in ac-
cordance with the connection diagram.
Both tap-change supervisory control Dropout of one or more phases of the For multi-column applications: Check whether all
contacts OFF motor-drive unit power supply during on-load tap-changers are in the same tap position. If
– Event No. 1806 the last tap-change operation. yes, you can acknowledge this event. And continue
to operate the on-load tap-changers.
Drive shaft break Check the drive shafts.

If the drive shaft has broken, the diverter switch in-
sert must be checked. Contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH.
Dropout of the control voltage for the Check the control voltage for the tap-change super-
tap-change supervisory control con- visory control contacts S80/S81.
tacts S80/S81.
Relays K80/K81 defective. Check the function of the relays K80/K81.
Wiring error Check the wiring between the tap-change supervi-

sory contacts S80/S81 and the relays K80/K81 in ac-
cordance with the connection diagram.
Tap-change supervisory control Wiring error Check the wiring between the tap-change supervi-
wiring error sory contacts S80/S81 and the relays K80/K81 in ac-
– Event No. 1810 cordance with the connection diagram.
Position acquisition faulty. The position sensor is not calibrated or Check wiring of the position sensor B30 as per con-
– Event No. 1818 is defective. nection diagram. Export service data. Contact MR. In
the event of replacement: Calibrate position sensor.
Invalid tap position Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
– Event No. 51
The position sensor is defective. Export service data. Contact MR. In the event of re-
placement: Calibrate position sensor.
Calculating the on-load tap-changer Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input [►Sec-
current tion 8.1.21, Page 219].
– Event No. 1899

Motor protective switch The motor protective switch has been Switch the motor protective switch back on (posi-
– Event No. 156 switched off manually (position O). tion I).
The motor protective switch been has Check the monitoring system event messages.
triggered by the monitoring system Check the cause for the motor protective switch
triggering.
The motor protective switch was trig- Check the motor circuit.
gered due to a short circuit of overload
of the motor circuit.
The motor protective switch was trig- Check the cause for the motor protective switch be-
gered by an external switch at the ter- ing triggered by the external switch.
minals X1:14/15.
Emergency operation input (X100) If the X100 bridge is inserted, the Remove the X100 bridge to end emergency opera-
– Event No. 1869 blocking function is disabled. tion.
Auxiliary contactor K100 is defective. Check the function of auxiliary contactor K100.
Overcurrent input A signal is present at the overcurrent Check signal source.

– Event No. 1868 input.
Wiring error Check wiring.
MD: Incorrect power supply fre- The power supply frequency did not Check the motor-drive unit nameplate. Connect a
quency during switching match the rated frequency of the mo- voltage supply with the correct frequency.
– Event No. 1802 tor-drive unit during switching.
Contact wear calculation The contact wear cannot be calcu- Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik
– Event No. 1169 lated. Reinhausen GmbH.
OLTC synchronization insufficient The tap changers do not switch with Set synchronous switching of the tap changers in
– Event No. 1812 sufficient synchronicity. accordance with the operating instructions.
Tap-change operation without di- A diverter switch operation was not Check the drive shaft, tap-change supervisory con-
verter switch operation detected during the tap-change opera- trol contacts S80/S81, relays K16/K17 and the posi-
– Event No. 1807 tion. tion-sensor wiring. Export service data. Contact MR.
Table 186: Function monitoring
9.2.7 Other faults
If you cannot find a solution to a malfunction, please contact Technical Service

and have the following information available:
– Serial number
– Nameplate (can be found on CPU assembly)
– Software version
Please provide answers to the following questions:

– Has the software been updated?
– Has there previously been a problem with this device?
– Have you previously contacted Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen about this is-
sue? If yes, then who was the contact?
Technical Service
Technical Service
Postfach 12 03 60
93025 Regensburg
Deutschland

+49 941 40 90-0
[email protected]
www.reinhausen.com

10 Inspection and mainte-
nance
This chapter contains information about inspecting and maintaining the prod-
uct.
10.1 Care
10.1.1 Cleaning the control cabinet
You can clean the housing of the control cabinet with a moist cloth. You can
clean the inside of the control cabinet with a dry cloth.
10.1.2 Cleaning the VS 1 vibration sensor
You can clean the VS 1 vibration sensor assembly (sensor, adapter, kick guard)
and the sensor cable with a moist cloth.
10.1.3 Cleaning the bushing adapter and the bushing coupling unit
You can clean the bushing adapter and the bushing coupling unit with a moist
cloth.
10.1.4 Cleaning the gear motor
You can clean the gear motor with a moist cloth.
7815063/10 EN Inspection and maintenance 471

10.2 Inspection
Carry out the following inspections within the specified intervals:
Interval Action Detail
For checking operations on Visual checks – Check the control cabinet seals.
the transformer Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH if the seals are not in
perfect condition.
– Check the lubrication of the door hinges and of the locking
mechanism. If necessary, relubricate with a silicone-free lubri-
cant [►Section 10.2.1, Page 473].
– Check the control cabinet lacquer coating. If damaged, touch up
the lacquer coating [►Section 6.1, Page 81].
Annually Checking the motor protec- The motor protective switch Q01 is switched on (position I).
tive switch 1. Trip the motor protective switch from the control room.
The motor protective switch is tripped (position O). If the mo-
tor protective switch is not tripped, check the switch's con-
nection to the control room and contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH if necessary.
2. Switch on the motor protective switch again (position I).
The tripping process for the motor protective switch from the
control room is checked.
Checking the residual cur- 1. Press the test button T on the residual current circuit breaker.
rent circuit breaker The residual current circuit breaker must trip immediately.
2. Have the effectiveness of the protective measure in the installa-
tion checked by an electrically skilled person.
Checking the heating 1. Set the thermostat in the control cabinet to a temperature that is
lower than the current ambient temperature.
After 15 minutes, the heating must have warmed up tangibly.
2. Reset the thermostat to the previous value (see connection dia-
gram for default setting).
Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH if the heating is not in
perfect condition.
Every 4 years Check – Check the control cabinet for soiling, damage and corrosion, and
clean it.
– Have the potential connections and groundings checked by an
electrically skilled person and retighten the screw connections
where necessary.
– Check the screw connections of all electrical components and
tighten if necessary (tightening torque 2.5...3 Nm).
Table 187: Inspection plan
472 Inspection and maintenance 7815063/10 EN

10.2.1 Lubricating the door hinges and locking mechanism
Lubricate the door hinges and the locking mechanism with a silicone-free lubri-
cant.
Figure 442: Lubricating the door hinges

Figure 443: Lubricating the rod guide and lock body of the locking mechanism
1 Rod guide 2 Lock body

10.3 Maintenance
10.3.1 Maintaining motor-drive unit
Maintenance of the motor-drive unit is not required. When maintaining the on-
load tap-changer/de-energized tap-changer/ARS, carry out a function test on
the motor-drive unit.
Switching operations Activity
125,000 With a 1 AC motor (see connection diagram or nameplate):

replace centrifugal switch.
Contact the Technical Service department of Maschinenfab-
rik Reinhausen GmbH for information.
600,000 Contact the Technical Service department of Maschinenfab-

1,000,000 Replace cam switches, relays, contactors, etc.

Contact the Technical Service department of Maschinenfab-
Table 188: Maintenance plan
We strongly recommend having on-load tap-changer maintenance and motor-

drive unit checks carried out by our Technical Service department. This ensures,
in addition to the correct performance of all work, that certain components will
be upgraded to the latest state of technology and manufacturing status.
If the maintenance and checks are not carried out by our Technical Service de-
partment, please ensure that the personnel who carry out the maintenance are
trained by MR or are otherwise suitably qualified to carry out the work. In such
cases, we would ask you to forward a report on the maintenance performed to
us so we can update our maintenance files. For inquiries about spare parts,
please provide the serial number (see nameplates on the on-load tap-changer
and motor-drive unit) and the number of tap-change operations.
Technical Service
Technical Service
Postfach 12 03 60
93025 Regensburg
Deutschland
+49 941 40 90-0
[email protected]
www.reinhausen.com
10.3.2 Heating maintenance
The heating must be replaced after an operating duration of 20 years. Contact

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH for this.

10.4 Updating application software
NOTICE Damage to the device due to incompatible wiring and configura-
tion.
If the configuration of the device inputs and outputs is changed as a result of
updating the application software, the device can become damaged due to in-
compatible wiring.
Before updating the device application software, wire it according to the
connection diagram provided with the device.
Note that you can only transmit the application software to the device with
i the same serial number. The serial number belonging to the software can
be found in the enclosed config.txt file.
You can use one of the following methods to update the device's application
software:
– USB stick: The application software is on a USB stick and can be imported di-
rectly via the device's display.
– Web-based visualization: The application software is on a PC and can be im-
ported via the web-based visualization.
If you want to update the application software using a USB stick, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Copy the application software to the USB stick. Use the root directory and do
not create a sub-folder.
2. Connect the USB stick.
3. Update the application software [►Section 10.4.4, Page 479].
If you want to update the application software using web-based visualization on

a PC, proceed as follows:
1. Copy the application software to the PC.
2. Establish a connection to the visualization.
3. Update the application software [►Section 10.4.4, Page 479].
10.4.1 Copy the application software to the PC
Prior to downloading, check which software version is currently installed on

i your device (go to Information > System > Software). Then download the
update package for your software version as described in the following.
You can download the latest version of the application software from the
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH customer portal. To do so, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Call up the website www.reinhausen.com.
2. Press the Customer Portal button.
3. Log in with your login data or register.
4. In the Transformer section at the My Devices tile, press the Open button.
5. If the desired device does not appear in the list, press the Add device button
and enter the device date (serial number, name, location, etc.).
6. Select the desired device in the list.

7. Select the device in the Firmware tab and select the Create firmware button
in the MR Versions entry for the desired version. If the firmware cannot be
generated automatically, you will see the Request button, which you can use
to send a request to Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
The firmware is generated. You will receive an email when the firmware is
available for download.
8. Press the Download button to save the firmware to the PC.
9. Press the ... button to display the hash value for verifying the download.
10. Calculate the hash value of the downloaded zip file on your PC and com-
pare it with the hash value displayed in the customer portal. If both values
are identical, the file was downloaded correctly.
Depending on your operating system, you can calculate the hash value of
i the file in different ways. If you run your PC with Windows 10, you can cal-
culate the hash value in the command line with the following command:
certutil –hashfile <filename>.zip sha256
11. Unzip the zip file on your PC.

The application software has been downloaded correctly.

CPU II)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Page 169]
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
System requirements
– Microsoft Edge


COM-ETH)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
System requirements
– Microsoft Edge

CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
192.168.165.100).
browser.


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

COM-ETH-X3

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
10.4.4 Updating application software

tional.

– Password: admin
Preparation
USB stick with application software is plugged in or the web-based visualiza-
tion has been accessed.
1. Press the LOGIN button and log in as a user with the user role Parameter
configurator or Administrator.
2. Go to Information > System > Software and take a note of the application
software version.
Creating a backup copy of the application software and event memory

1. Go to Settings > Export > System image.
2. Select the option with history and, optionally with TPLE, and then press the
button Next to export a backup copy of the current system.
3. If the software version is earlier than v3.430, save the settings manually (Set-
tings > Export > Settings).
5. Press the Start export button to start the export.
6. Go to Settings > Export > Event memory to export a backup copy of the
event memory (.csv file).
8. Press the Start export button to start the export.
Updating application software
When the application software is updated, the event memory on the de-
i vice is deleted.

3. Select Browse, select the file to be imported and select Start upload.
The file is checked.
4. Optional: Select the desired options for the import.
5. Press the Start update button.
NOTICE! The device function (monitoring/control) is stopped.
The data is imported, then the device is restarted. During the restart, the re-
lays are reset.
Examination of success
1. Go to Information > System > Software and compare the application soft-
ware version with the version noted down. The version number must be
higher.
2. If the software version was below v3.430 before the update, import the set-
tings manually.

11 Removal
An energized transformer and energized on-load tap-changer/de-energized
tap-changer/ARS and motor-drive unit components can cause death or seri-
ous injuries during disassembly!
Switch off the voltage supply.
Secure the voltage supply to prevent an unintentional restart.
Ensure that everything is de-energized.
Cover or cordon off adjacent energized parts.
11.1 Removing the drive shaft

Remove the vertical drive shaft and protective tube between the bevel gear
and control cabinet.
Figure 446: Removing the protective tube and horizontal drive shaft
7815063/10 EN Removal 481

11.2 Disassembling gear motor
To disassemble the gear motor, also observe the notes in the operating instruc-
tions of the associated on-load tap-changer to reduce the oil level in the on-load
tap-changer.
1. Remove connecting cable between gear motor and control cabinet.
2. Lower the on-load tap-changer oil level to below the level of the on-load tap-
changer head cover.
3. Remove gear motor screw connection on the on-load tap-changer head (3x
M12).
4. Lift the gear motor from the on-load tap-changer head using the lifting gear.
5. Cover exposed shafts and seals to protect them from dirt and damage.
The gear motor is disassembled.
11.3 Removing the bushing adapter and bushing

coupling unit
WARNING Time delayed explosion hazard and fire hazard!
If the test tap is not grounded or not properly connected to the bushing
adapter, the bushing may be destroyed and the transformer may catch fire.
This can lead to death or severe injuries.
Never operate the test tap when it is open. Observe the operating instruc-
tions for the bushing.
After removing the bushing adapter, close the test tap of the bushing with
the original safety cap to ensure grounding.
Proceed as follows to remove the bushing coupling unit and the bushing
adapter:
1. Remove the connection cable between the control cabinet and bushing cou-
pling unit.
2. Install the safety cap for the U connection of the bushing coupling unit.
3. Remove the connection cable between the bushing coupling unit and the
bushing adapter.
4. Remove the earthing cable between the transformer and the supporting
plate of the bushing coupling unit.
5. Unscrew the fixing screw on the bushing flange and remove the bushing cou-
pling unit together with the supporting plate.
6. Install the fixing screw on the bushing flange in accordance with the operat-
ing instructions from the bushing manufacturer.
7. Remove the bushing adapter.
8. WARNING! Install the safety cap onto the bushing test tap. While doing
so, follow the notes in the operating instructions from the bushing manufac-
turer. Otherwise, an explosion of the bushing can lead to death or serious in-
jury.
The bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit are removed.
482 Removal 7815063/10 EN

11.4 Removing the control cabinet
the load.
Disconnect all connection lines (sensor cable, control cable to the motor-
drive unit, customer cables, grounds etc.) in the control cabinet.
Figure 448: Maximum permissible cable angle for the lifting gear limit stop of the control
cabinet
2. Remove the nuts for fastening the control cabinet.

3. Lift the control cabinet away from the transformer.
4. WARNING! Serious injuries due to the control cabinet tipping and dam-
age to the cable gland if the control cabinet is set down, transported or
stored upright. Only set down, transport and store the control cabinet on its
back.
7815063/10 EN Removal 483

12 Technical data
12.1 Control cabinet
12.1.1 Dimensions and weight
Design 900 1,200 1,500 1,800
– Single-wall 924 x 700 x 446 1,213 x 700 x 446 1,524 x 700 x 446 1,791 x 700 x 446
– Double-wall 961 x 766 x 478 1,249 x 766 x 478 1,560 x 766 x 478 1,825 x 766 x 478
– Rail profile - 1,213 x 700 x 423 1,524 x 700 x 423 -
Permissible total weight 120 kg 150 kg 200 kg 200 kg
Table 192: Dimensions (height x width x depth in mm) and weight
12.1.2 Permissible ambient conditions
Operating temperature Depending on version:

Basic: -25...+50 °C
Pro: -25…+55 °C
Tropical: -25...+55 °C
Arctic 20: -40…+50 °C
Polar 20: -60…+50 °C
Storage temperature -40/-30...+70 °C (depending on device configuration)
Installation altitude/air Corresponds to 2,000 m above sea level

pressure
Potential corrosiveness C4 high, C4 very high

category in accordance C5 high, C5 very high
with ISO 12944-2:2018
Degree of protection IP66
IK shock resistance rating IK07

Table 193: Permissible ambient conditions
20 In ambient temperatures lower than -30 °C, you must ensure that the internal heating is in constant operation. To do so, connect the
heating circuit to the power supply. During storage, you can use the emergency heater plug-in device in the base plate (terminal X29)
[►Section 4.4.1.10, Page 58].
484 Technical data 7815063/10 EN

12.1.3 Electrical data
Control circuit
Power supply Ue See nameplate
Power consumption (con- 100/25 VA

trol / operation)
Table 194: Control circuit
Heater circuit
Power supply Ue 110…240 V
Grid type/frequency AC 50/60 Hz, DC
Power and current con- 900: 100 W, 0.3 A (230 V AC), 0.6 A (110 V AC)
sumption (by control cabi- 1,200: 100 W, 0.3 A (230 V AC), 0.6 A (110 V AC)
net size, at 25 °C) 1,500: 150 W, 0.4 A (230 V AC), 0.8 A (110 V AC)
1,800: 150 W, 0.4 A (230 V AC), 0.8 A (110 V AC)
1,500/1,800 arctic/polar: 175 W, 0.5 A (230 V AC), 1.0 A
(110 V AC)
Table 195: Heater circuit
Plug socket
Voltage 220…240 V AC
Current Max. 10 A
Table 196: Plug socket
Other electrical data

Insulation strength Rated insulation voltage (of a circuit) Ui = 400 V
Rated insulation voltage strength (of the control cabinet) Uimp =
4 kV
Insulation strength ("insu- If the control cabinet is dry and clean:

lated mounting" control Control cabinet to transformer mount: 5 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
cabinet design) Grounding bar in the control cabinet to control cabinet: 5 kV,
50 Hz, 1 min
Test voltage to ground (in 2 kV/1 min

accordance with
IEC 60214)
Overvoltage category III
Contamination level 2
Table 197: Other electrical data
7815063/10 EN Technical data 485

12.2 Motor-drive unit
12.2.1 Motor-drive unit (side drive)
Motor power 21 0.75 kW 2.0 kW 2.2 kW
Motor circuit power supply Ue See nameplate
Motor circuit grid type See nameplate
Motor circuit frequency See nameplate
Motor power See nameplate
Synchronous speed 1,500 rpm
Rotations of the drive shaft per tap-change opera- 16.5

tion
Duration of the tap-change operation Approx. 5.4 s
Rated torque on the drive shaft 45 Nm 90 Nm 125 Nm
Rotations of the hand crank per tap-change opera- 33 54

tion
Maximum number of operating positions 35
Load capacity of micro-switches Switching capacity: 100 W

Alternating current mode: AC 250 V; 1 mA…3 A
Direct current mode: DC 220 V; 1 mA…100 mA
Table 198: Technical data for motor-drive unit (side drive)
12.2.2 Technical data for position transmitter equipment
Resistance-type position transmitter module

Standard resistance: 10.0 Ω (0.6 W, +/-1 %) per tap position
The number of desired operating positions determines the number of loaded

resistors.
The decisive power loss of the position transmitter module is 0.6 W because in
the worst-case scenario only one resistor is energized. The supply voltage
should not exceed DC 220 V. If your setup is more demanding, please contact
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen.
Position transmitter module with N/O contact range (break-before-

make contact)
AC: 250 V, 0.5 A (resistive loading)
DC: 220 V, 0.2 A (resistive loading)
Minimum voltage level for signal and data processing: 24 V
21 Depending on the configuration, the supply voltage, mains frequency and motor power differ. Observe the information on the name-
plate.

Position transmitter module with N/O contact range, (make-before-
break-type)
AC, DC: 250 V, 0.02 A (resistive loading)
AC, DC: 24 V, 0.20 A (resistive loading)
Position transmitter module with N/O contact range, 10 A (make-be-

fore-break-type) for controlling current matching transformer in indus-
trial applications.
AC, DC: 250 V, 10 A (resistive loading)
Position transmitter module, diode matrix

DC: 220 V, 0.2 A (resistive loading)
12.2.3 Motor-drive unit (top drive)
Gear motor 22 Top Drive
Motor circuit power supply Ue See nameplate
Motor circuit frequency See nameplate
Motor power See nameplate
Running time of output shaft per tap-change operation approx. 6.5 S
Maximum number of operating positions 35
Permitted ambient temperature during operation -25...+55°C
Degree of protection IP66
Weight (including adapter flange) approx. 23.5 kg
Length of the connection cable 6.5 m

other lengths on request
Table 199: Gear motor technical data
Figure 449: Gear motor dimensions
22 Depending on the configuration, the supply voltage, mains frequency and motor power differ. Observe the information on the name-
plate.

12.3 Sensors
12.3.1 Vibroacoustics
12.3.1.1 VS 1 vibration sensor

VS 1
Sensor type Piezo vibration sensor
Housing Hermetically sealed
Working temperature -50°C…+125°C
Protection class IP67 in accordance with IEC 60529
Resistance to corrosion 316L, stainless steel

Table 200: VS 1 vibration sensor
12.3.2.1 Bushing adapter

The tightening torques for the bushing adapters are listed in the Installation
section under Installing the bushing adapters [►Section 6.11.2, Page 112].
Bushing adapter A001
Bushing type Micafil

RTKF, RTKG
Dimensions Ø 50 x 64 mm
Input Test tap Ø 4 mm (female)
Thread Inner, G¾″
Gasket O-ring, 40 x 2 NBR 70
Output N female connector
Permitted ambient temperature during operation -40°C...+90°C
Degree of protection (IEC 60529) IP 66
Weight approx. 170 g

Table 201: Technical data for the bushing adapter A001
Bushing type HSP

SETFt 1550/420-1800,
SETFt 600/123-2000
Thread Outer, M30 x 1.5
Gasket Flat gasket, 26 x 35 x 2, 65 Shore


Bushing type ABB

GOB 1050-750-1100-0.6-B
GSA 123-OA/1600/0.5
GSA 52-OA/2000/0.5
Thread Outer, M30 x 2

Bushing type Trench

COT 750-800
Weight approx. 60 g
Bushing type HSP

SETFt 750-170-4000
SETFt 1200/245-1250
SETFt 1425-420-1600
SESTFt 1050-245-B E6 B
SESTFt 1425-420-B E6 B-1600A
EKTG 72.5-800 kV
Gasket O-ring, 22 x 2.5 NBR 70


Bushing type PCORE

CSA standard POC series II
ABB
GOE, GSB (245...550 kV)
Thread Outer, 2¼″ – 12 UNF

Bushing type PCORE

B-81515-57-70
Input Test tap Ø 5 mm (contact spring)
Thread Outer, 1¼″ – 12 UNF

Bushing type Passoni Villa

PNO, POBO, PCTO, PAO
< 110 kV
Thread Outer, 1⅛″ – 12 UNF
Gasket O-ring, 25 x 2.5 NBR 70


Bushing type ABB O Plus C (O Plus Dry)
Exterior diameter x length Ø 35 x 79 mm
Input Test tap Ø 9 mm (contact spring)
Thread Outer, 3/4″ – 14 NS PM
Gasket O-ring, 24 x 2 NVQ 70
Output -40°C...+90°C

12.3.2.2 Bushing coupling unit

Bushing coupling unit
Dimensions (width x height x depth) 117 x 100 x 60 mm
Input N female connector
Output Voltage measurement (U) TNC female connector
Partial discharge measurement (PD); op-

tional
Capacitance In accordance with order:

0.033...4.7 µF (± 5%)
Output voltage Type (RMS): 75 V AC

Max. (RMS): 125 V AC
Permitted ambient temperature during operation - 40...+ 80 °C
Weight approx. 1.2 kg

Table 210: Technical data for the bushing coupling unit

85 ± 0,5
63 ± 0,5
Ø 4,8
Figure 450: Dimensional drawing for holes in the bushing coupling unit's retaining plate (di-
mensions in mm)
12.3.2.3 Connection cable

Connection cable Bushing adapter - Bushing coupling
bushing coupling unit - control cabinet
unit
Cable type RG142/U
Length 0.8 m 10 m, 15 m or 25 m
based on order
Connector N connector (both TNC connector (one

sides) side)
Minimum permitted bending radius 50 mm

Table 211: Technical data for the connection cable

12.4 ISM® assemblies
12.4.1 Power supply QS3.241
PULS QS3.241
Permissible voltage range 85...276 VAC

88...375 VDC
UN: 100...240 VAC
UN: 110...300 VDC
Permissible frequency range 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption (continuous) 66 W

Table 212: QS3.241 assembly technical data
12.4.2 Power supply CP5.241
PULS CP5.241
Permissible voltage range 85...264 VAC

88...180 VDC
UN: 100...240 VAC
UN: 110...150 VDC
Permissible frequency range 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption (continuous) 97.5 W

Table 213: CP5.241 assembly technical data
12.4.3 Power supply PS
8620 8640
Permissible voltage range 18...78 V DC 18...78 V DC

UN: 24...60 V DC UN: 24…60 V DC
Permissible frequency range - -
Nominal power consumption 19.2 W 55 W
Power output 12 W 45 W
Table 214: PS assembly technical data

143 mm (5.63 in)
30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)

Figure 451: PS dimensions
12.4.4 UI 1 voltage measurement and current measurement
UI 1
Measurement 1-phase
Voltage measurement UN (RMS): 100 VAC

Measuring range (RMS): 19.6...150 VAC
Measuring accuracy (at UN, -25...+70°C): <± 0.3%
Intrinsic consumption: < 1 VA
Measurement category III in accordance with
IEC 61010-2-30
Current measurement IN: 0.2 / 1 / 5 A

Measuring range: 0.01...2.1 · IN
Overload capacity: 12.5 A (continuous), 500 A (for 1 s)
Measuring accuracy (at IN, -25...+70°C): <± 0.5%
Phase angle Measuring accuracy (-25...+70°C): Ux/Ix <± 0.5°; Ux/Uy <
± 0.3°
Frequency measurement fN: 50 / 60 Hz

Measuring range: 45...65 Hz
Measuring accuracy (-25...+70°C): <± 0.03%
Table 215: Technical data for the UI 1 assembly
N Voltage input for neutral conductor
L Voltage input for phase L
N L NC NC NC -
NC -
Table 216: Voltage measurement

k Current input for phase L
l Current output for phase L
NC -
NC -
NC -
NC -
Table 217: Current measurement
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
UI 3
(4.69 in)
N L1 L2 L3
k1
119 mm
l1
k2
l2
k3
l3
Figure 452: UI 1 dimensions
12.4.5 UI 3 voltage measurement and current measurement
UI 3
Measurement 3-phase

IEC 61010-2-30
Current measurement IN: 0.2 / 1 / 5 A

Measuring range: 0.01...2.1 · IN
Overload capacity: 12.5 A (continuous), 500 A (for 1 s)
± 0.3°

Measuring accuracy (-25...+70°C): <± 0.03%
Table 218: Technical data for the UI 3 assembly

L1 Voltage input for phase L1 (UI 3)
L2 Voltage input for phase L2

N L1 L2 L3
k1 Current input for phase L1
l1 Current output for phase L1
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
UI 3
(4.69 in)
N L1 L2 L3
k1
119 mm
l1
k2
l2
k3
l3
12.4.6 UI 5-3 voltage measurement and current measurement
UI 5-3
Measurement 3-phase

IEC 61010-2-30
Current measurement IN: 5 A

Measuring range: 10 mA...15 A
Overload capacity: 15 A (continuous), 100 A (for 1 s)

UI 5-3
± 0.15°

Measuring accuracy: (-25 to +70°C): <±0.002 Hz
Table 221: Technical data of the UI 5-3 assemblies

L1
NC NC Not used
L2 L2 Voltage input for phase L2
NC NC Not used
L3 L3 Voltage input for phase L3
N

k1
l1 l1 Current output for phase L1
k2 k2 Current input for phase L2
l2 l2 Current output for phase L2

k3 k3 Current input for phase L3
l3
1A, 1B, No function

1C, 2A,
1A 2B, 2C
1B
1C
2A
2B
2C
Table 224: Relay
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

109 mm (4.29 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
UI 5-3
L1 k1
(4.69 in)
NC l1
L2 k2
NC l2
L3 k3
119 mm
N l3
+
-
Figure 454: UI 5-3 dimensions

12.4.7 UI 5-4 voltage measurement and current measurement
UI 5-4
Measurement 3-phase

Measuring range (RMS): 10...300 VAC
Measuring accuracy (at UN, -25...+70°C): < ±0.2%
IEC 61010-2-30
Current measurement IN: 5 A

Measuring range: 10 mA...15 A
Overload capacity: 15 A (continuous), 100 A (for 1 s)
Phase angle Measuring accuracy (-25 to +70°C): Vx/Ix <±0.6°; Vx/Uy <
±0.15°

Measuring accuracy: (-25 to +70°C): <±0.002 Hz
Table 225: UI 5-4 voltage measurement/current measurement
L1 Voltage input phase L1

L1
NC NC Not used
L2 L2 Voltage input phase L2
NC NC Not used
L3 L3 Voltage input phase L3
N
N Voltage input neutral conductor
k1 Current input phase L1

k1
l1 l1 Current output phase L1
k2 k2 Current input phase L2
l2 l2 Current output phase L2

k3 k3 Current input phase L3
l3
l3 Current output phase L3

1A, 1B, No function

1C, 2A,
1A 2B, 2C
1B
1C
2A
2B
2C
Table 228: Relay
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

109 mm (4.29 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
UI 5-3
L1 k1
(4.69 in)
NC l1
L2 k2
NC l2
L3 k3
119 mm
N l3
+
-
12.4.8 Voltage measurement U 3
U3
Measurement 3-phase
Voltage inputs 4 (electrically isolated)
Nominal voltage UN (AC) 10…250 V

UN typical (AC) 110 V, 110 V/√3, 230 V
Max. measured voltage 150% UN when UN ≤ 110 V

110% UN when UN ≤ 250 V
23
Measuring accuracy Deviation < ±0.3% · UN
Frequency measurement fN: 16.7, 50 or 60 Hz

Measuring range: fN ±15%
Table 229: U 3 assemblies technical data
4 Common reference output 1

4
3 Common reference output 0
3
2
2 Digital output 1
1 1 Digital output 0
Table 230: Connector X1
23 At reference conditions

10 Not used
10
9 Voltage input phase 1
9
8
8 Voltage input neutral conductor 1
7 7 Voltage input phase 2

6
5
4 5 Voltage input phase 3

3
2
3 Not used
1
2 Voltage input phase 4

143 mm (5.63 in)

30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)
Figure 456: U 3 dimensions
12.4.9 Current measurement I 3
I3
Measurement 3-phase
Nominal current IN 0.2...6 A

1A/2A/5A/6A
Overload capability 2 x IN
Measuring accuracy 24 Deviation < ±0.5% · IN (1 A, 5 A)

Deviation < ±1% · IN (0.2 A)
Rated frequency 50 / 60 / 16.7 Hz
Intrinsic consumption < 0.1 W up to I = 1 A

< 0.3 W up to I = 5 A
Table 232: I 3 assembly technical data
24 At reference conditions

6 Current input phase 1

6
5 Current input neutral conductor 1
I1
5
4 Current input phase 2
4 3 Current input neutral conductor 2
I2
3 2 Current input phase 3
2 1 Current input neutral conductor 3

I3
1
30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)

132 mm (5.19 in)
Figure 457: I 3 dimensions
12.4.10 DIO 28-15 digital inputs and outputs
DIO 28-15
Inputs (plug-based Quantity 28

electrical isolation)
Logical 0 0...10 V AC (RMS)
0...10 V DC
Logical 1 18...260 V AC (RMS)

18...260 V DC (RMS)
Input current min. 1.3 mA
Simultaneity factor max. 50%

(at 70 °C ambient temperature
and input voltage ≥ 230 V)
Outputs (floating Number (number of change- 15 (9)

relay outputs) over contacts in parentheses)
Contact load capacity Alternating current mode:

UN: 230 V AC; IN: 5 A
Direct current mode: See diagram
Simultaneity factor Up to 60 °C: 100%, > 60 °C: -5%/K

(if output is loaded with 5 A)
Table 234: Technical data for the DIO 28-15 assembly

300
100
Ohmic load
50
U 40
30
20
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 A 20
I
Figure 458: Contact load capacity of digital outputs with resistive load
CAUTION Electric shock!

The inputs of the assembly have plug-based electrical isolation. A mixture of
voltage ranges (e.g. extra low voltage and low voltage) or various phases
within a plug can lower the protection against electric shock.
Use the same voltage ranges within a plug.
Use the same phase within a plug.
1 9 17 25 Input
2 10 18 26 Input
3 11 19 27 Input
4 12 20 28 Input
5 13 21 29 Input
6 14 22 30 Input
7 15 23 31 Input
8 16 24 32 Common
Table 235: Digital inputs

1A 6A 11 A Break contact
1C 6C 11C Source contact
1B 6B 11B Make contact

Table 236: Digital outputs
ca. 150 mm (5.9 in)

164 mm (6.46 in) 93 mm (3.66 in)
DIO 28-15
DO DO DO
CAN
15B 15C 14B 14C 13B 13C 13A 12B 12C 12A 11B 11C 11A
10B 10C 9B 9C 8B 8C 8A 7B 7C 7A 6B 6C 6A
5B 5C 4B 4C 3B 3C 3A 2B 2C 2A 1B 1C 1A
(4.69 in)
DI DI DI DI
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
RUN
1
9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
2
INIT
3
119 mm
ERR
4
F0 1
AB E
23 6
CD
H
5
45
789
6
F0 1
AB E
23 6
CD
7
L
45
789
8
+
24V DC
Figure 459: DIO 28-15 dimensions
12.4.11 Digital inputs and outputs DIO 42-20 (HL)
DIO 42-20 DIO 42-20 HL
Inputs (plug-based Quantity 42

electrical isolation)
Logical 0 0...10 V AC (RMS) 0...40 V AC (RMS)
0...10 V DC 0...40 V DC
Logical 1 18...260 V AC (RMS) 170...260 V AC (RMS)

18...260 V DC 170...260 V DC
Input current Typically 1.3 mA (regardless of U)
Simultaneity factor At 70 °C and U ≥ 230 V: max. 50%

DIO 42-20 DIO 42-20 HL
Outputs (floating relay Number (number of change- 20 (12)

outputs) over contacts in parenthe-
ses)
Contact load capacity Max. AC: 230 V AC; 5 A

Max. DC: See diagram
Simultaneity factor Up to 60 °C: 100%, > 60 °C: -5%/K
Table 237: Technical data for the DIO 42-20 (HL) assemblies
300
100
Ohmic load
50
U 40
30
20
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 A 20
I

1 9 17 25 33 41 Input
2 10 18 26 34 42 Input
3 11 19 27 35 43 Input
4 12 20 28 36 44 Input
5 13 21 29 37 45 Input
6 14 22 30 38 46 Input
7 15 23 31 39 47 Input
8 16 24 32 40 48 Common
Table 238: Digital inputs

1A 6A 11 A 16A Break contact
1C 6C 11C 16C Source contact
1B 6B 11B 16B Make contact
2A 7A 12 A 17 A Break contact
3A 8A 13 A 18 A Break contact

Table 239: Digital outputs
ca. 150 mm (5.9 in)

219 mm (8,62 in) 93 mm (3.66 in)
DIO 42-20
DO DO DO DO
CAN
20B 20C 19B 19C 18B 18C 18A 17B 17C 17A 16B 16C 16A
15B 15C 14B 14C 13B 13C 13A 12B 12C 12A 11B 11C 11A
10B 10C 9B 9C 8B 8C 8A 7B 7C 7A 6B 6C 6A
5B 5C 4B 4C 3B 3C 3A 2B 2C 2A 1B 1C 1A
(4,69 in)
DI DI DI DI DI DI
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
RUN
1
9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
2
INIT
3
119 mm
ERR
4
F01
AB E
23 6
CD
H
5
45
789
6
F01
AB E
23 6
CD
7
L
45
789
8
+
24V DC
Figure 461: DIO 42-20 dimensions
12.4.12 Digital inputs DI 16-24 V
DI 16-24V
Inputs 2 x 8, plug-based electrical isolation
Nominal voltage 24 V DC
Max. operating voltage 31.2 V DC
Logical 0 ≤ 12 V
Logical 1 ≥ 18 V
Input current 0.9…4.8 mA at 18…31.2 V

Table 240: DI 16-24V assembly technical data

10 Common reference (common)

10
9
8
8 Input 7
7 7 Input 6
6
6 Input 5
5
4 5 Input 4
3
4 Input 3
2
3 Input 2
1
2 Input 1
1 Input 0
Table 241: Connector X1 (group 0)

10
9
8
8 Input 17
7 7 Input 16
6
6 Input 15
5
4 5 Input 14
3
4 Input 13
2
3 Input 12
1
2 Input 11
1 Input 10
143 mm (5.63 in)

30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)
Figure 462: DI 16-24V dimensions

DI 16-48V
Nominal voltage 48 V DC / 60 V DC
Max. operating voltage 78 V DC
Logical 0 ≤ 24 V
Logical 1 ≥ 36 V
Input current 0.5…2.5 mA at 36…78 V


10
9
8
8 Input 7
7 7 Input 6
6
6 Input 5
5
4 5 Input 4
3
4 Input 3
2
3 Input 2
1
2 Input 1
1 Input 0

10
9
8
8 Input 17
7 7 Input 16
6
6 Input 15
5
4 5 Input 14
3
4 Input 13
2
3 Input 12
1
2 Input 11
1 Input 10

143 mm (5.63 in)
30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)

DI 16-110 V

110…127 V AC ± 10% (50/60 Hz)

144 V AC
Logical 0 ≤ 55 V DC, ≤ 44 V AC
Logical 1 ≥ 82.5 V DC, ≥ 96 V AC
Input current 0.4…1.4 mA at 82.5…143 V

Derating begins at an ambient temperature of 65 °C. In this case, only oper-

i ate a maximum of 13 inputs at the same time.



10
9
8
8 Input 7
7 7 Input 6
6
6 Input 5
5
4 5 Input 4
3
4 Input 3
2
3 Input 2
1
2 Input 1
1 Input 0

10
9
8
8 Input 17
7 7 Input 16
6
6 Input 15
5
4 5 Input 14
3
4 Input 13
2
3 Input 12
1
2 Input 11
1 Input 10
143 mm (5.63 in)

30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)

DI 16-220 V
Logical 0 ≤ 110 V
Logical 1 ≥ 165 V
Input current 0.3…0.7 mA at 165…253 V

Derating begins at an ambient temperature of 65 °C. In this case, only oper-

i ate a maximum of 13 inputs at the same time.

10
9
8
8 Input 7
7 7 Input 6
6
6 Input 5
5
4 5 Input 4
3
4 Input 3
2
3 Input 2
1
2 Input 1
1 Input 0

10
9
8
8 Input 17
7 7 Input 16
6
6 Input 15
5
4 5 Input 14
3
4 Input 13
2
3 Input 12
1
2 Input 11
1 Input 10

143 mm (5.63 in)
30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)

12.4.16 Digital outputs DO 8
DO 8
Outputs (plug-based electrical isolation) 8 relays

4 groups per module
Switching voltage DC: 24 V, 48 V, 60 V, 110 V, 220 V

AC: 110 V, 230 V
Contact load capacity Min.: 5 V DC, 10 mA

Max. DC: See diagram
Max. AC: 250 V; 3 A (8 active outputs) or 5 A
(4 active outputs)
Table 252: DO 8 assembly technical data
300
100
Ohmic load
50
U 40
30
20
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 A 20
I

The outputs of the DO assembly have plug-based electrical isolation. A mix-
ture of voltage ranges (e.g. extra low voltage and low voltage) or various
phases within a plug can lower the protection against electric shock.

4 Common reference (common) output 1

4
3
2
2 Output 1
1 1 Output 0

4
3
2
2 Output 3
1 1 Output 2

4
3
2
2 Output 5
1 1 Output 4

4
3
2
2 Output 7
1 1 Output 6
143 mm (5.63 in)

30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)
Figure 467: DO 8 dimensions

12.4.17 AIO 2 analog inputs and outputs
Channels (input or output) 2
Inputs Measuring range 0...10 V

0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Load resistance Max. 300 Ω

(0/4...20 mA)
Outputs Signal range 0...10 V

0...20 mA
4...20 mA

(0/4...20 mA)
Resistor contact series Maximum resistance 100 Ω...10 kΩ,

max. 35 tap positions
Table 257: Technical data for the AIO 2 assembly
1 6 I OUT (+): Current output +
2 7 I/U IN (+) U OUT (+): Voltage input +,

3 8 I/U IN (-): Voltage input -, current input -
4 9 I/U OUT (-): Voltage output -, current

output -
5 10 Not used
Figure 468: AIO 2 dimensions
AIO 4
Channels (input or output) 4
Inputs Measuring range 0...10 V

0...20 mA
4...20 mA

(0/4...20 mA)

AIO 4
Outputs Signal range 0...10 V

0...20 mA
4...20 mA

(0/4...20 mA)
Resistor contact series Maximum resistance 100 Ω...10 kΩ,

max. 35 tap positions
1 6 11 16 I OUT (+): Current output +
2 7 12 17 I/U IN (+) U OUT (+): Voltage input +,

3 8 13 18 I/U IN (-): Voltage input -, current input -
4 9 14 19 I/U OUT (-): Voltage output -, current

output -
5 10 15 20 Not used
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
AIO
1 11
2 12
3 13
(4.69 in)
4 14
5 15
+
24V DC
119 mm
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
AIO 8
Channels (input) 8, max. 4 of these are current inputs

(channels 1, 2, 7, 8)
Inputs Measuring range 0 to 10 V

0...20 mA
4...20 mA

(0/4...20 mA)
Electrical isolation of the channels and to the 500 V

system

Interface Channel/pin Description
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7 Ch8
1 6 11 16 21 26 31 36 I OUT (+): Current output +
2 7 12 17 22 27 32 37 I/U IN (+) U OUT (+): Voltage input +, current in-

put +, voltage output +
3 8 13 18 23 28 33 38 I/U IN (-): Voltage input -, current input -
4 9 14 19 24 29 34 39 I/U OUT (-): Voltage output -, current output -
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Not used
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
AIO
1 11
2 12
3 13
(4.69 in)
4 14
5 15
+
24V DC
119 mm
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
12.4.20 Analog inputs AI 4-T
AI 4-T
Inputs (electrically isolated) 2x2
Measuring range 40…400 Ω (Pt100)

400…4,000 Ω (Pt1000)
Accuracy 0.19% at 0…+50 °C

0.4% at -40…+70 °C
Reference current 0.25 mA
Max. conductor resistance outgoing 300 Ω

and return conductor
Table 263: AI 4-T assembly technical data

10 IREF1- current output 1

10
9 IN V1- voltage input 1
9
8
8 IN V1+ voltage input 1
7 7 IREF1+ current output 1

6
6 Not used
5
4 5 Not used
3
2
1
1 IREF0+ current output 0


10
9
8
7 7 IREF3+ current output 3

6
6 Not used
5
4 5 Not used
3
2
1
1 IREF2+ current output 2

143 mm (5.63 in)

30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)
Figure 471: AI 4-T dimensions

12.4.21 Analog inputs AI 4
AI 4
Inputs (electrically isolated) 4x1
Measuring range 0…20 mA, overcurrent approx. 20%

0…10 V, overvoltage approx. 30%
Accuracy 0.15% at 25 °C
Current
0.2% at 0…50 °C
0.3% at -20…70 °C
0.4% at -40…70 °C
Voltage
0.4% at 0…50 °C
0.5% at -20…70 °C
0.6% at -40…70 °C
Input impedance 52 Ω at 0…20 mA

20.5 kΩ at 0…10 V
Table 266: AI 4 assembly technical data
4 V0 U- voltage input
4
3 V0 I- current input
3
2
2 V0 I+ current output
1 1 V0 U+ voltage output
4
3
2
4
3
2

4
3
2
143 mm (5.63 in)

30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)
Figure 472: AI 4 dimensions
12.4.22 Analog outputs AO 4
AO 4
Outputs (electrically isolated) 4x1
Signal range Max. 0...10 V on min. 1 kΩ load

Max. 0/4…20 mA on max. 1 kΩ load
Accuracy 0.3% at 25 °C
0.4% at 0 °C to 50 °C
0.7% at -20 °C to 70 °C
0.8% at -40 °C to 70 °C
Resistor contact series Maximum resistance 100 ... 600 Ω, max. 35 tap posi-
tions
Table 271: AO 4 assembly technical data
4 Not used
4
3 V0- current input
3
2
2 V0+ current output
1 1 Not used

4 Not used
4
3 V1- current input
3
2
1 1 Not used
4 Not used
4
3 V2- current input
3
2
1 1 Not used
4 Not used
4
3 V3- current input
3
2
1 1 Not used
143 mm (5.63 in)

30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)
Figure 473: AO 4 dimensions

12.4.23 CPU (central processing unit) I
CPU I
Processor 266 MHz
RAM 256 MB
Interfaces 1x serial RS232/485 (electrically isolated)

3x Ethernet 10/100 Mbps
1x USB 2.0
1x CAN (electrically isolated)
1x CAN
NVRAM (SRAM with battery 256 kB

backup)
Application memory 1 GB
Power supply +24 V DC (18...36 V DC)

Table 276: Technical data for the CPU I assembly
2 RXD (RS232)
3 TXD (RS232)
5 GND (RS232, RS485)
6 RXD+/TXD+ (RS485)
9 RXD-/TXD- (RS485)
Table 277: COM2 (RS232, RS485)
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Table 278: USB 2.0
1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 279: ETH1, ETH 2.1, ETH 2.2 (RJ45)

2 CAN-L
3 CAN-GND
7 CAN-H
Table 280: CAN1, CAN2
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

109 mm (4.29 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
CPU
RUN
INIT
9
COM 1
CAN 1
CAN 2
ERR
(4.69 in)
2 4 6
0 8 L
1
E C A
2 4 6
8 H
C A
TEST
9
PROG
COM 2
119 mm
RUN
USB2.0
1
24V DC

+
-
Figure 474: CPU dimensions
Optional accessories
CAN bus Terminating resistor

– D-SUB plug connector (9-pole)
– R = 120 Ω
Connector with terminal strip for directly connecting CAN lines
Media converter for Adapter from D-SUB (9-pole) to fiber-optic cable:

COM2 interface (only – ACF660/ST: F-ST, 660 nm, range max. 60 m at 40 kBd
RS232) – ACF660/SMA: F-SMA, 660 nm, range max. 60 m at 40 kBd
– ACF850/ST: F-ST, 850 nm, range max. 1,000 m at 40 kBd
– ACF850/SMA: F-SMA, 850 nm, range max. 1,000 m at
40 kBd
Table 281: Optional accessories
12.4.24 CPU (central processing unit) II
CPU II
Processor 433 MHz
RAM 256 MB
Interfaces 1x serial RS232/485 (electrically isolated)

3x Ethernet 10/100 Mbps
1x USB 2.0
1x CAN (electrically isolated)
1x CAN

backup)
Application memory Max. 4 GB

CPU II
Power supply +24 V DC (18...36 V DC)
Power consumption Max. 22 W

Table 282: Technical data for the CPU II assembly
2 RXD (RS232)
3 TXD (RS232)
5 GND (RS232, RS485)
6 RXD+/TXD+ (RS485)
9 RXD-/TXD- (RS485)
Table 283: COM2 (RS232, RS485)
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Table 284: USB 2.0
1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 285: ETH1, ETH 2.1, ETH 2.2 (RJ45)
2 CAN-L
3 CAN-GND
7 CAN-H
Table 286: CAN1, CAN2

ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)
109 mm (4.29 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
CPU
RUN
INIT
9
COM 1
CAN 1
CAN 2
ERR
(4.69 in)
2 4 6
0 8 L
1
E C A
2 4 6
8 H
C A
TEST
9
PROG
COM 2
119 mm
RUN
USB2.0
1
24V DC

+
-
Optional accessories
CAN bus Terminating resistor

– D-SUB plug connector (9-pole)
– R = 120 Ω
Connector with terminal strip for directly connecting CAN lines
Media converter for Adapter from D-SUB (9-pole) to fiber-optic cable:

COM2 interface (only – ACF660/ST: F-ST, 660 nm, range max. 60 m at 40 kBd
RS232) – ACF660/SMA: F-SMA, 660 nm, range max. 60 m at 40 kBd
– ACF850/ST: F-ST, 850 nm, range max. 1,000 m at 40 kBd
– ACF850/SMA: F-SMA, 850 nm, range max. 1,000 m at
40 kBd
Table 287: Optional accessories
12.4.25 CPU (central processing unit)
CPU
Processor 800 MHz
RAM 512 MB

backup)
Application memory 4 GB
Interfaces 1x serial RS232

1x serial RS485/422 (electrically isolated)
2x Ethernet 10/100 Mbps (electrically isolated)
Outputs 2 x 1 (electrically isolated) for watchdog/error messag-

ing
Nominal voltage 24/48/60 V DC
Continuous current 1 A
Table 288: Technical data of CPU assembly

300
100
Ohmic load
50
U 40
30
20
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 A 20
I
Figure 476: Contact load capacity of CPU-X1 digital outputs with resistive load
1 WD_COM
6
2 WD_NC
5
4
3 WD_NO
3 4 ER_COM
2
5 ER_NC
1
6 ER_NO
Table 289: Connector X1 (watchdog, error)
1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 290: Connectors X2, X3 (Ethernet)

1 TXD-/RXD- (RS485/422)
2 TXD+/RXD+ (RS485/422)
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 GND
7 RXD- (RS422)
8 RXD+ (RS422)
Table 291: Connector X4 (RS485/422)
1 CTS (I)
2 RTS (O)
3 VCC/OUT 5 V/12 V
4 TXD (O)
5 RXD (I)
6 GND
7 DCD (I)
8 DTR (O)
Table 292: Connector X5 (RS232)
143 mm (5.63 in)

30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)

12.4.26 System networking MC 2-2
MC 2-2
Description Media converter
Interfaces 2x RJ45
2x duplex LC (SFP)
RJ45 Max. 100 m (per section)

10/100 Mbit/s
Cable impedance 100 Ω
Fiber-optic cable Max. 2,000 m

100 Mbit/s
Light-emitting diode: class 1
Wave length: 1310 nm
Max. optical output power: <1 mW (in accordance with
IEC 60825-1:2014)
Table 293: Technical data for the MC 2-2 assembly
1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 294: ETHxx (RJ45)
Interface Description
Fiber glass 50/125 and 62.5/125 multimode
Table 295: ETHxx (duplex LC SFP)
ca. 150 mm (5.9 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 93 mm (3.66 in)
MC 2-2
(4.69 in)
ETH12
ETH22
119 mm
ETH21
ETH11
+ +
24V DC
24V DC
- -
Figure 478: MC2-2 dimensions

12.4.27 System networking SW 3-3
SW 3-3
Description Managed fast Ethernet switch per IEEE 802.3, store-

and-forward switching
Interfaces Media converters:

– 1x RJ45
– 1x duplex LC (SFP)
Managed switch with redundancy function:
– 2x RJ45
– 2x duplex LC (SFP)
Redundancy protocols PRP 25, RSTP
Time synchronization PTPv2 (IEEE 1588-2008)

10/100 Mbps
Cable impedance 100 Ω
Fiber-optic cable Max. 2,000 m

100 Mbps
Light-emitting diode: class 1
Wavelength: 1,310 nm
Max. optical output power: <1 mW (in accordance with
IEC 60825-1:2014)
Table 296: Technical data for the SW 3-3 assembly
1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 297: ETHxx (RJ45)
Interface Description
Fiber glass 50/125 and 62.5/125 multimode
Table 298: ETHxx (duplex LC SFP)
25 Factory settings

ca. 150 mm (5.9 in)
54 mm (2.12 in) 93 mm (3.66 in)
MC 2-2
(4.69 in)
ETH12
ETH22
119 mm
ETH21
ETH11
+ +
24V DC
24V DC
- -
Figure 479: SW3-3 dimensions
12.4.28 System networking COM-ETH
COM-ETH
Interfaces 5x Ethernet via RJ45

10/100 Mbps
Redundancy protocols HSR, PRP, RSTP

Table 299: COM-ETH assembly technical data
1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 300: Connectors X1…X5 (Ethernet)
30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)

132 mm (5.19 in)
Figure 480: COM-ETH dimensions

12.4.29 System networking BEM1/BES1
BEM 1 BES 1
Description Master Slave
Interfaces 1 fiber-optic cable
Fiber-optic cable Max. length: 40 m

(Polymeric optical fiber) Min. bending radius: 30 mm
Integrated power supply No Yes
Permissible voltage range - 18...34 V DC

UN: 24 VDC
Power consumption - 14 W
Table 301: Technical data for the BEM 1 and BES 1 assemblies
12.4.30 System networking BES
BES
Interfaces 2x Ethernet via RJ45

10/100 Mbps
Input voltage 18…78 V DC

UN 24…60 V DC
Input current 0.6/0.3/0.25 A (24/48/60 VDC)

Table 302: BES assembly technical data
1 Power supply (+)
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Power supply (-)

Table 303: Terminal X1
1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 304: Jacks X2, X3 (Ethernet)

143 mm (5.63 in)
30 mm (1.18 in) 124 mm (4.88 in)
132 mm (5.19 in)

Figure 481: BES dimensions
12.4.31 VI 4 vibration sensor input module
VI 4
Analog inputs For vibration sensors based on the IEPE

standard
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption Max. 200 mA
Operating temperature -25 °C...+70 °C
Relative humidity operation 5…95% non-condensing
Storage temperature -40 °C...+85 °C
Relative humidity storage 5…95% condensing

Table 305: VI 4 vibration sensor input module
12.4.32 CAN gateway
1 CAN-H
2 CAN-L
3 CAN-GND
1 2 3 4 4 CAN-Shield
Table 306: CAN1 (connector type: Phoenix Contact MSTB 2,5/ 4-ST BK– 1756298)

12.5 Standards and directives
Motor-drive unit
IEC 60214-1 Tap-changers - Part 1: Performance requirements and test
methods
Table 307: Motor-drive unit
Control cabinet electrical safety

IEC 61439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 1:
General rules
IEC 61439-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 2:

Power switchgear and controlgear assemblies
Table 308: Control cabinet electrical safety
Control cabinet electromagnetic compatibility

IEC 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-4: Generic stan-
dards – Emission standard for industrial environments
IEC 61000-6-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-5: Generic stan-

dards – Immunity for equipment used in power station and
substation environment
Table 309: Control cabinet electromagnetic compatibility
Control cabinet environmental durability tests

IEC 60529 IP66
IPXXB (when control cabinet doors are open)
IEC 62262 IK07

Table 310: Control cabinet environmental durability tests
Vibration and shock durability tests

IEC 60721-3-4:2019 4M11
IEC 60721-3-4:1995 100/120 Hz corresponds to the grid frequency 50/60 Hz

4 m/s²
1 cycle, test duration 30 h (10 h in each of the 3 main axes)
Function test throughout the entire switching range at the be-
ginning and end of the test with active test bench
Table 311: Vibration and shock durability tests
Environmental protection
IEC 61249-2-21:2003 The "H07Z-K, halogen-free wiring" version of the product is
halogen-free within the meaning of the standard:
– Cl < 900 ppm
– Br < 900 ppm
– Total amount of halogens < 1,500 ppm
Table 312: Environmental protection

13 Drawings
532 Drawings 7815063/10 EN

DATE NAME DOCUMENT NO.
DFTR. 24.11.2022 NOVACKJ SED 9127274 000 00 MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN GMBH COPYRIGHT RESERVED
THE REPRODUCTION, DISTRIBUTION AND UTILIZATION OF THIS DOCUMENT AS WELL AS THE COMMUNICATION OF ITS CONTENTS TO OTHERS WITHOUT EXPRESS AUTHORIZATION IS
CHKD. 25.11.2022 STEMPFHUBERJ CHANGE NO. SCALE PROHIBITED. OFFENDERS WILL BE HELD LIABLE FOR THE PAYMENT OF DAMAGES. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF A PATENT, UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN.
STAND. 28.11.2022 KLEYN 1118344 1:10
139 1046
750 84
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
Z
483
446
713
779
38
COMPENSATING OFFSETS
SHIM FOR
(VIEWED FROM BACK SIDE)

Z
1:5
OPTIONAL: PT100
20
A
ARRANGEMENT OF FIXING HOLES ON PROTECTIVE HOUSING
APPROX. 1159 IF OPENED 90°
TANK
APPROX. 480 IF OPENED 180° 1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
ATTACHMENT OF PROTECTIVE HOUSING

51,5 323 MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
DIMENSION DRAWING
332 63 OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS
ETOS® Cabinet 900

MOTOR-DRIVE UNIT ETOS®
68 924 55

631
24
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)
650
700
DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
THE DOOR CAN BE OPENED
MOUNTING HEIGHT: APPROX. 500 TO 1000 MM

ARRANGEMENT OF THE HINGES.
- SHEET
TO THE LEFT OR TO THE RIGHT
101734750E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 28.11.2022 KLEYN 1118344 1:10
172
750 118 1080
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
Z
502
478
713
779
SHIM FOR

38
Z
1:5
20
A
OPTIONAL: PT100
TANK
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323
332 62 MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
DIMENSION DRAWING
Motorantrieb ETOS®
OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS
66 961 55
ETOS CABINET 900 DOUBLE WALLED

631
24
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)
650
766
DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
- SHEET
101734780E 1 / 1A3
CHKD. 19.04.2023 JOBSTJ CHANGE NO. SCALE PROHIBITED. OFFENDERS WILL BE HELD LIABLE FOR THE PAYMENT OF DAMAGES. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF A PATENT, UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN.
STAND. 20.04.2023 WANNINGER 1114388 1:10
139 1335
750 84
IN mm
A
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
483
446
713
779
38
SHIM FOR

B
1:5
OPTIONAL: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323

MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
DIMENSION DRAWING
ETOS CABINET 1200
68 1213 55

631
24
650
700
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
ARRANGEMENT OF THE HINGES. MOUNTING HEIGHT: APPROX. 500 TO 1000 MM

- SHEET
101335000E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 20.04.2023 WANNINGER 1114388 1:10
173 1370
750 84
IN mm
A
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
O 25
483
446
182,5
713
779
38
SHIM FOR

B
1:5
OPTIONAL: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323

MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
DIMENSION DRAWING
332 63 89
ETOS Side Drive 1200

68 1213 55

248

631
24
70
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
700
M12
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
HAND CRANK
- SHEET
101334990E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 20.04.2023 WANNINGER 1114388 1:10
172
72
750 118 1369
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
502
478
713
779
SHIM FOR
38

B
1:5
20

TANK
OPTIONAL: PT100
1:5
APPROX. 975 IF OPENED 135° A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET

51,5 323
OPTIONAL: OPERATING ELEMENTS OUTSIDE
DIMENSION DRAWING
332 62
66 1249 55

ETOS CABINET 1200 DOUBLE WALL
631
188,5
24
33
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
766
185
241
M12
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
- SHEET
101358630E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 20.04.2023 WANNINGER 1114388 1:10
173
72
1370
750 118
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
O 25
502
478
713
779
182,5
SHIM FOR
38

B
1:5
20

TANK
OPTIONAL: PT100
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET

HAND CRANK
51,5 323
DIMENSION DRAWING
332 62
66 1249 55

ETOS S.D. 1200 DOUBLE WALL
631
248
185
24
33
70
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
766
185
241
M12
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
- SHEET
101358600E 1 / 1A3
DFTR. 19.07.2022 LIPINSKI SED 8922384 000 00 MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN GMBH COPYRIGHT RESERVED
STAND. 19.07.2022 KLEYN 1116506 1:10
173
750 84
IN mm
NOTED
A
1370
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
Z
O 25
423,4
417,5
SHIM FOR
743
809
154
9,5
(VIEWED FROM BACKSIDE)

Z
1:5
20
A
OPTIONAL PT100

TANK
1:5
A-A
23 323 WALL OF TRANSFORMER
DIMENSION DRAWING
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS 89
332 34,5

68 1213 55
ETOS SIDE DRIVE 1200 FLAT OPTION

631
24
248
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
700
70
M 12
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
HAND CRANK
- SHEET
MOUNTING HIGH: APPROX. 500 TO 1000
ARRANGEMENT OF THE HINGES
101716390E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 20.04.2023 WANNINGER 1114388 1:10
139 1646
750 84
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
483
446
713
779
38
SHIM FOR

B
1:5
OPTIONAL: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER

51,5 323
DIMENSION DRAWING
332 63 MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
ETOS CABINET 1500

68 OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS 1524 55

631
24
650
700
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER

- SHEET
101334980E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 20.04.2023 WANNINGER 1114388 1:10
173 1681
750 84
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
O 25
483
446
182,5
713
779
38
SHIM FOR

B
1:5
OPTIONAL: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323
DIMENSION DRAWING
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET 89
332 63
ETOS SIDE DRIVE 1500


248
APPROX. 1063 IF OPENED 180° 631
24
70
650
700
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
HAND CRANK
SERIAL NUMBER

- SHEET
101334970E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 20.04.2023 WANNINGER 1114388 1:10
172
72
750 118 1680
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
502
478
713
779
SHIM FOR

38
B
1:5
20

OPTIONAL: PT100
TANK
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
DIMENSION DRAWING
66 1560 55

631
188,5
24
33
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
766
185
241
M12
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
- SHEET
101358640E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 20.04.2023 WANNINGER 1114388 1:10
173
72
750 118 1681
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
O 25
502
478
713
779
182,5
SHIM FOR

38
20

B
1:5

TANK
1:5
OPTIONAL: PT100

A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323
HAND CRANK
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET

332 62
DIMENSION DRAWING

ETOS S.D. 1500 DOUBLE WALL
631
248
188,5
24
33
70
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
766
185
241
M12
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
- SHEET
101358620E 1 / 1A3
DFTR. 19.07.2022 LIPINSKI SED 8922414 000 00 MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN GMBH COPYRIGHT RESERVED
STAND. 19.07.2022 KLEYN 1116506 1:10
173 1681
750 84
IN mm
NOTED
A
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
O 25
Z
423,4
417,5
154
743
809
9,5
SHIM FOR
(VIEWED FROM BACKSIDE)

Z
1:5
20
A
OPTIONAL PT100

TANK
1:5
A-A
23 323

WALL OF TRANSFORMER
DIMENSION DRAWING
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS 89
332 34,5

68 1524 55
ETOS SIDE DRIVE 1500 FLAT OPTION

631
24
248
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
700
70
M 12
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
Handkurbel
MOUNTING HIGH APPROX. 500 TO 1000 MM
- SHEET
ARRANGEMENT OF THE HINGES
101716420E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 28.11.2022 KLEYN 1118344 1:10
139 1913
750 84
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
Z
483
446
713
779
38
SHIM FOR
Z
1:5

optional: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER

51,5 323
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
DIMENSION DRAWING
ETOS CABINET 1800
68 1791 55

631
24
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
700
DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
- SHEET
101734770E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 28.11.2022 KLEYN 1118344 1:10
173 1948
750 84
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
Z
O 25
483
446
182,5
713
779
SHIM FOR
Z
1:5

optional: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323
DIMENSION DRAWING
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET 89
ETOS SIDE DRIVE 1800

68 1791 55

248
631
24
650
700
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
HAND CRANK
- SHEET
101734760E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 28.11.2022 KLEYN 1118344 1:10
172 1947
750 118
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
Z
502
478
713
779
38
SHIM FOR
Z
1:5

optional: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER

51,5 323
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
DIMENSION DRAWING
Motorantrieb ETOS®
68 1825 55

631
24
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
766
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
M12
SERIAL NUMBER
- SHEET
101734800E 1 / 1A3
STAND. 28.11.2022 KLEYN 1118344 1:10
173 1948
750 118
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
Z
O 25
502
478
182,5
713
779
38
SHIM FOR
Z
1:5

optional: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A

WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
DIMENSION DRAWING
Motorantrieb ETOS®
332 62
68 1825 55
ETOS S.D. 1800 DOUBLE WALLED

631
24
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

650
766
DEPENDING ON THE
MATERIAL NUMBER
M12
SERIAL NUMBER
- SHEET
101734790E 1 / 1A3
Glossary
CSO MQTT
Change-over selector operation Message Queuing Telemetry Transport. A network pro-
tocol for machine-to-machine communication which en-
DGA ables the transmission of ISM® data in the form of mes-
Analysis of the gases dissolved in the oil (Dissolved Gas sages between two devices.
Analysis)
MR
DTR Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Dynamic Transformer Rating
Operating temperature
EMC Permissible temperature in the immediate surroundings
Electromagnetic compatibility of the device during operation taking ambient influences,
for example due to the equipment and installation loca-
Generator sign convention tion, into consideration.
Definition for describing electrical circuits. The arrows for
current rating and voltage on a "consumer" absorbing PRD
electrical power (e.g. a resistor) face opposite directions. Pressure relief device
U*I is the power generated in the component and -U*I is
the power absorbed by the component. PRP
Redundancy protocol in accordance with IEC 62439-3
GPI (Parallel Redundancy Protocol)
General Purpose Input
PTP
GPO PTP (Precision Time Protocol) is a standard for synchro-
General Purpose Output nizing clocks in a computer network. This synchroniza-
tion is high-precision.
Hot-spot
Point of highest temperature in the transformer winding. RADIUS
Protocol for authentication of users in computer net-
ICD works in accordance with RFC 2865 (Remote Authentica-
IED Capability Description tion Dial-In User Service).
IEEE RSO
Worldwide association of engineers, mainly from the Reverse tap-change operation
fields of electrical engineering and IT (Institute of Electri-
cal and Electronics Engineers) RSTP
Redundancy protocol in accordance with IEEE
IFM 802.1D-2004 (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
Insulation-friendly mode
SCADA
IP Technical processes are monitored and controlled using
Internet Protocol a computer system (Supervisory Control and Data Acqui-
sition)
Load sign convention
Definition for describing electrical circuits. The arrows for SNMP
current rating and voltage on a "consumer" absorbing SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a pro-
electrical power (e.g. a resistor) face the same direction. tocol for managing network devices.
U*I is the power absorbed by the component.
SNTP
Motor Current Index NTP (Network Time Protocol) is a standard for synchro-
Integral (area under) of the motor current curve over the nizing clocks in computer systems using packet-based
duration of the tap-change operation. communication networks. SNTP (Simple Network Time
Protocol) is the simplified version of NTP.
7815063/10 EN Glossary 549

Storage temperature
Permissible temperature for storing the device in an un-
mounted state or in a mounted state so long as the de-
vice is not in operation.
TDSC
TAPCON® Dynamic Set Point Control
TPLE
Transformer Personal Logic Editor
TSO
Tap selector operation
URL
Uniform Resource Locator
550 Glossary 7815063/10 EN

List of key words
Symbols Assembly Broker address 177
2nd syslog server 181 A00x 63 Broker port 177
2nd syslog server port 181 AI 4 51 brute-force protection 232
Enable 2nd syslog server 180 AI 4-T 51 Bushing adapter 63
AIO 49, 50 Bushing coupling unit 63
A AO 4 52 Installing 115
A00x 63 BES 54
Absolute 283, 286, 287 C002 63 C
Access point 182 COM-ETH 54 C002 63
Access rights 230 CP5.241 41 C1
Activate 426 CPU 42 Temporal progression 448
Activate alternating mode 430 CPU I 42 Cabling recommendation 122
Activate cooling stage X 426 DI 16-110V 48 Calculation method 339, 343, 348
Activate delay time T2 307, 311, 314 DI 16-220V 48 Calibration run 422
Activate desired value 1 209 DI 16-24V 47 CAN bus 323
Activate desired value 2 209 DI 16-48V 47 Capacitance C1
Activate desired value 3 209 DIO 46 Temporal progression 448
Activate desired value 4 209 DO 8 49 Capacitance monitoring
Activate desired value 5 209 I3 45 Configuring 441
Activate interval 376 MC 2-2 52 Change delay apparent current 333
Activate load-dependent mode 428 PS 41 Change delay Voltage 333
Activate parallel operation 323 QS3.241 41 Changing users 70
Activate periodic mode 429 SW 53 Channel (AIO) 142
Activate RADIUS client 232 U3 45 Circulating reactive current 320
Activate remote mode 209 UI 43, 44 Circulating reactive current blocking
Activate syslog 180 Asset intelligence 335 limit 323
Active if error 427 Assignment 176 circulating reactive current mea-
Active power regulation 311 Authentication protocol 232 sured input rated value 325
AI 4 51 Auto logout 168 Circulating reactive current sensitiv-
AI 4-T 51 Automatic daylight saving / standard ity 323
AIO 2 49 time 179 clamp-on current transformer 278
AIO 4 49 Automatic tap synchronization paral- COM ETH X1 network assignment
AIO 8 50 lel operation method 208 174
Alternating mode 427 Automatic winding selection COM-ETH 54
Change interval 430 Mode 333 Commissioning wizard 152, 166
Analog inputs and outputs 153, 219 Average value interval 206 Compensation 315
Anticipated service life 346 Z compensation 316
AO 4 52 B Compensation method 316, 317
ASDU address 184, 186, 187 Bandwidth 304, 308, 312 Configure data points 196
ASDU sequence optimization 185, Bandwidth monitoring 327, 328, 330 contact wear
187 Bandwidth setting 304 Determining 377
ASDU single character confirmation Baud rate 175, 183, 186, 189, 191, 212 Display 373
184 BCD tap position message 372, 391 Control cabinet monitoring 424
Behavior 283, 290, 370 Control cabinet RH >/>> limit value
Behavior for reversal of power flow 424
289 Control cabinet sensors 425
Behavior if no communication Control parameters 295, 314
present 325 Control system 181
BES 54 Control system protocol 167
Blocking 208 Control variable 281, 295
breakdown voltage 359 Cooling method 340
Broker 176
Client user name 177
Port 177
7815063/10 EN List of key words 551

Cooling system DI 16-110V 48 F
Alternating mode 430 DI 16-220V 48 F1/F2
Configuring cooling group 426 DI 16-24V 47 Reference system primary trans-
Load-dependent mode 428 DI 16-48V 47 former voltage 280
Periodic mode 429 dielectric strength 359 Reference system secondary
Status 433, 435 Digital inputs and outputs 222 transformer voltage 280
Counting behavior 370 DIO 28-15 46 F1/F2 tanδ: tanδ phase L1 445
CP5.241 41 DIO 42-20 46 F1/F2 tanδ: tanδ phase L2 445
CPU 42 Display 261 F1/F2 tanδ: tanδ phase L3 445
CPU I 42 Displaying the cooling efficiency 436 F1/F2-C: Activate capacitance moni-
CPU X2 network assignment 173 Dissipation factor monitoring toring 442
CPU X3 network assignment 173 Configuring 444 F1/F2-C: C1 phase L1 442
Current measurement 266 Dissipation factor tanδ F1/F2-C: C1 phase L2 442
Current monitoring 284 Temporal progression 448 F1/F2-C: C1 phase L3 442
Current transformer DNP3 190 F1/F2-C: ΔC1 > 442
Secondary current 267 DNP3 transmission type 190 F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >> 442
Current-transformer circuit 267 DNS F1/F2-tanδ
activate 171 Perform standardization 445
D DNS server F1/F2-tanδ: Activate diss. factor
Data IP address 171 monit. 445
Import/export 235 DO 8 49 Feed oil temperature 438
Databits 175, 184, 186, 190, 191, 212 Dörnenburg 357 Feed water temperature 439
Data-point list 236 Drive Field 1/Field 2 sum current 449
Date 179 Overview 416 Field 1/Field 2 sum current diagram
Date format 178 Dual code tap position message 372 449
Date of next maintenance 375, 376 Duration 375, 376 Field designation 440
Day profile 302 Duval 355 Follower parallel operation method
Deactivate parallel operation 208 Dynamic Transformer Rating 347 208
Decimal tap position message 372 Frequency-based cooling system
Decrease desired value 209 E control 430
Delay time RH 424 Edition 182 Function monitoring 290, 327, 328,
Delay time T1 305, 308, 312 Electromagnetic compatibility 127 329, 330, 331
Delay time T2 306, 310, 313 Emergency mode Function test 160
Delay time temperature 425 Max. hot-spot temp. 348
Desired load stress type 324 Max. top-oil temp. 348 G
Desired power factor 324 Emergency mode max. load factor Gateway address 170
Desired value 296, 297, 308, 312 348 Gateway target address 170
Desired value 1...24 303, 304 Emergency operation 35 General 166, 263
Desired value adjustment Enable cold start 192 Remote behavior 167
Active power-dependent 297, 299 Error if no communication present Generic digital output 210
Desired value setting 302 325 Generic status message 211
Desired value step width 297 Event (yellow) 376 GPI 207
Destination address 191 Event duration 370 GPO 207
Device address 191 Event memory 225 Gray code tap position message 372
Device designation 181 Events 224
Device ID 182 Acknowledge 224 H
DFC compatibility 186 Configure 224 Hardware 233
DGA 350, 351 Display 224 Highest tap position (numerical des-
Absolute values 354 Exporting 226 ignation) 392
Curve 355 Expert mode 71 High-speed return 209
Dörnenburg 357 Export 235 hot-spot 338
Duval 355 External visualization IP address 258 Forecast 345
IEC 60599 357 External visualization name 258 Hot-spot determination 338, 339,
Rate of increase 355 External visualization product 258 343
Rogers 356 External visualization protocol 258 Hot-spot forecast 345
Hysteresis 427
552 List of key words 7815063/10 EN

I Load-dependent mode Motor protective switch
I3 45 Overrun time 429 Status 416
ICD file 182 Switching point 428 Motor runtime 414, 415
IEC 60599 357 Switch-on delay 428 Motor runtime monitoring 414, 415
IEC 60870-5-101 183 Logging off 70 Motor runtime monitoring limit 415
IEC 60870-5-103 185 Logging on 70 Motor-drive unit
IEC 60870-5-104 187 Loss-of-life Overview 416
IEC 61850 182 Display 337 MQTT 176
IEC: gradient 341 Setting calculation 346 Activate 177
IEC: hot-spot factor 341 Lower limit warning OLTC temp. 393 Broker 177
IEC: Insulating paper 346 Lower load factor threshold 433 Broker address 177
IEC: k11 341 Lower top-oil temperature threshold Client user name 177
IEC: k21 341 433 Port 177
IEC: k22 341 Lowest tap position (numerical des- MR sensor bus 131, 211
IEC: Oil exponent 341 ignation) 392 Configuring 211
IEC: winding exponent 341
IED name 182 M N
IEEE: exponent 344 Main screen 66 Name plate 204
IEEE: gradient 343 Master parallel operation method Nameplate
IFM 208 Display 204
Activate rel. LOL limit 348 Master/follower current blocking Navigation 70
Max. hot-spot temp. 348 324 Negative power factor display 281
Max. load factor 348 Master/follower switching character- Network 260
Max. rel. LOL 348 istics 324 Network settings 169
Max. top-oil temperature 348 Max. permissible OLTC operating Network X gateway address 173
Import 235 temperature 392 Network X IP address 172
Import & Export 263 Maximum difference 290 Network X subnet mask 173
Increase desired value 209 Maximum fan speed 433 Nitrogen measurement method 352
Increase in the hot-spot temperature Maximum tap difference 324 No. of information object address
342, 344 MC 2-2 52 octets 184
Increase of the upper oil tempera- measured circulating reactive cur- Nominal current 341, 344
ture 342, 344 rent 322 Non-working day 302
Independent regulation 208 Measured value display 166 NTP 262
Inductive resistance load 316 Measured values Number of ASDU address octets 184
Information 265 Recorder 205 Number of cause of transmission
Bushings 447 Setting display 166 octets 184
Inputs Measuring mode 267 Number of clients 188
Analog 153, 219 Menu Number of link address octets 184
Digital 222 Display 261 Number of operations 369
Inrush current blocking 392 General 263 Number of starts 398, 434
Installation location 162 Import & Export 263 Number of tap-change operations
Interval type 375 Information 265 375
IO mapping 207 Network 260
IP address 170 Security 262 O
IP address client 188 Server 259 Ohmic resistance load 316
IP address client 1...6 182 Time 261 Oil filter unit 395
Messages 224 Oil flow 438
K Min. fan run time after error 432 Oil pressure 438
Key (shared secret) 232 Min. permissible OLTC operating Oil pump current 438
temperature 392 Oil temperature difference 438
L Minimum fan speed 432 Oil time constant 341, 343
Language 152 Modbus 189 OLTC
Length of line 316 Modbus address 189 Information 374
Lifting gear Modbus type 189 OLTC A/B/C serial number 390
Attachment points 79 Mode 283, 285 OLTC break. volt. SD calib. point 365
Limit value F1/F2-tanδ: Δtanδ > 445 Monitoring of unregulated winding OLTC breakdown volt. calib. point
Limit value monitoring 419 334 365
Link address 184 OLTC breakdown volt. ref. temp. 365

OLTC breakdown voltage < 366 PS 41 RFC 5424 180
OLTC breakdown voltage << 366 PTP 178, 179 Rogers 356
OLTC curve parameter a 364 PTP hops 179 RSO < 420
OLTC curve parameter b 365 PTP interface 179 RSO > 419
OLTC curve parameter c 365 PTP version 179 Run-in time evaluation 434
OLTC curve parameter d 365
OLTC data 390 Q S
OLTC limit values 366 QS3.241 41 SCADA 181
OLTC rel. water content calib. point Quick search 70 SCADA disconnection delay time
365 294
OLTC saturation parameter A 364 R SCADA network release 174
OLTC saturation parameter B 364 R&X compensation 315 Secondary transformer voltage 266
Operating concept 69 RADIUS 230 Security 262
Operating duration 398, 434 RADIUS server 232 Select desired value 296
operating instructions RADIUS server port 232 Self-learning model 339
Download 153 Rated power of the transformer 341, Send delay time 212
Operating mode 35 344, 348 Sensor bus
Select 413 Rated voltage of HV winding 3 in Link functions 214
Status 416 highest position 342, 344 Sensor measuring accuracy 351
Operations counter 369, 416 Rated voltage of HV winding 3 in Serial interface 183, 186, 189, 190
Outputs lowest position 343, 344 Server 259
Analog 153, 219 Rated voltage of LV winding 1 342, Service user access 169
Digital 222 344 Service user access activation 169
Overvoltage 282 Rated voltage of LV winding 2 342, setting of the desired value
344 Step-by-step 296
P Rates of increase evaluation interval Severity level 181
Parallel operation 317, 322 351 SNMP agent 169
CAN bus 323 Ratio of the evaluated power loss SNTP 178
Circulating reactive current 320 342, 344 SNTP time server 178
Information 326 Reaction 286, 287 SNTP time server 2 179
Parallel operation error message Reactive power regulation 308 Software
325 Reactive power regulation switching Information 235
Power factor 321 direction 416 SSL/TLS 260
Tap synchronization 318 Receiver IP address 188, 190, 192 SSL/TLS encryption 171, 174, 177
Parallel operation method 323 Reconnect delay time 181 Standard AVR mode 295
Parity 176, 184, 186, 190, 191, 212 Recorder 205 Start time 1...24 303, 304
Password 228 Average value interval 206 State of the bushings 447
Password 177 Reference time 185, 187, 188, 192 Stop bits 176, 184, 186, 190, 191, 212
Percentage 283, 286 Regulation 295 Subnet mask 170
Performing standardization 442 Regulation mode 281 Substitute relative water content
Periodic mode 427 Regulation type 333 value 351
Interval 429 Relative loss-of-life >/>> 337 Sum current method 446
Switch-on delay 429 Remote behavior 167 Supplement 236
Switch-on duration 429 Repeat unsolicited messages indefi- SW 3-3 53
Phase angle correction 267 nitely 191 Configuration 253
Polling rate 212 Repetition of unsolicited messages Swap circulating reactive current po-
Pos behavior 368 191 larity 325
Power characteristics 393 Report defective temperature sen- Switch off input variable 427
power factor 321 sors 167 Switch on input variable 426
Power flow RES bit test 184 Switching direction monitoring 416
Negative 288 Reset diagnostic errors 351 Switching interval monitoring 369,
Power flow monitoring 288 Response to SCADA disconnection 370
Power monitoring 286 294 Switching point 427
Primary transformer current 266, Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx 291 Switching pulse pause 414
420 Return oil temperature 438 Switching pulse time 414
Primary transformer voltage 266 Return water temperature 439 Switching pulse type 414
Protective device status 451 Reversal of power flow 288 Switching statistics 373
Protocol specification 236 RFC 3164 180 Switch-on delay 427
554 List of key words 7815063/10 EN

Synchronization 422 Time shift 179 Undervoltage 282
Synchronization interval 179 Time switch end 397 Unsolicited messages 191
Syslog 180 Time switch start 397 Update 476
Syslog server 180 Time synchronization 178, 262 Update firmware 476
Syslog server port 180 Activate 178 Update software 476
Syslog standard 180 Reference time 185, 187, 188, 192 Upper limit warning OLTC temp. 393
Time until auto logout 168 Upper load factor threshold 433
T Time zone 179 Upper top-oil temperature threshold
tanδ Timeout 191 433
Temporal progression 448 Timeout for response confirmation USB interface
Tap changer oil type 364 191 Activating/Deactivating 167
Tap difference TLS version 171, 175 Use OLTC calibration point 365
Follower 324 Total tap-change operations 369 Use substitute relative water content
Tap position TPLE 33, 239 value 351
Change designation 371 Transformer Use Tx calibration point 362
Display 416 Overview 66 User administration 226
Tap position message (analog) 372, Transformer age 346 User ID code 191
391 Transformer data 266, 279 User role 227
Tap position monitoring 368 Secondary current 267
Tap synchronization 318 Transformer name 167 V
Tap-change operation Transformer no-load losses 436 VAM analysis 387
Evaluated 384 Transformer oil type 361 VAM update guidelines 387
Tap-change operations Transformer purchase price 346 Visualization
Unevaluated 384 Transformer short-circuit losses 436 Operating concept 69
Tap-change operations waiting time Transmission procedure 184 Visualization release 170
392 Transport 162 Voltage balance 267
TAP-change supervisory control 28, TSO/CSO < 419 Voltage increase 317
383 TSO/CSO > 419 Voltage limit value 317
TAPCON® 2xx retrofit 290 Tx breakdown volt. ref. temp. 362 Voltage monitoring 282
TAPCON® Dynamic Setpoint Control Tx breakdown voltage < 363 Voltage regulation switching direc-
297, 299 Tx breakdown voltage << 363 tion 415
Target tap position 331 Tx breakdown voltage calib. point Voltage-transformer circuit 267
Target-tap-position operation 209 362
Target-tap-position operation al- Tx breakdown voltage SD calib. W
lowed 332 point 362 W1/W2
TCP connections 189 Tx curve parameter a 361 U>/U< switching limits 333
TCP Keepalive 189 Tx curve parameter b 361 Water flow 439
TCP port 187, 189, 190 Tx curve parameter c 361 Water pressure 439
TDSC Pmax 299, 302 Tx curve parameter d 361 Water pump current 439
TDSC Pmin 299, 302 Tx limit values 362 Web visualization network release
TDSC U0 299, 302 Tx nominal voltage 363 174
TDSC Umax 299, 301 Tx rel. water content calib. point 362 Winding selection 333
TDSC Umin 299, 301 Tx saturation parameter A 361 Winding temperature 337
Temperature Tx saturation parameter B 361 Winding time constant 341, 343
Curve 336 Tx statistics 337 Working day 302
Monitoring 336
Temperature < 425 U X
Three-winding transformer 332 U3 45 X100 35
Time 179, 261 UI 1 43
Time format 178 UI 3 43 Z
Time interval 369 UI 5-3 44 Z compensation 316
Time response T1 306, 309, 312 UI 5-4 44
Time server address 178 UI measuring channels 281

Falkensteinstrasse 8
93059 Regensburg
Germany
+49 941 4090-0
[email protected]
reinhausen.com
Please note:
The data in our publications may differ from the data of the devices delivered.
We reserve the right to make changes without notice.
7815063/10 EN - ETOS® Operating instructions -
12/23
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2023 THE POWER BEHIND POWER.

ETOS®_Operating_Instructions_7815063_10_en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETOS®_Operating_Instructions_7815063_10_en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETOS®_Operating_Instructions_7815063_10_en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE POWER BEHIND POWER.

7815063/10 EN Table of contents 3

4 Table of contents 7815063/10 EN

7815063/10 EN Table of contents 5

6 Table of contents 7815063/10 EN

List of key words ......................................... 551

7815063/10 EN Table of contents 7

MR Reinhausen customer portal: https://portal.reinhausen.com.

The following documents also apply in addition to this technical file:

Also observe generally valid legislation, standards, and guidelines as well as

1.4.1 Hazard communication system

Warnings in this technical file are displayed as follows.

1.4.1.1 Warning relating to section

WARNING Type of danger!

1.4.1.2 Embedded warning information

DANGER! Instruction for avoiding a dangerous situation.

1.4.1.3 Signal words in warning notices

WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

NOTICE Indicates measures to be taken to prevent damage to property.

1.4.2 Information system

Information is designed to simplify and improve understanding of particular pro-

This technical file contains single-step and multi-step instructions.

1.4.4 Typographic conventions

Typographic convention Purpose Example

UPPERCASE Operating controls, switches ON/OFF

[Brackets] PC keyboard [Ctrl] + [Alt]

Bold Software operating controls Press Continue button

…>…>… Menu paths Parameter > Control parameter

[► Number of pages] Cross reference [► Page 41].

Table 2: Typographic conventions used in this technical file

2.1 Appropriate use

The following is considered intended use:

2.1.1 Motor-drive unit

The following is considered appropriate use of the motor-drive unit function

2.1.2 On-load tap-changer regulation

The on-load tap-changer regulation function package is used to automatically

2.1.3 Bushing monitoring

The bushing monitoring function package is used to monitor capacitance-

The following is considered appropriate use of the bushing monitoring function

2.1.4 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM)

The vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) function pack-

The following is considered appropriate use of the VAM function package:

2.2.1 Bushing monitoring

Note the following information on inappropriate use of the bushing monitoring

2.2.2 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM)

Note the following information on inappropriate use of the vibro-acoustic moni-

2.2.3 Internal power supply

Personal protective equipment

Drying the transformer

Working during operation

Invisible laser radiation

Working with current transformers

Handling electrical components

Hand crank aperture

Securing the motor-drive unit

Opening the swing frame

Auxiliary materials and operating materials

Modifications and conversions

2.4 Personnel qualification

Electrically skilled person